THE JUNIOR MANUAL 



A HANDBOOK OF METHODS 

FOR 

JUNIOR CHRISTIAN ENDEAVOR WORKERS. 



BY 

AMOS R. WELLS, 

MANAGING EDITOR OF THE GOLDEN RULE AND THE JUNIOR GOLDEN RULE, 

AUTHOR OF "WAYS OF WORKING SERIES," "SOCIAL EVENINGS," 

"GOLDEN RULE MEDITATIONS," ETC. 




JHi*u 



^ett 



BOSTON AND CHICAGO : 

UNITED SOCIETY OF CHRISTIAN ENDEAVOR. 

1895. 



The Library 
Of Conokess 

washington 






Copyright, 1895, 
By United Society of Christian Endeavor. 



All rights reserved. 



TYPOGRAPHY BY C. J. PETERS & SON, 
BOSTON. 



PREFACE. 



The preparation of this Manual would have been quite im- 
possible for me had I not received the most cordial assistance 
from Junior workers all over the world. In response to a re- 
quest printed in The Golden Rule, letters from Junior superin- 
tendents fairly rained down upon me, each expressing the great 
need of a manual of Junior methods, and the desire of the 
writer to co-operate. I wish it were possible to print here the 
names of these kind friends, who are more the authors of this 
book than I am. I can at least express thus publicly my sense 
of obligation to them, and my sincere gratitude. 

Will not all Junior workers take up and continue this partner- 
ship ? New and useful ways of working are constantly devised 
by Junior superintendents. If you will send to me, at the 
office of The Golden Rule, Boston, Mass., an account of any 
helpful plan not incorporated in these pages, it will be published 
at once in the international Christian Endeavor organ, and be 
inserted in future editions of the Junior Manual. 

It is too much to hope that this book, even though a large 
amount of labor has been spent upon it, will prove entirely 
satisfactory to every one, and in all of its forty chapters. I 
have done my best, however, to make it straightforward, prac- 
tical, and to the point ; and I shall be richly rewarded if the 
noble Junior Christian Endeavor workers, whom I so much 
honor, are in any way inspired and helped by these pages. 

Amos R. Wells. 
Boston, March 22, 1895. 



CONTENTS. 



CHAPTER PAGE 

I. History of the Junior Society of Christian 

Endeavor i 

II. How to Organize a Junior Society 5 

III. Pastors, Churches, and Juniors 14 

IV. Working with the Parents 22 

V. Older Endeavorers and the Juniors 31 

VI. The Superintendent's Work 40 

VII. The General Management of the Society . . 65 

VIII. The Prayer-Meeting Committee 72 

IX. Plans for the Prayer Meeting 77 

X. The Consecration Meeting 90 

XI. Prayer in the Meetings 99 

-" XII. Junior Music 105 

XIII. The Leaders of Junior Meetings 115 

XIV. Bible Work in the Society 119 

XV. The Junior Pledge 140 

XVI. The Lookout Committee 147 

XVII. The Attendance and Records 156 

XVIII. Something About Roll-Calls 161 

XIX. The Daily Bible-Reading 164 

XX. The Society and the Sunday School 169 

XXL At Work for Missions 172 

XXII. Temperance Work for Juniors 193 

XXIII. Good-Citizenship Work 201 

XXIV. Junior Socials 204 

XXV. The Birthday Committee 216 

XXVI. The Sunshine Committee 218 

XXVII. The Scrap-Book Committee 224 

XXVIII. The Flower Committee 228 

XXIX. Committee Work in General 232 

XXX. Winning and Holding the Boys 247 

XXXI. Badges and Banners 254 

XXXII. Order in the Society 259 

v 



VI 



CONTENTS. 



CHAPTER PAGE 

XXXIII. The Business Meeting 263 

XXXIV. Junior Finances 267 

XXXV. Junior Literature 271 

XXXVI. The Trial Members 277 

XXXVII. Reception, Graduation, and Dismission .... 281 

XXXVIII. The Intermediate Society 288 

XXXIX. Junior Unions 290 

XL. The State Junior Superintendent 302 



THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 



CHAPTER I. 

HISTORY OF THE JUNIOR SOCIETY OF CHRISTIAN 
ENDEAVOR. 

The Mizpah Circle. — One of the immediate precursors of 
the Christian Endeavor Society may be said to have been a 
little missionary society organized by the wife of the founder of 
Christian Endeavor, Mrs. Francis E. Clark. The Williston 
Mizpah Circle consisted of girls and boys, who met once a week 
on Saturday afterncons in Portland, Me., earned money for 
home and foreign missions, and studied about them. 

Another forerunner of the Christian Endeavor Society was 
the pastor's class connected with the Williston Church ; a com- 
pany of young people who met with the pastor each week to 
study the church creed, Pilgri?n's Progress, and other books. 
Especially was this class a forerunner of the Junior society, for 
its members signed a pledge in many respects like the Junior 
pledge of to-day. 

On that eventful day, February 2, 1881, the first society of 
Christian Endeavor was formed, which included some boys and 
girls, as well as many older young people. 

The First Junior Society. — Christian Endeavor went on 
for three years before a distinctively Junior society was formed. 
In southwestern Iowa, in the college town of Tabor, was an 
earnest pastor, J. W. Cowan by name. There were no older 
Christian Endeavor societies in town, because the Young Men's 
and Young Women's Christian Associations of the college 
seemed to fill their place; but for the children there was no 
Christian organization, and the idea occurred to Mr. Cowan to 
form them into a Junior Christian Endeavor society. 



2 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

The date of the organization of this first society is March 27, 
1884. There were eleven charter members, all of whom have 
grown up into earnest Christian manhood and womanhood. 
The first to sign the Junior constitution is now a young man, 
Mr. Raymond C. Brooks, who has graduated from Yale Divinity 
School, and begun a successful course as minister of the gospel. 

This first society adopted the Christian Endeavor constitu- 
tion, including the iron-clad pledge. Within two years after its 
organization, a Young People's Society of Christian Endeavor 
was formed from this Junior society by the graduation of its 
members. Moved by the example of their successful methods, 
the college organizations of the town changed their form, and 
became probably the first distinctively college Christian En- 
deavor society. 

Early Workers. — The name of the first Junior superinten- 
dent, the leader of this Tabor society, should be held in perpet- 
ual honor. She was Miss Belle Smith. Much credit for the 
early spread of the movement is also due to Mrs. E. H. Slocum, 
the first secretary of the Iowa State Christian Endeavor Union. 
From this small beginning, in 1884, the society developed, 
until, at the Minnesota Convention of 1891, General Secretary 
Baer reported 855 Junior societies. 

Rapid Growth. — No separate record of Junior societies was 
made until that date. The next year, at New York, an immense 
increase was announced, the number being 2,574. In 1893, at 
Montreal, the figures had risen to 4,136. In 1894, at Cleveland, 
the record stood 6,809 societies, with 365,000 members. At 
this writing, not long before the Boston Convention of 1895, 
there are about 8,000 societies, with approximately half a million 
members. 

Just a Few of the Workers. — This growth is due to many 
earnest workers in addition to those already named. Probably 
no branch of Christian Endeavor has been so fruitful as the 
Junior Society in creating consecrated and zealous laborers. 
Among those who have been most active in promoting this 
movement among the children is Mrs. Francis E. Clark, who, 
during her Christian Endeavor journey around the world with 
her husband, devoted herself especially, in many addresses, to 
teaching pastors and their wives, and Christian Endeavor workers, 



HISTORY OF THE JUNIOR SOCIETY. 3 

the blessedness of labor for the children, and the best methods 
to use in establishing and carrying on Junior societies. 

Another worker who has done yeoman service by tongue and 
pen, and in many different regions, for the promotion of the 
Junior cause, is Mrs. Alice May Scudder of New Jersey. Prom- 
inent also on this noble roll of honor is Miss Kate H. Haus of 
Missouri, Mr. Thomas Wainwright (" Uncle Tom ") of Illinois, 
Mr. William S. Ferguson of Pennsylvania, Miss Nettie Harring- 
ton of Wisconsin, Miss Lillian A. Wilcox and Miss Grace E. 
Hyde of Massachusetts, Miss Belle P. Nason of California, Miss 
Mary C. Merritt of Ohio, Mrs. E. C. Smith of Connecticut, 
Rev. W. W. Sleeper of Wisconsin, Miss Bertha L. Hess of 
Idaho, Mrs. M. L. Hageman of Indiana, Miss Daisy Dunning- 
ton of West Virginia, Miss Laura C. Preston of Oregon, Miss 
Frances M. Schuyler of New York, Mrs. E. W. Darst and Mrs. 
George W. Coleman of Massachusetts, Mrs. O. M. Needham 
of Nebraska, Rev. A. W. Spooner of New Jersey, Miss Flora 
B. Berry of Maine, Miss Ruth Nash of Kansas, Mr. C. J. 
Atkinson of Ontario, and Miss Margaret C. Sutton of Quebec. 
The list of noble and devoted Junior workers could be almost 
indefinitely extended. 

One of the chief features in the rapid progress of the Junior 
cause has been the formation of Junior city unions. The first 
of these was organized at Bridgeport, Conn., in 1891. 

State Superintendents. — Another step in advance was the 
establishment of the office of State superintendent of Junior 
work. Nearly all State unions now have such officers, and most 
of the persons just named hold that honorable position. 

At the Conventions. — At the International Conventions 
the Junior work is claiming a more and more prominent place. 
The New York Convention of 1892 first honored it with a sepa- 
rate session, which was crowded and enthusiastic. At Montreal 
the great Drill Hall was given up to a still more inspiring meet- 
ing, while at Cleveland, in 1894, the immense Sangerfest building 
was filled with more than ten thousand people, whose atten- 
tion was held through the crowded programme of the Junior 
rally. 

The Banners. — Much interest has been excited by the Junior 
banners awarded at the International Conventions. The first 



4 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

of these was given at the New York Convention to Illinois, the 
State that had the largest number of Junior societies. This 
banner was carried off by Illinois the next year; but in 1894, at 
Cleveland, it was surrendered to Pennsylvania. 

At Montreal, two other Junior banners were awarded. One, 
for the largest proportionate increase in Junior societies during 
the preceding year, was carried off by the District of Columbia. 
The second, for the largest absolute gain in Junior societies, 
went to New York. This latter banner, for the greatest absolute 
gain, was also won by Pennsylvania in 1894, while the banner for 
the largest proportionate increase was at that same Convention 
turned over by the District of Columbia to the State of Dela- 
ware. These banners are made up of Junior badges contributed 
by societies all over the world. 

Honor Books. — At the coming Boston Convention a new 
feature is to be introduced for the benefit of the Juniors, — 
immense honor books, four of them, in one of which are to be 
enrolled the names of all Junior societies that have contributed 
to missions ten dollars more during the year than during the 
former year ; in another, the names of the societies whose 
members are faithful to the pledge ; while the other two are for 
the societies whose members help their pastor in every way he 
wishes, and for those that help to make home happy. 

Besides the importance of the Junior rallies at the Interna- 
tional Conventions, the cause is gaining more and more atten- 
tion at the annual conventions of the State unions, nearly all of 
which now hold enthusiastic and helpful Junior sessions. 

Their Paper and Song=Book. — Important steps in the 
progress of the Junior movement were the founding, in January, 
1893, of the Junior international organ, The Junior Golden 
Rule, and the publishing at about the same time of a Junior 
song-book, whose editors were Mr. Ira D. Sankey, General 
Secretary Baer, and Mr. William Shaw, treasurer of the United 
Society. 



HOW TO ORGANIZE A JUNIOR SOCIETY. 



CHAPTER II. 

HOW TO ORGANIZE A JUNIOR SOCIETY. 

Preparation. — In forming a Junior society too much pains 
cannot be taken to become perfectly familiar with the best plans 
before the society is set on foot. Write to the Junior superin- 
tendent of your county union or of your State union, tell all 
about your surroundings, and ask as many questions as you can 
think of. Consult with the best Junior workers in your neigh- 
borhood. Send to the United Society of Christian Endeavor 
for their Junior helps, and read carefully the whole of them. 

The Junior Committee. — Before you enter upon your work, 
get your assistants. Ask the Young People's Society of Chris- 
tian Endeavor to appoint as a regular committee, called the 
"Junior committee," some of their best workers, who will aid 
you. 

Talk It Up. — Do preliminary personal work with the boys 
and girls. Tell them of the good times a Junior society will 
bring about. Touch their noble impulses by showing them 
what a blessing such a society would be to the church, to the 
community, and to themselves. By noticing who are most in- 
terested in this talk, you will gain many valuable hints for the 
selection of officers. 

The Constitution. — Make ready the constitution and by- 
laws of the new society. By far your best plan will be to adopt 
the Model Junior Constitution and By-Laws, which may be mod- 
ified, of course, as necessity requires. Here they are : 

CONSTITUTION. 



Article I. Name. 
This society shall be called the Junior Society of Christian 
Endeavor of 

Article II. Object. 
Its object shall be to promote an earnest Christian life among the 



6 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

boys and girls who may become members, and prepare them for the 
active service of Christ. 

Article III. Membership. 
i. The members shall consist of two classes, Active and Trial. 

2. Active Members. Any boy or girl between the ages of. 

and inclusive, who shall be approved by the superintendent 

and assistant, may become an active member of the society by taking 
the following pledge : — 

JUNIOR MEMBERSHIP PLEDGE. 

Trusting in the Lord Jesus Christ for strength, I promise him that I 
will strive to do whatever he would like to have me do ; that I will 
pray and read the Bible every day ; and that, just so far as I know 
how, I will try to lead a Christian life. I will be present at every 
meeting of the society when I can, and will take some part in every 
meeting. 

Name 

I am willing that should sign this pledge, and will do 

all I can to help keep it. 

Parent's name 

Residence 

OPTIONAL PLEDGE. 

[Form No. 2. For societies where the majority of members are under ten years.] 

I promise Jesus to pray to him every day for strength to do what- 
ever he would like to have me do. I promise Jesus to come to every 
meeting. 

Name 

Date 

3. Trial Members shall be those who wish to attend, and who 
promise to behave when at the meeting. These shall have their names 
on the trial roll, but shall not sign the pledge, or serve as leaders 
for the meetings. 

Article IV. Officers. 
1. The officers of the society shall be superintendent, assistant 
superintendent, president, vice-president, secretary, and treasurer. 
There shall be lookout, prayer-meeting, and social committees, and 
such other committees as may be needed. 



HOW TO ORGANIZE A JUNIOR SOCIETY. 7 

Article V. Duties of Officers. 

1 . The superintendent shall have full control of the society. 

2. The assistant superintendent shall aid the superintendent in her 
work. The assistant shall take care of all funds belonging to the 
society, the money being turned over to her by the treasurer at the 
close of each meeting. 

3. The president shall conduct the business meetings, under the 
direction of the superintendent. 

4. The vice-president shall act in the absence of the president. 

5. The secretary shall keep a correct list of the members, take the 
minutes of the business meetings, and call the roll at each meeting. 

6. The treasurer shall take up the collections, enter the amount 
in the account-book, and turn over the money to the assistant 
superintendent, and also enter all expenditures as directed by the 
superintendent. 

7. The superintendent and assistant may be appointed by the 
pastor, or by the senior society (if one exists), with the approval of 
the pastor. The other officers and committees shall be nominated 
by the superintendent and assistant, and elected by the society. All 
officers shall be chosen once in six months. 

Article VI. Duties of Committees. 

1. The lookout committee shall secure the names of any who may 
wish to join the society, and report the same to the superintendents 
for action. They shall also obtain excuses from members absent from 
the roll call, and affectionately look after and reclaim any who seem 
indifferent to their pledge. 

2. The prayer-meeting committee shall, in connection with the 
superintendent, select topics, assign leaders, and do what they can to 
secure faithfulness to the prayer-meeting pledge. 

3. The social committee shall welcome the children to the meetings 
and introduce them to the other members of the society. They may 
also arrange for occasional sociables. 

Article VII. Relationship. 
The relation of the Junior to the senior society of Christian Endeavor 
should be close and intimate; and it is expected that, when the mem- 
bers of the Junior society have reached their age limit, they will enter 
the Christian Endeavor society as active members. 

Article VIII. Meetings. 
1 . A prayer-meeting shall be held once every week. A consecra- 
tion meeting shall be held once a month, at which the pledge shall be 



8 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

read and the roll called, and the responses of the members shall be 
considered a renewal of the pledge of the society. If any member is 
absent from three consecutive consecration meetings, without excuse, 
his name shall be dropped from the list of members. 

2. Part of the hour of the weekly meeting shall, if deemed best, be 
used by the pastor or superintendent of the society for instruction, or 
for other exercises which they may approve. 

BY-LAWS. 



1. The society shall hold a prayer meeting on 

of each week. The last regular meeting of each month shall be a 
consecration meeting. The business meeting may be held in connec- 
tion with the first regular meeting of each month. 

2. The officers and committees shall be chosen in and 

and continue six months, beginning on the first of the 

month following their election. 

3. Special meetings of the society may be held at any time, at the 
call of the superintendent. 

4. A collection shall be taken at the consecration meeting, and at 
the other meetings if desired, the money thus obtained to be held 
available for benevolent objects and to meet the expenses of the 
society. 

5. All committees should meet at least once a month for consulta- 
tion with the superintendent in regard to their work. 

6. All expenditures shall be made under the direction of the 
superintendents. 

7. Other committees may be added, whose duties shall be defined 
as follows: — 

The music committee shall distribute and collect the singing books, 
and co-operate with the leader of the meeting in trying in every way 
to make the singing a success. 

The missionary committee shall arrange for an occasional missionary 
meeting, and seek to interest the members in home and foreign work. 

The temperance committee shall arrange for an occasional temperance 
meeting, and circulate a temperance pledge among the members. 

The Sunday-school committee shall secure the names of children who 
do not attend Sunday school, and invite them to become members of 
the Sunday school. 

The flower committee shall provide flowers for the Sunday school 
room, and distribute fruit and flowers to the sick and needy. 



HOW TO ORGANIZE A JUNIOR SOCIETY. 9 

The scrap-book committee shall collect pictures and clippings, and 
make scrap-books for sick and disabled members, and for distribution 
in the hospitals. 

The relief committee shall collect clothing for the destitute children 
found in the Sunday school and society, and bring it to the superin- 
tendent for distribution. 

The birthday committee shall report all birthdays as they occur 
among the members, so that special prayer may be offered for each 
member on his or her birthday. 

8. This constitution and by-laws may be altered or amended when- 
ever the superintendents and pastor find it necessary. 

No Unnecessary Differences. — It is very advantageous to 
make the constitution and work of the Junior society as near 
like those of the Young People's society as is possible. The 
reason for this is that then, when the Juniors come to graduate 
into the older society, the transition will be less difficult, and 
they will he better prepared to take up advanced work. 

The First Heeting. — After all this preliminary work is done, 
call your first meeting of the children. Let it be on a Saturday 
afternoon, when all can attend. Advertise it as widely as pos- 
sible, in church, Sunday school, and newspaper. Avoid disap- 
pointment by stating plainly the age limit, usually from six to 
fourteen. You will get a good attendance, especially of the 
boys whom you are most anxious to reach, if you announce 
that there will be some refreshments after the meeting. Get 
the best speaker from your Junior committee to prepare a little 
talk to the children. They will listen to those nearer their own 
age more readily at first than they will listen to you. 

After the proposed methods of the new society are fully ex- 
plained, being put in as attractive a form as possible, ask the 
children present who would like to join such a society to rise. 
With these, go over the constitution carefully, article by article. 
Explain each point, and let each division of the constitution and 
by-laws be adopted by those who intend to join the new society. 
Appoint a nominating committee to meet with the superinten- 
dent during the week and nominate the officers ; then bring 
forward the refreshments, and at the close have an orderly ad- 
journment to meet on the next Sunday afternoon. 



10 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

The Call.— At this meeting the superintendent will preside. 
Have some lively singing and a few short prayers. Then let 
the superintendent talk earnestly about the conditions of join- 
ing the new society, briefly explaining the pledge and its im- 
portance, and what a solemn thing it is to sign such a pledge. 
Then ask the children to tell you whether they wish to join as 
active or associate (trial) members, and make a note of each on 
your list. Announce a topic and leader for next Sunday's meet- 
ing, and close with singing, " God be with you till we meet 
again," and with the Christian Endeavor benediction. 

Go Slowly. — You will notice that up to this point you have 
not received a single member, nor has a single pledge been 
signed. During the following week visit each child separately. 
Talk over the pledge. See that they understand it perfectly, 
and accept their signatures to it only after you are thoroughly 
assured of their sincerity, and that they are not merely attracted 
by the novelty of the affair. Admit them as associate (trial) 
members unless you are certain that they are deeply in earnest 
as active members. 

Receive no signature without the signature of the parent to 
the pledge, and do not accept the latter until you have talked 
with the parents yourself, and shown them just what the pledge 
means both for their child and for themselves. 

Now you have your body of Juniors, and can go to work to 
form your committees and choose your officers. The meetings 
from this time on should be conducted by the Juniors, and 
along regular lines. 

This is a slow way to begin, and it may seem to some that it 
is too cautious, but the most experienced workers know that a 
little caution at the beginning will save much discouragement 
and vain effort farther on. A society thus founded will be 
founded on the rock. 

Outside Help. — It is always well, in organizing a new Junior 
society, to get the assistance of some experienced Junior worker, 
having her upon the ground, having her talk with the children, 
and consult with the new superintendent and her assistants at 
every point. In addition to this, it is helpful to have present 
Juniors from other societies, especially at the first meeting, when 
the Juniors come together to decide for or against membership 



HOW TO ORGANIZE A JUNIOR SOCIETY. II 

in this society. Let two or three of these speak to the young 
folks, and tell them what their society is doing, and how much 
they enjoy it. 

A Recognition Service. — It will be pleasant for the older 
society to hold a recognition service as soon as their younger 
brothers are organized. Both societies will be present. The 
president of the older society will congratulate the Juniors on 
their organization, and the Junior president will respond briefly. 
The older Endeavorers will discuss plans for aiding the Juniors 
in their work. The pastor will give some hints as to the tasks 
all his Endeavorers might undertake. There will be much 
prayer. Be sure to assign to the Juniors themselves some de- 
cided part in the meeting, having them recite, give responsive 
readings, sing, and take part, it may be, in sentence prayers. 

Don't Wait. — In your church there may be (it is still possi- 
ble !) some opposition to the Young People's Society of Chris- 
tian Endeavor. Do not wait for this opposition to die down 
before you organize a Junior society, provided the opposition 
would not extend also to that. It has happened in many in- 
stances that the organization of a Junior society taught the 
older church members what Christian Endeavor really means, 
and prepared them to accept with readiness an older society of 
Christian Endeavor. 

Do not wait either, before you organize your Junior society, 
to make too elaborate preparations and consult with too many 
workers. If you delay too long, the children's enthusiasm, that 
you are so eager to utilize, will have vanished. 

Do not wait too long, either, seeking for a single Christian 
with grit and grace enough to undertake the superintendency. 
If, after diligent search, no ideal or half-ideal superintendent 
appears, appoint a Junior committee from the older society. It 
is a good plan to have a committee of six, two of whom are to 
carry on the society each month, all six serving in the course of 
the quarter. Of course they will all be in constant consultation 
with one another. 

An Impressive Beginning. — The plan of an Iowa superin- 
tendent in starting her Junior society will be suggestive to 
others. She had carefully watched her trial members for some 
time before permitting any to sign the pledge, After some 



12 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

weeks she found three boys and three girls who were, she de- 
cided, true Christians. After talking with them beforehand, 
she asked them at one of the meetings to take the front seat. 

With her watch and a needle she showed how so small a 
thing as a needle can stop the entire machinery of the watch, 
and applied this to the principle of pledge-keeping, failure to 
hold to any of the things promised being the little needle that 
would stop the right action of their lives. Earnestly and sol- 
emnly the superintendent went on to speak of the seriousness of 
taking such a pledge. 

She then gave each of the six a pledge card, and they all 
knelt, the other Juniors bowing their heads. On their knees 
the six Juniors read the pledge slowly together. Each little 
head then went down on the seat, and, taking turns, they re- 
peated this sentence: "Dear Jesus, help me to keep this 
pledge.' 1 After an earnest prayer from the leader, each Junior 
went forward to the desk and signed the pledge, and thus the 
active membership of that society was started. 

Junior Companies. — If you are compelled to start your so- 
ciety with few members, try the plan adopted by a Kansas Junior 
society at whose initial meeting only twelve young people were 
present. These twelve were made leaders of twelve companies, 
on condition that each promised to get three more members. 
Other young people later undertook the same task, volunteering 
to raise companies. This organization into companies was con- 
tinued, and the work of each leader was recorded by a chart. 
If all four members were present, a blue star was placed on the 
chart. Five cents in the collection from that company placed a 
silver star there, and a new member added to their number 
glittered as a gilt star. 

Committee Outlines. — At the outset of your society work, 
however familiar the plans may be to you, remember that they 
are all strange to the children. One of the best ways of setting 
the wheels smoothly to running is to give to each officer and to 
each member of the committees simple outlines of the main 
features of the work they are about to undertake. Such outlines 
are given for the committees in the chapter on committee work. 

It is essential that each member of the society be set as soon 
as possible to doing something. Let each committee hold a 



HOW TO ORGANIZE A JUNIOR SOCIETY. 1 3 

meeting at the earliest possible date. You cannot attend them 
all ; but you can see that some older Endeavorer, familiar with 
the work of that committee in his society, is present to superin- 
tend the planning of the Juniors. 

Country Societies. — In country districts the children may 
be so scattered and the parents so busy that it will seem quite 
difficult to get them together at any one season for the purpose 
of carrying on a Junior society. In some localities this difficulty 
has been met by holding the Junior society in immediate con- 
nection with the Sunday school, letting it occupy the last half 
of the Sunday-school hour. Another good plan is to adopt a 
single centre convenient for the greatest number, holding the 
Junior meetings there, and permitting the other children who 
belong to the church to join this society as members of what 
might be called the home department. They will be given 
committee work to do in their own neighborhoods. They will 
sign the pledge and keep its provisions as far as possible under 
the circumstances, engaging in daily prayer and Bible-reading. 
They will make monthly reports to the central society to be read 
at the consecration meetings, and will attend whenever attend- 
ance is possible. 



14 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 



CHAPTER III. 

PASTORS, CHURCHES, AND JUNIORS. 

The Juniors at Church. — A pastor has truly said that the 
Junior Endeavor society is, next to the home, the best instru- 
mentality in existence for insuring the presence of the children 
at church. The superintendent should keep the church meeting 
in mind in all Junior work. If the congregation is in the habit 
of repeating the Apostles' Creed, singing the Gloria or the Dox- 
ology, let these be taught the children, and frequently practised. 

The training for responsive reading given in the Junior society 
will make the Juniors more ready than many of their elders in 
the responsive readings of the church services. 

Above all things, teach the Juniors the church hymns, not to 
the exclusion of their own bright children's songs, but in addi- 
tion to them. The pastor will be glad to tell the superintendent 
what hymns are to be sung in church the next Sunday, and these 
the Juniors may sing at the Junior meeting. Such methods in 
some churches have made the Juniors a strong factor in congre- 
gational singing. In fact, nobody else knows the hymns quite 
so well as they. 

Sermons for Juniors. — If the pastor does not preach five- 
minute sermons to the children, it would be a good thing for the 
Junior superintendent to suggest that he take up this most help- 
ful line of work. An Australian pastor has obtained the attend- 
ance of all his Juniors, — and he has a large number, — at the 
regular church services. He uses this excellent programme : 
The first Scripture reading is read by the congregation and the 
Juniors alternately. This Scripture lesson contains the text 
of the five-minute children's sermon, which the pastor then 
preaches. A child's hymn is next sung by the whole congrega- 
tion, and the pastor then turns to the mature portion of his 
audience. 



PASTORS, CHURCHES, AND JUNIORS. 1 5 

The Pastor in the Junioi* Meeting. — One Sunday a sturdy 
little fellow entered a Junior society. After looking around, he 
asked, " Where is the preacher? I thought he was here." The 
preacher was immediately sent for. 

The children themselves will soon prove to the pastor that he 
is welcome to the meetings ; but it is well occasionally to give 
the pastor a special invitation to be present at the Junior meet- 
ing, and to set apart four or five minutes for his use, telling him 
beforehand just how much time he will have, telling the children 
also beforehand that the pastor is to speak to them, and awak- 
ening their curiosity and expectation. 

It is needless to say, however, that the pastor should be 
present at the Junior meeting as often as he can, consistently 
with his other duties. Every true pastor will feel this to be a 
joy and privilege. He will take part with the children simply 
and briefly ; he will make them feel that he is one of them ; he 
will urge them to pray for him and for the work of the church. 
One of the best ways in which he can show his interest in the 
Juniors and draw them close to him, will be to give them an 
occasional social afternoon at his home. 

Attendance Cards. — There are a great many methods of 
spurring the Juniors to better attendance on church services, 
but one of the simplest is this. Each Junior is given a card at 
the weekly meeting ; and on the following Sunday these cards, 
appropriately filled out, are dropped in a basket or box in the 
lobby of the church as the Junior enters. The card is like 
this : — 



sVs ( 

CATSK1LL, N. Y. 



For Regular Church Attendance. 

SUNDAY. 18Q5. 

NAME. 



Texts. — Ask the Juniors at every meeting how many of 
them have attended the morning service, and follow this ques- 



l6 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

tion by the request that all who have so attended repeat the text 
that the minister used. At first you will not get a very good 
response ; but very soon the Juniors will learn to listen to this 
part, at least, of the sermon. 

Sermon Talks. — A sermon talk is effective in spurring the 
Juniors to better attendance on the church services, and better 
attention when there. All the Juniors who are at church are 
asked to stand, and are then questioned as to the name of the 
preacher, if he was a stranger, and as to his subject and text. 
Sometimes the superintendent asks questions on the main points 
of the sermon, but more often tries to get one fact or illustration 
from each Junior. This work can very profitably be placed in 
charge of one of the assistant superintendents. 

A Roll of Honor. — A roll of honor is an excellent thing for 
promoting church attendance. Have a large list of the names 
of the Juniors pasted in some conspicuous place, and paste 
opposite the name of each Junior a silver star for each time he is 
present at church. Another plan is to make a wall roll divided 
into twelve sections, and at the close of the month write in the 
appropriate section the names of all the Juniors who have been 
present at church during the month. 

For Church Attendance. — In order to promote attendance 
at church, some superintendents give a little prize every half- 
year to the Juniors who respond to the roll-call, " Present at 
church," the largest number of times. 

Church Committees. — Some societies have church com- 
mittees. The duty of this committee is to keep a record of all 
Juniors who do not attend church services, and to try in every 
way to bring them in. It also keeps a record of those who are 
regularly at the services, and makes an honor roll of all Juniors 
whose church attendance for the month is perfect. 

It is a shrewd plan to place upon this committee at least two 
or three of the Juniors who are not in the habit of regular church 
attendance. Such work as this has been the means, in cases 
not a few, of inducing the parents of Juniors to attend church 
more regularly. 

Thought Blanks. — One Baptist pastor of whom I have heard 
gives a prize every six months to the Junior who brings to the 
Junior meeting, during the half-year, the largest number of 



PASTORS, CHURCHES, AND JUNIORS. I J 

blanks like the following, filled out in the best shape with the 
best thoughts from the sermon. This is found very effective in 
securing not merely attendance, but attention. 



Junior Christian (Entreafcor, 



MORNING SERVICE. 

Date i8g 

PREACHER 

SCRIPTURE LESSON. 

TEXT. 

THOUGHTS. 



NAME. 



A Junior Corner. — Of course most of the Juniors will wish 
to sit with their parents in the church services ; but there will 
be enough of them who, for various reasons, cannot do this, to 
warrant in most churches the establishment of a Junior corner, 
which will usually be well filled at the morning church service. 
The secretary of the Junior society should notice what Juniors 
are present at church, and make a report of the number at the 
next meeting of the society. 

Junior Pews. — Some Wisconsin Endeavorers have the habit 
of renting two pews near the pulpit for the use of those Juniors 
whose parents do not regularly attend church. These pews are 
filled with children, and the overflow crowds the neighboring 



1 8 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

pews also. The Junior treasurer, who pays the pew-rent in the 
name of the society, acts as children's usher. Almost the entire 
Junior society of this church are present at the church service, 
and the pastor always preaches to them a five-minute sermon, 
which is enjoyed by the elders as much as by the Juniors. 

After Sunday school. — It is an excellent idea, when the 
church services come after the Sunday school, to invite the 
Juniors, if they are not accompanied by their parents, to gather 
after Sunday-school and attend church in a body. In this case 
a special seat, or several seats, should be assigned them, and a 
"Junior corner' 1 might be established. 

In the Church Service. — Five or ten minutes of some regu- 
lar church service may, without harm, be set apart for the 
Juniors. They may be given some position in the front of the 
congregation, and requested to repeat some of the portions of 
the Bible they know, giving them in concert, to sing some of 
their songs, and in other ways to show what the society is ac- 
complishing. This will serve to interest the parents, give fresh 
enthusiasm to the Juniors, and win new members to the society. 

A Church Meeting. — The Junior society can do much to 
get the children interested in the church to which they belong, 
and in the wider work of their denomination, by holding occa- 
sional meetings that may be called denominational days, or 
church meetings. Such meetings are suggested in the uniform 
topics for each year. It should be the aim of the superin- 
tendent at these meetings to give the Juniors an idea of the 
most important points in their church history, some knowledge 
of the great men of the denomination and the striking events 
in their lives, of the fundamental principles for which the de- 
nomination stands, of the main facts in the organization of 
their churches, and the like. As bearing more directly upon 
their own relation to the church, they should be taught at such 
meetings the meaning of the Lord's Supper, and the reasons 
why church membership is both a duty and a privilege. 

Work with the Pastor. — The superintendent can scarcely 
consult the pastor too frequently. She should remember that 
the Junior society is one part of the church, and that for the 
general conduct of the church in all its parts the pastor is re- 
sponsible. He will not feel at liberty to advice her in her work 



PASTORS, CHURCHES, AND JUNIORS. 19 

unless she shows him unmistakably that such advice is desired. 
The pastor's aid is almost indispensable, too, if the superin- 
tendent would interest the parents in the Junior society. Words 
from the pulpit, or hints dropped by the pastor in his calls, will 
do wonders towards maintaining among the parents a lively 
interest in the work of the society. 

How the Pastor May Help. — The pastor may do much 
for the success of the Junior society by a little thoughtfulness 
in giving the Juniors a place in the various exercises of the 
church. The small people will be eager to have something to 
do, and will be very thorough in the performance of whatever 
is within their power. 

What One Minister Does. — It is wonderful how much can 
be done toward the success of the Junior society by even a little 
show of interest on the part of the pastor. I have heard of one 
minister who prepares for his Juniors every week the lesson for 
the following Sunday, making an outline of it on the mimeo- 
graph, and presenting a copy of it to each Junior. This results 
in a constant increase of interest. 

Gifts of Testaments. — One pastor of whom I know has 
been especially successful in winning the children to the church, 
and he makes it his custom to present inexpensive Testaments 
each year to the Juniors who have attended church not less than 
forty-eight Sundays. One of the pleasantest exercises of Chil- 
dren's Day is the presentation of these Testaments, accom- 
panied by a word or two showing what the church might be 
to the Juniors, and what the Juniors might be to the church. 

Pastoral Letters to the Juniors. — It sometimes happens 
that the pastor cannot very frequently attend the Junior society, 
or take part in its meetings. There is no pastor in the land, 
however, who cannot occasionally follow the example of one 
good children's pastor I know, who frequently sends letters to 
his Juniors. These he manifolds, so that each can take a copy 
home and show to his parents. Through these letters the pas- 
tor is able to exercise a very real control over the society, to 
check any tendencies toward frivolity and disorderliness or 
carelessness, and to praise them, and inspire them in every 
good work. 

For Helping the Pastor. — Every Junior society should have 



20 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

a "pastor's aid committee," which shall be set, either by the 
pastor or the superintendent, to doing things that are helpful in 
the pastor's work. 

The Pastor's Boys. — The boys will like to be enrolled in a 
little sub-society of their own, which may be called the " pastor's 
boys," and set to doing work like the following: They must 
always be ready to serve the pastor at any time. They must 
make it their aim to invite to the church services at least one 
boy a Sunday who is not in the habit of attending church. They 
must sit in a body as near as possible to the pulpit, and must 
keep good order. They must agree to pray that the sermon 
may be effective in winning men to the better life. 

Once a month the head of the committee must make a special 
report to the society. Of course this work cannot be carried on 
without the hearty assistance of the pastor, who should occa- 
sionally invite these boys, with their superintendent, to his 
home, spending a pleasant evening with them. 

A Present for the Pastor. — It is a good thing, both for 
pastor and society, to have the Juniors occasionally give a little 
present to their pastor. Invite him to your next social, giving 
him a place of honor, and decorating his chair, and have the 
president of the Junior society present the gift with appropriate 
words. 

A good present for your pastor, or your pastor's wife, may 
easily be made in this way. Give each member of the society 
a small sheet of nice paper, asking the Juniors each to write 
a greeting. They may be urged to decorate the sheets in ways 
of their own devising. When the sheets are returned, the su- 
perintendent will bind them into two pretty books, which the 
pastor and his wife will greatly treasure. 

Another Present. — Give to each Junior a square card, the 
colors being different. Ask each Junior to write upon his card 
the Bible verse he likes best. At the following meeting, when 
these cards are brought back, each Junior will recite his Bible 
verse, at the same time handing the superintendent the card. 
These she will tie together with a ribbon of the Junior color, and 
will give the whole to the pastor, who will like to make these 
verses the opportunity for a little talk to the Juniors at the next 
meeting. 



PASTORS, CHURCHES, AND JUNIORS. 21 

Close Connection. — The Juniors may be as closely bound 
to the church as the church itself desires. Some churches may 
prefer the very close connection between the Junior society and 
the church organization adopted by a certain Presbyterian church 
I have heard of. The executive committee of this Junior society 
is composed of the pastor, one elder, and three other persons 
appointed by the session of the church. This executive com- 
mittee appoints the officers of the society, or, if it thinks best, 
permits the Juniors to select them. The pastor is himself 
chairman of the executive committee, and superintendent of the 
society. 

Juniors in the Church Prayer Meeting. — I do not think 
it best to urge the Juniors to take any conspicuous part in the 
church prayer meeting. Such urging should come from the 
parents themselves, if they think it best for their children. If, 
however, the Juniors of their own accord raise their voices in 
the meetings of their elders, this pleasant addition to the hour 
should be gladly welcomed. The Juniors should be made to 
feel that they are wanted at the church prayer meeting, that 
their verses are helpful, that their voices are needed in the sing- 
ing, and that, whatever part they may take now, they are ex- 
pected at no distant date to take a very decided part, and in due 
time to conduct those meetings themselves. 

A Visit of Investigation. — The officers of the church, and 
especially those that have to do with the reception of members, 
should be urged to pay an occasional visit to the Junior society. 
At these visits they should keep their eyes open, and especially 
notice signs of thoughtfulness and earnestness among the Jun- 
iors, and see if, in their opinion, some of these little folks are 
not ready for church membership. In no better way can the 
church officers and the pastor come to know the young Christians 
of the congregation, and they will find no better opportunity for 
the winning of new members for the church. 



22 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 



CHAPTER IV. 

WORKING WITH THE PARENTS. 

Parents Through Children. — For the sake of the parents, 
as well as for the sake of the children, the superintendent should 
insist strenuously on the signing of the parents 1 pledge that 
accompanies every Junior pledge. Many a parent has been 
brought to Christ by this means. A suggestive incident is 
given by Mr. William S. Ferguson. 

At one of his Junior meetings a card was handed in, signed 
by the parents, with these words : " We are not professing Chris- 
tian people. We want our children to be better than we are, 
and we will try to help them keep this pledge." The new Jun- 
iors took a great deal of interest in the meetings, and became 
very active ; and one day the little girl, taking part in the conse- 
cration meeting, said that she wanted her comrades to pray for 
her parents, that they might " soon become members of our 
Junior society." This was said with an expression of deep ear- 
nestness that showed her profound longing. 

The prayers of the Juniors were answered. To-day the par- 
ents are both members of the church, and active members of 
the older Christian Endeavor society. They say that the sign- 
ing of the Junior pledge first set them to thinking ; that, keeping 
it, they looked after their children to see that they read the 
Bible and prayed every day, and soon they began to pray with 
them. The following steps were easy. 

To the Parents. — The following is an admirable and busi- 
ness-like letter, which is sent with a copy of the pledge to the 
parents of the boy or girl who intends to join the Junior society. 
It will be observed that the letter calls especial attention to the 
promises made in the pledge, and to the promise of the parent 
to help the child keep the pledge. A little carefulness of this 
sort at the beginning of the children's connection with the soci- 
ety will add greatly to the society's efficiency. 



WORKING WITH THE PARENTS. 23 

My dear Friend, — Your child has expressed the wish to join the 
Junior Christian Endeavor Society of this church. Will you please 
read the enclosed pledge carefully? 

You will see that your child is to make certain promises. These 
promises are made to the Lord Jesus Christ, in dependence upon him. 
They are not meant to be assumed lightly. They are not temporary. 
They are meant to be life-long. These promises assume that your 
child may be converted, and live a Christian life. 

Should you consent to your child's signing this pledge, please no- 
tice that you will promise to help that child to keep the pledge faith- 
fully. Each week we shall issue a lesson paper, with verses to be 
marked and learned daily. Upon you must rest largely the responsi- 
bility for the way in which that promise shall be kept. 

On our part, we shall try to train your child for Christ. And as 
soon as possible, we shall hope and labor to bring your child into 
church membership. You are cordially invited to come to all our ser- 
vices, unless you are a member of some other church or congregation. 
Cordially and faithfully yours, 

Corda E. Garrison, Superintendent. 

A Pointed Letter. — Here is another practical letter, which 
one Junior worker is in the habit of sending to the parents of 
children who are thinking of joining the society : — 

Mr. and Mrs. 

Dear Friends : — Enclosed you will find the pledge which 

is expected to take in order to become a member of our Junior Chris- 
tian Endeavor Society. Will you kindly examine it, and only permit 
to sign it with your approval, and with your signatures at- 
tached? Please fill out all the blanks. This request is made in order 
to secure your support and co-operation; for I feel that without your 
constant sympathy, prayers, and help it will be useless for me to un- 
dertake the work. 



Superintendent of *the Junior Christian Endeavor Society. 

A Plea for the Juniors. — The superintendent of a Friends' 
Junior society in Indiana makes use of the following admirable 
card, which he sends to the parents of his Juniors : — 

A PLEA FOR THE JUNIORS. 

That the Junior Society of Christian Endeavor may be effective to 
the greatest possible extent, the superintendent begs leave by this card 



24 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

to present a few suggestions to the parents of the members. While we 
believe the society has your sympathy and prayers, we desire your 
hearty support in the ways here spoken of. 

1. Notice early in the week the topic for the next lesson, and call 
the attention of the children to it, that they may not forget it. 

2. If the children should be negligent or forgetful of daily Bible- 
reading, remind them of the importance of forming the habit in child- 
hood, using the daily readings, which will prove a helpful attendant to 
the study of the lesson. 

3. Encourage daily prayer. 

4. Help the children to draw some point from the lesson text or 
readings out of which they can give a testimony. 

5. Encourage regular attendance. 

6. Encourage benevolence by giving them money to contribute. 
Prayer meeting every Sabbath at 3 o'clock p.m. 

Allen C. Dicks, Junior Superintendent. 

Let Her Test It. — The Junior superintendent, before she 
admits the Junior to the society, should always call upon the 
mother, and get her to attend a Junior meeting. In this way her 
support, which is essential, will be assured from the outset. 

Put Them at Work. — Nothing interests like active work. 
If you want the cordial co-operation of the parents, you can gain 
it in no better way than by setting them at work for the Juniors 
and the society. Occasionally call on the parents for little 
talks before the children, giving them a plenty of time for 
preparation. On other occasions, invite them to be present 
at the society meeting, and to take just such part as they see 
the children take, speaking on the regular topic. 

If any of the parents are gifted in this line, ask them to give 
object lessons to the children, or chalk talks. Some of them 
may be fine singers, and will be glad to sing beautiful songs at 
the society meetings. Others may play a noble piece of sacred 
music upon the organ or the piano. Others may have the gift 
of entertaining, and will prove invaluable assistants in the Junior 
socials. In all these ways the parents may be interested and 
kept interested in the work of the society. 

A riothers' Reception. — The Juniors will enjoy giving a re- 
ception to their mothers, and will preside at such an affair with 
surprising dignity and grace. They should present a pretty 



WORKING WITH THE PARENTS. 2$ 

entertainment of some kind, and light refreshments. For such 
an affair be sure to appoint committees, one on reception, one 
on refreshments, and one on programme. Interest other mem- 
bers by appointing them waiters. 

rionthly Reports. — It does much to interest the parents in 
the progress of the Juniors if the superintendent takes the trou- 
ble to send to the mothers a monthly report. The following 
form is in use for this purpose : — 



Dea 


%uuwx % % 


?PORT. 


% 


MONTHLY Ri 


r Friend : 




Your child, 






in. . . 


standing in the 


society during the month 


of... 


, having been 




...in attendance 


and 










Su n day 


r in the month. 




The consecration meeting is 


held the last Sunday in 


each 


month. Will you kindly see that 




has 


a verse for response at roll call ? 






Superintendents' signatures, 



















With the riothers. — A quarterly mothers' meeting is not 
too often for any Junior society. Let this be made a joint 
meeting of the Juniors and the mothers, long thought of and 
carefully planned for by both. If there is a Mothers 1 Society 
of Christian Endeavor or a maternal association, the regular 
meeting of this organization should be merged in this joint 
meeting. 



26 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

Work with the Parents. — Whatever the Junior superinten- 
dent does or does not do, he should call upon the parents of his 
Juniors, and in the course of the call should suggest to them 
ways in which they can help the Juniors in their work. Often 
the parents are greatly blessed through the work of their chil- 
dren, and in not a few instances have been led to Christ through 
the conversion of their boys and girls. 

This visiting must be systematic, or it will fall hopelessly in 
arrears in a short time. 

The Parents Leading. — Take every opportunity to get the 
parents of the Juniors to attend the meetings, and never fail, 
when they come, to urge them to be one with the Juniors, and 
to take part in the meeting like the rest. A bit of example 
from the parents will do much to spur the Juniors to greater 
faithfulness. 

Juniors and Parents. — After you have talked to the Juniors 
about the topic of the meeting, urge them to go home and talk 
to their parents about the same matter. In private conversa- 
tion, urge the parents also to question the Juniors about the 
subject of the meeting. In this way both will be interested, 
and each will interest the other. 

From the Start. — It is an important point in establishing a 
Junior society to accustom the little folks to the attendance of 
older people. Unless older people come from the start, they 
will be likely to embarrass the children with their occasional 
visits. While this presence of older Endeavorers and parents 
at the meetings of the Juniors may at first render them more 
timid, yet it is an assurance that they will take seriously what 
part they do take, and they will soon develop confidence. 

An Open Meeting. — It is good for the Junior society to 
give, once in a while, an open meeting. Let the Juniors have 
the church hour, if no other time can be found for them. They 
will delight to show their parents what they have learned and 
what they can do, and many friends will be won for the society, 
both among the Endeavorers and among the older people. 

Willing Helpers. — Use the help of the Juniors in connection 
with your church entertainments, fairs, socials, etc., whenever 
you can. Set them in charge of a five-cent booth or a ten-cent 
table, and you will be astonished to see how eagerly they will 
take up the work. 



WORKING WITH THE PARENTS. 1J 

Honorary Members. — I have heard about the advantage 
which honorary members have proved to be to a certain Junior 
society of Washington, D.C. At first these older people were 
made honorary members as a graceful recognition of their kind- 
ness to the society. Soon this honor came to be asked for, and 
now the society has twenty of such members. 

There is a honorary membership committee, which writes 
letters, inviting the older Christians to become honorary mem- 
bers. They read to the society the letters received in reply, 
keeping .the letters on file, and keeping a record also of what is 
done for the society by the honorary members. These honorary 
members are never asked for money, but yet they have given liber- 
ally to help the society, and have assisted it in other ways as well. 

It is certainly worth while to have honorary members ; and we 
believe that, much as these members may do for the Juniors, the 
Junior society, especially if the honorary members will work with 
it, will be of an immensely greater benefit to them. 

Mothers' Societies. — Mothers 1 Societies of Christian En- 
deavor are of the greatest assistance to the Junior societies, and 
one of the most hopeful advance steps in the progress of the 
Junior movement is the springing up of these societies all over 
the country. If a mothers' society already exists, it is the easiest 
possible change to transform it into a Mothers' Society of Chris- 
tian Endeavor, and associate it closely with the workings of the 
Junior society. 

If you have no mothers' society, and wish to organize a 
Mothers' Society of Christian Endeavor, first do some prelim- 
inary talking, striving to interest as many as possible in the new 
plan. Issue to those interested a call for a meeting, and get the 
pastor or the Junior superintendent, or better, both, to present to 
this meeting the methods and purposes of this new organization. 

The following simple constitution may be adopted, with any 
changes that may be necessary to fit it to the local needs : 

CONSTITUTION OF THE MOTHERS' SOCIETY OF CHRIS- 
TIAN ENDEAVOR. 

Article I. Name. 
This society shall be called the Mothers' Society of Christian En- 
deavor of the Church of £ city j 



28 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

Article II. Purposes. 
The object of this society shall be to stimulate mothers to raise the 
Standard of the Christian home, and to pray for aid to help the chil- 
dren in their Christian life, especially those that belong to the Junior 
Society of Christian Endeavor. 

Article III. Membership. 

Section i. Any woman interested in the welfare of children may 
become a member of this society by signing the following pledge : — 

Trusting in the Lord Jesus Christ for strength, I promise him that I 
will strive to do whatever he would have me do; especially that I will 
endeavor to bring the children to Christ and to train them for him. 
To this end I will co-operate with the Junior Christian Endeavor su- 
perintendents in any way I can. I promise to seek daily the Master's 
blessing on the children. I will attend each meeting of the Mothers' 
Society of Christian Endeavor, unless prevented by a reason that I can 
conscientiously give to my Saviour, and will come prepared to add to 
the interest of the meeting. When obliged to be absent from the con- 
secration meeting, I will, if possible, send a message to be read in 
response to my name. 

A"ame 

Address 

Date.... 



Sec. 2. The relation of the Mothers' Society to the Junior Society 
of Christian Endeavor should be close and intimate, and it is expected 
that the members will in every way possible seek to promote the 
spiritual growth of the boys and girls of their church and Sunday 
school, as well as of the Junior society. 

Article IV. Officers. 

Section i. The officers of the society shall be a president, vice- 
president, secretary, and 'such other officers as may be necessary. 

Sec. 2. The president shall keep especial watch over the interests 
of the society, and it shall be her care to see that the committees per- 
form the duties devolving upon them. 

Sec. 3. The vice-president shall assist the president in her duties, 
and perform them in her absence. 

Sec. 4. The secretary shall keep a record of the names and ad- 
dresses of the members, and the minutes of all prayer and business 
meetings, and perform the other usual duties of a secretary. 



WORKING WITH THE PARENTS. 29 

Sec. 5. The officers and committees shall be elected by the society, 
and shall be chosen once a year, at the first meeting in [month] 



The meetings should be held monthly. The United Society 
of Christian Endeavor issues topic cards with suggested themes 
for these meetings. The meetings should be devotional, as well 
as instructive. Into them should enter the Christian Endeavor 
principle that requires every one to take part who has no reason 
for not doing so that he could submit to the Master. 

The essential thing is the Mothers' pledge, promising daily 
prayer for the children, regular attendance on the Mothers' 
meeting and participation therein, and co-operation with the 
Junior Christian Endeavor superintendent. 

This co-operation will lead the members to attend the Junior 
society meetings as often as possible, to help the Juniors in their 
Christian Endeavor work, to assist in the Junior socials, to open 
their homes to the Juniors for committee meetings and the like, 
and in every way to show their interest in the Christian work 
their children are endeavoring to accomplish. 

In some places this Mothers' society is a Parents' society, the 
fathers uniting with the mothers in this monthly meeting for 
prayer and consultation. It does not need to be said that this 
is infinitely better than the old one-sided arrangement. It 
requires only a change of name in the constitution given above. 

A flothers' Committee. — Where the mothers of a congre- 
gation are not willing to form a Mothers' Christian Endeavor 
society, a mothers' committee is the next best thing. The pastor 
should appoint this committee from among the mothers of the 
Juniors who are willing to serve. This committee stands ready 
to call, with the Junior superintendent, upon mothers who do 
not attend any church, to help out Junior socials, leaving the 
superintendent free to entertain, and to advise and assist in 
many other ways. 

Your Assistant. — Where a mothers' society exists in the 
church, whether it is a Mothers' Christian Endeavor society or 
not, it is an excellent plan, if possible, to have the president of 
the mothers' society hold also the office of assistant superintend- 
ent of the Junior society. 

The Parents' Pledge. — Many Junior workers dp not think 



30 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

it advisable to set on foot still one more society and one more 
set of meetings. They advocate simply the Parents 1 Christian 
Endeavor pledge, which is as follows : — 

Trusting in the Lord Jesus Christ for strength, I promise him that I 
will strive to do whatever he would have me do, especially to show my 
interest in the Junior society of Christian Endeavor, by co-operating 
with the superintendents in any way that will prove beneficial to the 
welfare and spiritual growth of the boys and girls; that I will pray 
and read the Bible every day; and that, just so far as I know how, I 
will try to lead a Christian life. I promise to seek the Master's daily 
blessing on the Junior work. I will make a great effort to attend each 
Parents' meeting, and will come prepared to add to the interest of the 
meeting, with at least a verse or thought. 

The Parents 1 meeting referred to in the pledge is simply one 
of the regular sessions of the church prayer meeting, one evening 
a month being given up to the needs of the parents ; or, rather, 
not an entire evening, but simply the last half of the regular 
meeting. This parents 1 half-hour is presided over by the pastor, 
and the regular subjects prescribed for the Mothers 1 Christian 
Endeavor society may appropriately be discussed. The co-ope- 
ration with the Junior society, the daily prayer for the Juniors, 
the pledge, participation in the parents 1 meeting — all of these 
points are held in common by the two methods, and great good 
will be gained by the adoption of either plan that local circum- 
stances may seem to favor. 



OLDER ENDEAVORERS AND THE JUNIORS. 3 1 



CHAPTER V. 

OLDER ENDEAVORERS AND THE JUNIORS. 

The Coming Workers. — The feeling should be inculcated 
in the two societies that the Junior society is really a branch of 
the older society. It will not be many years before the entire 
membership of the older society will practically have come from 
the Juniors. As the older workers care for the perpetuity of 
their work, they should seek in all ways to promote and 
strengthen the work of the Juniors. 

Pray For It. — One of the best tests of the interest the 
older Endeavorers feel in their Junior society is the number of 
prayers offered for it and for its superintendent in the course 
of the society meetings. 

Committee Superintendents. — It is sometimes well in a 
Junior society to have a superintendent for each committee, in 
addition to the chairman of the committee, the latter being one 
of the little people. The superintendents should be elected 
from the older society, and each committee is thus given in 
charge of some worker who is especially well qualified to super- 
intend the work of that committee. 

It is a good idea for each superintendent to sit with her 
committee at the meetings of the Junior society, and they, as 
well as the Juniors, should take part in each meeting. In one 
society I know of, each of these committee superintendents asks 
one member of her committee to lead in prayer at the coming 
meeting, and, if necessary, assists that Junior to prepare for 
this important duty. 

" Guardians " is an excellent name adopted by some superin- 
tendents for these members of the older Endeavor society that 
take charge of the work of the Junior committees. Others call 
them, just as fittingly, " advisers." 

It is an excellent idea to place in charge of this work Juniors 
that have recently been graduated into the Young People's 



32 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

society. They are more familiar with the needs of the Juniors, 
and, if they can accomplish the work at all, are more likely to 
do it better than one that has not passed through the Junior 
society. 

The Officers Also. — Whenever this helpful plan is tried, it 
should be extended to take in the officers, appointing, as part of 
the work of the older president, secretary, treasurer, etc., the 
assistance of corresponding officers in the younger society. 
The executive committee of the Junior society may occasion- 
ally be invited to meet with the executive committee of the older 
society, for the purpose of observing their methods. 

Real Friends. — These helpers of the superintendent that 
come from the older society should not confine their efforts to 
the prayer meeting of the Juniors. They can do wonders in 
influencing the life of the Juniors at home and at school. Each 
of them should try, working upon the division of the Juniors 
assigned to her, to make those children her friends, so that they 
will confide in her, bring her their troubles, and get her help in 
all their perplexities. Each helper should report to the superin- 
tendent any conversation or incident that comes up in this out- 
side work that will throw any needed light on the character of 
the Juniors under her charge. 

Each with His Wards. — Whether your society has adopted 
the plan of a Junior committee, or of " committee advisers, 1 ' or 
not, at any rate it is an admirable scheme to divide the mem- 
bers of the Junior society among the older Endeavorers, a cer- 
tain number to each, so that the older members may feel an 
especial responsibility for the training of these Juniors ; may 
pray for them, help them in their society work, and be their 
guides, through their Junior years, into the older society. An 
occasional invitation to their homes from these older Endeavor- 
ers would be greatly appreciated by the Juniors. 

In the Executive Committee. — By every imaginable means 
seek to tie together the Junior society and the older Endeavor- 
ers. One of the best ways of doing this is to make the super- 
intendent of the Junior society a member of the executive 
committee of the Young People's society. In this way she is 
able to suggest ways in which the older Endeavorers can co- 
operate with the Juniors, superintend their committee work, 



OLDER ENDEAVORERS AND THE JUNIORS. 33 

assist their leaders and officers, and smooth the path of grad- 
uation from one society into the other. 

Furthermore, if your Junior society is helped by a "Junior 
committee " from the Young People's society, the superinten- 
dent of the Junior society should by all means be the chairman 
of this committee. 

A Superintendent in Sections. — In many a town, Junior 
work is never taken up because the Endeavorers have a very 
high ideal of a Junior superintendent, and because every one 
shrinks from undertaking this great responsibility. It is for- 
gotten that the qualities that cannot be found combined in any 
one person may easily be found separately in four or five 
Endeavorers, and that a Junior society can often be better man- 
aged by a Junior committee than by a Junior superintendent. 

This committee should be appointed with exceeding care, and 
always on consultation with the pastor. It should be composed 
of both young men and young women, and various talents 
should be represented upon it. There should be one who can 
lead singing well ; there should be one who is especially popular 
among the children, one who is skilled in Bible work, one who 
is able to inspire devotional zeal. As one Junior superin- 
tendent suggests, these Junior committees should be "put up 
assorted. 11 

Sharing the Work. — When this Junior committee of the 
Young People's society constitutes the only leaders of the Jun- 
ior society, it is customary for the members of the Junior com- 
mittee to take turns, month about, in acting as superintendent, 
the rest acting as assistants. In this way each member of the 
committee keeps in touch with the work. 

If the superintendent for the month is for any reason obliged 
to be absent, there is always a properly qualified person to be 
called upon. As the members of the Junior committee change 
from time to time, there soon comes to be quite a body of 
Endeavorers actively interested in the work of the Junior 
society. 

The difficulty with this plan is that it lacks continuity, and 
leads to haphazard methods with the Juniors. In some com- 
munities, however, where long search fails to find any one who 
is willing to undertake the work of a permanent superintendent, 



34 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

this method may be adopted as far better than having no Junior 
society at all. 

Meeting Together. — Joint meetings of the Junior and Young 
People's societies should be held at least as often as once a year, 
and such meetings are provided for in the uniform topics of the 
United Society. These meetings should always be led by the 
superintendent of the Junior society, or by some one who is 
equally familiar with the work and the powers of the Juniors, 
and with whom the Juniors are equally familiar. 

On either side of the leader should sit the president of the 
two societies. There should be a common topic, so simple 
that it can be grasped by the youngest of the Juniors, and yet 
thought-provoking enough for the oldest of the Endeavorers. 
Remember that the Juniors especially will find it difficult to 
take part in such a meeting, and plan the evening largely with 
them in mind. 

The opening reading of scripture should be by the two presi- 
dents, alternating verses. Following that should come a short 
talk by the Junior superintendent. Following that might be 
responsive readings, first between the president of the Junior 
society and his Juniors, and then between the president of the 
older society and his Endeavorers. Next might come a set of 
questions and answers, led by the president of each society in 
turn, the president reading the questions for the day in The 
Golden Rule, and the Endeavorers responding by Bible 
verses, or with thoughts of their own, as they have made 
preparation. 

Interspersed throughout might be songs from the Juniors. 
If you have a Junior choir, let the choir sing a stanza, and the 
Juniors take up the chorus. In the sentence prayers, all should 
take part, both the Juniors and their elders. When opportu- 
nity is given for the repetition of Bible verses, here again the 
societies should be united. 

There should be an opportunity for brief testimony, and it 
would be well at this time for some of the Endeavorers to speak 
directly to the Juniors, telling them of the interest the older so- 
ciety feels in them, and how glad they will be to welcome them 
into their midst when the time comes for graduation. These 
remarks should, of course, be very brief, the object of the whole 



OLDER ENDEAVORERS AND THE JUNIORS. 35 

meeting being largely to make the Juniors feel that they will be 
at home in the older society. At the close, three or four min- 
utes should be given up to the pastor for whatever he may have 
to say, and the society songs and the Mizpah benediction will 
make a fitting close. 

Closing Together. — I have heard of a church whose Junior 
and Young People's societies, though they meet separately in 
adjoining rooms for the first half of the hour, yet come together 
in one room for the remaining half, and hold a joint meeting. 
This is a pleasant and very helpful combination ; and though I 
am sure it would be hurtful as a permanent arrangement, yet 
I am sure it would be a charming variation from the ordinary 
separate meetings, helping both the Juniors and their elders by 
contact with each other. It might be best to begin together, 
the Juniors retiring to their own room at the close of the first 
half of the hour. 

A Leader from the Juniors. — Occasionally ask the older 
society to request some of the better workers among the Juniors 
to lead their meetings. They will be astonished to see what 
excellent work the Juniors are able to do in this difficult line ; 
and the Juniors, as well as the older society, will be spurred to 
more zealous efforts. 

A Help from Outside. — Occasionally invite a member of 
the Young People's society to conduct a Bible drill among the 
Juniors. He will come provided with references, all relating to 
some particular topic, and will give out these references in the 
usual way, permitting the Junior who first finds each to read it 
aloud. A few words from him will connect the references to- 
gether and enforce the lesson. 

An Invitation. — The superintendent should occasionally 
invite some member of the older society to come in and give 
the Juniors a brief talk, being careful to emphasize the word 
brief, so that its meaning is unmistakable. If this invitation 
can come from the Juniors themselves, and be presented by one 
of their number to the fortunate senior, so much the better. 

Missionary Meeting Leaders. — In one Junior society the 
missionary meetings held each month are led in turn by the 
members of the missionary committee of the older society. 
This plan works well. The programmes are greatly varied, as 



2,6 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

they are prepared by different persons, and the children enjoy 
the variety. The plan serves also to keep up an interest in the 
Juniors among the members of the older society. 

An Auxiliary. — The president of the older society is not 
the president of the Junior society, and has no control over it. 
None the less he may be glad to consider the Juniors a sort of 
outside parish. He will be present at the Junior meetings occa- 
sionally, and will adopt the Junior president as a sort of younger 
brother, consulting with him regarding his work, and remem- 
bering that the older Juniors are soon to become members of 
the Young People's society. 

Junior Visitors. — It should be so arranged that every mem- 
ber of the older society shall visit the Junior society at least 
once in the course of the year. In no way can this better be 
accomplished than by the regular appointment of visitors ; and 
these should be one or more, according to the size of the older 
society. The president is the best officer to appoint them, and 
they need not be appointed more than a week in advance. 
These visitors should take some slight part in the Junior society, 
but no more than the Juniors themselves take, except by special 
invitation from the superintendent. They will help the Junior 
work greatly if, after the meeting, they say a word of encourage- 
ment to the Juniors who have taken part, to the leader, and to 
the society officers. 

A Spur. — When you appoint visitors to the Junior society 
from the older society, be sure occasionally to appoint some of 
the more backward Endeavorers. In cases not a few these 
Endeavorers have been moved by the heartiness with which the 
Juniors enter into their work, have been ashamed of their foolish 
timidity, and have been spurred to more zealous service in their 
own society. 

Delegates. — One of the best ways of knitting together the 
Juniors and the older society, is to appoint a Junior delegate to 
each meeting of the Young People's society. This delegate 
should be appointed by the prayer-meeting committee the week 
before. It should be the duty of the delegate to take some 
little part in the older society, and to bring back to the Junior 
society a report of what is done. This report should speak of 
the attendance and the way in which the older Endeavorers 



OLDER ENDEAVORERS AND THE JUNIORS. 2>7 

take part, of any helpful thought, or of any striking inci- 
dent. 

Not only are the Juniors thus led to take an interest in the 
older society, this interest making graduation from the Junior 
society seem easy, but the older society also is greatly bene- 
fited ; and the presence of the Junior delegate, and the knowl- 
edge that he is watching their conduct with a view to reporting 
their success or failure, act as decided spurs to more vigorous 
efforts. 

A Visit. — Occasionally have the Juniors visit the older 
society in a body, and take part by reciting the Twenty-third 
Psalm, by singing a song, or in some other special way. This 
will greatly help both societies. 

Junior Reports. — Have the Junior president or secretary, 
or, if this is not possible, the chairman of some important Junior 
committee, present at the business meeting of the older society. 
They are to give the report of the Juniors, this report being 
previously prepared or corrected by the superintendent. Through 
attendance on the business meeting of the older society the 
Juniors will learn business methods, and will feel an added 
dignity because of this representation of their society. 

Knit them Together. — The superintendent will do much 
to knit together the two societies if, when the Juniors come to 
her for advice, occasionally, instead of giving it herself, she 
send them to older Endeavorers. Especially she should seek 
to unite in their work corresponding officers of the two societies, 
and the members of corresponding committees. 

The Graduates Consulted. — When a class of Juniors is 
ready to graduate into the older society, some especial attention 
should be paid them before the graduation day. It is suggested 
that the executive committee might step in here and ask the 
Juniors to meet with them for a social hour. Here they will 
talk over fully the plans for graduation, fixing the time, place, 
and programme, and showing these Juniors in a very practical 
way that they are to be welcome in the older society. 

In Summer. — Union work between the two societies will be 
most useful in the summer, when the membership of both is 
small. Sometimes it will be well to hold union consecration 
meetings under these circumstances. 



38 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

Pass them On. — Notices of union meetings come to the 
corresponding secretary of the older society, but they should 
not stop there. This secretary should pass them on to the 
secretary of the Junior society, so that the Juniors also may 
know what is going on in the wider Christian Endeavor world. 
All Juniors that wish to attend the union meetings should be 
given a cordial invitation, and every wide-awake union will give 
some part in this union meeting to the Juniors. 

Learn the Older Song. — If the older Christian Endeavor 
society has adopted any song for its own, the Juniors should 
learn this in addition to their own song, so that when they 
come to graduate into the older society they may have at least 
this point of familiarity. 

A Present from the Juniors. — I have heard of a Junior 
society that made a present to the members of the Young 
People's society of their church, the present being a Bible- 
mark. This Bible-mark was a long strip of paper, containing 
a list of all the missionaries of the denomination, grouped under 
the names of the different countries. The chairman of the 
Junior missionary committee, at the time the gift was made, 
asked each of the older Endeavorers to pray for these mission- 
aries every day. 

This incident is suggestive of some things the older society 
also might well do occasionally for the Juniors. 

A Social for the Juniors. — One of the best things the 
older society can do for the Juniors is to give, once a year, 
a Junior social, to which the Juniors are especially invited. 
This is best held in the summer and in the afternoon, so that 
out-door games can be played. If the time is suitable, the 
anniversary of the formation of the Junior society may be 
chosen, and it may be called a Junior birthday party. Refresh- 
ments should be served ; and the Junior boys may escort the 
young women of the older society, and the Junior girls be 
escorted by the older boys. 

After refreshments might come a little programme, in which 
the Juniors should be especially prominent ; though a bright 
little speech should be made by one of the older Endeavorers, 
welcoming the Juniors, and expressing the interest of the older 
society in them and their work. After this programme should 



OLDER ENDEAVORERS AND THE JUNIORS. 39 

come a little singing, a chain prayer, the Mizpah benediction, 
and then the older Endeavorers should see the Juniors safe 
home. If the Juniors should desire to return the compliment 
and give a social to the older society, let the older Endeavorers 
enter heartily into their plan. 



40 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 



CHAPTER VI. 

THE SUPERINTENDENTS WORK. 

How Appointed. — No rule can be laid down as to how the 
superintendent of the Junior society is to be selected. Some- 
times she will be chosen by the Young People's society, on con- 
sultation with the pastor. Sometimes the pastor, in conjunction 
with the officers of the church, will be the person to do the 
appointing. Sometimes, as explained elsewhere, no single 
person can be found who combines all the qualities requisite 
for a superintendent ; and a Junior committee from the Young 
People's society may undertake the task, or there may be 
several superintendents acting jointly. 

He — She ! — Let us not always refer to the Junior super- 
intendent with the feminine pronoun. To be sure, the large 
majority of Junior superintendents are women, but a very 
respectable minority, to say the least, are wide-awake young 
men ; and some of the most successful of Junior workers are 
pastors and laymen. In this book I have, on purpose, used 
masculine and feminine pronouns quite recklessly in referring 
to Junior superintendents, though the feminine predominate, as 
is only just. 

Your Best for the Juniors. — It is part of the Junior super- 
intendent's duty not to permit herself to be loaded down with 
so much work outside the society that she cannot bring full 
health of body and vigor of mind to this most important work 
of all. A great deal of the success of the society will depend 
upon her cheerfulness and the buoyancy of her spirit. Let her 
save her strength on Sunday, and on Saturday as well. Let her 
go to the meeting fully prepared by long meditation and careful 
study, not that she may make a long harangue before the Juniors 
— that is abominable; but that she may know how, by a few 
words here and there, by a shrewd direction, and by the uplift 
of an inspiring presence, to lead her young charges into the 
Christian life. 



THE SUPERINTENDENT S WORK. 41 

A Caution. — I wish I could write upon the hearts and 
consciences of every Junior superintendent in the world this 
stirring exhortation from a Junior worker: "Never go to the 
meeting feeling the least bit cross. Juniors can tell better than 
older people whether you feel all right. I went to the meeting 
just once feeling that I did not care what kind of meeting we 
had, and we came just as near having no meeting as could be. 
The little ones seemed afraid to read, and the older ones barely 
took part. Have a pleasant word and a smile for every one. 
Be bright and cheerful, and those around you will be the same." 

"One Thing I Do." — In a letter from an active Junior 
superintendent I find another suggestion along this line, which, 
on account of its personal force, I give in the words of my 
correspondent: " If a Junior superintendent is doing good 
with! the Juniors, he should never give up his Junior work to do 
some other church work. I, for instance, sing in the choir, and 
once attended a funeral to help with the singing, leaving the 
Juniors with a good leader ; but the carelessness formed in that 
meeting it took me quite a while to overcome."" 

The Four P's. — And again, here is a good specimen of 
common sense and alliteration sent me by a Junior worker : 
"A superintendent needs, most of all, prayer, patience, per- 
severance, and pleasantness." Nor is the last by any means 
the least important. 

Be Prompt. — To these may well be added a fifth " P." A 
great help in keeping the children bright and alert is prompt- 
ness, both in opening and closing the meeting. If in this par- 
ticular the meeting drags, it is likely to drag in all other 
particulars. 

Set Your Assistant to Working. — Take care to train your 
assistant superintendent, giving her abundant practice not merely 
in helping the children but in leading the meetings. It is a 
good plan to have her make the opening talk every other Sun- 
day. Give her such chances for development that you may be 
able at any time to leave the society in her charge. 

Junior Assistant Superintendents. — Sometimes, in a 
young society, the Junior superintendent is confronted with 
the necessity of putting new Juniors in office, and at the same 
time feels the need of retaining the services of the experienced 



42 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

workers trained during the preceding months. A happy solu- 
tion of this difficulty was conceived by a certain Junior super- 
intendent, who made the retiring president, secretary, and 
treasurer her assistants in superintending the society. 

She talked with them earnestly, showing them the greater 
responsibility they were undertaking, and they entered heartily 
into her plans. It was her custom occasionally to have the 
three lead the meeting together, one giving out the hymns, 
another leading in prayer, and the third speaking on the topic. 
This plan was a great blessing, both to the society and to the 
superintendent. 

Visit. — Probably in no work connected with the Christian 
Endeavor movement is visitation of other societies so necessary 
and helpful as in the work of the Junior superintendent. As 
just said, you should have an assistant, fully capable of taking 
your place ; but if opportunity for visiting can be obtained in no 
other way, call in the pastor, or some older Endeavorer, to lead 
the meeting ; or take your Juniors with you to visit. 

" The Best." — It is a great misfortune for a Junior super- 
intendent to have too high an opinion of her own society. 
This opinion is usually based on imperfect knowledge of what 
other societies and superintendents are doing. The following 
sentence I find in the correspondence printed by a State Chris- 
tian Endeavor paper: " The Junior Christian Endeavor society 

of church is, I think, the best Junior society in the State, 

but, as I Jiave never visited anotlier society myself, probably I 
am not a competent judge. 11 Most certainly she was not a com- 
petent judge, and most certainly a society whose superintendent 
never visits another society to get fresh inspiration and new 
plans is not, however good it may be, the best society in the 
State. 

Let Them Do It. — "Oh! 11 said a disgusted Junior once, 
talking about his superintendent, " she does all the work, and 
all we have to do is to say Amen to it. 11 Which means that that 
superintendent was not doing her work at all. 

All through the work of the children the superintendent must 
remember that it is a great mistake to do anything for the chil- 
dren that they can be brought to do for themselves. Mrs. Scud- 
der's illustration Is a forcible one : " A leader is to be merely a 



THE SUPERINTENDENT S WORK. 43 

trellis to support the young vine while it grows." This is 
the rule observed by all practical Junior workers: "A super- 
intendent should never do anything a Junior can do instead." 
Though of course the rule is not to be followed with unvary- 
ing literalness, yet in the majority of cases it is certainly sound. 
It is as bad for the Junior superintendent to help the children 
too much as for him to help them too little. 

On the other side, however, it should be urged that in all 
work the superintendent should herself set an example. What- 
ever you wish the Juniors to do, do yourself first before the 
society, asking them to follow. Said one pastor, for instance, 
to his Juniors, " If I tell you the way in which I found the 
Lord Jesus to be my Saviour ; will you tell me how you found 
him?" 

Let the Juniors Plan. — Ask the Juniors for their ideas re- 
garding the work of the society. They will astonish you by the 
wisdom with which they propose new plans, and the eagerness 
with which they carry out the plans they themselves have sug- 
gested. They will hear from their comrades the methods in use 
in other societies, and they will pick up many a bright idea from 
The Junior Golden Rule. 

Something New. — A wise teacher once said, " Remember 
that the best soon becomes second-best by constant use." This 
wise maxim is worth remembering by all our Junior workers. 
Remember that the best plan in the world becomes the second- 
best, if you stick to it too long. 

Manage, if possible, to give the children something new each 
Sunday to think about. Do not exhaust all your plans upon a 
few Sundays. If, for instance, you have them select society 
colors at one meeting, do not have them at the same meeting 
select their motto, but postpone that to another meeting. 

A model Junior superintendent will take care that the first 
interest the Juniors feel in their society shall not flag through 
lack of novelty, but will aim always to have on hand something 
fresh, some plan for a sociable, some new scheme for their 
prayer meetings or their committee work. Above all, a wise 
superintendent will seek to keep the Juniors at work along new 
and helpful lines for the good of others. 

A Change of Face. — Most Junior societies begin with small 



44 

numbers ; and the superintendent, as the society grows, must 
constantly bear in mind that her plans must grow with it. The 
methods that are most helpful for a small society are quite cer- 
tain not to be the most helpful for a large one. 

Surprises. — The little folks will greatly appreciate anything 
in the line of surprises, and can be made to do a great deal of 
excellent service if they think it will surprise their friends. 
Such things as coming to church in a body to surprise the pas- 
tor, giving the pastor a surprise party on his birthday, and cele- 
brating Thanksgiving or Christmas by giving a surprise dinner 
for poor children, will especially take their fancy. 

Know Them. — Junior superintendents should use great 
pains to become familiar with the daily life of the little folks 
under their care. Truth uttered at random has little effect 
compared with truths carefully chosen to fit the needs of the 
children. Talks with parents will do much to give you this 
knowledge, talks with the Juniors 1 friends will do more, but fre- 
quent visits at the Juniors' houses will do most of all. 

Christless Homes. — The Junior superintendent should, it 
is needless to say, have an especially tender and deep interest 
in all the members of her society whose parents are not Chris- 
tians — this not merely for the children's sake but for the sake 
of the parents, for many a Junior has led his parents to the 
Master. 

Praise Them. — Often, during the week, the superintendent 
will hear of some good deed which has been done by the Jun- 
iors. It is an admirable plan to speak of this at the next meet- 
ing with a word of commendation. Of course no name should 
be mentioned, and the story should not be told in such a way 
as to give a clew to the name of the Junior. 

Superintendent's Letters. — A busy superintendent who has 
not much time to call upon the Juniors will find it very helpful 
to write occasional letters, especially to the leaders, giving them 
plans for managing the meeting ; to the timid members, giving 
them suggestions for taking part in the prayer meeting ; to those 
whose home influences are discouraging to the Christian life ; 
and sometimes also to the very best members, showing that you 
appreciate their work, and stimulating them to increased efforts. 

Indeed, one of the very best ways of rewarding faithful ser- 



45 

vice in the Junior society, a method far superior to any giving 
of prizes, is a little note of appreciation sent quietly to the 
Junior whom you wish to commend. A slight gift may some- 
times accompany it, such as a beautiful flower or a helpful 
book ; but the note itself, and the consciousness that the super- 
intendent is pleased, will be by far the best reward. 

Believe in Them. — Children, who are quick to catch emo- 
tions, will speedily feel the contagion of distrust if their superin- 
tendent lacks confidence in their ability. On the contrary, if 
their superintendent is courageous both for herself and for them, 
they will soon gain the same confidence. 

Explain. — If the superintendent finds that any of his boys or 
girls are growing careless in Christian Endeavor work, his first 
step should be to go to them personally and talk over the work 
with them. Many times he will find that their carelessness 
arises from the failure to understand what is required of them, 
and that when this understanding is given them they will do 
their work eagerly and faithfully. 

Better than a Yardstick. — It is a great mistake for the 
superintendent to feel that the society is accomplishing nothing 
unless the members are engaged in some definite and easily 
measured work, such as the learning of Bible verses. Let it 
never be forgotten that the society exists primarily for spiritual 
purposes, to train the Juniors to habits of prayer and devotion, 
and to the expression of Christian testimony, as well as to the 
outward manifestation of the Christian spirit in acts of kindli- 
ness and charity. The results of the Junior prayer meetings 
cannot be measured as definitely as those of a Sunday-school 
class, but they are far reaching and deep, none the less. 

Just for Drill. — The superintendent will make a mistake if 
she estimates the value of a method of work solely by its direct 
importance, or the need of it that would be manifest in an older 
society. A certain measure of "red tape 11 and detail in the 
Junior society is of value in setting the children to work ; and 
they will enjoy it, though it may be plain to the superintendent 
that much of it is unnecessary and might be avoided by the 
adoption of simpler plans. At the same time the Juniors may 
be taught, by this seemingly unnecessary detail to be careful 
and painstaking, and may learn many valuable lessons. 



4 6 



THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 



A Reminder. — Whenever the topic card or programme calls 
upon all the Juniors to take part in some definite way at the 
next meeting, do not fail, as you see the Juniors during the week, 
and especially as you see the careless and indifferent ones, to 
remind each of them that he or she has some part in the next 
meeting. If they ask you what part it is, tell them to go home 
and look at their programmes or topic cards. 

Passing Time. — The Junior superintendent of Wisconsin 
strikes at the secret of many a failure in Junior work, with this 
sentence in a private letter : ** Still, in both Wisconsin and Min- 
nesota, the tendency to pass away the hour, instead of to Jill in 
the hour and make the most of the time, seems to predominate. 1 ' 

Name the fleetings. — Individualize the meetings by giving 
them distinct and attractive names, which should be announced 
several weeks beforehand, or possibly printed on the Junior 
topic cards. Such names as the following may be used : " Good 
Deed Meeting,' 1 "Sunshine Meeting, 11 "Bible Bees," " Bible 
Search Meeting, 1 ' "Cheerful Givers," "Willing Workers," 
" Star Meeting." 

Variety Spice. — Frequently change the arrangement of 
chairs in your Junior meeting-room. Some superintendents 
make it a point to have different arrangements of chairs for 
every meeting. Here is one set, for example, sent me by a 



i I 



! : I 

i 1 k 



o • - 



wide-awake superintendent. Thus the Juniors are seated facing 
in turn all points of the compass. A little surprise awaits them 



THE SUPERINTENDENT S WORK. 47 

as they enter the room, and the novelty of the situation adds 
novelty to the exercises. 

Draw Them Out First. — Many Junior superintendents 
make the mistake of putting their talk on the topic first in the 
meeting. A better plan is to get first from the Juniors them- 
selves all the suggestions you can. You will be astonished to 
see how fully the topic will be treated, and how much of your 
own talk will be rendered unnecessary. 

Utilize Everything. — Start from what the children know 
and tell you. Do not permit yourself to be abashed by queer 
answers, but organize victory out of defeat. Mr. Thomas Wain- 
wright gives two illustrations of what I mean. 

" If you ask: ' How many disciples were there? ' a little girl may 
answer, 'Eleven.' 'Yes, but how many more?' A boy answers, 
' Thirteen.' ' Not quite so many.' The next answer will be correct, 
and no one's feelings hurt. 

"A superintendent once noticed a boy brimful of some idea. He 
was very restless, and she knew that he must relieve his mind; so she 
said, — 

" ' Johnny, you've got something to say; what is it? ' 

" ' Baby's got a new tooth.' 

"She took this piece of news, so wonderful to the boy, talked 
about it a little, wound her lesson about that tooth, and held the 
attention not only of Johnny, but the whole society. Pick up ideas 
that interest the children, and use the simplest language to express 
what you have to teach." 

Numbers. — Whenever you give out to the Juniors sets of 
verses or other matter to be read, take pains to number them. 
In this way confusion will be avoided, since you can call for 
them by numbers. 

Letters, not Epistles. — It is a small matter, but one that is 
suggestive of a large matter : the superintendent should never 
refer to Paul's letters as " epistles, 11 but always as " letters, 1 ' 
having the Juniors know to whom each letter was written, the 
place from which it was sent, and the place where his correspond- 
ents lived. In fine, the superintendent should always use the 
language of the present day, and make the Scriptures seem as 
vivid and familiar to the children as possible. 



48 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

Some Model Programmes. — Few plans will add more to 
the interest of your Juniors than the preparation of regular 
programmes, copies of which, made by a manifolder, are dis- 
tributed to the Juniors one week before the meeting. Excellent 
sample programmes are the following, which Junior workers 
will find very suggestive : — 

PROGRAMME 

OF THE 

Slate Ridge Junior Christian Endeavor Society Meeting, 

Saturday Afternoon, Feb. 18, 1893, at 2 -3° o'clock. 



Opening exercises, conducted by the president. 

Reading of the minutes of the last meeting. 

Reports of committees and enrolment of new members 



Subject for consideration : " Never use intoxicating liquors as a beverage." 



Topic : " Reasons why we should never use intoxicating liquors as a bever- 
age." To be discussed by Archie Wallace, Harry Baer, Samuel Jones, 
Willie Mobley, George Geiger, Joshua Green, Jr. 



Temperance Readings, by Lula Stewart and Agnes Daughton. 



Singing. 

Temperance Recitation, Willie Maffet. 

" Should we drinlr wine or cider ? " To be answered by James Webster, 

Howard Sellers, Robert Stewart. 



" Why should boys not stay around places where intoxicating liquors are 
sold ?" To be answered by Clarence Lloyd, Harry Street, Harry Cantler. 



" What does the Bible say about drunkards ? " To be answered by Eva 
Heaps and Annie Torbert. 



Essay, " Evils of Intemperance." — Bessie Dinsmore. 



Singing and Prayer. 

General discussion and question-box. 

Remarks by elder and pastor. Roll-call and closing exercbes. 



THE SUPERINTENDENT S WORK. 49 

PROGRAMME. 
Slate Ridge Junior Christian Endeavor Society. 

Meeting Saturday Afternoon, July 8, 1893. 



Opening exercises, conducted by the president. 

Reading of minutes of the last meeting. 

Reports of committees. Enrolment of new members. 



Address by the new president. 
Subject : " How we can do more good." 



Essay, " How we can help the Sabbath school." By Lula Stewart. 



Discussion : " The benefits of the Sabbath school." By David Fulton, 
Robert Stewart, Hugh Jones. 



Singing. 
Discussion : " How to get boys and girls who do not attend Sabbath school to 
come." By Johnny Roberts, Howard Sellers, Bennie Baer, Willie Mobley, 
James Fulton, Harry Street. 



" What is the best way to study the Sabbath-school lessons ? " Mary Fulton, 
Annie Heaps. 



General talk on the Sabbath school. 



Singing and Prayer. 

Remarks by elder and pastor. 

Question-box. Roll-call. Closing exercises. 

PROGRAMME. 
Slate Ridge Junior Christian Endeavor Society. 

Meeting Saturday Afternoon, Oct. 6, 1894, at 2.30 o 1 clock. 



Topic for discussion : " Gambling." Leader, Willie Maffet. 



Singing, Hymn No. 328. 

Reading Luke 2 : 40-52, by Mary Fulton. 

The Lord's Prayer in concert. 



Singing, Hymn No. 68. 



Discussion: " What is gambling ? " The question to be answered by each 
member. 



50 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

" Why is it sinful and dishonorable to gamble ? " To be answered by Willie 
Mobley, Joshua Green, Ina Dooley. 



" How do men gamble at horse races ? " To be answered by Harry Street, 
Ben Baer. 



Singing, Hymn No. 451. 
What kind of gambling is there at county fairs?" To be answered by 
Robert Bay, Plodwin Roberts. 



'• How do boys sometimes gamble in their play ? " To be answered by 
Johnny Roberts, Walter Stewart, Annie Torbert. 



Singing, Hymn No. 27. 

Remarks by pastor and elder. 

Question-box. 

Roll-call. 

Reading of minutes. Report of committees. 

Closing exercises. 

A Portfolio of Programmes. — Do not trust to a pro- 
gramme for a meeting that is kept in your head. Always 
write it down ; and if you will write these programmes in a 
blank-book, each under the topic of the meeting, you will 
find that blank-book rapidly becoming invaluable for reference. 
Ideas that you have used a few months ago will be just as valu- 
able for future use, but without this careful record you are likely 
to forget all about them. 

A Glance Ahead. — The superintendent should be familiar 
with the topics of coming meetings as far ahead as possible. 
Plans for next week's meeting will often be greatly varied by 
a knowledge of the meetings that are to come. Often the 
superintendent is on the point of selecting a method for the 
next meeting, but finds that method more suitable for a meet- 
ing several weeks in advance, and reserves it for that occasion. 
Often, too, it is helpful to direct the thoughts of the children to 
the coming meetings. 

If the superintendent can plan for five or six meetings ahead, 
she will find herself able to use methods that call for much pre- 
liminary work on the part of the children. If, however, she 
lives from hand to mouth in her Junior work, she can never call 



THE SUPERINTENDENTS WORK. 5 1 

upon the children for any preparation that would occupy more 
than a few days. 

The chief reason of all, however, is that Junior work should 
be a great whole, and all the lessons should be as far as possi- 
ble interwoven. This cannot be accomplished if the topics are 
not thoroughly studied a good way in advance. 

Take Them by Themselves. — It would be well for a Jun- 
ior superintendent to accustom herself to giving an opportunity, 
at the close of every meeting, for private conversation with any 
Junior whose thought or conscience may have been stirred by 
something that has taken place in the meeting. Often this con- 
versation may be invited, and the superintendent should always 
invite it by manner and readiness, if not in words. The few 
minutes after the Junior meeting may be made the time of 
genuine ingathering, and may often accomplish more good 
than the whole of the meeting preceding. 

Put Opposites Together. — In selecting members for the 
different committees, it is a great mistake always to look at 
the likings and apparent aptitudes of the children. Commit- 
tee work is often valuable because of developing unsuspected 
abilities, and because it rounds out character by compelling 
people to do what they do not like, and to keep on doing it 
until they like it. Children who do not care much for flowers 
may, if placed on the flower committee with flower-lovers, 
develop an excellent taste and a sincere appreciation of the 
beautiful. Children who are shy and reserved, placed on the 
social committee with those who are bright and sociable, will 
lose their shyness in due time. Children who find it difficult 
to pray in public may overcome their timidity if placed on the 
prayer-meeting committee with braver workers. Urge the Jun- 
iors to undertake hard things for the Lord's sake. 

The Junior in Print. — It is to be hoped that you have a 
Christian Endeavor department in one or more of your town 
papers. The Juniors will be especially appreciative of items 
regarding their work that appear in its columns. They will 
like to see their names in print, and they will glory in the 
prominence thus given to their society. 

Varicolored. — An invaluable possession to any Junior sup- 
erintendent is a hectograph or a mimeograph, and very pretty 



52 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

effects can be produced by using different-colored inks. A card 
or an announcement can thus be printed in several different 
colors, to the great delight of the Juniors. 

A Rally Day. — Rally Sundays are found useful in Sunday- 
school work ; why not rally days also for the Junior society, 
to gather together in the fall the members scattered during the 
summer vacation, and set the society work promptly on its feet 
again? Make a special effort to bring out to this meeting the 
members of the society who have become sluggish and have 
lost their interest. Seek also to obtain the presence of the 
young people who may be expected to join the society. Do 
not leave out the parents, and plan the meeting largely with- a 
view to increasing their interest in the work of the society. 

Consult with the Juniors beforehand, and permit them to 
have a large share in planning for the rally. Let the society 
president preside, and have a society choir. Hold the meeting, 
if possible, in the large audience-room of the church. 

Let the pastor have a few words to say to the Juniors, giving 
them inspiration and instruction for the work of the coming 
year. The president of the Young People's society will be glad 
to greet his younger brothers and sisters in Christian Endeavor, 
and of course the Junior superintendent herself will have a 
word for the parents, and for the children who do not yet be- 
long to the society. 

Quite a large part of the meeting, however, should be carried 
on by the Juniors themselves. The Junior secretary might give 
a little report of the past year's work of the society, including 
some figures of membership. The chairmen of the different 
committees should tell a little about their committee work, all 
of these papers being carefully written beforehand. Through- 
out the whole should be bright songs, with an occasional reci- 
tation. 

The evening may fittingly be closed by a short consecration 
meeting, for which the Juniors have prepared testimonies and 
verses beforehand. 

Opening Questions. — One of the first orders of business 
at the opening of the Junior meeting may well be the asking 
of questions by the superintendent, to which all the members 
respond by raising their hands. One superintendent uses the 



53 

following set: " How many have read their Bibles every day? 
How many have prayed every day ? How many have invited 
some one to attend this meeting ? How many have made prep- 
aration for this meeting ? How many took part in sentence 
prayers at the last meeting ? How many took part in other 
ways ? How many have done something for missions during 
the past week ? How many have done some temperance work? 
How many remembered, when they came in, that this is God's 
house ? " 

In some societies such questions are presented to the Juniors 
occasionally on little slips of paper as they enter the room, and 
they write answers to them as the first exercise of the hour. 

Searching Questions. — It is a good plan occasionally to 
set before the Juniors some heart-searching questions, with the 
view of disclosing to them their true spiritual condition. This 
of course should not be done frequently, nor with an air of 
solemnity, but it may be made very helpful. A set used by one 
well-known superintendent is the following : — 

i. Do you desire always to do as Jesus Christ would do if he 
were in your place ? 

2. Do you pray every day that you may live unselfishly, and 
may show to your friends that you are one of Christ's children ? 

3. Do you strive to remember every day to read at least one 
verse in your Bible? 

4. Are you willing that your father and mother, your school- 
mates, and your friends in the Sunday school and Junior society, 
should know that you are a Christian? 

These papers are given out, one to each Junior, with a pencil ; 
and after the superintendent has explained quietly and earnestly 
what each question signifies, there is a very quiet time in the 
room while each Junior prayerfully examines himself as to 
whether he shall write Yes or No opposite the questions. 

Ten Questions. — Doctrinal instruction may be given the 
Juniors by a memory exercise called "Ten Questions. 1 ' These 
exercises may be prepared by the superintendent herself. For 
example, ten questions on repentance may be written, each 
being numbered. The Bible verses that answer these questions, 
also numbered, should be placed each in a separate envelope 
which has the same number, and these envelopes should be 



54 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

given out just before the meeting opens. The leader asks the 
questions by number, calling for the answers, and at the close 
of the meeting collects the envelopes again. After a while these 
references are learned, and the responses may be made in con- 
cert. When one set of Bible verses is thoroughly mastered, 
a new set, on a different doctrine, may be taken up. 

Junior Questioners. — Occasionally, instead of asking the 
questions yourself, get the children to ask them. Give each 
child a topic, and ask him to think out at home one or two 
questions on the topic to propose to the society. These ques- 
tions should be written out, collected at the next meeting, and 
again distributed, each Junior who draws a question doing his 
best to answer it. 

The Catechism. — The catechism will afford to many Juniors 
both a strong basis of correct thinking, and an admirable drill 
in Bible principles. They will also greatly enjoy the task of 
committing it to memory, and repeating it at the meetings. 

Blank Books. — If you are giving your Juniors any system- 
atic Bible study, or if, in the course of each meeting, you are in 
the habit of presenting regularly anything for them to remem- 
ber, you will find it a great aid to provide them with little blank 
books and pencils whereby they may write out these facts for 
study and reference during the week. These blank-books, 
always at hand, you will be able also to use in a great variety 
of ways. 

Examine Them. — Both in missionary work and in Bible 
study written examinations are profitable. Indeed, if all the 
Juniors have learned nothing that they can put on paper, they 
have probably made no solid acquisitions at all. These exam- 
inations should, of course, be exceedingly simple ; but neither 
the superintendent nor the Juniors should shrink from such 
a test. 

Bible Exercises. — Many Junior superintendents do some- 
thing in the way of arranging little responsive Bible readings 
and simple Bible exercises for the Juniors. Let the Bible texts 
that are made the basis of these exercises be carefully com- 
mitted to memory. An exercise that is committed to memory 
is many times more valuable than one that is simply read from 
the blackboard or from printed slips of paper. 



THE SUPERINTENDENTS WORK. 55 

For such exercises you may begin with the Beatitudes, or 
with the shorter psalms, the children repeating one verse and 
you the second, or the boys repeating one and the girls the 
second, alternating. Interesting responsive exercises may be 
made of a series of questions repeated by the superintendent, 
the Juniors answering with Bible texts recited in concert. 

Responsive Readings. — The back part of the popular 
Junior song-book, " Junior Endeavor Hymns, 1 ' contains some 
admirable responsive readings, which superintendents will find 
especially useful in their society meetings. 

Special Exercises. — Too few superintendents exhibit in- 
genuity in preparing their own exercises for special occasions. 
As a sample, one superintendent tells us about an exercise she 
herself prepared to teach the children kindness to animals, as 
she had noticed the boys killing a great many birds in her 
neighborhood. 

She sent to Mr. George T. Angell, 19 Milk Street, Boston, 
Mass., for twenty cents 1 worth of his bird leaflets. She got 
eighty of them, and with some copies of Our Ditmb A?iimals, 
she made up a fine programme. There were four pieces to 
speak, there was a song on the birds, there were Bible refer- 
ences, and there was a great deal of information regarding the 
use of birds, the numbers killed, the results of bird-slaughter, 
the abominable custom of using birds on the hats, and the 
opinions of famous writers on the subject. 

A similar exercise for boys, on smoking, could be easily 
arranged ; and so with many other live themes. 

A Flexible Blackboard. — The ordinary hard blackboard is 
a very poor surface on which to draw effectively. Superintend- 
ents who have not tried it will be astonished to find how pleas- 
ing their pictures are when they use large sheets of manilla paper. 

But the most efficient blackboard consists of a large sheet of 
canvas stretched tightly on a frame, which may be so con- 
structed that it can be taken apart and folded. This canvas 
must be painted black, and there are preparations which give it 
the finish of a regular blackboard. 

Shading on such a surface may be done perfectly, and lines of 
varying widths are easily obtained. The figures stand out with 
wonderful distinctness when drawn on this yielding material. 



$6 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

A Paper Blackboard. — You may have no blackboard, and 
you may not see your way to get one soon ; but do not, for that 
reason, neglect the great aid given by pictures. Try how well 
crayon can be made to work upon coarse brown paper, and 
remember that the Juniors are not severe art critics. 

A Folding Blackboard. — It is best that the Junior black- 
board should not be a fixture upon the wall, as, for many 
purposes, the superintendent will wish to reverse it. If, how- 
ever, a blackboard fixed on the wall cannot be avoided, the 
best way is to make it so that it will fold like two slates hinged 
together. In this way, whatever the superintendent does not 
wish the Juniors to see until the proper time comes can be 
written upon the inside of the board, which will then be closed 
and fastened with a catch. 

A Trick with Chalk. — It is possible to draw or write upon 
the board with damp crayon, and then to add to what has 
already been placed there additional lines, figures, or letters 
with dry chalk — all this before the society comes together. 
Then with a sweep of the cloth the dry chalk may be removed, 
leaving upon the board what has been drawn or written with 
the damp chalk, thus producing a striking transformation. 

Junior Artists. — Let the Juniors go to the blackboard as 
frequently as possible, occasionally asking them to draw objects 
connected with the lesson. At this work they will soon become 
surprisingly skilful. At the same time that one is drawing, an- 
other may be printing or writing on the board some name con- 
nected with the theme. 

Picture Interpretations. — If the society is small, it is some- 
times well, occasionally at least, to draw the illustration of the 
topic upon a piece of cardboard instead of upon the blackboard. 
Pass the picture around among the Juniors, and when all have 
seen it, call upon one or two to talk a little about it, telling 
what they think the illustration means. 

Once for All. — Some Junior superintendents are too lavish 
of their labor in writing upon the blackboard. If it is matter 
that you are likely to refer to again, such as a copy of the 
words of a new song, a list of books of the Bible, a set of 
texts, etc., do not use the blackboard, but a sheet of manilla 
paper, writing with a coarse pen, or a large graphite pen- 



THE SUPERINTENDENT S WORK. 57 

cil, and hanging the chart you have thus made upon the 
wall. 

Tell Stories. — Junior superintendents should cultivate skill 
in story-telling. In no better way can the interest of the Juniors 
be aroused at the outset of the meeting than by telling some 
bright story, in which boys and girls figure, and which illus- 
trates the topic of the meeting. Furthermore, every superin- 
tendent should be prepared with a large fund of interesting, 
soul-winning, brief stories, that she can use on an emergency 
when the Juniors get restless. 

Read Children's Stories. — An experienced Junior worker 
testifies that she has obtained a good deal of insight into child 
character from the reading of many children's stories. The pe- 
rusal of these, moreover, assists her to tell stories to the children 
in a plain and simple way. The narrative style of too many 
talkers to children is formed after the model of novels intended 
for adults, rather than after the simple and direct style that alone 
appeals to the minds of the children. 

Telling Bible Stories. — Junior superintendents have great 
need of consecrated imaginations, especially in telling Bible 
stories. To tell these vividly you must think yourself back into 
the scenes you are describing, and remember how men and 
women must have talked and acted in such circumstances. A 
good illustration of what I mean is furnished by this outline of 
a description of Christ's walking on the waves. It is the way 
Rev. C. H. Tyndall tells it: — 

" You and I know," he says, " how the disciples must have felt in 
that storm. One of them looked up, perhaps Peter, and saw some- 
thing that looked like an apparition on the water; and he nudged 
John, and said to him, 'John, do you see that?' 'What is that? ' 
John says: 'I do not see anything.' And pretty soon Peter says, 
' There it is again ! ' And soon all the disciples see the figure of a 
man in the distance. Then, as a wave rolled on, it hid the figure from 
their view. Soon they saw the figure again, and nearer the boat; and 
then John said, * It is the Lord.' And Peter stood up without a mo- 
ment's hesitation, and cried, ' Master, if it is you, bid me come to you 
on the water.' And they all hear the word, ' Come.' Peter gets up 
from his seat, puts one foot over the side of the boat into the water, 
and tries it to see if it will hold, and all the disciples watch. It does 



58 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

hold; and he takes the first step, and then another, and step after step 
he goes, and seems to say, ' Look at me.' Then a great wave comes, 
and he takes his eyes from the Master to look at the wave. He be- 
comes fearful, and down he goes, but is caught by the Master. Soon 
Jesus and Peter are in the boat, and then there is a calm. One of the 
disciples, perhaps Thomas, leans over to Peter, and says, ' Peter, how 
did it feel while you were on the water? What made you go down in 
that way ? Did you get scared ? ' Peter says, ' You just go out there 
and see how it feels with nothing under you but water.' 

" Now, we know there were some such experiences as these, because 
the disciples were men like the rest of us. And any one would have 
acted in about this way, and have asked about such questions. After 
relating an event like this in a picturesque way, how much interest the 
reading of this Scripture narrative would have to boys and girls ! Boys 
and girls like stories; and you can take the most inattentive and mis- 
chievous boys and girls and say, ' Now I have a story to tell you,' 
and you will have their attention at once, and you will keep up their 
interest, and they will attend your meetings, if you do not tell them 
silly stories." 

A Junior Serial. — Not all Junior superintendents have the 
necessary gifts ; but one consecrated worker makes skilled use 
of a Junior serial story, one chapter being read each Sunday 
just before the close of the meeting. The chapter was written 
in every case after a study of the Sunday's subject had been 
made, and after she had determined the particular lesson she 
wished to impress. The chapter was practically a review of the 
topic, and showed vividly by example how the lesson might be 
practised by the boys and girls themselves. This chapter of 
the serial, coming at the close of the prayer meeting, gained the 
attention of the more restless ones, and gave her a second 
opportunity to present the truth. 

Golden Rule Illustrations. — Every week in The Golden 
Rule is given, on the Junior page, a brief, condensed story 
especially illustrating the topic for the week. Many Junior 
superintendents have already found the usefulness of these sto- 
ries. Some have the Juniors read them. Others have the 
Juniors tell the story in their own words, and others tell the 
story themselves to the Juniors. Some, alas ! read the story 
themselves ; but this practice is surely not to be commended, 



59 

Many Junior superintendents make incidental use of these 
stories in their talks. Some of them make little sketches, and 
use the stories as chalk-talks. For this purpose most of them 
are well adapted. 

Bottles and Traps and Things. — A little ingenuity in the 
use of objects pays a thousandfold. One superintendent uses a 
bottle to illustrate all her missionary meetings. She dresses it 
in the costume of the people about whom they are talking, and 
at the close of the meeting the children drop their pennies into 
the neck of the bottle ! For temperance meetings, a trap makes 
an excellent illustration ; or, better still, a set of traps of differ- 
ent kinds. 

Sample Object Lessons. — The following bright illustra- 
tions, which I take from various Junior workers, are given as 
suggestions of ways of using common objects : — 

Roll up a sheet of tissue paper into a little ball. Draw it out 
before the Juniors, and explain that that is how the influence of 
a single act is unfolded and extended. 

Put a drop of ink into a glass of milk or of water, then an- 
other drop, then another, to show the cumulative effects of little 
sins. 

Clean a tarnished piece of silver, to show how Christ cleans 
the heart, until his image is reflected there. 

Extinguish a beautiful lamp, to show how worthless is a beau- 
tiful face without the light of Christ shining through it. 

To illustrate the evils of bad company, rub a white stick with 
several charred and blackened ones. The latter grow no whiter, 
but the first becomes black. 

Put an ugly picture into a thin glass tumbler. It shows 
through, just as the bad stories we put in our minds will show 
through our faces and actions. 

Draw twelve cigarettes on the board, writing on each a reason 
why it should not be smoked. This reason is written on every 
cigarette that is bought, if one had eyes to see it. 

Look Out ! — One of the most experienced of our Junior 
superintendents, Miss Jerome of Massachusetts, who is herself 
a mistress of apt illustrations, gives this wise warning: "Do 
not have your illustration like a glass of soda I bought one 
day, about nine-tenths foam. Dp not let the means overcome 



60 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

the end. Be sure that the lesson is made very clear. Better no 
objects used than that the children should remember the objects 
only, and get a false idea of the lesson taught." An illustration 
of this error is given by The Sunday School Times : — 

" Do you see this apple? " said a teacher. " How does it look on 
this side — good or bad?" "Good!" cried the children. "Yes, 
good — as if you would all like a piece ! But on this side, is this 
good?" "No!" "It's rotten!" "It's soft!" came in varying 
tones. "Yes; this side is all bad and decayed, good for nothing! 
Now, your hearts are like this apple, unless you try to serve God. On 
one side it may be fair and apparently beautiful, but the other — how 
dreadful! Who wants a heart partly bad, like this? " Nobody wanted 
it. "Of course not" (producing a fine and sound apple). "But 
who wants a heart like this beautiful sound apple? " Evidently every 
child wanted a heart precisely like an apple, and an earnest exhorta- 
tion from a conscientious teacher followed. But at least five of the 
small auditors went home and told their parents that children's hearts 
turned soft and got rotten if they were naughty, and one inquired 
anxiously if, when it became rotten on both sides, the child would 
die. 

Flower Talks. — The Juniors will take great pleasure in 
flower talks, which the superintendent can carry on in this way. 
At the preceding meeting the Juniors select the flower which is 
to be the subject of the flower talk on the following Sunday. A 
flower with a short name should be chosen. 

The superintendent will draw the flower on the blackboard, or 
have an actual specimen of it in a vase on the table. As to the 
drawing, no one need hesitate because he cannot use the crayon 
with the skill of a Frank Beard. The Juniors have strong im- 
aginations, and will see a beautiful flower where eyes less kind 
would see only a few crude strokes. 

The Juniors themselves may be permitted to suggest the 
words which shall be the basis of the flower talk, or these words 
may be given by the superintendent. In any case, the initials 
of the words must spell the name of the flower. If rose is the 
flower, it might mean to the Juniors, " Repentance, Obedience, 
Sincerity, Earnestness. 1 ' 

Silhouettes. — Junior superintendents will find a pair of 
shears, pf great; assistance, They can cut out before the Juniors 



THE SUPERINTENDENT'S WORK. 6l 

significant objects from white paper, and many a superintendent 
who cannot draw can make these silhouettes, and pin them to 
the blackboard. The Juniors will be interested in watching the 
process, and their attention will be firmly held. 

Pricked Cards. — Imitate the kindergarten workers by giv- 
ing the Juniors little designs illustrative of the topic, neatly 
printed on cardboard with some manifolding machine. Have 
the Juniors prick these designs, and work them with silk or 
worsted ; and while they work these cards let them be learning 
some Bible verses referring to the lesson. 

Impromptus. — An ingenious superintendent will seldom be 
at a loss what to do if the Juniors become restless in the course 
of the meeting. Picking up the nearest object, she will begin 
to talk about it, and in some way or other make it contribute to 
impress the truth the Juniors are studying. 

Taking up the bell, for instance, she will ask what bells are 
for, what they are made of, whence the material comes, and who 
created the material. Seizing a book, she will, by a series of 
questions, lead the Juniors to thinking about the Book of books. 
Taking up a soiled bit of paper, and asking how it can be 
cleaned, she will induce the Juniors to think about soiled hearts, 
and how God can cleanse them from sin. 

The Temple. — Junior superintendents will get much help 
from a paper model of Solomon's temple, made up from the 
views given in any Bible dictionary. 

Pasteboard Men. — A set of home-made pasteboard men and 
women, dressed as nearly as possible to represent the costumes 
of Bible times, will be found of the greatest assistance in Jun- 
ior work. Pasteboard animals are also useful. Sand maps are 
to be made and used in connection with these figures. 

For example, a man in a bit of a real tree will represent 
Zaccheus. To illustrate obedience, such a scene might be pre- 
sented as the great draught of fishes in response to Christ's 
command. A large dishpan of water will represent the sea. 
There will be a child's wooden boat with sails, pasteboard men, 
and a torn net tacked to the sides of the boat. 

A Sermon in Checkers. — A Junior worker sends us the 
following as a sample of how almost any common game can be 
Utilized in. teaching the Juniors, They all know something 



62 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

about checkers ; and this is the way he talks to them, drawing 
moral lessons from that sprightly game : — 

You all know how to play checkers. Now to-day I will play a 
game of checkers with you. 

In playing checkers, you move your men in one direction. In 
what direction do you move them? 

Yes; you have to move them towards the king-row. 

But what is the opposite side doing? 

O yes; they are trying to jump your men off, and prevent you from 
getting your men into the king-row. 

Just so your superintendent is playing checkers. Her Juniors are 
the checkers she is trying to push into the king-row of Christ, step by 
step, watching to prevent the other side from jumping her men off. 
That king-row is the church. 

Satan, with his many forms of temptation, is on the other side, 
playing against your teacher, and watching you all the time to find 
some weak spot where he can lead you into some temptation, and so 
jump you off the board, and prevent your getting into this king-row. 

But after hard work some of the checkers are pushed into the king- 
row. What do we do then? 

Yes, we crown them, to show that they are kings. 

Just so, when we get you into the king-row, we put a crown on 
you. That crown is Christ's name. We call you a "Christian," 
showing that you are a king, but not one of this world. 

But do we leave our king in the king-row? 

No; we move him out, to make him help get our other men into the 
king-row. 

So, as soon as we crown you by having you join the church, we 
want you to move out and help us get your companions of the society 
into this king-row. 

We use our king in checkers to shield our men while we are push- 
ing them into the king-row. So you can help shield your companions 
from their temptations, and in many ways help us push them into the 
king-row. Then they will accept Christ, and Christ will give them a 
power that no one knows, or can appreciate, until he has received it. 

Candle Talks. — Candles may be made to illustrate many 
important truths in Junior work. Here is one. This exercise, 
by the way, has been honored by the winning of some souls to 
open confession. Taking for your theme Matt. 5:16, "Let 



THE SUPERINTENDENT'S WORK. 63 

your light so shine, 1 ' prepare for its illustration a " C. E." made 
out of candles. 

Procure a nice board about twenty inches by twelve, and 
three-quarters of an inch thick, painted black. Let a number 
of small holes be bored in this board so as to form the mon- 
ogram, and place little wax candles in each hole. Question the 
Juniors, and bring out these truths : — 

That the pretty little candles were made to give light, but 
cannot do so until they are first lighted. After this happens, 
one can light another. Many of them, lighted, give more light 
than one. Some can be extinguished after they are lighted, 
but then they seem more useless than those that have never 
been lighted. There cannot be a perfect " C. E." of light 
unless all the candles are shining at once. 

God wants the Juniors to shine for him, but they cannot 
unless he illuminates their hearts by his forgiveness and his 
love. After this happens, they can light others by their beauti- 
ful lives and words. The unlighted candles are the associate 
members that have not become Christians. The extinguished 
candles are the members that have ceased to shine. 

Sand Maps. — Sand maps are being used more and more 
to teach the children in the public schools and kindergartens. 
Why may they not be equally useful in rendering clear to the 
Juniors the geography of Bible lands and mission countries ? 

Get a large, shallow tray, and fill it with bright, clean sand. 
Teach the Juniors to hollow out the seas, and trace the outlines 
of the continents and islands. Have little paper pyramids for 
mountains, and toy houses for the cities and mission stations. 
Have toy ships for the mission vessels, like the Morning Star. 

If you have time, you may make houses of different shapes, 
and miniature temples, to illustrate the differences in the build- 
ings in the various countries. You will find that the children 
will learn a great deal from these ; and it will be strange if the 
superintendent does not, in the process, learn a great deal 
herself also. 

Home=made Symbols. — Junior superintendents can add a 
great deal to the interest of the Juniors by a little bit of work 
with the scissors and the paint brush. One Junior superintend- 
ent gave interest to a temperance meeting whose theme was 



64 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

"The cup of cold water," by cutting out a piece of paper in 
the shape of a cup, and giving it to the Juniors, that it might 
be a reminder during the week. 

At another time, when the theme was " The cures of the 
Bible," each Junior was given a little paper bottle inscribed 
with the sentence, " Who healeth all thy diseases." 

On another occasion the superintendent's patient scissors cut 
out for each Junior, from yellow cardboard, a Christian En- 
deavor monogram, the E inside the C, and all of one piece. 

To emphasize a lesson of benevolence and kindness, each 
Junior was presented with a white paper hand, on which had 
been printed the words, " Lend a." 

For a Thanksgiving symbol, circles of white cardboard were 
used, each having a gilt heart in ;he centre of one side. 
Around the heart, in letters of liquid bronze, was the word 
" Thanksgiving, 11 while on the other side, in a circle corre- 
sponding to the word " Thanksgiving," were the initials of the 
months of the year — twelve in all, one for each letter of 
" Thanksgiving," the year, 1894, being placed in the centre. 

These paper symbols make excellent pegs on which to hang 
brief talks to the children. They cost very little, and the 
children are greatly pleased with them. If the Juniors are 
of sufficient age, they may themselves be set to cutting them 
out. 

An Object Table. — The superintendent should have, in the 
meeting room of his society, a little table solely occupied with 
illustrative material, so that he may have a variety of articles 
at hand to use in the course of his talk on the topic, or to 
pick up and talk about when the meeting flags. An acorn, 
a grain of corn, a bottle of seeds, a bit of rock, a bell, a book, 
a globe, are samples of what will be likely to be useful. 



THE GENERAL MANAGEMENT OF THE SOCIETY. 6$ 



CHAPTER VII. 

THE GENERAL MANAGEMENT OF THE SOCIETY. 

Go Slowly. — Beginners in the interesting work of mana- 
ging a Junior society are often too lavish in the use of good 
ideas. Plans for work that could with profit be stretched over 
an entire year, or even a series of years, they use up in the 
meetings of a few months. Then they have nothing new to 
present to the Juniors, whose interest flags with their own. 
More than that, they have confused the young folks with the 
multiplicity of plans. It is better to take up the plans one 
by one, and make sure that the possibilities inherent in any 
scheme are exhausted before passing on to another. 

Trust Them. — Let the superintendent trust her Juniors as 
much as possible Take the executive committee of the society 
into your confidence whenever you can. Present to them your 
new plans, and discuss them with them. If possible, get the 
Juniors to originate plans, and carry them out if they are at 
all practicable, though you may have to change them some- 
times in some particulars. Few things will do more to spur 
your members to better work than this method of throwing 
responsibility upon them. 

"Mr." — "Miss." — The Juniors will appreciate it if the 
superintendent, instead of calling them " John A." and " Bessie 
B.," calls them " Mr. A." and " Miss B." Everywhere outside 
the Junior society they are called John and Bessie, and an 
added dignity will be given them if this attention is shown 
them in the Junior meeting. 

Society Names. — It will interest your Juniors if you permit 
them to choose for themselves special names for their society. 
The Presbyterian Juniors of Yellow Springs, O., for instance, 
are called the " Pure Gold" Juniors, while those of the Chris- 
tian church are called the "All the Year Around' 1 Juniors. 

Lest They Forget. — One ingenious Junior superintendent, 



66 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

when she sets a task for all her Juniors for a coming meeting, 
such as giving verses beginning with a certain letter, telling 
something they are thankful for, or the like, is in the habit 
of seeing all her Juniors in Sunday school, and tying a small 
slip of paper by a thread to a button of their coats or to their 
Junior badges, telling them to write whatever she desires for the 
meeting on that paper, and bring it back to the meeting in the 
afternoon. She has seen almost a whole class of boys march 
into Sunday school with these slips of white paper flying in the 
breeze. Usually, too, they wear them in that way when they 
come to the meeting in the afternoon. 

Prizes. — Sometimes the Junior superintendent may wish to 
offer prizes for superior excellence in any line of Junior work. 
Appropriate prizes are Junior badge pins of various degrees 
of value, Junior hymn books, Christian Endeavor book marks, 
and subscriptions to The Junior Golden Rule. 

Not On Sunday. — Some Junior workers are especially urgent 
in their advocacy of week-day Junior meetings, as this means 
one hour more of religious training, to break into and sanctify 
the activities of the busy week. 

The Second Card. — Some Junior societies require that the 
Junior pay for the second card, if he loses his first copy. To 
guard against this loss, it is well to urge the Juniors to keep 
their topic cards in their Bibles. 

A Useful Slip of Paper. — The cheapest and one of the best 
ways of obtaining topic cards is to get the uniform topics pub- 
lished by the United Society, the little book containing the daily 
readings. If the society wishes, they can have some local 
printer print little slips of paper of the same size as the United 
Society pamphlet and containing the lists of officers and com- 
mittees. These can be pasted on the covers of the uniform 
topics, and others can be pasted over these when the officers are 
changed. 

To Be Sure. — Speaking of the intermission of Junior meet- 
ings during the summer, Indiana's Junior superintendent says'! 
" I have heard from some superintendents, not very many, this 
reason for disbanding, « It is so very warm to go out to the meet- 
ing on Sunday afternoon.' Now I know il is warm work, I have 
tried it; but, dear friends, is it any cooler on Thursday, Tuesday, 



THE GENERAL MANAGEMENT OF THE SOCIETY. 6j 

or any other afternoon in the week, when we go down-street, or 
calling, or upon some personal errand ? " 

Summer Work. — On account of the possibilities of outdoor 
work, summer should be one of the best of seasons for Junior 
societies. Change your hour of meeting, if necessary, to bring 
it in a cool time of the day. One summer some Juniors met 
outdoors every afternoon under the shade of the trees, making 
clothing for an orphan child, while their superintendent read a 
story to them. Others in the same way dressed dolls, made 
hoods, mittens, aprons, etc., to be sent to missionaries or used 
as Christmas gifts, while at the same time the Junior boys made 
scrap-books. 

Another set of Juniors set up an ice-cream industry during the 
hot months, and cleared forty dollars for missions. The raising 
of flowers and vegetables for missionary purposes is a summer 
industry in which the Juniors may be engaged. 

The children will be easily interested in the fresh-air work. 
If they live near large cities, they will like to entertain the chil- 
dren as they come out from the cities during their country week ; 
or, if they live in the city, they will be glad to help to give them 
a taste of the country air. 

Summer flissionaries. — Many of the Juniors spend their 
vacations in towns other than home. Before they leave, the 
superintendent should show them how they may keep their eyes 
open for opportunities for aggressive work. Many Juniors have 
used their vacations to organize new societies. They should be 
invited to write letters during their absence to the Junior society, 
telling of their experience. 

Junior Circles. — It is helpful in many ways to divide the 
society into Junior circles. These may be utilized in the meet- 
ings, and for the accomplishment of special work. A Maryland 
superintendent who tried it had sixty Juniors whom she divided 
into twelve circles, appointing an older Junior as leader for each. 
These leaders gave some reference or Bible verse to each 
member of the circle one week in advance, and at the following 
meeting, when the circle was called, all its members rose, the 
leader gave the number present, told where the verse selected 
was found, how it bore upon the lesson, and then all recited it 
together. 



68 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

When the superintendent divided her Juniors into circles, she 
told them that no circle would be complete without ten members, 
and urged them to see which circle would be completed first. 
In less than a month they had one hundred and twenty-five 
members instead of sixty. The responsibility thus placed upon 
the leaders of the circles developed some excellent Christian 
workers. 

A Joint Society. — In some communities there are not 
enough young people to support more than one society. In 
such a case, rather than leave the youngest children out in the 
cold, it is better to have them join the older Christian Endeavor 
society as Junior members, signing the Junior pledge. Let the 
first half of the meeting be given to the Juniors, while their 
elders occupy the closing half-hour. Possibly there might be 
different leaders for these two divisions. In this way the 
Juniors will feel that they have an important part, for the suc- 
cessful management of which they themselves are responsible. 

Junior Work by Sections. — For a small society, where 
it is especially desirable to furnish regular work for all the 
members, the following plan has proved exceedingly useful. 
Divide the society into sections, containing, as nearly as may 
be, equal numbers of young people. Seat these sections one 
behind the other, and put in charge of each row one member 
of the lookout committee. A little rivalry among these mem- 
bers of the committee will result in admirable attendance. 
Each section may also have its vice-president, and some special 
recognition may be given them in the regular order of service 
by having them rise and repeat a verse together. 

In the society whose superintendent sends me an account of 
this method, the committee work was based entirely on these 
sections. For example, Section No. I would be for one week 
the prayer-meeting committee. From that section the leader 
of the prayer meeting would be taken, and each of the other 
members would be expected to offer a sentence prayer. 

The same week Section No. 2 would be the social committee, 
its members coming early, arranging the room, greeting the 
strangers, and staying afterwards to put things in order again. 

Section 3 would be the music committee of the week, its 
members having entire charge of the hymns to be sung. 



THE GENERAL MANAGEMENT OF THE SOCIETY. 69 

Section 4, the flower committee, would keep track of the sick 
members through the various lookout committeemen, and would 
send them flowers and books, also putting flowers in the church 
when possible. 

Each member of Section 5, the testimony committee, was ex- 
pected to bring some personal testimony, or some story to 
illustrate the lesson. 

Section 6 for this week would be the missionary committee. 
They would meet one afternoon during the week to study about 
missions, and to work for the missionary box. 

The next week all these committees would rotate. Section 
2 would be the prayer-meeting committee, Section 1, the mis- 
sionary committee, and so on. Each section contained a chair- 
man for each committee, so that nearly all the Juniors had an 
office. 

When the section was on duty, as a prayer-meeting com- 
mittee, for instance, its prayer-meeting committee chairman 
would consult with the superintendent, and set his committee to 
work in accordance with the superintendent's directions. The 
result of this method was to give all the children a feeling of 
responsibility, while at the same time the constant changing 
of committees gave to each member an intelligent interest in 
all departments of the work. 

Meeting them in Groups. — One of the best ways by means 
of which the superintendent can put himself into regular and 
close communication with the members of his society is to divide 
the society into groups, one of which is to meet him for fifteen 
minutes before the prayer meeting each Sunday. 

With the usual complement of committees, two committees 
can be placed in each group. The lookout and prayer-meeting 
committees will go well together, the social and music commit- 
tees, the temperance and Sunday-school, the literature and 
sunshine. If there is a fifth meeting in the month, the superin- 
tendent should hold a cabinet meeting, consulting with the 
chairmen of all the committees. 

These group meetings should be introduced by brief written 
reports, which have been carefully prepared beforehand. Then 
should come a general conversation on the work of the society 
in relation to those committees, and at the close a few brief 



70 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

prayers, all the group kneeling. This makes an excellent prep- 
aration for the regular meetings of the society. 

Little Sheep. — For the very smallest of the Juniors who 
cannot read, one superintendent forms a class which she calls 
" Little Sheep. 1 ' While the older Juniors are finding references 
which she gives out, she calls these to the front, and gives each 
in order one word of a text, calling it their " name." This 
" name " is whispered so low that no one else can hear, and 
the Junior is required to repeat it over and over again until she 
is sure that each remembers it. Then they are disbanded until 
after the references are read by the older Juniors. 

The small ones then take their places just as they were before, 
and repeat their " names " loud enough for all to hear, the other 
Juniors being required to listen attentively, and see who can first 
repeat the text given by the little ones. 

A simpler method of interesting these very little ones, who 
are too small to read and yet are regular attendants, is to have 
them learn at home some verse to repeat at the Junior meeting. 
Then, when they are of the age to join the society, they will be 
quite sure to do so. 

A and B. — Sometimes it is found advisable to organize a 
section of the Junior society, to be composed of children who 
are not yet ready to join the Junior society. This may be called 
the B section, the regular society being the A section. The 
B section should be placed in charge of the assistant superin- 
tendent. Division into regular committees being unadvisable, 
the following plan has been found practicable: Divide the 
B section into two parts. One part meets the superintendent 
this week for scrap-book work, say. Next week the second 
part meets her for the same work. The third week the first 
band meets her for sunshine or flower committee work, and 
so on, thus minimizing the time and thought required of the 
superintendent. 

The Sunshine Department. — Where the Junior society is 
divided into these two parts, the very small Juniors should be 
separated, during part of the meeting at least, from the older 
Juniors, in order that more suitable work may be found for 
them. By the way, refrain from calling the younger division 
the primary department, or any such minimizing name. An 



THE GENERAL MANAGEMENT OF THE SOCIETY. Jl 

excellent title for this division would be " the sunshine depart- 
ment," if you do not adopt " Section A" and " Section B," as 
suggested in the last paragraph. 

Intervisitation. — The older societies have found intervisita- 
tion exceedingly helpful. Why not the Juniors also? For this 
purpose appoint two members of your society to visit some 
other society, speaking at the meeting if possible, giving the 
greetings of your society, and to return, bringing back a full 
report of the meeting they have attended, and any helpful ideas 
they may have gained regarding the methods used by the other 
society. The delegate who speaks should be very careful to tell 
what society they come from, as well as their own names, to 
tell when their own society meets, and to extend a cordial 
invitation to the Juniors whom he is addressing to return the 
call. The Junior who does not make this speech is the one 
who should make the report to the home society, and it is 
a good plan to appoint to this duty some Junior whose voice 
is seldom heard in his own words at the home meeting. 



72 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 



CHAPTER VIII. 

THE PRAYER-MEETING COMMITTEE. 

Their Duties. — " The prayer-meeting committee, " says the 
Model Junior Constitution, " shall, in connection with the super- 
intendent, select topics, assign leaders, and do what it can to 
secure faithfulness to the prayer-meeting pledge." Most so- 
cieties, of course, will find the uniform topics the best for their 
use. These are sold by the United Society of Christian En- 
deavor for $1.00 a hundred, special designs costing more. I 
advise all superintendents, however, to use the little leaflet 
containing the daily verses as well as the topics. These are 
prettily printed, and cost only $1.50 a hundred. 

The list of leaders should be prepared by this committee, 
always in close consultation with the superintendent ; and the 
committee should notify each leader, promptly reporting to the 
superintendent if any are unable to serve. 

Form this committee of pledge enthusiasts, Juniors loyal to 
the pledge in every fibre, and not afraid to speak a word for it 
whenever necessary. 

Fit to be Examples. — All the members of the prayer- 
meeting committee should be able to lead a meeting, to offer 
prayer, and to give testimony before the society. It need not 
be said, in addition, that they should be good Bible readers. 
Whatever method of participation is adopted by the other mem- 
bers of the Junior society, the superintendent should see to 
it that at least the prayer-meeting committee repeat their 
verses, and do not read them. It is better, if you must, to 
begin with a very small prayer-meeting committee, and con- 
fine it to those who are well fitted for the work, waiting to 
enlarge your committee until you have developed appropriate 
workers upon it. 

A Volunteer Committee. —An English society of which I 
have heard adopted the daring plan of forming the prayer* 



THE PRAYER-MEETING COMMITTEE. 73 

meeting committee entirely by volunteers. It was decreed that 
each member of the coming committee should promise to take 
part promptly in the meeting, and should try, during the week, 
to get some one else to promise to take part. These conditions 
being fully understood, the superintendent was delighted to find 
that the volunteers were more than double the number of the 
desired committee. 

Their Heetings. — Teach the prayer-meeting committee to 
feel that each meeting held during their term of office is theirs ; 
that they will be largely responsible for its failure, if it fails, 
and largely to be credited with its success, if it succeeds. 

Her Aids. — The prayer-meeting committee are the especial 
aids of the superintendent in all things connected with the con- 
duct of the meeting. Let them clean the blackboard for her 
drawings ; and, if this work is not provided for by other commit- 
tees, let them distribute the hymn-books and the Bibles, and 
collect them after the meeting. If the superintendent wishes to 
introduce certain objects in her talk, let the committee be called 
upon to bring these. 

The superintendent should not even select the pledge cards or 
the topic cards without consultation with the prayer-meeting 
committee, in whose province these things lie. They will enjoy 
making their own selection of colors and designs, and will take 
an added interest in all things connected with the topic cards 
and pledges that they have virtually chosen. 

Use Their Wits. — Let the superintendent invite the prayer- 
meeting committee to suggest new kinds of meetings. Their 
bright eyes will often find in The Golden Rule or The Junior 
Golden Rule some novel idea that they will wish to try in their 
own society. Whatever new schemes the superintendent may 
wish to adopt, she should communicate first to the prayer-meet- 
ing committee, and win their co-operation. With this nucleus 
the schemes will be quite sure of success. 

A Wall Hint. — Hang upon the wall of the room in which 
the society meets a sheet of paper containing, in large letters, 
the names of the prayer-meeting committee, with this remark 
below : " If you have forgotten to bring a verse for to-day, please 
obtain one from any of the above." 

Surveying The Ground, — In order that the prayer-meeting 



74 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

committee may know what work they have to do among the 
Juniors, let them, during occasional months at least, keep an 
extra record of the method of participation each member adopts, 
dividing the society into groups, one of which is taken by each 
committeeman. When a verse is recited, mark the name of the 
reciter with a V. P will stand for prayer, T for testimony, S 
for a song that is called for. Those who have not taken part in 
any way, and those who continually take some very easy mode 
of participation, it will be the duty of the committee to talk with 
and improve. 

A Prayer=Box. — The prayer-meeting committee may be 
placed in charge of the prayer-box, in which the Juniors may be 
encouraged to drop, as they enter the room, little slips of paper 
containing requests for prayers for any one or anything they 
choose. The members should be made to feel that these re- 
quests are in place if given orally at the meeting, but many will 
be too timid to make this public request. The prayer-meeting 
committee will open this box after all have entered, and read 
these requests, when the prayers will be offered by the Juniors. 

As Ushers. — The arrangement of the prayer-meeting room 
falls naturally to the charge of the prayer-meeting committee. 
They should see that the air is good, that the room is not too 
dark or too light, that the door is not left open during the meet- 
ing, that there are no extra chairs to produce a straggling effect, 
and that newcomers are welcomed, and given hymn-books. 

Care For The Trial Hembers. — If the associate or trial 
members of the society are divided up among the prayer-meet- 
ing committee, a certain few for each to pray for, that they may 
be brought to know and love their Saviour, this method will be 
found to move the children to a very real and affectionate inter- 
est in each other's spiritual welfare and progress. 

Pilots. — The superintendent should impress it upon her 
prayer-meeting committee that it is their duty to initiate new 
members into right ways of working in the society. Some 
member of this committee should for several weeks sit by 
each new member, making himself his friend, and urging upon 
him the best ways of participation of which he is capable, ask- 
ing him to offer a sentence prayer as he sees the member of the 
committee doing, or to repeat his Bible verse right after the 



THE PRAYER-MEETING COMMITTEE. 75 

member of the committee has repeated his, and in similar ways 
giving him confidence. 

At Home. — The private prayers of the Juniors fall also 
within the province of this committee. Not much can be done, 
of course, in this direction. It has been found helpful in some 
societies for the committee to write out little prayers on cards. 
These prayers are taken home by the Juniors, placed where they 
can often see them, and read over prayerfully every day during 
the week. The card is to be returned at the next meeting with 
an account on the other side, written by the Junior, telling how 
the prayer has been answered. Such sentences as, " Jesus, 
help me to be more patient;" " Dear Saviour, teach me to be 
more helpful ; " and the like, thus followed up during the week, 
will insensibly lead the Juniors into the very spirit of prayer. 

His Natural Assistants. — The members of the prayer- 
meeting committee are the most appropriate aids for the leader. 
They should know his plan, and be ready to co-operate with 
him in all its more difficult features. Especially should they be 
ready to come to the support of Juniors who have never before 
led the meeting. 

The Meeting Before the Meeting. — The meeting of prayer 
for five minutes before the regular meeting, that is so helpful in 
the prayer-meeting work of the older society, is just as helpful 
in the prayer-meeting work of the Juniors. Be sure the mem- 
bers arrive promptly ten minutes before the regular time, accom- 
panied by the leader of the meeting, for whom one member of 
the committee has called. Each committeeman will offer a 
short prayer, praying especially for the blessing of the Master 
upon the meeting that is to follow, and its leader. It is espe- 
cially helpful occasionally to invite to this meeting a Junior who 
is not yet a Christian. 

Pauses and Prayer. — The prayer-meeting committee should, 
in the Junior as in the older society, be a pause committee as 
well. The Juniors should not be taught to fear pauses when 
pauses are appropriate, as in silent prayer ; but this committee 
should promptly respond to all the requests of the leader, offer- 
ing the first sentence prayers when these are called for, and 
giving testimonies in particular ways at the request of the 
Jeader or superintendent. When prayer is requested for any 



?6 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

special person or object, if others do not quickly respond, the 
members of this committee should be ready to. Teach them, 
also, how valuable is their example in the matter of prayer, 
coming as they do from a little prayer meeting of their own. 
Ask them to scatter themselves as far as may be among the 
Juniors. The contagion of their prayerful spirit will affect the 
entire meeting. 



PLANS FOR THE PRAYER MEETING. JJ 



CHAPTER IX. 

PLANS FOR THE PRAYER MEETING. 

The Right ilodel. — There are two types of Junior meet- 
ings, one of which follows the analogy of the Sunday-school 
primary department, and the other the analogy of the Young 
People's Christian Endeavor prayer meetings. It is needless to 
say that, while the first is very much easier than the second, a 
Junior society is simply a work of supererogation, if that is all 
it accomplishes. The Junior society differs from the primary 
department of the Sunday school in the fact that it teaches the 
Juniors to do religious work for themselves, while the study of 
the Bible is only a secondary matter ; in the Sunday school that 
is the primary object. 

A Way of Opening. — A good way to begin a Junior meet- 
ing is to divide the children into bands, placing some older 
Endeavorer, or some of the most steady of the Juniors them- 
selves, at the head of each band. Ten minutes before the time 
for the beginning of the meeting, these bands are to meet in 
different parts of the church, and are to hold little prayer meet- 
ings. The very smallest will be given prayers, which they are to 
repeat after their leader. These opening services having been 
completed, at the tap of a bell the Juniors will all strike up a 
marching song, and proceed in order to the full meeting. Here 
the training just given in the band meetings may be utilized, 
especially by the smaller children, who will repeat the prayers 
they have learned there. 

Begin Earnestly. — Open the meeting with some regular, 
solemn service. Here is a suggested one : One verse of " Nearer, 
my God, to Thee, 1 ' or some other suitable hymn. Silent prayer, 
with bowed heads, closed with concert repetition of the Lord's 
Prayer, led by the leader of the evening. Then let all rise and 
sing, " Praise God from whom all bjessings flow," Then let the 
leader begin- 



78 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

Let Them Do the Reading. — It is a good plan to have 
the Juniors read the Bible lesson for the day at the outset of the 
meeting, either in concert or responsively. Occasionally the 
girls may read one verse and the boys the next, or the superin- 
tendent may read a few verses and then call upon the Juniors, 
one after the other, to read portions. In this way the attention 
of the Juniors will be held, especially if the method is frequently 
varied. 

One Thing Learned, Anyway. — Be dissatisfied with your 
plans for the meeting unless they include the teaching of at 
least one new thing. Make it a point that the Juniors shall all 
learn certainly one valuable truth or fact a Sunday. The rapid 
accumulations will surprise both you and them. 

One Task a Week. — It is helpful to assign to the Juniors 
one definite spiritual task a week. For example, you may ask 
them to endeavor during the week not to speak one unkind 
word. At the meeting of the next week ask all the Juniors to 
tell their experiences in this endeavor. 

Lesson Stories. — Ask, each week, one of the most intelli- 
gent of the Juniors to select from any religious paper some story 
bearing on the lesson of the day, or some little article which will 
help the children to see the truths of the lesson. After this 
story or article has been read, another Junior, not appointed 
beforehand, is to be asked to rehearse the story. Thus the at- 
tention of the Juniors will be secured, and the story will be fixed 
in their minds. If a girl gives the story, ask a boy to rehearse 
it, and vice versa. 

A variation of this method is to give selected members, the 
week beforehand, stories bearing on next week's topic, with the 
request that they read them and tell them in their own words at 
the next meeting. These stories, of course, should be short 
and simple, and yet they should have a well-marked point. 
Missionary and temperance meetings are admirably illustrated 
in this manner. 

Blackboard Stories. — The blackboard illustration of the 
Junior topic given each week in The Golden Rule may be put to 
various uses. Some of these uses are spoken of elsewhere. 
One of the best is this. With a gelatine pad, or other duplicat- 
ing device, make copies of the illustration, one for each Junior, 



PLANS FOR THE PRAYER MEETING. 79 

using the illustration for the next Sunday. Ask the Juniors to 
take these home, and to write out, each one of them, a story 
about the picture. These stories will be read at the next meet- 
ing, and will serve as an excellent review. 

Leading Up To It. — You cannot get your Juniors to take 
part by original testimony in the Junior meeting without some 
trouble. Here is a plan that requires a great deal of care, but 
is very effective, as those who have tried it testify. 

During the week, write out little stories illustrating the sub- 
ject ; select Bible verses, adding to them a sentence or two that 
explains them ; or write a question bearing upon the topic, and 
follow it with an answer. Distribute these three forms of help 
to the Juniors, and ask them to read their slips over until they 
can tell the contents in their own words at the next meeting. 

The next step is to send the story, verse, or question, with a 
little note, asking the Juniors to repeat the story, verse, or ques- 
tion, and comment upon them in their own words. 

The third and final step is to request them to be ready with 
thoughts of their own at the next meeting, and then at every 
meeting. 

Such thorough work as this decidedly pays. " I should not 
feel that I was keeping my pledge if I just read a verse," de- 
clared one Junior who had been led in accordance with this 
method. 

Little Commentators. — A helpful variation in a common 
Junior exercise is the following : Let the superintendent provide 
himself, before going to the meeting, with eight or ten refer- 
ences in different parts of the Bible. Let these selections con- 
tain good, practical thoughts, readily comprehended by children. 

Near the opening of the meeting the superintendent will say, 
li Now, boys and girls, I am going to read a reference. The 
one who finds it first will please rise promptly and read it ; and 
I want each one who reads to add to the reading one thing that 
is to be learned from the verse. 11 

In this way, before they know it, the Juniors will be learning 
to make little speeches before the society. The superintendent 
should pronounce his words very distinctly, repeating them just 
once, in order to insure attention. It is better to say, " Prov- 
erbs 20 : 11," than to say, " The eleventh verse of the twentieth 



SO THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

chapter of Proverbs." The superintendent should take care to 
commend the little preachers for their sermons. 

The ileaning. — Occasionally assign to the Juniors before 
the meeting a verse apiece bearing on the topic, and ask them 
to write out the meaning of this verse in their own words. At 
the meeting each Junior will read first the Bible verse and then 
his explanation of it. Much interest will be aroused by this 
exercise. 

Lessons in Chairs. — I have spoken elsewhere about the 
advantage of making frequent changes in the arrangement of 
the chairs of the place of meeting. This variety in arrangement 
may also be made the basis of several attractive meetings. If 
you are studying a country in a missionary lesson, arrange the 
chairs in the outline of that country. 

For example, if it is on India, your triangle will easily be 
formed. The Juniors who have something to say about Cal- 
cutta will sit at one apex, about Ceylon at another, about the 
Punjaub will sit at the third, while those who have been study- 
ing about Bombay will sit near by. 

Rev. F. B. Everitt suggests several other shrewd arrange- 
ments. Arrange the chairs in the form of a C. E. monogram. 
The C might stand for China and the E for England ; those 
occupying the first chairs to wear Chinese flags, carry Chinese 
curios to exhibit, or give to the society some interesting facts 
about the country. Those occupying the E chairs will state 
what England is doing for China, will wear English flags, and 
carry articles from England. 

Or the " C. E." may stand for "Call Every one, 1 ' the C 
chairs giving Scripture invitations, and the E chairs responding 
with Scripture verses that emphasize the universality of the gos- 
pel, verses that contain " every one " or " all. 1 ' 

Many Bible passages can well be illustrated by the arrange- 
ment of chairs ; for example, Christ's command to begin at 
Jerusalem and evangelize the world. Let <he leader sit in the 
centre chair, and the Juniors in three circles concentric with 
her. The leader will represent Jerusalem, the first circle Judea, 
the second Samaria, and the third " the uttermost parts of the 
earth." The leader will tell what can be done for her own 
street and neighborhood, those in the next circle what the so- 



PLANS FOR THE PRAYER MEETING. SI 

ciety can do for the town, those in the second for the country, 
and those in the third for the world. 

Placing the Juniors in a square facing the different points of 
the compass, those on the appropriate sides may tell about mis- 
sionary work in the north, south, east, and west of our land. 
Placing the chairs in the form of a cross, those who are in the 
head of the cross may talk about speaking for Jesus, those in 
the arms about giving for Jesus, those in the foot of the cross 
about working for him and going on his errands, and those in 
the centre of the cross, where Christ's heart lay, should speak 
about love in Christ's service. 

Let the Juniors Answer. — The questions on the topic 
given each week in The Golden Ride under the heading, " Let 
the Juniors Answer," will be found of the greatest service, not 
merely in themselves, but also as suggesting other questions 
that the superintendent may propose. These questions should 
be copied on slips of paper, which should be distributed among 
the Juniors a week in advance of the meeting, each being asked 
to answer the question at the coming meeting in his own words. 

For the superintendent also the questions will be useful, as 
suggesting a synopsis of the topic, and various helpful lines 
along which he may make his talk. The more advanced of 
the Juniors should not receive questions, but should be in- 
structed to read over the questions themselves in the paper, 
and get stimulus from them for their own original thinking. 

Occasionally it is helpful to make use of these questions, not 
in the form of questions, but as incomplete sentences. If, for 
example, the question was, "What is the one thing necessary 
to be a Christian?" the superintendent might write it on her 
slip of paper, " The one thing necessary to be a Christian 
is ," giving these slips to the Juniors, for them to com- 
plete and read before the society. 

Impromptu Answers. — A series of simple questions, pre- 
pared by the superintendent before the Junior meeting, may 
thus be utilized. At some pause in the meeting the questions 
may be distributed ; and those who receive them will stand, one 
after the other, read the question, and call upon some other 
Junior to answer it. Some very bright answers will be brought 
out in this way, and the meeting will be greatly enlivened. 



82 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

The questions, of course, must be exceedingly simple, and 
should usually bear upon the topic of the day, though occasion- 
ally a set may be prepared for the sole purpose of stimulating 
the Juniors to better work for their society. 

Junior Question=Boxes. — Among the most pleasing devices 
for maintaining interest in the older Endeavor societies are the 
question-box meetings. The Juniors also will delight in these. 
For success in such a meeting, announce the plan several weeks 
before, that the Juniors may be thinking about their perplex- 
ities, both regarding every-day conduct, and regarding religious 
truth. These questions should be written out before the meet- 
ing, and received in a basket at the door as the Juniors enter. 

The pastor should be present, and some older Endeavorers, 
to answer the questions as the superintendent reads them. 
Some she will also answer herself, and some of the easier 
questions she will ask the Juniors themselves to answer, occa- 
sionally calling upon the entire society for a response. 

It is not a bad plan to have a question-box as a regular 
feature of every Junior meeting, giving no more than five 
minutes to it at a time. The box will seldom be empty, and 
sometimes it will be crowded ; and the abundance of its contents 
will be, in a large measure, a test of the success of the superin- 
tendent in teaching the Juniors to think for themselves. 

An Open Parliament. — It is sometimes pleasant for the 
Juniors to have presented to them a general question regard- 
ing which they are to write very short paragraphs, a little prize 
being offered, possibly, for the best one. One superintendent, 
for instance, proposed the topic, " How to keep off the blues.' 1 
The three answers considered the best were : — 

" Do some kind deed to some one near you, and try to make other 
people happy." 

" Casting all your care upon God." 

"Always keep a clear conscience, and look on the bright side of life." 

Work Slips. — The Juniors delight in doing definite work, 
if the definite work is set before them. One of the greatest 
helps toward a successful prayer meeting is to write on little 
slips of paper, before the meeting, requests such as, "Please 
offer a sentence prayer in the meeting to-day." 



PLANS FOR THE PRAYER MEETING. 83 

Brief — Brief — Brief ! — If you ask visitors to speak to the 
Juniors, be sure to warn them beforehand, or when you invite 
them to speak, that they must be very brief. Five minutes is 
long enough to talk to any Junior society, I care not how skilled 
the speaker may be. 

Good for Reciting. — Many of the poems published in The 
Junior Golden Rule will be found helpful for the Juniors to 
commit to memory and recite at the meeting. 

What Others are Doing. — Occasionally brighten the meet- 
ing by cutting out from The Golden Rule and The Junior 
Golden Rule items telling about what other societies are doing 
all over the world. Number them, and pass them around to be 
read when called for in the regular meeting. This will inspire 
the Juniors, making them feel akin to all the ends of the earth. 

A Month's Programme. — It is a poor plan to have all the 
Junior meetings alike, and yet there is no harm in having four 
consecutive meetings alike in most particulars. If you agree 
with me, then you will be able to form a programme, copies of 
which you can give to the leaders for a month, and the mem- 
bers will soon become measurably accustomed to this order 
of exercises. 

Let Them Rise. — The Junior society is the place to begin 
teaching Endeavorers to rise to their feet when speaking in the 
prayer meeting. Especially when the Juniors are taking part 
in any particular way, as in reading something that they have 
written, be sure to insist upon their standing. 

A List of Members. — It is very helpful to place upon the 
society topic card the list of members in alphabetical order. 
If this is not on the topic card, it would pay any society to 
have such a list struck off, either from type or from a hekto- 
graph. Aside from the pleasure the members will have in 
reading their names in print, such a list is frequently useful in 
conducting the meetings. It permits, for example, the dis- 
pensing with the roll-call occasionally at consecration meetings, 
the members taking part in the order of their names on the 
card. 

Key Words for Junior Meetings. — All Junior superinten- 
dents will recognize the danger that the Junior meetings will 
not leave definite impressions. One way to remedy this is by 



84 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

the use of key words descriptive of the topic of each meeting. 
Call one meeting, for instance, " The Stumbling-Block Meet- 
ing ; " another, "A Trouble Meeting;" others, "Money 
Meeting, 1 ' " Heaven Meeting, 1 ' "Thankful Meeting." Give the 
children something for each meeting to focus the thoughts of 
the meeting, and to serve as a monument for the meeting. 

These single words may be given out the week before, and 
they will help the children greatly in their work of finding refer- 
ences in the concordance — -r a work, by the way, which every 
Junior should be taught to do. 

At the meeting, eifective use may be made of them by print- 
ing them upon the blackboard, or upon a banner, and putting 
them in some conspicuous position before the children. 

At the opening of the meeting the superintendent might call 
for Bible verses containing the key word ; at another time she 
might call for songs containing the key word ; and she might 
even ask the children to use the key word in a series of sentence 
prayers. 

Another way to emphasize these key words is to give out to 
some of the Juniors slips of paper on which is written a passage 
of Scripture containing the key word underscored. These pas- 
sages they are to commit to memory, and recite at the next 
meeting. This is better than simply to tell them what the key 
word is, and ask them to hunt up a passage of Scripture con- 
taining it. 

An instructive and pleasant exercise might be contrived by 
giving out at the previous meeting a series of Bible verses, the 
first letters of which should spell the word chosen as key word 
of the next meeting, and these verses might be recited at that 
meeting in their proper order. Ingenious superintendents will 
find many uses for the key words ; but their chief use will be 
to give point to the meeting, and to make its chief lesson easily 
remembered. 

A Card a Sunday. — Some Methodist Juniors use a separate 
topic card for each Sunday. These cards are little slips of 
paper, two inches by an inch and a half, and bear upon them 
the name of the society, the topic, and the name of the leader. 
Many societies that could not afford to have these separate cards 
printed may contain amateur printers who would be willing to 
give their services. 



PLANS FOR THE PRAYER MEETING. 85 

Entrance Cards. — Some Methodist Episcopal Juniors of 
whom I have heard are very systematically shepherded. For 
admission into the Junior room an entrance card is required 
at the door. On this card are printed the months and days 
of the meetings ; and as each Junior enters, his card is punched 
in the appropriate place by the sentinel or doorkeeper. Even 
visitors have to obtain entrance cards, or they cannot get in. 
These cards, of course, can be obtained with the greatest readi- 
ness by application to the proper officer ; but this slight bit of 
secrecy and formality pleases the Juniors, besides contributing 
to the regularity of their attendance. 

Out-Door Prayer Meetings. — For the pleasant days of 
summer it is a good idea to hold at least one out-door prayer 
meeting. The unusual surroundings will move the Juniors to 
renewed interest in the services of the hour. The theme for 
the meeting may well be one connected with out-door life, such 
as Bible flowers, or the trees of the Bible, Bible waters, or 
Bible animals. 

Junior Open-Air Meetings. — The custom is more common 
in England than in this country, but some superintendents have 
found it possible to hold open-air evangelistic services almost 
entirely conducted by Juniors. These, of course, are held 
during the warmer months, and the Juniors soon pray and 
testify in a very beautiful way, their childish voices influencing 
the hardened men and women that listen, as older people would 
scarcely be able to do. 

A Home Prayer Meeting. — If you find your Juniors slow 
in taking up the devotional work of the society, try the effect 
of a prayer meeting held at your own home. The familiar and 
home-like surroundings will inspire the young people with cour- 
age, and many voices will be heard that before have been 
silent. 

Summer Meetings. — During the summer the superinten- 
dent may well make the meetings shorter if the days are warm. 
The time may well be transferred to a cooler hour if the meet- 
ing has been held near the middle of the afternoon. 

Definition Meetings. — Helpful Junior meetings maybe 
based on definitions. For example, the Juniors may be asked 
to bring original definitions of the word, "Christian," each 



86 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

telling in his own simple way what sort of person he thinks a 
Christian should be. At another meeting the society may in 
the same manner define the word " Endeavor. " Other topics 
for definition might be "the Bible, 1 ' "Christ," "love," "un- 
selfishness. 11 

Midweek Meetings. — For the purpose of rousing in the 
Junior society a greater spiritual interest, a midweek meeting 
is an excellent aid. Invite all the Juniors to come together 
after school on Wednesday. You will get, of course, only those 
who are especially interested. Talk with them earnestly about 
their Christian duties, and about getting into close relations 
with Christ, and have earnest prayers and testimonies. These 
midweek meetings, of course, should not be continued indefi- 
nitely. 

A New Idea Meeting. — A " new idea 11 service, originated by 
a Junior society in the Emerald Isle, is thus conducted. Upon 
the blackboard this diagram is printed : — 
Let all 

Christ's 
Epistles 
Say: 
"Trusting in the Lord Jesus Christ, 

I am T TEAR. 
I 1 EED. 

READY to X. XELP." 

The pastor gave a little talk upon this diagram, asking the 
Juniors to repeat it thoughtfully in concert three times. Before 
the meeting each Junior had been set to studying copies of 
The Golden Rule of various dates, as well as of The Junior 
Golden Rule ; and after the pastor had finished his talk they read 
reports from societies in different parts of the world. The ideas 
that were new to that society were commented upon by the 
superintendent, and resolutions were adopted regarding the use 
of several of them. 

A Testimony Meeting. — A testimony meeting was held by 
a society of Belfast, Ireland, managed upon the following plan. 
Folded sheets of paper bore plainly printed upon the outside 
the question, " How were you led to Christ? 11 and on the other, 
"What hinders your coming to Christ?' 1 the first printed in 



PLANS FOR THE PRAYER MEETING. 87 

blue, and the second in red ink. At the meeting of the pre- 
vious week a basket containing these papers was presented to 
the Juniors, and each chose a paper as he passed from the 
room. 

The superintendent had explained what was desired ; and at 
the next meeting, in accordance with his invitation, the papers 
were brought in, each containing some bit of personal experi- 
ence. As a result of the meeting, some of the Juniors were 
strengthened, and others, who found themselves in a difficulty 
about answering, were led to careful consideration of the ques- 
tion to which their attention had been called. 

A New Year's Souvenir. — One pleasant feature of a New 
Year's meeting of a Junior society I know of was a folded piece 
of paper given to each member. Upon the front leaf were the 
words, " Turning over a new leaf, January 1, 1895. " The next 
page was headed, " A lamp unto my feet ; " the next, " A light 
unto my path ; " while the last contained the name of the so- 
ciety and church. Upon the second page each member of the 
society wrote a verse of Scripture with his name, and returned 
the sheet to the superintendent. These sheets were then redis- 
tributed ; and the last recipient wrote upon the third page a 
verse of Scripture, and kept the folder as a New Year's sou- 
venir, these verses being adopted as each Juniors mottoes for 
the coming year. 

A May Day Meeting. — As near May Day as possible hold 
a flower meeting. This should be the especial care of the 
flower committee. You will easily find suitable recitations and 
songs. The room should be nicely decorated, and the flowers 
at the close of the meeting sent to the sick. The superinten- 
dent's talk will have the beautiful theme of " Lessons from the 
Flowers, 1 ' showing how the lily teaches purity, the pansy thought- 
fulness, the violet modesty, and the like. 

Scrap Meetings. — An occasional scrap meeting will be pleas- 
ing to the Juniors. To this meeting let them bring clippings 
that they have made from Tke Golden Rule and The Junior 
Golden Rule, — whatever each thinks will be most helpful to the 
society and its work, — and let the reading of these clippings be 
their participation in the meeting. 

Lessons from the Immortal Tinker. — Cheap copies of 



88 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

Banyan's Pilgrirn's Progress may be furnished the Juniors. 
They will delight in reading the matchless allegory, and in talk- 
ing about it at their meetings. It would be a good plan to go 
through the entire book, taking one scene a week, the Juniors 
telling the story in their own words, turn about, and the su- 
perintendent applying the lessons to modern conditions and 
experiences. 

Needs and Promises. — A need and promise meeting will 
furnish a pleasing variety. Let the superintendent prepare for it 
by making out a list of needs that are likely to be felt by every 
child, as, for example, " We need help in trouble ; " " We need 
strength ; " " We need sympathy ; " " We need courage ; " " We 
need salvation ; " " We need purity ; " " We need wisdom," etc. 
Give each of the Juniors a copy of this list, and ask each to find 
in the Bible as many promises as he can that fit the different 
needs. At the next meeting call out the needs one by one, and 
have the Juniors respond by repeating the promises that fit 
them. Let the Juniors vote as to which is the best promise to 
remember in connection with that particular need. Make a 
note of it, and drill the Juniors upon it afterward. 

A Church Meeting. — You will do a wise thing if you set 
apart at least one meeting in the year to interest the Juniors in 
the different branches of the work of their own church. At this 
meeting they should especially consider the pastor and his dif- 
ferent lines of work, praying for him, and bringing to the meet- 
ing poems and extracts that will be helpful, collected and sent 
to him. A special prayer should be offered for the success of 
his work. The Sunday school, the church prayer meeting, the 
missionary activities of the church, the older Christian En- 
deavor society, the mothers' meeting, the church officers — 
these and every other activity of the church should be remem- 
bered in this meeting, the object being to give the children as 
comprehensive an idea as is possible of the manifold labors of 
their church home. 

See Other Chapters. — Though this chapter concerns one 
of the most important of all topics connected with this subject, 
it is a comparatively short chapter, for the reason that nearly 
every chapter of the book contains hints on the Junior prayer 
meetings. A large number of different forms of prayer meet- 



PLANS FOR THE PRAYER MEETING. 89 

ings and ways of managing them will be found in the chapters 
on the consecration meeting, the Bible work, missionary work, 
temperance work, good-citizenship work, the Sunday-school 
committee, the music committee, prayer, the daily readings, the 
birthday committee, the flower committee — and, in fact, in 
almost all the chapters hints may be found on this topic of 
Junior prayer meetings. 



gO THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 



CHAPTER X. 

THE CONSECRATION MEETING. 

What It Is. — "A consecration meeting, 1 ' says the Model 
Junior Constitution, " shall be held once a month, at which the 
pledge shall be read and the roll called, and the responses of 
the members shall be considered a renewal of the pledge of the 
society. If any member is absent from three consecutive conse- 
cration meetings, without excuse, his name shall be dropped 
from the list of members.' 1 The by-laws fix the time for this 
meeting on the last of the month, subject, of course, to local 
circumstances. 

No Junior should be dropped from the society until persistent, 
prayerful efforts have been made to retain him. The test of 
faithfulness given in the constitution is never to be enforced 
literally, except when the best interests of the society and of the 
delinquent seem to require it. Do not long keep unfaithful 
members on your lists, but exhaust all your resources before 
you let them go. No public announcement should be made 
when a member is dropped. 

One a Month. — The superintendent, or the assistant super- 
intendent, should lead at least one meeting a month, and this 
meeting should usually be the consecration meeting, in which 
should be made an especially urgent appeal to the Juniors, turn- 
ing their thoughts toward personal consecration. 

Begin in Time. — You cannot make as much of your conse- 
cration meeting as you should if you do not begin to plan for it 
and talk about it among the Juniors a month beforehand. Oc- 
casionally get them to promise to pray every day during the 
month for the next consecration meeting. At the opening of 
tliis meeting, let them all kneel down and pray for God's bless- 
ing upon it. Your prayers will be answered. 

A Definition. — Consecration is a long word, and the Juniors 
may be pardoned if they fail to understand it. Let the superm* 



THE CONSECRATION MEETING. 9I 

tendent explain its meaning carefully, not hesitating to repeat 
his explanation at every consecration meeting until he is sure 
that it is understood. An excellent plan is to ask each En- 
deavorer, one week beforehand, to bring to the consecration 
meeting some account of what consecration means, expressed 
in his own words. 

Consecration RolUCall. — The secretary should not be per- 
mitted to call the roll in the same way on two consecutive 
meetings. Now let her call the names in alphabetical order; 
now let the names be written on little cards, the cards shuffled, 
and called in the order of chance ; now let the Juniors be called 
by rows as they sit in the room. Sometimes, instead of calling 
the names in alphabetical order by ones, call them by groups of 
three, the members responding in the order in which they are 
named. At another time place a list of the members upon the 
blackboard, asking each Junior to take part in that order, the 
secretary noting the responses. 

If you have a printed list of the society, occasionally give 
each member a copy, asking them to take part in the order 
of that list. Sometimes take the society by sections, asking 
all in a certain part of the room to speak in any way they 
please, then turning to some other portion. Again, arrange 
for committee responses, asking the chairmen of the commit- 
tees to call the roll of their committees, and when these have 
each taken part, the committee will rise and repeat some appro- 
priate consecration verse previously determined upon. 

The Roll of Associates. — It is not best, in my opinion, to 
call the roll of the associate or trial members at the consecration 
meeting. Such a roll-call implies that they are under a corre- 
sponding obligation to the society with the active members, and 
this is in no way implied in their pledge. It also, in a measure, 
places them on an equality of Christian confession with the 
other Juniors, and that is not best. If, however, this roll is 
called, these members should merely answer " Present." 

Send a Message. — Though nothing is said about it in the 
Junior pledge, I believe it to be well to teach the Juniors that 
which will be a very important part of their duty when they 
join the older society, the sending of a message to the conse- 
cration meeting from which they are obliged to be absent, 



92 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

This message should be an appropriate verse of Scripture, 
a bit of a poem, or some words of the Junior's own. The 
message may be read by the friend who brings it, or may 
be handed to the secretary or superintendent for him to read. 

The Pledge in the Meeting. — No consecration meeting 
should pass without the concert repetition of the pledge, which 
may come either at the beginning or at the end of the meet- 
ing. It should be followed by the singing of the pledge song. 

Consecration Responses. — Responses to the roll-call at con- 
secration meetings should not be permitted to fall into a rut. 
One of the best methods, of course, is the giving of memorized 
verses of Scripture. At one consecration meeting these verses 
may all begin with the first letter of each Junior's name. At 
another meeting, each Junior may give a verse beginning with 
the last letter of his name. At still another, the verse chosen 
may mention the particular sin or fault of which each Endeavorer 
is conscious. 

Hymns may be used, and the Juniors may come prepared to 
give each his favorite verse of his favorite hymn. Again, they 
may give three verses each of a hymn that commences with the 
first letter of their Christian names. Ask the Juniors on another 
occasion to give, at roll-call, some instance of God's especial 
kindness shown to themselves or to some one they know. 

Seven Meetings. — Seek in every way to promote variety in 
the manner of conducting the consecration meeting. Here are 
some different plans : A voluntary meeting, in which no roll is 
called, though a record of participation is kept, the members 
taking part in any order they please. A biography meeting, in 
which the Juniors participate by giving, each one of them, a brief 
account of some beautiful consecrated life, taken from the Bible, 
history, or from personal knowledge. A "-next step" meeting, 
in which the Junior is expected to take part in some way dif- 
erent from his usual method, and in some manner more difficult 
for him. An after-election consecration meeting, in which the 
newly chosen officers and committees speak of their plans for 
work, and pray for God's blessing upon it. A " C. E." con- 
secration meeting, in which each Endeavorer repeats two Bible 
verses, one beginning with the letter C, and the other with the 
letter E, these verses to be appropriate to the significance of the 



THE CONSECRATION MEETING. 93 

initials. A prayer consecration meeting, in which prayers alone 
shall constitute the mode of participation. A song consecration 
meeting, each Junior responding, as his name is called, by sing- 
ing or repeating one stanza of his favorite hymn. 

Committee Responses. — One portion of the consecration 
meeting may well be devoted to committee responses, each com- 
mittee having learned some appropriate verse which they repeat 
in unison. The temperance committee, for example, might say, 
"Look not upon the wine when it is red, 11 etc. ; the sunshine 
committee, " Do unto others as you would have them do to 
you ;" the birthday committee, "So teach us to number our 
days,' 1 etc. At the close, let all the members, with the officers, 
recite in concert the society motto, or the motto of the United 
Society, " One is your master, even Christ, and all ye are breth- 
ren. 11 

Definite Consecrations. —Give point to the consecration 
meetings by teaching the Juniors to make definite consecrations 
for the month to come. Call upon them during one month, for 
example, to consecrate their hands to doing kind deeds. During 
another month let them keep special watch over their tongues, 
that they refrain from everything that is harsh, and that they ac- 
custom them to speak bright and cheery words. Let the next 
consecration meeting look backward upon the month which has 
been passed. Call upon the children for their experiences, ask- 
ing each to testify as to how he has been enabled to keep this 
definite consecration. 

A Number Meeting. — An admirable plan for conducting 
the Junior consecration meeting has been used successfully in 
the First Congregational Church of San Diego, Cal. The secre- 
tary stands at the door, and as each Junior enters the room he is 
given a number which is placed opposite his name on a list. At 
the same time the secretary finds out whether the Junior has 
come prepared with a Bible verse to be used as his response to 
the roll-call. If not, the secretary furnishes the Junior with a 
Bible verse which has been supplied by the prayer-meeting com- 
mittee. 

After the opening of the meeting, the leader asks all to rise 
and take part who have numbers between one and eight. These 
rise and take part in the order of their numbers. Then comes 



94 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

a song, and another set. In this way the formal calling of the 
roll is avoided, and every member takes an active part in the 
meeting. 

Confessions. — Sometimes confessions will make a good 
opening for the consecration meeting. Ask the Juniors to tell 
the ways in which they have failed to keep the pledge during 
the past month, the points in regard to which they have found 
pledge-keeping difficult. After this exercise the Juniors will be 
far more ready to repeat the pledge in concert, with the spirit 
and understanding. 

** Sealed Orders." — A " sealed orders 11 consecration meet- 
ing will have the cordial co-operation of the Juniors. It is 
thus carried out. Just before the meeting begins, the chairman 
of the prayer-meeting committee will pass around a plate con- 
taining little slips, each of them bearing some direction as to 
how the Junior will take part. Some will be told to pray, some 
to repeat a verse, some to answer a question about the subject 
of the meeting, some to tell of their experience in certain mat- 
ters during the past month. These slips may be addressed to 
the different Juniors, or they may be apportioned by chance. 
In either case, many advance steps will be taken during the 
meeting. 

Consecration Questions. — Write upon the blackboard be- 
fore the consecration meeting such questions as the following, 
asking each Junior to select one, and embody his reply in his 
response to the roll-call : — 

How did being a c jfunior i with the Junior pledge, help you this past 
month — 

1. To be more truthful? 

2. To be kinder to others? 

3. Not to swear? 

4. Not to cheat in school? 

5. To be pleasanter at home? 

6. To read your Bible oftener and better? 

7. To pray more earnestly? 

8. To be more unselfish? 

9. To listen better in Sunday school? 

10. To do your home duties without grumbling? 

No Meaningless Terms. — Take especial pains to nip in the 



THE CONSECRATION MEETING. 95 

bud any tendency among the Juniors to use stock phrases in 
the consecration meeting, such as that nuisance in the older 
society, " I want to reconsecrate myself." Teach the Juniors 
in all things to be sincere, and to speak out of their desires and 
experience. Any failure in this respect may mean for them a 
life of canting insincerity. 

A Consecration Exercise. — This little exercise for the con- 
secration service was originated by Miss Laura Wade Rice of 
Baltimore, the well-known Lutheran mission worker. All our 
Junior superintendents will be glad to see it. 

Leader. — We are met in the name of the Lord Jesus Christ, who 
loved us, and gave himself for us. 

All. — " For the love of Christ constraineth us ; because we thus 
judge, that if one died for all, then were all dead ; and that he died 
for all, that they which live should not henceforth live unto them- 
selves, but unto him which died for them, and rose again." There- 
fore we make him this pledge : — 

Trusting in the Lord Jesus Christ for strength, L promise him, 
etc. ( Juniors repeat membership pledge. ) 

Leader. — "I beseech you therefore, brethren, by the mercies of 
God, that ye present your bodies a living sacrifice, holy, acceptable 
unto God, which is your reasonable service." 

PRAYER HYMN. 
Dear Jesus, take me as I am, 

And make me more like thee, 
Till, when God looks into my heart, 

Thine image he may see. 

Dear Jesus, take these lips of mine, 

And may the words they say 
Be kind and gentle, pure and true, 

More Christ-like every day. 

Dear Jesus, take my hands, my feet, 

Set them to work, I pray ; 
Help me to make this earth more sweet, 

More like to heaven each day. 

Leader. — "Whether therefore ye eat or drink, or whatsoever ye 
do, do all to the glory of God. For none of us liveth to himself, 
and no man dieth to himself." 

All. — " For whether we live, we live unto the Lord ; and whether 



g6 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

we die, we die unto the Lord ; whether we live, therefore, or die, we 
are the Lord's." 

" I will go where you want me to go, Lord, 
Over river or mountain or sea, 
I will say what you want me to say, Lord, 

I will be what you want me to be. 
Whenever you speak I will listen, 

I will read your sweet words every day, 
And belong to you only and always, 
At my home, in my work, in my play." 

SUNSHINE MOTTO. 

" I expect to pass through this world but once. Any good thing, 
therefore, that I can do, or any kindness that I can show to any human 
being, or any word I can speak for Jesus, let me do it now. Let me 
not defer it, or neglect it, for I shall not pass this way again." 

New Members and Graduates. — The consecration meet- 
ing, as it is the most serious meeting of the month, the meeting 
at which the pledge is uppermost and the thought of personal 
loyalty to Christ at its height, may well be made the meeting 
for the reception of new members and the graduation of old 
ones. For the proper performance of these two things, see the 
chapter devoted to them. 

Avoid Monotony. — Be careful that the calling of the roll is 
well broken up by singing. Instruct the leader beforehand to 
interrupt the secretary at suitable intervals by announcing a 
hymn. It is best to have only one verse sung at a time, the 
Juniors being asked to keep their books open at the place until 
all have been sung. 

A Consecration Hymn. — Let your Juniors choose for them- 
selves some consecration hymn, to be sung only in consecration 
meetings, and to signify consecration always to them. With 
this the meeting may well be closed. 

Arise ! — It will serve to emphasize the consecration meeting 
and the importance of the part each member takes in it, if, at 
this meeting, all the Juniors rise as they speak or read, though 
at other meetings they remain seated. 

Prayer in the Meeting. — Each consecration meeting should 
be largely devoted to prayer. Silent prayer will come fittingly 
at the close. If any of the members are sick, prayer should be 
offered for them when their names occur in the roll-call. Dur- 



THE CONSECRATION MEETING. 97 

ing seasons of sentence prayers the Juniors should be taught to 
kneel, in the consecration meeting especially. It will be found 
wise to devote occasional consecration meetings entirely to 
prayers, no roll being called, though the secretary keeps an 
account of the participation. You will find, if the plan is an- 
nounced a week or two beforehand with an earnest little talk, 
that you will have slight difficulty in getting all the Juniors to 
pray. 

Consecration Gifts. — One of the most beautiful teachings 
of the consecration meeting will be the teaching of practical 
charity. A consecration basket may well be placed at the door 
of every consecration meeting ; and in this the Juniors will drop, 
as they enter, gifts for the poor, their monthly missionary offer- 
ings, papers and magazines for sailors, flowers and fruit for the 
sick in the hospital, and similar things. If this is not thought 
best, certainly a missionary collection should be received, and 
the Juniors should feel that they are actually consecrating part 
of their possessions to the Lord's service. The superintendent 
should offer a prayer after this collection has been taken, or the 
Juniors should sing some appropriate song. 

How They Earned It. — Occasionally, at least, have your 
Juniors during the month earn the money that they bring for 
their consecration meeting offering, and then spend some time 
at that meeting hearing from the Juniors the ways in which the 
money has been earned. 

How to Close. — It is always best to close a consecration 
meeting with some concert features, something that will fuse 
the thought and purpose of the entire society in one. This 
may be the Lord's prayer repeated in concert, a consecration 
hymn sung with bowed heads, the concert repetition of the 
pledge or of some appropriate psalm, silent prayer, the singing 
of the Gloria or the doxologv, the repeating of the child's creed, 
or the like. 

A Little Prompting. — If you find the Juniors becoming care- 
less of the consecration meeting, and forgetful of its sacred im- 
port, it would prove helpful to write out little notices something 
like the following, and send them around by willing Juniors from 
house to house the day before this meeting : " As you know, to- 
morrow's meeting will be a consecration service. Please come 



98 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

to the meeting with some verse of a hymn, or some Bible verse, 
which expresses your need or your prayer. Please pray for the 
meeting, that it may be a blessed and a helpful one for all of us. 
If you cannot be present, be sure to send some message." 



PRAYER IN THE MEETINGS. 99 



CHAPTER XI. 

PRAYER IN THE MEETINGS. 

Teaching to Pray. — The superintendent should select from 
the Bible short prayer passages and teach the Juniors to use these 
as their own. The psalms especially abound in fitting quotations. 
One Methodist pastor taught his Juniors to pray by having them 
kneel down and repeat, one after another, any prayer he might 
know, even " Now I lay me down to sleep. 1 ' In this way they 
became accustomed to their own voices, and since all were 
praying, no one was willing to refuse. 

Another admirable method is for the superintendent, at the 
opening of the meeting, to ask the Juniors some question, such 
as, " What do you wish to ask God for to-day? "and then, after 
a good many answers have been given, call for sentence prayers 
embodying these answers. 

Leading in Prayer. — One of the best ways of instructing the 
Juniors how to pray is for the superintendent to offer a prayer 
with short and simple sentences, pausing at the end of each 
sentence, or portion of a sentence, for the Juniors reverently to 
repeat in concert after him what he has just said. Here is an 
example, the prayer offered by Mr. Sewall and the Juniors who 
were present at the Junior rally of the Montreal Convention : — 

"Our dear heavenly Father, we thank thee for this day — for the 
Bible — for Jesus Christ our Saviour — and that each of us may be a 
Christian now. We pray for thy blessing upon our meeting. Help 
all those who shall speak to us. Help us to remember and understand 
what they say. May some of us become Christians before we go from 
this room. Wilt thou bless this city, and all the boys and girls in it, — 
and wilt thou bless all the boys and girls in all the world. For Jesus' 
sake. Amen." 

And here is another example, a prayer offered by Mr. Ralph 
Wells and the children at a Sunday-school convention : — 

" Dear Saviour, — we do thank thee — for coming so far — to save 
us. — We remember — how thou wast a little boy — in Bethlehem's 



IOO THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

manger; — how thou didst go about — doing good; — without any 
home; — men ill-treating thee; — until at last, after thirty-three years, 

— thou didst die for me — on Calvary. — O Saviour ! — help me to 
call thee — my Saviour, — and to love thee, — like thy little child. — 
May I show my love for thee — by trying to keep — all thy command- 
ments ; — by being very kind to everybody ; by keeping the Sabbath 
day — by not saying bad words — by helping my father and mother. 

— Bless all that I love, — make them all thy children, — and in a lit- 
tle while — may we meet thee in heaven, — for Jesus' sake, Amen." 

Written Prayers. — Some superintendents have found it 
helpful to inspire confidence in public prayer by this method, to 
which many Junior workers will object. I give it because it has 
been found useful. The superintendent writes a simple prayer, 
and gives it to one of the Juniors to read. "Now let us all 
bow our heads, 1 ' says the superintendent, "while Lucy reads a 
prayer. 1 ' After several repetitions of this method, the superin- 
tendent advances to the step of asking the Juniors to form their 
own simple prayers. 

Instead of this method, little slips of paper, each bearing a 
sentence prayer, may be given out, and many set to praying 
during the meeting. 

Transformed into Prayers. — Teach your Juniors to pray 
by showing them how any of their Bible verses may be trans- 
formed into prayers. For example, the beatitude, "Blessed 
are the pure in heart, for they shall see God, 11 may become the 
prayer, " Make me pure in heart, dear Father, that I may come 
to see thee. 11 And in the same way they may be taught quite 
indefinitely to pray in the language of Scripture. 

Praise and Petition. — In teaching the Juniors to pray, it is 
a good plan to ask at one meeting solely for sentences of thanks, 

beginning, " I thank thee, Jesus, for ." At the next meeting 

teach them to pray prayers of supplication, beginning, " I pr.iy 

thee, Jesus, that thou wilt - 11 At the third meeting they will 

be asked to unite the two forms of prayer, praying little prayers 
containing two sentences, one of thanksgiving, and one of sup- 
plication. 

Talk It Over First. — A little conversation between the 
superintendent and the Juniors may be made the basis of follow- 
ing prayers. Ask the Juniors to tell, each one, what he or she 



PRAYER IN THE MEETINGS. 101 

needs that the topic of the day suggests to them. After all have 
done this, ask the Juniors to kneel down and simply ask God for 
the things about which they have been talking to their superin- 
tendent. 

The Parts of Prayer. — Do not permit your Juniors to make 
the mistake of thinking that all prayers must be prayers of peti- 
tion. Familiarize your young charges with the different portions 
of a model prayer, namely, adoration, thanksgiving, supplication, 
and confession. Do not use these long words, or, if you use 
them, explain their meaning to the Juniors. Occasionally the 
Juniors may be asked to pray prayers containing something 
under each of these heads. 

The Model Prayer. — When the Juniors are slow in form- 
ing their own prayers, let not the superintendent forget the 
Lord's Prayer. Train the children to pray that in public, and 
be sure to ask different Juniors at each meeting. It will soon 
become easy for them to offer their own petitions. 

In Turn. — An admirable way to get the children to take 
part in sentence prayers is the following : Ask all to rise and 
repeat the pledge in concert, and request them, on the con- 
clusion of the pledge, beginning with the leader of the meeting, 
to offer sentence prayers in turn, the sentences passing from 
each to each in order. Any Junior that, for any reason, may not 
wish to take part in this exercise, is to take his seat instead, at 
the moment when his turn comes. Each Junior is to stand 
until his turn, so that in case of refusal it is an active rather 
than a passive one. This plan will secure a very full participa- 
tion in sentence prayers. 

Beginnings and Endings. — The Juniors will find it much 
easier to engage in prayer, if they are taught some appropriate 
beginnings and endings of prayers. A short time may well be 
spent some day in a drill on this subject. The superintendent 
may write appropriate forms on the blackboard, and may get 
the Juniors themselves to suggest others. 

Begin with Few. — Much may be done in committee meet- 
ings toward the promotion of sentence prayers in the prayer 
meetings. Many will begin to pray in the smaller committee 
meetings that will be too bashful to make the attempt before 
more of their companions. 



102 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

Their Thanksgivings. — An impressive way of opening the 
Junior meeting with prayer is the following : Let the superin- 
tendent ask the Juniors each to think of just one thing that he 
is thankful for, without mentioning it to the superintendent or 
any one. Then the society is to stand up, and the Juniors, 
taking part in order, are to offer sentence prayers, thanking 
God for the one thing of which each has thought. 

No Mumbling. — In teaching the Juniors to pray, remember 
that it is very essential that they learn to pray very distinctly, 
not mumbling their prayers. Teach them that it is manly and 
womanly to speak in meeting with sufficient loudness and clear- 
ness that all may hear. 

Prayer Circles. — The Juniors will like to form prayer cir- 
cles, rising and standing with hands joined, circling the room, 
bowing their heads and praying in turn. 

For Understanding. — A season of prayer should never be 
entered upon with the Juniors without at least a word from the 
superintendent, explaining to the children the sacredness and 
the meaning of what they are about to do. The spirituality of 
the season will be increased if the Juniors are taught to kneel. 
At any rate, they should be required to bow their heads. 

Prayer Lists. — See that the members of the prayer-meeting 
committee are each furnished with a printed list of the members 
of the society. Such lists are useful also for the lookout, social, 
and other committees, as well as the officers. One prayer-meet- 
ing committee of which I have heard has the helpful habit of 
dividing the Juniors among the members in such a way that 
each committeeman shall have one Junior to pray for each day. 
In this way all the members of the society are remembered in 
prayer by some one of the committee in the course of the week, 
with the result of deepening very greatly the spiritual life of the 
entire little band. 

Don't Do Too Much. — The Junior superintendent will make 
a mistake if he permits the Juniors to call upon him very fre- 
quently to lead in prayer. They will soon come to depend 
upon him, and will cease to take this responsibility upon them- 
selves. 

Calling by Name. — In some societies the members are so 
ready and have so conquered their timidity that the leaders 
dare to call upon the members by name, as they desire to have 



PRAYER IN THE MEETINGS. IO3 

them speak, pray, or repeat Bible verses. If your Juniors have 
sufficient confidence, this method may occasionally be adopted 
in your society, though with exceeding tact. 

In general, the leader or the superintendent should never make 
this request in public until in private he has learned whether 
the Junior is willing thus to be called upon. If a Junior is 
asked to pray and refuses, the meeting is hurt, and all future 
efforts in that line are discouraged. 

Prayer Themes. — In order to give definiteness to the 
prayers of the Juniors (and the Juniors delight in such definite- 
ness), propose for each meeting some special theme of prayer. 
Often it should be in harmony with the topic ; but sometimes 
there may be suggested special persons or objects, such as 
missionaries in whom the society is interested, or persons in the 
church who are sick. 

Prayer Slips. — Sometimes the superintendent will do well 
to distribute prayer slips before the opening of the meeting. 
Each Junior will read upon his paper the name of some object 
for which he is to pray. One will be told to pray for the super- 
intendent. Another will be asked to pray for " our officers." 
A third will be asked to offer a short prayer for increase in the 
numbers of the society. Thus the Juniors will be led to widen 
their themes, and to find them for themselves in the future. 

Silent Prayer. — Silent prayer should often be used, though 
not more than once in the course of a meeting, and the time for 
it should vary. It should come after some impressive thought 
or experience. Always it is well to tell the Juniors for what to 
pray during this time of silent prayer ; and occasionally it is best 
to announce a series of themes of prayer during this silent mo- 
ment, one after the other. Show the Juniors that this is the 
way in which they are to follow one who is praying audibly. 

Subjects for Prayers. — If the society is just beginning to 
make sentence prayers, it is a good plan to write upon the black- 
board and keep in plain sight some fruitful themes for such 
prayers. The following list will be suggestive : — 

1. Truth. 5. Our committees. 

2. Sinning. 6. Our superintendent, 

3. Bad company. 7. Our pastor. 

4. Heathen lands, 8, Sad homes, 



104 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

Stand or Kneel. — Occasionally call upon the Juniors to rise 
and repeat in concert the Lord's Prayer. At other times they 
may be asked to stand, and with bowed heads sing some prayer- 
song, like "Nearer, my God, to Thee." It is best for them to 
stand during such exercises, as this will be a relief for their 
restlessness. In general, however, prayers of any sort, and es- 
pecially sentence prayers, will be more effective if the society 
kneels while praying. 

A Prayer-Hymn Service. — A good prayer service for the 
Juniors groups itself around some fitting prayer-hymn, such as 
"Just as I am. 11 The first verse is sung, and three or four of 
the boys are called upon to lead in prayer. After the second 
verse, three or four girls are called upon in a similar way ; and 
so it alternates until, after the last verse, the superintendent 
herself offers prayer, at the close of which all join in the Lord's 
Prayer. 

For Opening and Close. — Here is a fitting verse of prayer 
to be repeated in concert at the opening of a meeting : — 

" A prayer we lift to thee, dear Lord, 
Ere we shall listen to thy word. 
The truth thy Spirit brings from thee 
Help us to study patiently. 
For Jesus' sake. Amen." 

The following verse is a good one for the Juniors to repeat in 
concert, with bowed heads, at the close of a meeting: — 

" Our Father, through each coming day, 
Watch o'er our every step, we pray ; 
And may thy Spirit hide the word 
Deep in our willing hearts, O Lord. 
For Jesus' sake. Amen/' 

The Week of Prayer. — During the week of prayer, the 
Juniors should by no means be omitted. Though it may not 
be best for them to attend all the meetings, one meeting cer- 
tainly should be theirs ; and they should be asked to join their 
prayers with those of their elders during all the course of the 
seven days. In some places, Junior work during the week of 
prayer has been crowned with abundant conversions, 



JUNIOR MUSIC. IO5 



CHAPTER XII. 

JUNIOR MUSIC. 

The Music Committee. — No part of the superintendent's 
work can be made so delightful as the direction of the singing 
and other music. Every society should have a music commit- 
tee. The Model Junior Constitution lays down its most impor- 
tant duties : " The music committee shall distribute and collect 
the singing books, and co-operate with the leader of the meeting 
in trying in every way to make the singing a success." Other 
work is suggested in the following pages. 

In addition, a large society, and many a smaller one, will find 
useful a Junior choir, whose leaders should, if possible, be the 
music committee. This choir should meet for occasional prac- 
tice under a skilled leader, and will furnish the efficient nucleus 
for all the society singing. 

Music Everywhere. — An Illinois Junior had a music-box, 
and played a tune every time she gave a cent for missions. After 
this fashion a shrewd superintendent will teach the Juniors to 
put music into everything they do. This will need guidance 
rather than urging ; for children are filled with the spirit of song 
— a spirit that some, alas! repress, but all should delight to 
train. 

The Best Instrument. — To lead the Junior singing, nothing 
is better thon a strong and well-trained voice. Of course a 
piano or an organ is a great assistance, or a violin, cornet, clari- 
net, and the like. Some of these instruments the Juniors 
themselves play ; but all of these may be dispensed with, while 
the human voice is indispensable. 

Some Technical Knowledge. — A Junior superintendent, 
who has the management of so many unformed voices, will find 
it well worth while to become familiar with the management of 
the vocal organs. It is nothing short of a sin so to train chil- 
ren as to strain their voices, and unfit them for future usefulness. 



I06 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

Give them songs within the range of a child's voice. Never 
permit screaming. Remember that the young throats need rest 
oftener than you yourself do. Show the Juniors that singing is 
a part of worship, and that to sing a prayer without feeling it is 
as bad as to repeat it without feeling it. Though you should 
not make the Junior meeting a singing-school, yet a word about 
singing from note, the different kinds of time, the pitch, and the 
like, will not be out of place, and will help you greatly. 

Transpose. — As the voices of the Juniors range low, and as 
it is especially important to avoid in any way straining them, a 
knowledge of the principles of transposition is especially helpful 
to the Junior organist or pianist. These principles are easily 
learned ; and a little practice will make the player proficient, so 
proficient that she can readily lower the key of any piece whose 
range is too high for the undeveloped voices of the Juniors. In 
this way she can be far more useful in Christ's service. 

Expressive Singing. — Do not fall into the mistake so com- 
monly made of estimating the excellence of Junior singing by its 
loudness, rather than its correctness and feeling. Teach the 
Juniors to sing with expression. Teach them to make marked 
variations in softness and time in accordance with the thought 
of the words, now sinking almost to a whisper, now louder with 
some joyous thought. If the children are made to feel what 
they are singing, you have gained the greatest possible triumph. 

Learning without Book. — Do not hesitate to attempt to 
teach the Juniors new songs without books or music. Place 
the words before them written upon the blackboard. Sing a 
line or two, and ask them to repeat it. Keep this up until they 
are familiar with that portion, and then go on to another. They 
will soon pick up a tune, which will thus be added to the per- 
manent possessions of the society. They will enjoy it if one 
new tune is learned at each meeting. Do not fail, however, to 
practise the tunes for several meetings before you conclude that 
the Juniors know them. 

Good Humor. — " Good air and good humor," says Rev. W. 
W. Sleeper, " will be found of great assistance in Junior sing- 
ing. " Anything approaching scolding is an immediate destruc- 
tion of spiritual harmony, and it is hard to see how the harmony 
gf sound can be expected to result, Keep in good humor, ancj 



JUNIOR MUSIC. IO7 

your Juniors will be a thousand times more likely to keep in good 
voice. 

Suitable Songs. — Take care to set before the Juniors songs 
that are in harmony with their own experiences. Remember 
that the hymns that voice the sterner experiences of older people 
are not always most fitting for the Juniors. You cannot judge 
of this by the zeal with which they sing them, because the chil- 
dren will be caught by the pleasing tune, and will sing an un- 
fitting hymn for the sake of the tune. 

Start Right In. — You have no idea how much it will help 
your Junior meetings if your organist is able to do without her 
notes, at least in playing the pieces most commonly used in the 
society. Then she can strike up a tune as soon as it is called 
for by the Juniors. Their ready memories have possessed 
themselves of the words of their commonest songs, and usually 
they are waiting impatiently for the organist to find the hymn 
in the book and play the prelude. Life and vivacity will be 
added to the meeting if this fumbling can be dispensed with. 

Without Books. — As soon as you have become quite sure 
that the Juniors know a song, then do not permit them to make 
any use of the book while they are singing that song. Accus- 
tom them to sing from memory. This training will be of the 
greatest advantage in their future Christian service. 

Standard Music. — Devote much attention to teaching the 
Juniors some of the many beautiful songs by standard compo- 
sers especially adapted to their work. These should be learned 
by heart, so that they will always abide with the young Chris- 
tians. A Junior superintendent suggests as especially fitted for 
this purpose such hymns as Sir Arthur Sullivan's, " Hear us, 
Holy Jesus ; " Luther's hymn that he wrote for his own children, 
"Away in the manger, no crib for his bed;" Dr. Holland's 
beautiful Christmas hymn, "There's a song in the air;" and 
Baring-Gould's exquisite evening song, " Now the day is over." 

The grand hymns of the church, such as, " Lead, Kindly 
Light," " Nearer, my God, to Thee," " Rock of Ages," and the 
like, should, in a similar way, be made the lasting possession 
of their memories, rather than the property of their hymn-books. 
One of these hymns may well be selected each month, com- 
mitted to memory, and sung at the opening of all the meetings, 



108 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

until it is thoroughly learned. At the next meeting a new one 
may be chosen. 

Teach the Juniors to sing the Lord's Prayer, the Gloria, the 
Doxology, and some of the easier chants. You will find that 
they can be taught to chant beautifully. Obtain some easy 
prayer response, and teach the Juniors to sing it at the close of 
the opening prayer or at the close of sentence prayers. 

Junior Hymn=books. — In my opinion, the best book pub- 
lished for the use of Junior Christian Endeavor societies is 
"Junior Christian Endeavor Songs," edited by Mr. Ira D. 
Sankey, with the co-operation of Mr. William Shaw and Mr. 
John Willis Baer. It is sold by the United Society of Christian 
Endeavor for twenty-five cents a copy (postage five cents), and 
you should at least examine it before you make any selection. 
For the use of Junior conventions and union meetings, the 
United Society has prepared a sixteen-page leaflet of selections 
from this song-book. These are not for sale, and cannot be 
loaned to individual societies, but will be loaned for the occa- 
sions first mentioned, on condition that expressage both ways 
shall be paid, and payment be made for the missing leaflets. 

Take Care of Them. — If it is worth while to have Junior 
singing-books at all, it is worth while to take good care of them. 
Have them gathered up before the society is dismissed. One 
of the Juniors will take pride in being appointed to this office. 
Have a bookcase or a box in which they can be locked ; and 
thus you will never lose any, nor need to use books that are 
ragged and soiled. 

A Hymn=book Committee. — A hymn-book committee will 
be helpful for occasional endeavors. These have charge not 
merely of the Junior song-books, but of the church hymn-books. 
In one Kansas society, such a committee went to the church an 
hour or more before the regular meeting. They took with them 
erasers and mucilage, erasing all writing they found in the 
hymn-books, and pasting in the leaves that had been torn out. 

In Church. — A Methodist Protestant Junior society, on 
buying a new hymn-book, was so proud of it that they gained 
permission to sing a song from it at each church service. Why 
would not this be one pleasant way of interesting the Juniors in 
the church service, and the older Christians in the Juniors? 



JUNIOR MUSIC. 109 

The History of Hymns. — Songs and hymns may be made 
much more vivid to the Juniors by a little knowledge of hym- 
nology. The superintendent should make a collection of anec- 
dotes illustrative of hymns, and of bits from the biographies of 
famous hymn-writers, occasionally giving one of these in the 
meetings. If such a method is used, the Juniors will always 
think of these stories when they, come across those hymns. 

A Hymn Service. — A service your Juniors will appreciate 
is a hymn service, wherein all the songs shall be taken from the 
work of some great hymn-writer, such as Watts, or Fanny 
Crosby, or Ray Palmer. Tell the Juniors about the beautiful 
lives of these sw^eet singers, inserting anecdotes between the 
hymns, occasionally questioning the Juniors so as to fix in their 
memory what you have already told them, using the map to 
show where these writers lived, showing the children pictures 
of their homes and of their faces. Aim to make each charac- 
ter vivid and real to the Juniors, so that whenever the name is 
seen in the hymn-book henceforward, it will carry with it help- 
ful associations. 

Initial Hymns. — It is a common custom for the Juniors to 
learn Bible verses whose initials coincide with the initials of 
their names. The same plan may be applied to the learning 
of hymns, each Junior committing to memory three hymns 
whose initials are the same as his own. 

"Picking out Hymns." — Few older leaders know how to 
make judicious selection of hymns, and the Juniors can hardly 
be expected to have this knowledge. A little teaching along 
this line might well be given before the whole society, so that 
the spirit of the meeting may not be spoiled by some ill-con- 
sidered selection of inappropriate hymns. Occasionally the 
Juniors may take an exercise in hymn selection. The super- 
intendent may say, " Suppose we had a meeting about Christ's 
love, what hymns would you pick out?" and as the Juniors 
name hymns, turning over their hymn-books, the superinten- 
dent may commend each selection as fitting, or show in what 
ways it is inappropriate. 

Introductory Praise Services. — A praise service of five min- 
utes just before the regular meeting of the Juniors is an admir- 
able plan. The younger members of tjie sogietv who would not 



HO THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

feel competent to lead the regular meetings may well be set to 
leading these brief introductory services, and they will make for 
them an excellent stepping-stone into the more difficult work. 

Preparation for Singing. — It will add much to the interest 
and understanding with which the Juniors sing their Christian 
Endeavor songs if, before a hymn is sung, especially if it is an 
old hymn, the stanzas be recited by one of the Juniors. If it 
is a new hymn, it will be well to ask one of the Juniors to read 
it first. 

Sometimes the entire society may be called upon to read the 
hymn in concert. It may be read through and then sung ; or, 
on another occasion, it may be read a stanza at a time, each 
stanza being sung after it is read. 

If the thought of the hymn is unusually difficult, the superin- 
tendent may give a little explanation of it, and then the singing 
will come with more than the customary zeal. 

The Spice of Singing. — A very impressive way of using 
a song that is in especial harmony with the thought of the meet- 
ing is to get some Junior to read it or repeat it before it is sung. 
Other variations in the use of hymns should be made. Have 
occasional solos, asking one Junior to sing the stanzas, while 
the rest come in on the chorus. Vary these by appointing 
duets and quartettes ; by having a girl sing one verse and a boy 
the next, while all sing the chorus ; by having the girls sing 
the verses while the boys sing the chorus, or the reverse ; by 
appointing different members of the society to sing different 
stanzas as solos ; by dividing the society into two divisions, 
those on the left singing the first stanza, and those on the right 
the second, while all join in the third, and in many other ways. 

When you make a separation between the boys and girls, 
having the girls sing one verse and the boys another, appoint 
a girl to lead the girls and a boy to lead the boys. It is a good 
plan to vary the singing by calling for the favorite songs, first 
letting a girl name a piece, and then a boy. When the Juniors 
become restless in the course of a meeting, sometimes it is 
advisable to drop everything else, even the most carefully pre- 
pared programme, and have them stand up and sing. 

Alternate. — Utilize your Junior choir by setting them to 
sing one verse, while the rest of the Juniors sing the chorus 



JUNIOR MUSIC. Ill 

of the song. Those Juniors who are not in the choir, by the 
way, should be called "the chorus." 

Emphasize the Music Committee. — If possible have the 
music committee and the choir the same, in order to avoid con- 
fusion in authority and responsibility. This committee should 
sit in front, facing the society, at each meeting. Their office 
may be emphasized by requesting them occasionally to sing a 
song by themselves, and by occasionally choosing members 
from their number to sing solos or duets. 

An Organized Choir. — It is not a bad plan to organize the 
Junior choir with its own president and secretary ; its treasurer, 
to collect fines for absence from rehearsals, and the like ; its 
lookout and membership committee, and so on. Membership 
in the Junior choir should be made a reward for progress in 
singing ; and the Juniors should feel that it is possible for each 
one of them, by attending faithfully to the instructions of the 
superintendent, to gain this coveted position. In some societies 
the Junior choir for the day is appointed at the opening of the 
meeting, and thus all are given a chance. 

A Hymn-leader. — Occasionally ask some Junior besides the 
leader to select the hymns for the meeting, placing the name of 
this Junior upon the programme as assigned to that duty. 

Boys* Choirs. — A boys' choir is helpful to any Junior society, 
and the boys will enter into the work with great zest, and take 
pride in their success. A boys 1 choir and a girls 1 choir, singing 
alternately, would make a pretty feature. All Junior choirs 
should be changed as frequently as possible, in order to avoid 
all suspicion of favoritism, and to give all the members the 
needed practice. 

Musical Boys. — I have heard of a Junior society in which 
the boys play the pieces on their mouth harps. Other boys 
may be found that are skilled with the violin, and all such abil- 
ity should certainly be utilized. 

A Daring Venture. — A bold and ingenius Junior superin- 
tendent of Iowa, finding that her boys could not sing very well, 
adopted the daring expedient of permitting them to whistle the 
songs. This kept them out of mischief and maintained their 
interest, but was a rather hazardous experiment. 

One Junior worker in Connecticut, having ventured upon this 



112 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

risky innovation, writes me: "It has been a great success with 
us. My boys enjoy the singing now even more than the girls." 

Young Musicians. — If any among your Juniors plays the 
organ or the piano, have him or her preside at that instrument 
at the prayer meetings in preference to an older performer. 

Motion Songs. — Junior superintendents have many lessons 
to learn from kindergarten teachers. One of the most impor- 
tant of these is the value of motion songs. I do not mean, of 
course, the same class of motion songs used in the kindergarten ; 
but many familiar religions songs may be illustrated by simple 
motions which the children may be taught to execute together. 
For instance, in hymns of consecration, have the Juniors lift up 
their hands ; in hymns of prayer, have them fold their hands ; 
in hymns of work, let the hands be extended ; in hymns of union 
and fellowship, let neighbors 1 hands be joined. A little thought 
will make out of more than half our hymns appropriate motion 
«ongs. 

These motion songs, used at the beginning of a meeting, or 
in the middle of it when the children are becoming a little tired, 
will serve to remove their restlessness. Besides that, the songs 
will become more vivid through the use of motions, and the 
children will be greatly interested. 

The Bible and Song. — Couple the hymns with Scripture in 
this way. Occasionally, as the children enter the room, give to 
each the number of a hymn in the book you use, asking him to 
find a Scripture verse for the next meeting suitable to the theme 
of the hymn. At that meeting each in turn will repeat his verse 
and announce his hymn, one or more stanzas of which will be 
sung. 

Song and Prayer. — An entire service devoted to song and 
prayer will be helpful. Spend the whole time, first in singing, 
then with a prayer, and so on, alternating. 

Antiphonal Hymns. — A little ingenuity will find in the 
hymn-books many hymns that can be divided into antiphonal 
songs, such as, " Watchman, tell us of the night," the girls 
singing the questions, and the boys the answers. Another 
hymn of this nature is, "Art thou weary, art thou lanquid ? " 

Various Services of Song. — In some societies the Juniors 
leave the room in a very orderly way, with no talking, jostling, 



JUNIOR MUSIC. 113 

or laughing. After the Lord's Prayer, they all strike up a stir- 
ring song, like " Onward, Christian soldiers," and march out, 
keeping time to it with happy feet. 

Prayer songs should be used in connection with sentence 
prayers, the children singing one stanza of such a hymn as 
" Nearer, my God, to Thee," or " My faith looks up to Thee," 
then following it with sentence prayers. At any break in these 
prayers another stanza may be sung, which may be followed by 
more prayers. 

Sometimes the meeting is preceded by a song service, at the 
close of which, to wear off any restlessness, the Juniors may 
march around the room while they are singing the last song, 
after which the regular meeting will open. 

Society Songs. — Each Junior society should have a song 
of its own, calling upon some friend of poetical gifts for the 
words, which should be adapted to some favorite tune of the 
Juniors. One society of which I have heard goes so far as to 
have a separate song for every meeting. The first verse and 
the chorus are always the same, while the second stanza, new 
for each meeting, bears directly upon the lesson that is studied. 

This rallying song, whatever it is, should be frequently prac- 
tised in the meetings, so that it can be used with good effect on 
anniversary occasions, at union meetings, at socials, Christian 
Endeavor picnics, and on innumerable other pleasant occasions. 

A Musical Surprise. — Do not let the music of the Junior 
society run into a rut, any more than you permit the same fate 
to any other part of the society work. For each meeting think 
out some little surprise, such as a solo, or a song from some 
older Endeavorer, or an easy anthem by the choir, or an an- 
tiphonal song service, with which to incite the Juniors to fresh 
interest in this branch of their work. 

Collection Songs. — Many portions of the meeting may be 
vivified by song. The following collection verses are in use, 
sung or repeated in concert by the children while the mission- 
ary offering is being collected. 

" I am but a penny in a little hand. 
Can I bear glad tidings over all the land ? 
Yes, if love goes with me, then shall I be blessed, 
For God's love is promised unto all the rest." 



114 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

u Dropping ! Dropping ! Dropping ! Hear us fall ? 
Crowding in the mite-chests, offerings great and small. 
Surely God will bless as we gently fall, 
Many prayers rise upward ; for his help they call, 
Till we form together such a mighty band, 
As to bear salvation over all the land." 

Their Favorites. — Occasionally ask the Juniors to select 
during the week each his favorite hymn for announcing at the 
next meeting. If there are too many Juniors for this, ask the 
boys to take charge in this way of the music for one meeting, 
while the girls do the same for the next. 

A Free Parliament. — Has your society yet had a meeting 
a portion of which is taken up with answers to the question, 
" What song do you like best, and why ?" This might occupy 
fifteen minutes after the regular topic for the day has been dis- 
cussed ; and the selections made by the Juniors will give the su- 
perintendent an insight into their characters, and an opportunity 
to say many a word in season. 

His Favorite Verse. — Once in a while permit any Junior 
present to select hymns, and let the Juniors understand that 
when permission is given them to announce a hymn they may, 
if they wish, rise and read their favorite verse in that hymn. 



THE LEADERS OF JUNIOR MEETINGS. 1 1 5 



CHAPTER XIII. 

THE LEADERS OF JUNIOR MEETINGS. 

Let AH Lead that Can. — One of the most important du- 
ties of the prayer-meeting committee is to obtain the leaders. 
Every one in the society at all capable of the work should be 
invited to lead a meeting. The superintendent will be surprised 
to see how good work will be done by many of those whom he 
believes to be quite incompetent. This work of the selection of 
leaders should be done at least a month before each meeting is 
to occur, and the prayer-meeting committee should hold them- 
selves ready to take the place of the leader in an emergency. 

Plan Far Ahead. — Appoint your leaders far enough in ad- 
vance so that they will have a plenty of time to talk their plans 
over with you and with the prayer-meeting committee. No 
leader should be appointed less than three weeks before his 
meeting ; and, in my opinion, it is best to appoint at the begin- 
ning of the quarter all the leaders for the quarter. This sched- 
ule, however, should be flexible, so that new members may be 
asked to lead if it is thought best. By giving them some subor- 
dinate part in conjunction with the regular leader, this need will 
be met. 

The Leader Announced. — In the older society, it is not 
the best plan, in my judgment, to have the name of the leader 
announced at a previous meeting. In the Junior society, how- 
ever, the leader may without harm be made more conspicuous, 
and this will serve to enlarge his sense of his responsibility. If 
possible, the names of the leaders for the quarter should be 
printed upon the topic card. Children think a great deal of 
seeing their names in print. An alternative plan is to post in 
the society room a written list of the leaders for the quarter, 
giving dates. The prayer-meeting committee may well an- 
nounce at the end of each meeting who is to be the leader for 
the ne*t. 



Il6 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

A Programme. — Young leaders especially are rendered 
much more confident if they have a regular programme to carry 
out. This programme should be carefully fixed by consultation 
with the superintendent, who should go over it with the Junior 
often enough to be sure that the young leader is familiar with it, 
and will not get confused. In order to make sure of the smooth 
running of the plan for the meeting, let the leader acquaint the 
prayer-meeting committee of any especial points in which he 
desires their co-operation. Unless the Scripture to be read at 
the opening of the meeting is exceedingly simple, be sure to 
have the leader read it over with you, that you may correct 
mispronounced words, and that he may gain a ready utterance. 

Suggested Introductions. — When the superintendent aids 
the Junior leader to make out the programme for the prayer 
meeting, let her at the same time suggest neat little ways of in- 
troducing the various divisions of the programme. For exam- 
ple, instead of simply writing down, " The Lord's Prayer in 
concert," let her write, " Let us join in repeating the Lord's 
Prayer, and after that will as many as possibly can make a 
prayer of their own? 1 ' Instead of writing, " Bible verses, 11 let 
her write, "And now will not the Juniors tell what the Bible 
itself says about our topic ? " 

Study the Leaders. — Be careful, in your plans for the 
leader, to introduce as much variety as possible into the general 
conduct of the meeting. Study the capacities of the young 
leaders. One is strong in Bible knowledge ; another is a skil- 
ful story-teller ; another has unusual confidence in prayer. Use 
all these different abilities, and form the plans of the meetings 
in such a way as to develop them. 

Interest the Leader. — Strive in every way to make the 
leader feel that it is his meeting and take a pride in it. What- 
ever novelty you propose to introduce, let him feel that he is 
introducing it. Get him to consult with his parents regarding 
his plans, and thus you will interest them as well as him. Have 
the leader meet for prayer before the meeting with the prayer- 
meeting committee. Above all, make him feel that in order to 
insure a good meeting he must pray much over it at his own 
home, and then, after the meeting is over, do not fail to praise 
the young leader for the good work he has done. 



THE LEADERS OF JUNIOR MEETINGS. 117 

Voluntary Leaders. — Try the plan, some quarter, of giving 
the Juniors an opportunity to volunteer to lead the meetings. 
Go before the society and name a date, asking for a girl to vol- 
unteer to lead on that date, the next date for a boy, and so on, 
alternating. 

Two Leaders. — If the Juniors are any of them timid about 
leading the meeting, couple each timid member with another 
more confident, and divide the meeting between them, giving 
one, say, the Bible-reading and the announcement of hymns 
only. It is possible to use even more leaders ; and, if the 
society is large, this is a good plan. One leader might open 
the meeting, calling for sentence prayers and singing. The 
second might read Bible verses responsively with the society. 
The third and fourth might treat different divisions of the topic. 
The fifth might put a little drawing upon the blackboard, or say 
a few words about a drawing that has previously been made ; 
the sixth might tell a little story about the lesson, and the 
seventh might close the meeting. It is almost essential, if the 
Junior society is to be an effective training-school, that all of 
the Juniors shall be taught to lead meetings, and shall be 
appointed leaders as frequently as is possible. 

Some Points for the Leader. — The following set of leader's 
hints I find on a leader's programme used in a certain Presby- 
terian Junior society : — 

1. Begin on time and close on time. 

2. Prepare by prayer and Bible study. 

3. Write out your own thoughts. 

4. Write out a prayer and learn it. Ask others to be ready to 
follow in sentence prayers. 

5. Repeat distinctly the numbers of hymns. 

6. Invite all visitors to take some part. 

7. Be sure to make this your meeting. 

An Effective Disposition. — Some Junior superintendents 
find it advisable to place the assistant superintendent by the 
side of the Junior leader, while they themselves sit in front of 
the leader and among the Juniors. 

Committee Aids. — Occasionally give the leader of the 
meeting the support of an entire committee. If the meeting 
is on Prayer, for example, ask the prayer-meeting committee 



1 18 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

to consider itself an associate leader. The same use may be 
made of other committees when the theme is appropriate. 

Hints to Leaders. — One very helpful division of the treat- 
ment of the prayer-meeting topic in The Junior Golden Rule 
is its hints to leaders. These the Juniors can carry out, and 
they will add variety to the meetings. 

The Leader and Order. — Tell the Junior leader that he or 
she is partly responsible for the order of the meeting. Though 
the superintendent should always interfere to preserve order, 
if such interference is necessary, yet if the order can be kept by 
the leader, so much the better. Instruct the leader, when the 
Juniors become restless, to interject some bright song, calling 
upon them to rise as they sing. Let this be a motion song, 
if your society is happy enough to know such. Above all, 
teach the leader that, if he is reverent and thoughtful, all in the 
society will be likely to be the same. 



BIBLE WORK IN THE SOCIETY. II9 



CHAPTER XIV. 

BIBLE WORK IN THE SOCIETY. 

An Important Distinction. — One of the most cheering facts 
about the Junior society, and one of the strongest omens of its 
perpetuity and permanent usefulness, i* the prominence given 
in its work to the Bible ; and yet at this very point a note of 
warning must be sounded. 

In some cases the Junior society is scarcely more than a 
second edition of the primary Sunday-school class. It should 
be kept constantly in mind that the Bible work of the Junior 
society is not to teach about the Bible, so much as to teach 
ways of using the Bible in Christian work and for inspiration 
and helpfulness. Bible texts are to be learned, to be sure; but 
the special reason for learning them must have reference to the 
conduct of life. 

Any Bible work may be taken up that could not suitably be 
accomplished in the primary department of the Sunday school. 
The teacher of this department should be in closest league with 
the Junior superintendent, and they should not duplicate each 
others work. In the Junior society the children should be 
taught how to handle the Bible speedily, find texts promptly, 
select texts bearing on certain subjects ; how to study the differ- 
ent books of the Bible, and how to compare Scripture with 
Scripture. The Bible work of the Sunday school can seldom 
proceed along these large lines, but must be more minute and 
detailed. The Junior superintendent has this wider scope. 

Bring Bibles. — Insist on the Juniors bringing their Bibles 
to the Junior meeting. For many of your exercises, the Bible 
will be needed. At the opening of the meeting, ask how many 
Bibles have been brought. Let the Juniors hold them up, and 
let the secretary note the number, so that she can state in her 
monthly report what progress has been made in this particular. 

A Bible Roll of Honor. — For special inducement to the 



120 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

Juniors to bring their Bibles regularly to the meeting, prepare 
a large roll of honor on which their names are to be placed 
when they bring their Bibles for six consecutive Sundays. 
Place a star at the end of each name when they bring them 
six more Sundays in succession, and ask the Juniors to see 
who will get the most stars. 

Responsive Readings. — The most important use to be 
made of the Bibles in the Junior meetings will, of course, be 
in responsive readings. The Junior superintendent can so plan 
these that no two responsive readings in the course of many 
months shall be carried on in precisely the same way. 

Concert Reading. — When you desire to have a long pas- 
sage from the Bible read, it is well to have the Juniors read it 
in concert, instead of reading it yourself. An excellent plan is 
to ask the leader to read the first verse, the boys the second, 
the girls the third, and so on to the last verse, in which all 
are to join. This plan may, of course, be varied indefinitely. 

Bibles of Their Own. — A Junior society in Chicago had 
an entertainment, and with the money they gained bought a 
Bible for each member of the society. It would be well for all 
Junior superintendents to find out how many of their Juniors 
are unable to purchase Bibles, and in this way, or some other, 
to see that each is so provided. 

Large Type. — The careful superintendent, moreover, will 
find it well worth while to see that his Juniors have large-type 
copies of the Bible wherever possible ; and Bibles are so cheap 
now that there is usually no reason why the children should be 
compelled to destroy their eyesight and spoil their reading by 
Bibles that require a microscope to decipher. 

Concordances. — If you can possibly manage it, see that 
your Juniors possess Bibles that contain concordances, and 
drill them in the use of this indispensable tool of the Bible 
student. An excellent plan is to announce the key-word of 
the meeting, and have the Juniors open their concordances and 
look out, each at his own pleasure, some Bible verse containing 
this key-word. These are to be read, one after the other, the 
Junior making brief comments. 

Bible- Marking. — The Juniors will take great delight in 
marking their Bibles, and no superintendent should fail to in* 



BIBLE WORK IN THE SOCIETY. 121 

struct them in Bible-marking. A cheap outfit consists of five 
little glass bottles, five-eighths of an inch each in diameter, ob- 
tainable of any druggist, placed in five holes in a block of wood, 
and filled with different colored inks. They should also obtain 
a brass-edged rule. 

One superintendent has them underline with red all verses 
about salvation, the atonement, and forgiveness of sin. Black 
is used to underline verses about sin and condemnation or 
punishment. Verses about love are underscored with purple ; 
promises, with green ; things Christians should do and lessons 
for Christian living, with blue. Other colors maybe used, such 
as gilt for words about prayer. 

A simpler way of marking the Bibles of the Juniors is to place 
after each verse containing a promise the letter P in red ink, 
after each command the letter C, after each lesson the letter L, 
after each warning the letter W, etc. Then the Juniors may 
underline with red ink the passages that seem to them most 
beautiful and helpful. 

Daily Bible-reading is thus made attractive to the Juniors, 
and they are led to think about the meaning of the words they 
are reading, and to compare Scripture with Scripture. Besides, 
the work thus done speaks for itself; and the superintendent, by 
examining the Bibles of his charges, can make sure that the 
work has been done well and faithfully. The outfit above de- 
scribed may be given by the superintendent, or purchased by 
the parent. 

A Bible Hand. — One of the most common tasks set before 
our Juniors — and rightly — is to learn the names and order of 
the books of the Bible. A Kansas superintendent teaches these 
to her Juniors by drawing on a large sheet of paper a hand. 
The five fingers stand for the five divisions of the books of the 
Bible, each finger bearing opposite the name of the division the 
initials of the books that belong to that division, as follows : — 

In the thumb: Pentateuch, 5. — G. E. L. N. D. 

In the first finger : Historical, 12. — J. J. R. I and 2 S. I and 2 K. 
I and 2 C. E. N. E. 

In the middle finger ; Poetical, 5. —J. P. P. E. S.-S. 

In the fourth finger : Major Prophets, 5. — I. J. L. E. D. 

In the last finger > Minor Prophets, 12. — H. J. A, O. J. M, N. H, 
Z, H, Z, M, 



122 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

An Object Lesson. — Another admirable method of teaching 
the names of the books of the Bible is reported by a well-known 
State Junior superintendent. A small bookcase is provided. 
The shelves of it are divided into compartments, one for each 
book of the Bible. These compartments vary in width accord- 
ing to the size of the books. 

In these are placed books made of wood covered with paper, 
each book of a different color. These colors should be chosen 
with an eye to the appropriateness of the color to the subject 
matter of the book. John's Gospel, for example, might be scar- 
let, because he makes so much of love ; the Psalms might be 
gilt, as they are the gold of the Old Testament ; Revelation 
might be white, as through it shines the brilliancy of the great 
white throne ; Lamentations might be black, and so forth. 

This bookcase is placed before the society, and is used in 
this way : The wooden books are taken from the case, and 
given to the Juniors. On a given signal the Juniors come for- 
ward, one by one, and each tells the name of the book he holds, 
the name of its author, and gives some fact about it. Then he 
places it, or tries to place it, in its proper place in the Bible 
bookcase. 

This is an admirable method, not only because of the facts 
it teaches, but because it is lively enough to keep the Juniors 
thoroughly interested. 

To Teach the Books of the Bible. — From Mrs. Charles 
A. Savage, of Orange, N.J., I have an account of a third plan, 
which is most excellent. She has set up two long boards in 
which are fastened at certain intervals some hooks. Strips of 
card-board of equal length are prepared to hang from these 
hooks, the strips each representing a book of the Bible. They 
vary in width with the size of the book. Moreover, the strips 
are colored so as to indicate the groupings of the books ; the Pen- 
tateuch bearing one color, the minor prophets another, the po- 
etical books another, the Gospels another, and so on. The 
names of the books are plainly printed upon the strips. To 
use this apparatus, these strips are distributed among the chil- 
dren, who are then required, one after the other, to place the 
strip each holds upon the proper hook of the board, one board 
representing the Old and the other the New Testament. This 
plan may be varied in many interesting ways; 



BIBLE WORK IN THE SOCIETY. 1 23 

Several at Once. — To drill the children to find quickly the 
books of the Bible, it is a common plan for the superintendent 
to call out a Bible reference, permitting the one who first finds 
it to read it. A good variation of this plan is to call out several 
references at once, asking the members to rise as soon as each 
has found all the references. A little of this practice will speed- 
ily make the Juniors very expert. 

Book, Chapter, Verse. — An excellent way to vary this 
common Junior exercise is the following, which one live super- 
intendent uses once every month. She prepares at home on 
a slip of paper a list of Bible references — short, easy verses 
that all the Juniors can read and understand ; and after the les- 
son, which is made shorter than usual on that day, she tells 
them to get their Bibles ready, and reads first the book in the 
Bible that is wanted, which they all find quickly, the first one 
who gets it putting up his hand. Then she reads the chapter, 
which is found in a similar way, and finally the verse. The first 
hand up belongs to the Junior who is given permission to read 
the verse, though the Juniors are required to wait until all are 
ready before the reference is read. 

Both Ways. — In setting the Juniors to learn the books of 
the Bible, remember that it is just as useful for them to have a 
knowledge of their order backwards as forwards. In finding a 
Bible reference we work in one direction as frequently as in the 
other. 

Their Neighbors. — It is an admirable plan not merely to 
learn the order of the books backwards and forwards, but also, 
with respect to each book taken at random, what book follows 
and what precedes it. For example, when Hosea is called, the 
Juniors should be able to say, " Hosea is in the Old Testament, 
Daniel at the left, and Joel at the right." 

To Spell Them. — While your Juniors are at this work, be 
sure that they also learn how to spell the names of the Bible 
books. A good practice for this is to send them in turn to the 
blackboard, and have them write the words, the other members 
correcting in case of misspelling. 

It is the practice of some superintendents to instruct the Jun- 
iors at the same time in the number of chapters contained in 
each book. If this is not thought necessary, some plan at least 



124 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

should be devised to teach the Juniors the relative length of the 
books. 

The Author Also. — And in connection with learning the 
books of the Bible, the Juniors should by all means be taught to 
name also the authors of these books, wherever the name of the 
author is not expressed in the title of the book, as in the Reve- 
lation and in Paul's letters. Besides, they should be instructed 
in the proper contractions, as " Isa., Dan., Ps.," and should 
know which ought not to be contracted, as "John, Luke, 
Ruth." 

Bible History. — While you are teaching the Juniors the 
books of the Bible, why not add also a little information, that 
may easily be given in that context, regarding the order in 
which the books were written? You may also go on to tell 
them something about the time when the different books were 
put together to make the Bible, and something also about our 
own English Bible and the different translations. 

Book Outline. — After a Junior society has committed to 
memory the names in order of the books of the Bible, often the 
question comes to the perplexed superintendent, " What next?" 
It is an excellent plan to have the Juniors read through a book 
at a time, making a simple outline of it as they go, each point 
of the outline to include several chapters. As an illustration, 
take this outline of the book of Genesis : 
GENESIS. 

THE BOOK OF THE BEGINNING. 

Creation I Six d ^ s ' work - 

CREATION. | Qne day for rest 

{Adam and Eve. 
Murder of Abel. 
Great increase of sin. 
Tub- Vi n,™ J Noah and the ark. 

1HE *LOOD. I Tower of Babel and the dispersion> 

A j Covenant with him. 

Abraham, j offering of Isaac on the altar. 

{Sold by his brethren. 
A man of God in Egypt. 
The Egyptian bondage. 
These outlines snould be printed distinctly on large sheets of 
paper, and kept for future reference. It will do no harm for the 
children to write them upon the margins of their Bibles. 



BIBLE WORK IN THE SOCIETY. 1 25 

Learning a Book. — A book of the Bible may be studied by 
chapters, after the fashion of the study of the Gospel of John 
by a certain Junior society of which I have heard. One chapter 
was taken for each week. Each Junior was requested to learn 
the verse he liked best in the entire chapter, and read it or 
recite it at the meeting. 

The pastor prepared a design for a chart, representing the 
principal subject found in the chapter; and one of the Juniors 
enlarged the design on a sheet of paper. After the members 
had given all the verses, the pastor exhibited the chart, and 
talked a little about it. A name was then selected for the chap- 
ter, and the Juniors made choice of a verse which would stand 
to them for that particular chapter. 

These names and verses were often reviewed in connection 
with the charts, and thus the Juniors soon got to know the en- 
tire book of John by the names and special verses of its chapters. 
They gave a special exercise in public, exhibiting the fruits of 
this study. 

Bible Divisions. — There are certain facts about the Bible 
that the Juniors should be taught, if these are not already taught 
in the primary Sunday-school class ; for example, the number of 
books in each Testament, and the division of these books into 
the five books of the law, the twelve historical books, the five 
poetical books, the seventeen prophecies of the Old Testament, 
and the five historical books, the twenty-one epistles, and the 
one prophecy of the New Testament. 

Things to Do. — Here are some of the things that Juniors 
may be set to doing to spur them to Bible study : They may 
learn the Commandments, the first chapter of John, the names 
of the parables and of the miracles, the thirty-fourth psalm, the 
names of the apostles, ten verses containing promises, five 
verses containing commands, twenty-five names by which 
Christ is called. 

Good Topics. — Interesting topics for Bible study, each of 
them sufficing for one meeting, are : mountains of the Bible, 
rivers of the Bible, precious stones, animals, birds, etc. Mrs. 
Hill gives a capital list of these in her " Meetings for Juniors," 
sold by the United Society for ten cents. 

The Life of Christ. — The Juniors may, with great profit, 



126 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

be set to studying in a systematic way the life of Christ, taking 
as the basis of the superintendent's talks some such books as 
Dr. Stalker's Life of Christ, or Geikie's, or Farrar's. One fact 
might be learned every Sunday, and a few minutes be spent in 
reviewing what has been learned already and in adding this new 
point. Dates for the prominent events should be carefully 
fixed, as well as the places. 

A few minutes spent this way every Sunday by the superin- 
tendent will speedily give the Juniors a definite idea of the life 
of Christ such as is possessed by comparatively few Christians. 
It is an excellent plan to teach the events by numbers : so that 
the Juniors can tell, when called upon, what was the first re- 
corded event in Christ's life, the second, the third, etc. 

If each event is associated carefully with the place in which it 
occurred, the Juniors should be able to go to the map, and, 
pointing with their finger, follow the footsteps of the Master up 
and down through the Holy Land, as the numbers of the events 
are called. For another exercise it is well sometimes to ask 
the Juniors what events that they have studied occurred at 
Cana, at Nazareth, in Samaria, at Jerusalem, and so forth. 

Incidents in Christ's Life. — A helpful Bible exercise is to 
call upon the Juniors to rise, as many as can think of an inci- 
dent in the life of Christ, and are willing to tell about it. Let 
those who have risen give their incidents in order, and encour- 
age them to relate the story at some length. If the incident 
chosen by one is the same as that repeated by some one who 
has preceded him, let him think of some other event in Christ's 
life, or, failing that, tell the same story in his own words. 

A Whole Book. — Set the Juniors occasionally to reading 
through entire books of the Bible in the course of a week. At 
the next meeting, ask them ten easy questions on the book they 
have read, and see if they can answer the questions. 

Bible Campaigns. — When there is a Boys' Brigade con- 
nected with your Junior society, you will find a series of talks 
on Bible campaigns of the greatest interest to the boys. For 
the sake of the boys, it would be well to prepare such a series 
of talks, even if you have no Boys' Brigade. 

One pastor who tried this plan with great success made his 
talks a military history of the Israelites. He began with the 



BIBLE WORK IN THE SOCIETY. \2J 

campaign of Chedorlaomer, in the Jordan country, and Abra- 
ham's finishing stroke. Then he told the story of the passage 
of the Red Sea by Moses, and went on to the fight with the 
Amorites, the defeat at Kadesh Barnea, and so on through the 
stirring history. 

He pictured the scenes vividly, describing the country and 
the costumes of the times, the political and religious surround- 
ings, the methods of military practice, and the character of the 
commanders. The value of this in giving the Juniors a knowl- 
edge of Bible history, at least in outline, is invaluable ; and the 
best of it is that the boys will be fascinated by the story. 

A Relief Map. — Your Juniors will enjoy building a relief 
map of Palestine. Here is the way a certain pastor set his 
Juniors to work. He had made a large light frame six feet by 
three feet, well stayed at the back, and backed all over with 
thin board. Upon this he laid a complete lining of heavy 
builders' paper, well sized with glue on both sides, gluing it 
to the boards at the back. 

He instructed the children to draw upon this with charcoal 
a map of Palestine. He made this work easy by dividing the 
map they were to copy into squares corresponding to squares 
formed upon the larger surface by threads stretched across. 

The drawing being completed, the threads were removed ; 
and taking clay, the Juniors built up the mountain ranges. 
They took a little space each day, studying, as they went along, 
books, pictures, and maps. To make the clay hold fast, they 
put in slender brads at an angle with the back, and anchored 
the clay frequently to these. 

After completing the larger features, they spread glue over the 
level country, and sprinkled sand over it lightly, painting the 
top of Hermon white to indicate its snow cap. They painted 
the rivers and the seas in water colors, with different shades 
of blue. 

They then located the principal towns and cities named in 
the story of Jesus' life, printing the names on narrow slips of 
paper, and placing them, flag-like, on long pins stuck in the 
clay, marking the more important places by little white houses. 
The expense altogether for this useful map was not more th"n 
two dollars. The Juniors worked upon it for two months of 
weekly meetings- 



128 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

Vacation Work. — A Massachusetts Junior worker suggests 
this plan to keep the Juniors at Bible work during vacation. 
Tell them that the Bible is God's garden, and that their own 
hearts are their garden. Name certain kinds of verses after 
certain plants, as, verses that speak of love, forget-me-nots ; 
of purity or cleansing, lilies ; of forgiveness, pansies ; of prayer, 
morning-glories. At the beginning of the vacation ask the 
Juniors to see during the coming weeks how many flower verses 
each can transplant from God's garden to the garden of his own 
heart, bringing a list of the verses that he has learned when he 
comes back to the society in the fall. If the Junior is too young 
to select the verses himself, the superintendent may make the 
selection for him, drawing opposite each division a picture of 
the plant that symbolizes it. 

A Bible Sunday. — Devote one Sunday in the month es- 
pecially to Bible-study ; that is, make the exercises of that par- 
ticular Sunday bear more directly than usual on the Bible. It 
would not be at all out of the way to do nothing that day but 
teach the Juniors how to study the Word of God. 

An Examination. — An occasional written examination is a 
great stimulus. Scatter the members over the room, and write 
upon the blackboard ten carefully selected Bible questions, 
which the Juniors are to answer upon paper provided for them. 
The results of this examination should b^ read at the next 
meeting, and an oral drill given on the same questions. 

Bible Biographies. — Set the Juniors to writing little biog- 
raphies of Bible characters. Give them Bible references, includ- 
ing the principal points in the lives of such men as Moses, Joshua, 
Joseph, David, Abraham, Lazarus, and ask them, after reading 
the Bible, to tell the stirring story in their own words. This 
they will greatly enjoy doing. The essays should be limited 
in length, say to three hundred words. 

An Essay Alphabet. — If you have met with success in ob- 
taining these short papers upon Bible characters, your Juniors 
will like to fill up an alphabet with such essays. Ask one 
Endeavorer to write a short life of some Bible character whose 
name begins with A, another to take one beginning with B, 
and so on. 

A Bible Exercise. — An interesting Bible recreation that may 



BIBLE WORK IN THE SOCIETY. 1 29 

be used to diversify the meetings of the Junior society is this : 
Let the superintendent repeat any good Bible verse that comes 
to his mind, for example, " Ye are the light of the world. A 
city that is set on a hill cannot be hid." The first Junior who 
can recall another Bible verse beginning with h, the first letter 
of the last word of the text quoted, now rises and repeats it. 

Suppose he repeats, "Honor thy father and thy mother." 
Instantly the Juniors try to think of another text beginning 
with m. The first to think of this rises and repeats it, and so 
the quoting goes on until the superintendent thinks best to 
close the contest. This is done by asking all to repeat in con- 
cert the last text given. All Bibles are closed, of course, 
during this exercise. 

Filling Out Texts. — A Bible drill in which the Juniors will 
delight consists of giving small portions of familiar texts, as, 
" God so loved," the Juniors to add as promptly as possible 
the missing words. 

A Sword Drill. — The boys will be especially pleased with 
a Bible sword drill, which consists in a selection of Bible texts 
that may be called swords, such as the sword of preparation, 
" Seek ye first the kingdom of God," etc. ; the sword of warn- 
ing, Gal. vi. 7 ; the sword of strength, 1 Thess. v. 17 ; Matt, 
vii. 7 ; the Damascus blade, John iii. 16, etc. The superinten- 
dent may call for these swords one after the other, and as she 
calls for them let the boys bring them forth out of their armory. 

Word Hunts. — These Bible word hunts should be made to 
bear upon the topic to be studied at the Junior meeting. Sup- 
pose the prominent thought in this topic may be summed up in 
the word forgiveness . Ask the Juniors to hunt through their 
Bibles at home, and find all the passages they can that contain 
the word forgive, showing them how to use the concordance, 
and at the same time telling them not to include in their list 
passages that do not help to explain the topic. These Bible 
verses they are to copy in little blank-books, and at the next 
meeting are to report how many they have found. The one 
who has the largest number will then read his list ; and the 
lists will then be compared, those that are deficient adding, so 
far as there is time, the texts that they lack. 

Bible Stories. — One of the most interesting Bible exercises is 



130 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

the following, which may be prepared beforehand. Ask some 
bright Junior to learn at home the principal facts in the life of 
some Bible hero or heroine. At the next meeting the Junior 
will tell the story, omitting all the names. When the story is 
ended, the society must guess what character has been told 
about. The story should be so selected that it will bear upon 
the topic for the day. 

Bible Objects. — An interesting way to tell Bible stories 
is by the use of objects. In one Junior society, for instance, 
one of the Juniors came forward with a leather bottle of water, 
a piece of bread, and a bow and arrow — objects involved in the 
story of Hagar. She asked if any of the Juniors could tell the 
Bible story that mentioned these things. None could ; so she 
told of Hagar's journey, referring to the objects, but leaving 
them to guess all the names connected with the story. 

A Verse Alphabet. — Every Junior society should form for 
itself an alphabet of Bible verses. This is the way to do it. 
At one meeting ask all the Juniors to bring Bible verses begin- 
ning with A. These should be committed to memory. When 
all have been spoken, ask the Juniors to vote which they will 
select as the society's A verse. In the same way at the follow- 
ing meetings select verses for all the letters of the alphabet. 
At each meeting review the verses previously chosen. 

Bible Anatomy. — The Juniors will take great delight in 
learning passages of Scripture that are applicable to the various 
parts of the human body. Let the superintendent draw, upon 
manilla paper or muslin, a large outline of a man ; and after the 
appropriate texts are learned, let 'her call for the recitation of 
them as she points to the parts of the figure. Mr. Thomas 
Wainwright has selected the following appropriate passages : — 

Skin, flesh, bones, Job 10:11. Lips, Ps. 141 :3- 

Head, Prov. 16:31. Teeth, Job 4:10. 

Hair, Matt. 10:30. Tongue, Ps. 34:13. 

Forehead, Rev. 22:4. Neck, Rom. 16:4. 

Mind, Isa. 26:3. Shoulder, Isa. 9:6. 

Eye, Ps. 33:18. Breast, John 13:25. 

Nose, Prov. 30:33. Heart, Matt. 5:8. 

Ear, Prov. 18:15. Bowels, Col. 3:12. 

Mouth, Ps. 141:3. Liver, kidneys, Ex. 29:13. 



BIBLE WORK IN THE SOCIETY. I3I 

Thigh, Gen. 32:25. Arms, Deut. 33:27. 

Loin, Isa. 11:5. Hand, Eccl. 9:10. 

Leg, Prov. 26:7. Fingers, Ps. 8:3. 

Knee, Rom. 14:11. Joints, Col. 2:19. 

Feet, Ps. 119:105. Bodies, Rom. 12:1. 

The Chautauqua Drill. — This exercise, originated by Rev. 
H. N. Kinney, is an admirable one to introduce into the middle 
of a meeting when the Juniors show symptoms of weariness : — 

1. Right hand raised, with concert repetition. — "Lift up your 
hands in the sanctuary, and bless the Lord." 

2. Clap hands once. — " O clap your hands, all ye people." 

3. Fold arms. — " Thy word have I hid in mine heart." 

4. Both hands raised, palms to front. — "Stand up and bless the 
Lord." 

5. Join the tips of the fingers over the head. — " His banner over 
me is love." 

6. Hands to sides. — " Happy is the man that findeth wisdom." 

7. Right hand extended, palm up. — "Length of days is in her 
right hand." 

8. Left hand extended, palm up. — " And in her left hand riches 
and honor." 

9. Both hands extended. — " Her ways are ways of pleasantness." 
10. Right face ! — " And all her paths are peace." 

Christ's Titles. — Have you tried teaching your Juniors the 
different titles of Christ, as "Good Shepherd, 1 ' "Physician," 
"Door," "Vine," "Lamb," etc.? If not, ask the Juniors to 
bring each to the meeting a verse containing one of these titles. 
Be prepared to add verses containing titles that they may not 
select. Get one of the boys to write the titles on the black- 
board as the verses are repeated. It would be well for all the 
Juniors to learn as many of these verses as possible, as they all 
contain rich truths for their future living. 

A Good Exercise. — Junior superintendents will find the fol- 
lowing table useful as an exercise for home work. Let it be 
copied on a hectograp , and handed out to the children, each 
being asked to fill out the blanks, and bring them in to the next 
meeting. At that meeting the superintendent will read in order 
the descriptions, the Juniors answering in concert with the 
appropriate names. 



132 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

A — , the first man. 
B — , the favorite son of Jacob. 
C — , a man of Csesarea who had a vision. 
D — , one cast into the lions' den. 
E — , a prophet fed by ravens. 
F — , a governor of Csesarea. 
G — , a giant. 
H — , son of Noah. 
I — , son of Abraham. 
J — , who was swallowed by a whale. 
K— , the father of Saul. 
L — , the poor man covered with sores. 
M — , one careful and troubled about many things. 
N — , an officer who was healed of the leprosy. 
O — , one in whose house the ark of the Lord continued three 

months. 
P — , an apostle who wrote thirteen of the epistles in the New 

Testament. 
Q — , one whom Paul called a brother, when writing to the Romans. 
R — , Isaac's wife. 

S — , a wise man who built a temple 
T — , one who knew the Scriptures from a child. 
U — , one who put forth his hand to stay the ark of God, and God 

smote him. 
V — , a beautiful queen. 
Z — , one who climbed a sycomore-tree to see Jesus. 

Bible Puzzles. — Some Junior workers make use of Bible 
puzzles, rebuses, etc., constructed after the following fashion : — 

My 5» 6, 7 is one of the sons of Noah. 

My 7, 6, 3, 4, 5 is the place where Moses made bitter water sweet. 

My I, 2, 2, I is a name by which Christ called God. 

My I, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 is the name of a great patriarch. 

These Bible puzzles should always relate to the topic, and 
should bring out some particular application thereof. They 
are easily made, and will serve for home work. 

Acrostics. — It is an excellent plan to string the Bible verses 
you wish your Juniors to learn upon some acrostic. Choose, 
for instance, such a word as " Christian,' 1 and select Bible 
verses, each of them descriDtive of some Christian attribute, 



BIBLE WORK IN THE SOCIETY. 1 33 

their initial letters forming the word "Christian." Print these 
initials on large shields of pasteboard, giving one to each of 
the Juniors who are to learn the verses. They will enjoy step- 
ping in front of the society in order, holding up their shields, 
and repeating their verses until the members can spell the 
completed word ; and the verses thus learned will not readily 
be forgotten. 

Their Own Questions. — Ask the children occasionally to 
bring in Bible questions to present to the society — any ques- 
tions they please arising from their reading of the Bible. 
Devote a few moments of the next meeting to these questions, 
which the Juniors will propound, and which the superintendent 
may either answer herself or refer to the society. 

Twenty Questions. — Mrs. Scudder suggests this plan of 
stirring up a lagging Junior meeting : Let the superintendent 
take some object mentioned in the Bible, and allow the chil- 
dren to ask twenty questions, and find out within that limit 
what it is. 

Bible Queries. — The society as a society might well utilize 
the Bible questions given in The Junior Golden Rule. Some 
societies make a practice of studying these every month, and 
learning the answers so well that they are able to recite them 
in concert. 

Bible Questions. — One Junior superintendent finds it an 
excellent plan to spend fifteen or twenty minutes of each prayer 
meeting in systematic Bible work. The Bible is read in course 
by the Juniors, a small portion at a time. For each portion 
of the Bible the superintendent makes out a set of easy ques- 
tions that can be answered by any one who has read the portion 
selected. Mimeograph copies of these questions are distributed 
to the Juniors at the preceding meeting, and at the next meet- 
ing they are answered and discussed. 

The last question of each set is always one bearing upon the 
central thought of the topic for the day, so that the superinten- 
dent is thus enabled to close the meeting with a discussion of 
the theme with which the meeting opened. At the end of each 
two months the superintendent selects ten out of the eighty or 
ninety questions the Juniors have answered, and holds a written 
examination. He miy award prizes at the end of the year to 
the five examination papers that are found to be best. 



134 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

A Question Meeting. — A Bible question meeting may be 
arranged in the following way : Place the boys on one side of 
the room and the girls on the other, in rows, and ask Bible 
questions back and forth after the fashion of a spelling-match. 
Allow only a limited time for the answers, and keep a record 
of each side, announcing at the close whether the boys or the 
girls have been victors. 

A Bible School. — A contest in Bible verses arranged like 
a spelling-school, though simple, will excite great interest 
among the Juniors. Choosing sides and beginning at the head, 
let each repeat a Bible verse, and continue the exercise as long 
as possible, each side watching the other to see that no Bible 
verse is repeated incorrectly, or given more than once. Who- 
ever gives a verse already given, errs in repeating it, or fails 
to think of one when his turn comes, is counted out and sits 
down ; and so it continues until none are left. 

A Reference Contest. — A reference contest will add spice 
to an occasional Junior meeting. The superintendent brings 
a certain number of references, which are written upon the 
blackboard. Those who find the most of these within a certain 
time will be accounted the victors. It should be required that 
the verse not only be found, but be read. 

A Bible Contest. — Though some Junior workers may con- 
sider the method too close on the borders of a game, yet I 
find much that is suggestive in the following scheme for inciting 
the Juniors to learn Bible verses : Each member is asked to 
commit a verse for each day in the week, and to write this 
verse upon a sheet of paper. 

When the time comes to recite these texts in the meeting, 
the members stand in a row, one end of the row being head 
and the other foot. The papers are then handed to the leader, 
who holds them in the order in which the members stand. 

The Junior at the head of the row then recites his texts, and 
so it proceeds until some one fails to recite a text perfectly. 
When this happens he moves down, and is passed by the first 
one below him who can recite correctly all his texts. 

Whoever is head at the close of the exercise receives a head 
mark, and starts in at the foot the next time. The children 
are eager to get these marks, and it is wonderful how much 
Scripture they learn. 



BIBLE WORK IN THE SOCIETY. I35 

Book=Marks. — Bible book-marks are very easily made, and 
will form a very acceptable gift from the superintendent to the 
Juniors. A little strip of bright ribbon with the name of the 
society printed upon it, the date, and " Happy New Year," 
or "Merry Christmas," or some other pleasant wish, — this is 
all that is necessary. It will give the society a feeling of solid- 
ity when the members see its name in print. 

A Handy Method. — An excellent use to make of The Ju- 
nior Golden Rule Bible references is the following, though the 
method is not to be commended for regular, but only for occa- 
sional use : Before the Junior superintendent hands to the 
Juniors their copies of the paper, let her mark for each the Bible 
reference that he is to copy and bring to the meeting prepared 
to read, or else to learn at home and repeat at the meeting. 
Different Bible references being marked in the different Junior 
Golden Rules, the prayer-meeting committee is saved the 
trouble of writing out the references for the members to use. 

Parable Meetings. — A parable meeting will be greatly en- 
joyed by the Juniors. Assign a parable to each member, the 
Juniors to tell the beautiful stories in their own simple words. 
Arrange the parables in sets of four and five, and at the close of 
each set let the choir sing a hymn touching on the last parable ; 
such hymns, for instance, as " The Ninety and Nine. 11 

The Twelve Disciples. — In learning the names of the 
twelve disciples, superintendents will find the following rhyme 

of use : — 

" These are the twelve disciples' names : 
Peter and Andrew, John and James, 

Two pairs of brothers, who lived by the sea 
When Jesus said to them, ' Follow me.' 
Then James the Less and Jude were called too, 
Philip, and also Bartholomew, 

Matthew, and Thomas who doubted the word, 
Simon, and Judas who sold his Lord." 

Nazarites. — Papers on Bible Nazarites will furnish interest 
for a series of meetings, one paper being given at each meeting. 
On this cord may be strung little biographies of Samuel, Elijah, 
Moses, and John the Baptist. 

Bible Cities. — Bible cities will furnish an interesting theme 
for the Bible portion of the Junior hour. Let one Junior name 



I36 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

a city beginning with A, telling an interesting fact about it ; 
another Junior will take B, and so on. Of course these letters 
will be assigned the Juniors a week beforehand. 

Symbolic Cards. — If, as in some societies, it is your custom 
to write upon little slips of paper the Bible reference each Junior 
is to commit to memory, it will be advisable occasionally to cut 
the paper into shapes symbolic of the truth that is to be upper- 
most in the next meeting. For example, if it is to be a meeting 
about the Bible, cut your slips into the shape of a lamp ; a tem- 
perance meeting, cut them into the shape of a bottle ; a Christ- 
mas meeting, into stars ; an Easter meeting, into lilies, etc. 

Cards. — A certain Methodist pastor prepares his young En- 
deavorers to take regular part in their weekly prayer meetings 
by buying cheap picture cards with a Bible verse on each, and 
giving them to each child at every meeting. The verse is to be 
learned, and repeated at the meeting of the next week. The 
Sunday school and Christian Endeavor society pay for these 
cards, and are glad to do so. 

A Book of Cards. — One Junior superintendent I have 
heard of presents to her Juniors every week a card with some 
Bible reference upon it. Whoever fills out this card with the 
Bible verse correctly copied, and recites it perfectly at the next 
meeting, receives the card back again with an embossed picture 
pasted on the back. When the Junior has eight of these cards, 
they are made into a little book with stiff covers and a picture 
on the front. 

Calling the Roll. — The roll-call may be utilized in various 
ways ; but probably no way is better than to ask each Junior, as 
his name is called, to respond with a verse of Scripture, not 
read, but committed to memory. In a certain Canadian society 
they take the verses alphabetically. One week they will all 
begin with A, the next with B, and so on. 

Their Favorites. — Distribute cards at the prayer meeting, 
and ask the Juniors at their homes to write upon these cards 
their names and their favorite Bible verses, telling at the next 
meeting why they like them. 

Precious Verses. — One of the nicest plans for Junior socie- 
ties is to have the Juniors commit to memory lists of " precious 
verses, 1 ' each being asked to select four or five of his favorites. 



BIBLE WORK IN THE SOCIETY. 1 37 

Two or three of the Juniors may be asked to repeat their entire 
list in the course of a single meeting. 

Committee Verses. — A pleasant way to familiarize the Jun- 
iors with certain important texts is to set the committees to 
learning texts appropriate to their work. Each committee may 
choose a verse for its term of office. The temperance commit- 
tee, for example, " Look not upon the wine, 11 etc. ; the sunshine 
committee, the Golden Rule; the birthday committee, "So 
teach us to number our days, 11 etc. The superintendent should 
frequently call upon the committees to recite their texts in con- 
cert ; and thus the other Juniors will become familiar with them, 
even though they are not on the committees. After each elec- 
tion these verses will be changed, and thus a considerable range 
of texts will be secured. 

" Love" Verses. — Occasionally call upon all the Juniors to 
give, at the next meeting, a praise verse, or a love verse, or a 
sin verse, leaving them to discover for themselves what you 
mean. 

Verse Names. — Each Junior in your society should be able 
to spell his name in Bible verses ; selecting, that is, a set of 
Bible verses that he has made peculiarly his own, the initials of 
which spell his own name. The children will delight in finding 
these verses and committing them to memory, and will enjoy 
hearing each other repeat them. 

In Promises and Commands. — A variation of this plan is 
to ask the Juniors first to spell their names in Bible promises 
and then in Bible commands. This method may be varied quite 
indefinitely. 

Every =Day Verses. — Store the minds of your young charges 
with verses that you may call every-day verses — Bible gems, 
that is, that are especially applicable to the tasks and the wor- 
ries, the little cares and the common joys, of every day. This 
will be more helpful to them than you can tell, in their future 
life. 

Seven=Day Texts. — Occasionally give the entire society a 
text, such, for example, as "Bear ye one another's burdens. 1 ' 
Request them to make this the text of their living for the com- 
ing week, and to report at the next meeting how they have suc- 
ceeded in obeying its precepts, what difficulties they have found, 
and what rewards have come to them. 



13^ THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

Concert Verses. — It is helpful to teach the Juniors Scripture 
verses to be recited uniformly at certain stages in the meeting. 
For example, before the opening hymn, Ps. 95 : 1, "O come, 
let us sing unto the Lord, let us make a joyful noise to the Rock 
of our salvation/ 1 Before the opening prayer, Hab. 2 : 20, " The 
Lord is in his holy temple, let all the earth keep silence before 
him." Before the Bible-reading, Ps. 119 : 18, "Open thou 
mine eyes, that I may behold wondrous things out of thy 
law." 

"Name Texts." — Set the Juniors to learning Bible texts 
strung upon the name of some Bible character; five texts, for 
instance, suitable to the character of Moses, and beginning suc- 
cessively with the five letters of his name. 

The Location. — As your Juniors learn Bible verses, be sure 
to have them learn also the chapter and verse number. You 
have no idea what a help this will be in all their later Bible 
work. Simply knowing the words, " God so loved the world," 
etc., is of course the main thing; but it is also a great help to 
know that these words are found in John 3 : 16. 

Initial Words. — Many Junior superintendents have tried the 
plan of asking the Juniors each to bring to the next meeting a 
verse beginning with "be." Not so many, however, extend 
this useful exercise to other words, — "let," for instance, 
"come," "go," "send," "speak," "pray," and so on. 

A Swarm of Bees. — The occupation of learning "Bible 
be's," so common among our Junior societies, may be pleasantly 
varied in the following way : Have a bush with a cushion among 
its branches. Give each member an imitation bee, made of 
tissue paper, larger than natural size, and with pins for legs. 
Each member, as he says his verse beginning with "be," will 
place the bee upon the cushion. The cushion will soon be 
filled, and the Junior superintendent will explain to the children 
then how it stands for a character fully equipped for the Mas- 
ter's use. 

Bible Committees. — Bible committees of the Junior society 
can help the superintendent very greatly. In some societies 
they even select the passages of Scripture or the chapters of 
the Bible that the Juniors are to learn. Of course, when they 
do this, their work should be carefully gone over by the 
superintendent. 



BIBLE WORK IN THE SOCIETY. 1 39 

Learn the Psalms. — The Juniors should be set to learn- 
ing the Psalms. No portion of Scripture is so well adapted to 
being committed to memory. Let the Juniors themselves select 
the psalm they will memorize during the coming month, and try 
to get them to learn twelve psalms in the course of the year. 
Extracts may be made from some of the longer psalms. 



140 THE JUNIOR MANUAL 



CHAPTER XV. 

THE JUNIOR PLEDGE. 

Hold To It. — The pledge of the Junior Christian Endeavor 
society is the following: " Trusting in the Lord Jesus Christ for 
strength, I promise him that I will strive to do whatever he 
would like to have me do ; that I will pray and read the Bible 
every day ; and that, just so far as I know how, I will try to 
lead a Christian life. I will be present at every meeting of the 
society when I can, and will take some part in every meeting. 11 

Every word of the pledge is carefully thought out, and there is 
a reason for it. Experiment has proved the usefulness of it. Do 
not change the form except for the very best reasons, carefully 
considered and prayed over. 

An Essential. — The pledge is an absolute necessity for the 
Junior Christian Endeavor society. Indeed, I have never heard 
of an attempt to organize one without it. For such an attempt 
nothing but failure could be predicted. Older people may object 
to the pledge, but no objections will come from the children. 
They are always ready for definite obligations. 

How About Objectors ? — In most communities will be found 
one or two who argue against the pledge, and refuse to let their 
children join the Junior society because they do not believe in 
it, thinking that the children are too young to take upon them- 
selves so solemn an obligation. They forget that children's 
consciences are more sensitive even than those of their elders. 
It is far better to keep them sensitive, and train them in this 
delicacy by the pledge, than to permit them to grow hardened 
without this training. 

It is difficult to say when little hands are too young to be set 
to work, and little tongues too feeble to be taught to talk. It 
would be equally hard to say when consciences are too young to 
be trained. 

Mr. Gough was in the habit of telling the story of a boy six or 



THE JUNIOR PLEDGE. I4I 

seven years old, who wanted to sign the temperance pledge with 
the other members of his family. His father objected, thinking 
he was too young; but he insisted. Afterwards the father, on a 
journey, called for a drink of water at an inn. It was not ob- 
tainable ; but cider was brought, and, being very thirsty, he 
drank it instead. He told about this when he reached home, 
and this little boy came up to him with his eyes full of tears. 
" Father," he asked, " how far were you from the James River 
when you drank that cider ?" "About fifteen miles, " was the 
reply. "Well, I should have walked there and back again 
rather than break my pledge. 1 ' 

1 have heard of a hot-tempered ten-year-old Junior, who was 
put in a trying position where the injustice of a comrade tempted 
him to a declaration of war and something worse. But he kept 
the peace, saying afterwards, "If it had not been for that 
pledge, I should have fixed him! 11 

I have heard of a ten-year-old Junior who went to bed with- 
out reading her chapter in the Bible. Remembering it, she got 
up and lighted the gas, and read it, and did not read it in a 
hurry, either. This same Junior, who lives in a sceptical fam- 
ily, has conducted family prayers. 

On the whole, the best answer to those who argue against the 
pledge, is simply to show them that it is in harmony with the 
Bible, and then to keep quiet. Do not try to argue in reply, 
because thus you only confirm them in opposition. Begin with 
the children whose parents heartily agree with the pledge prin- 
ciple. Aim to show forth the benefits of Christian Endeavor 
work; and in this way, if in anyway, you will convert objectors. 

An Examination. — As the Juniors enter the society they 
should be tested very carefully regarding their understanding of 
the requirements of the pledge. The lookout committee and 
the superintendent should talk this matter over with the appli- 
cant for membership, reading the pledge and carefully explain- 
ing it. Then a set of questions should be formally propounded. 
The shy young people may be permitted to write their answers 
to these questions. Those who are more confident may give 
their responses in open meeting. Such questions as these will 
furnish satisfactory tests : " What do you promise in your pledge 
as to the Junior meeting? About the Bible? About prayer? 



142 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

About your conduct in life? To whom are your promises 
made? How will you get strength to keep your pledge? Why 
do you wish to take it? How long must it last? " 

Go Carefully. — Junior superintendents should realize what 
a heavy responsibility they are taking upon themselves in asking 
the Juniors to sign a pledge so solemn and far-reaching in its 
influence as the Junior pledge. If the Juniors take this pledge 
carelessly, and do not live up to its requirements, the careless- 
ness regarding promise-keeping thus inculcated will have an 
effect on their future life. On the contrary, faithfulness to their 
Junior pledge will probably mean for them a lifetime of fidelity 
and truth. 

I know of one superintendent who worked with her new soci- 
ety for more than four months before she permitted any mem- 
bers to join. She preferred to have the boys and girls think 
over the step very seriously, especially before signing the active 
members' pledge, and took particular pains, before receiving a 
new member, to inquire into the home and school life of the 
boy or girl, to learn whether he was trying to do what Jesus 
would have him do. 

Committed to Memory First. — It is not unwise for the 
superintendent to require the Juniors, as some superintendents 
do, to commit to memory the Junior pledge before they permit 
them to sign it. This is, of course, not because any special im- 
portance is attached to the committing to memory or to the 
mere form of words, but because in this way they can be as- 
sured that the Junior has thoroughly considered the contents of 
the pledge. 

Two Pledges. — It is a good plan for the Junior to sign two 
pledges, one the original pledge, which the parent signs with 
the Junior. This is returned to the superintendent, and kept 
on file by her. Then the Junior should sign a second pledge 
and take it home with him, keeping it in the Bible or in some 
place where he can often see it. The fact that the superinten- 
dent holds a pledge signed by him will be a constant spur to 
fidelity. 

Some societies have the pledge kept by the Junior printed on 
cards bearing the pansy, — the Christian Endeavor flower, — 
printed in colors. These are called "pansy cards, 11 to distin- 



THE JUNIOR PLEDGE. I43 

guish them from the pledge that is kept on file. The United 
Society sells these for $1.25 a hundred. The plain card costs 
50 cents a hundred; on heavy card-board with gilt edge, $2.00 
a hundred ; and embossed in purple and gold, 75 cents a hun- 
dred. An ingenious superintendent will find a use for all these 
varieties. 

The Pledge Memorized. — Be sure that all your Juniors are 
able to repeat the pledge from memory. Its every word cannot 
be too firmly embedded in their minds. Insist on this memory 
repetition at the beginning of each consecration meeting, or, if 
you prefer it, at its close. 

Occasionally call on some Junior to repeat the pledge by him- 
self, asking the entire society to be ready, as soon as he is 
through, to sing a verse of some appropriate song, such as 
"Our Pledge" (No. 7, in " Junior Christian Endeavor Songs "), 
or " Strong in Thy Strength, O Jesus " (No. 33, in the same 
book), or " Keep Your Covenant with Jesus " (No. 10, in the 
same book). 

The Substance. — Instead of requiring the Juniors always 

to repeat the pledge in the exact words of it, occasionally vary 

this proceeding by requesting them to tell in their own words 

what things they have promised to do. One minister condensed 

it thus : — 

" Trust and obey, 

Read and pray." 
I shouldn't wonder if some of your Juniors would make para- 
phrases as bright. 

You will make no mistake if, in some form or other, the 
pledge is brought into every meeting. Hammer it in. 

A Pledge Song. — Occasionally, instead of repeating the 
prose form of the pledge, it is well to sing a versified form, and 
I have prepared the following for this purpose. It is to be sung 
to the tune Hursley, " Sun of my soul. 11 
I promise Jesus I will pray 
And read the Bible every day ; 
Here at the meeting I will be, 
And do my duty faithfully. 

All of my life I'll try to do 
Just what the Lord would wish me to, 
Trusting to Christ whose power is given 
Freely to all in earth and heaven. 



144 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

I have also written the following version, rather for concert 
repetition than for singing. 



We promise, dear Jesus, to try to be true, 
And do what our Saviour would like us to do. 
We promise to read in our Bibles each day. 
We promise that daily to God we will pray. 

Trusting in Christ, 

Trusting in Christ, 
Saviour, dear Saviour, we promise to pray. 

ii. 

When our Juniors meet we will try to be there; 
We'll say a few words, or we'll pray a short prayer. 
And all our life through, just as far as we know, 
We'll go where our Saviour would like us to go. 

Trusting in Christ, 

Trusting in Christ, 
Saviour, dear Saviour, we promise to live. 

in. 
While all of these duties we promise to try, 
We're trusting in Jesus his strength to supply ; 
His love will infold us, his wisdom will guide, 
His power uphold us whatever betide. 

Trusting in Christ, 

Trusting in Christ, 
Help us, dear Saviour, our pledges to keep. 

The Good of It. — An occasional half-hour may be given to 
a pledge meeting in which the Juniors may be asked to answer 
by personal experiences how the pledge has helped each of 
them to live a better Christian life. 

A BibIe=Reading. — A Bible-reading on the pledge may 
easily be arranged. Miss Kate Haus has selected the following 
illustrative texts : " Trusting in the Lord Jesus Christ (Prow 3 : 5) 
for strength (Ps. 29 : 11), I promise (Rom. 9 : 9) him (Acts 5:31) 
that I will strive (Col. 1 : 29) to do whatever (John 15: 14) he 
would like to have me do (Col. 3: 17); that I will pray 
(Ps. 55 : 17) and read the Bible every day (Rev. 1:3; John 5 : 39 ; 
Acts 17:11); and that, just so far as I know how (Ps. 143 : 8), 
I will try to lead a Christian life (Ps. 25:5; Phil. 3:14). I 
will be present (2 Sam. 20:4) at every meeting of the society 



THE JUNIOR PLEDGE. 



145 



(Mai. 3: 16) when I can (Heb. 10:25), and take some part in 
every meeting (Isa. 43 : 10 ; Luke 12 : 8)." 

In using this Bible-reading, divide the society into two parts, 
asking one part to repeat the pledge, pausing at the appropriate 
places for the recitation of the confirmatory passages of Scrip- 
ture from the other half. 

Pledge Acrostics. — A pleasant exercise for the Juniors is 
to set them to making an acrostic on the pledge. These acros- 
tics should explain what each Junior thinks the pledge ought to 
mean in his life. The following sample comes from Ireland : — 

Praise God, 

Love Jesus, 

Ever more 

Doing 

God's work 

Everywhere. 
A Pledge Record. — Many Junior superintendents find a 
personal record of pledge-keeping very valuable. A sample of 



word, such as " well " or " ill," or possibly with a figure, graded 
from one to ten, or from one to four, faithfulness in each of the 
four particulars counting one point. There are five spaces, be- 
cause sometimes the month has five weeks. 



I PROMISE 

2Ed tio infjat Sesus tooultt like to l)abe me to. 2To prag eberg Hag. 
HOW KEPT: 



First. ISecond. 


Third. 


Fourth. 


Fifth. 



STo watt tfje Bible. Ea attentt all meetings of tfje societg tofjen possible. 
Mo nth Na me 



A Wall Pledge. — No Junior room is at all well equipped 
without a large, clear-type pledge. It should not be placed, 
however, in such a position that the Juniors will rely upon 
it for the concert repetition of the pledge ; but they should be 
taught to commit the pledge to memory. If they have to turn 



I46 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

their heads to see it when it is referred to, all the better. Such 
a pledge, 28 by 36 inches, ready for hanging on the wall, is sold 
by the United Society of Christian Endeavor for 75 cents. 

A Novel Pledge. — The idea of the pledge must not be car- 
ried too far. A multiplicity of pledges has a tendency to con- 
fuse. Nevertheless, under certain circumstances, it may be very 
advantageous to introduce definite pledges for such matters as 
are not referred to in the Christian Endeavor pledge. The 
Juniors of a certain Cumberland Presbyterian society have 
taken the following pledge, which explains itself, and certainly 
is most desirable in its aim : " Trusting in Jesus for strength, I 
promise him that I will not repeat or tell any bad thing which 
I hear of any person, but will try to find all the good I can of 
every one, and tell it." This is a pledge that might with profit 
be taken by many of the older Endeavorers. 

Sunday Observance Pledges. — Some Junior workers, espe- 
cially those whose work lies in mission schools and churches, 
may find a Sunday observance pledge of service. The pledge 
used by one Chicago worker is a promise on the part of the 
Junior not to buy, sell, or trade on the Lord's day, and to 
teach others also not to do so. 



THE LOOKOUT COMMITTEE. 1 47 



CHAPTER XVI. 

THE LOOKOUT COMMITTEE. 

Their Duties. — The Model Junior Constitution thus defines 
the work of the lookout committee: "The lookout committee 
shall secure the names of any who may wish to join the society, 
and report the same to the superintendents for action. They 
shall also obtain excuses from members absent from the roll- 
call, and affectionately look after and reclaim any who seem 
indifferent to their pledge. 11 The duties will be seen to be two- 
fold — partly toward outsiders, and partly toward those already 
members. The first set of duties especially requires enterprise ; 
the second, tact. 

A Firm Guide. — On no committee should the superinten- 
dent keep so firm a hand as on the lookout committee. Lack of 
tact in the members, and hasty action on their part, may do the 
society irreparable injury. Forbid the members of the com- 
mittee to invite any children to join the society without first 
speaking to you about it, for fear they should get in those who 
are unprepared. Unless you can thoroughly trust them, do not 
permit them to speak to any who have been remiss in their 
duties until they have first talked the matter over with you. 

Working for the Future. — In all your work with the look- 
out committee, remember that it is not the results this committee 
may accomplish that will be especially valuable, but the effect of 
this work upon the members of the committee themselves. You 
are training in these young people the pastors and evangel- 
ists, the Sunday-school teachers, and the earnest Christian lay 
workers of the coming years. As you make them earnest and 
consecrated, sincere and unselfish and frank, such will be the 
characteristics of the church of the next generation. 

Modest Overseers. — Of course one of the dangers of look- 
out committee work, though it is a danger which those who 
do not know children are likely to exaggerate, is Phariseeism. 



I48 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

The superintendent should never permit the lookout committee 
to rebuke the Juniors, or in any way to set themselves above 
the delinquents. Remind the committee how often they them- 
selves fail to do their duty. If, in the progress of the commit- 
tee meetings, you see any trace of a harsh judgment, let all 
kneel while you offer up an earnest prayer for the right guidance 
of the committee and of the Juniors who are not doing their 
duty. Urge the committee themselves to pray earnestly before 
they speak to any who are remiss. 

Hold, in the progress of the committee meetings, frequent 
drills of the following nature: "You, Mary, are to see Martha, 
who has been absent from two meetings. What are you going 
to say to her?" " You, Tom, are going to speak to Ned, who 
does not take part faithfully in the prayer meetings. Imagine 
that I am Ned; what are you going to say to me?" 

Interlocking. — If the pastor is able to give any attention to 
the committee work of the Juniors, that attention should be 
given to the lookout committee. The same thing is true of the 
Sunday-school superintendent, the teachers of the primary de- 
partment, and the president of the Mothers' society. The 
work of the Junior lookout' committee affects in many ways 
these different interests. Especially should the officers whose 
business it is to superintend the admission of children to the 
church take an interest in the work of this lookout committee, 
for they are more likely than any others to understand the true 
spiritual condition of the young people. 

Dividing Them Up. — By far the most satisfactory method 
of carrying on the work of the lookout committee is to divide 
the membership of the society among the committeemen, a por- 
tion to each. At the consecration meeting, each member of the 
committee will notice the presence or absence of his own par- 
ticular division, and will hunt up the absentees, reporting at 
the next meeting of the lookout committee what he has learned. 
These divisions should remain constant during the life of the 
committee, in order that each committeeman may become per- 
fectly familiar with the voices, faces, and circumstances of his 
particular charges. 

An Unknown Lookout Committee. — Select from your 
Juniors five of the most faithful and earnest Christians. Divide 



THE LOOKOUT COMMITTEE. I49 

up among these the names of the members. All that the look- 
out committee is expected to do for the whole society, each of 
these five is to do for his division of the society. They are to 
give no public reports, however, and their work is not to be 
known to the society. The superintendent meets monthly with 
the five, asking for reports of what they have been able to 
accomplish in this quiet way ; praying with them also, and sug- 
gesting new endeavors. 

Gaining New Members. — For the winning of new mem- 
bers, it is not a bad plan occasionally to make a thorough can- 
vass of the town or the neighborhood, though this canvass may 
be merely imaginary, the committee thinking over in their meet- 
ing the houses of the town, street by street, inquiring whether 
there are in each house children who ought to belong to the 
society, and making a list of the doubtful houses for future 
inquiry. 

Your list of possible Juniors having been formed, send after 
each one the member of the committee who is best acquainted 
with him. If no member of the committee is acquainted, find 
some Junior who is, and let the committeeman go to the 
stranger with this mutual friend. 

You can set your lookout committee to work most effectually 
if you give to each member a list of three or four possible 
Juniors, urging the committee to strive who can get the most 
to join, and do it in the shortest time. The superintendent will 
make the society more zealous in this particular of winning 
members if, at the time the new member joins, she make men- 
tion before the society of the Junior who was chiefly instrumen- 
tal in winning him. 

Utilize the Socials. — The society socials furnish one of 
the best fields for the work of the lookout committee. Teach 
them that at the social they have opportunities for coming in 
close contact with strangers, and interesting them in the work 
of the society. The social committee is chiefly occupied with 
the management of the social, and the lookout committee should 
be busied about this blessed task. Young people whom the 
lookout committee is trying to draw into the society they should 
take special pains to invite to the socials, introduce to the mem- 
bers, and make their evening a pleasant one. 



I50 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

Canvassing the Sunday School. — If you have a Sunday- 
school committee, the lookout committee should be in closest 
consultation with it. If your society lacks this useful com- 
mittee, its duties will largely fall to the lookout committee. 
They should canvass the Sunday school for young people who 
should be in the Junior society but are not, and should in every 
way try to draw them in. 

Empty Chairs. — If the lookout committee will see to it 
that beside each Junior of the society is placed an empty chair 
with the instruction that it is to be filled by a friend who is 
to be brought to the meeting, the plan will add greatly to the 
attendance and eventually to the membership. It can be seen 
at a glance what Juniors bring companions to the meeting, and 
the members will take pride in having their neighboring seats 
always filled. 

Attend a While First. — Before any child is asked to join 
the society, the lookout committee should bring about his 
attendance at a few meetings, so that he may understand fully 
with what sort of organization he is to connect himself. If 
these visitors can be induced to take part in the meetings it 
will be a further test, and will tell the lookout committee a 
great deal about their spiritual life. This attendance of visitors 
will be increased if the Juniors, and the lookout committee 
especially, are urged to call for those who are not members, and 
take them with them to the meetings. Invitations may also 
be given out at school. 

When To Vote In. — Though new members may be pro- 
posed by the chairman of the lookout committee at any time, 
they should be voted in and should take their first part only 
in the consecration meeting, and then with a little ceremony, 
which should be held at the very beginning of the hour This 
ceremony should always include the presentation of the Junior 
badge and of the society colors, if the society has such, together 
with the concert repetition of the pledge by the entire society, 
and some word of welcome. The secretary should at once 
place upon the roll the name of the new Junior, and call this 
name as he calls the other members. 

Greeting the Newcomer. — When new members are re- 
ceived into the society, the president, of course, and the super- 



THE LOOKOUT COMMITTEE. I 5 I 

intendent, say a word of greeting ; but the Juniors themselves 
are necessarily silent until after the meeting is over, when 
this helpful duty is likely to be forgotten. Impress it upon the 
lookout committee that their first effort should be to make 
the newcomers feel that they are heartily welcome, and to put 
them at ease among the members. It is pleasant if the com- 
mittee will not only speak its greeting, but write it out. A 
nice little note of welcome, written by the chairman and signed 
by all the members, will constitute to the new member a perma- 
nent assurance that the society members are glad to have him 
among them. 

Keeping Track of Them. — It would be a good idea to make 
the member of the Junior lookout committee who proposes a 
new member to the committee and obtains his election to the 
society responsible for introducing that new member to the other 
Juniors, and for establishing him in the ways of the society. 
Teach your committee that their work is scarcely more than 
begun when the new members sign the constitution and pledge. 

The Pledge First. — Above all committees, the lookout com- 
mittee should emphasize the pledge. The superintendent 
should see that the committee themselves understand it, and are 
able to make others understand it. Before they propose any 
new member they should go over the pledge carefully with the 
candidate, and be sure that he not merely comprehends its pro- 
visions, but that he heartily agrees to them. Urge the members 
of the lookout committee to set before prospective Juniors, not 
the social advantages of the society, telling them how much fun 
they will have, or how interesting the meetings are, but simply 
the will of Christ, that in the society they will serve him, and 
will learn how to serve him better, and that the fun and the 
interest are to come in as side matters. 

Pledge Meetings. — Meetings for the especial consideration 
of the pledge will aid the lookout committee in maintaining the 
faithfulness of the members. Juniors appointed beforehand to 
the task will read at this meeting little essays on the different 
divisions of the pledge. An open parliament may be announced 
at the preceding meeting on such a topic as, " How has the 
the pledge helped you? " or, " What part of the pledge do you 
find it hardest to keep? 11 or, " How can we keep the pledge 
more perfectly?" 



152 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

A portion of the meeting should be devoted to confessions, 
the members telling how during the past month they have failed 
to observe the pledge. Part should be devoted to prayer, ask- 
ing God to help them keep the pledge in these different par- 
ticulars. There might well be a short talk from some older 
Endeavorer, telling from his longer experience how the pledge 
is helpful. The United Society of Christian Endeavor publishes 
a Bible-reading on the pledge that may be used at this meeting, 
and the Juniors will like to select beforehand from the hymnal 
songs that are appropriate to the different portions of the pledge, 
which may be sung after the essays considering those portions. 

Progress. — Urge the members of the lookout committee to 
make themselves models in all respects regarding which they 
are themselves to oversee the Juniors. Urge them to advance 
in their society work, taking part in more and more difficult 
ways, not resting satisfied merely with reading a verse ; and set 
before them as one of the objects of this advance that they then 
will be able consistently to teach others. 

The members of the committee keep careful account of the 
way in which each Junior takes part in every meeting ; utilize 
this account. It is a good plan for the committee to make for 
each member a written monthly report, stating how many times 
he has taken part during the month, and in precisely what ways, 
with possibly a comparison with former months, a word of com- 
mendation for progress or of warning for retrogression. 

A similar report should be made before the whole society 
without mentioning names ; and the work of the society along 
the lines of prayer-meeting participation should be carefully 
summed up, — as that, during the month, so many had taken 
part by praying, so many by testifying, so many by verse read- 
ing, so many by repeating verses. Compare this record with 
the totals for the preceding months, and praise the society if it 
has improved and advanced. 

The Record. — Furnish each member of the lookout commit- 
tee with a little blank-book, fitly ruled, in which he may keep a 
record of the members of his division. He will note their at- 
tendance at each meeting, and the way in which they take part, 
using simple contractions, such as a vertical stroke for attend- 
ance, P for prayer, V for verse read, R for verse repeated, T for 



THE LOOKOUT COMMITTEE. 1 53 

testimony, and so forth. These books should be brought to 
all committee meetings, and a summary of their contents will 
furnish the principal portion of the monthly report of the 
committee. 

Stars and Hearts. — The lookout committee may use this 
method of encouraging the Juniors to take part in their meet- 
ings : Upon a blackboard are written the names of the active 
members, followed by five spaces for the four or five meetings 
of the month. The members of the committee divide up the 
active members among them, and note what part, if any, they 
take in the meeting. The record is placed on the board in the 
following manner. Absent members receive a black star ; those 
that were present without taking part have a black heart placed 
after their names ; those that recite Bible verses receive silver 
stars ; and those that pray, or express their own thoughts on 
the topic, get gold stars. 

A Warning. — A little thoughtfulness before the consecra- 
tion meeting is better than a great deal of painstaking afterward. 
At the previous meeting, the committee should remind the 
society of the consecration meeting coming next week ; and dur- 
ing the week it would be well to speak in private to the few 
Juniors who experience has taught the committee are most 
likely to be unfaithful to the pledge at this meeting. 

Investigating Absences. — The Junior pledge does not con- 
tain the provision of the older societies regarding three consec- 
utive absences from the consecration meetings. The Junior 
lookout committee should watch cases of unfaithfulness with far 
more promptness than this would imply. It is best, if a Junior 
is absent for two of the weekly meetings without excuse, at 
once to look up the matter. The best way is, of course, to call 
upon the delinquent. Under no circumstances should the ab- 
sences be allowed to accumulate without investigation ; and 
whenever the investigation is made, the superintendent should 
be notified of the result. 

Looking Them Up. — It will pay the lookout committee to 
look after its absent members in the following thorough fashion. 
At the close of each meeting the superintendent makes out a 
list of active members who were absent, and hands it to the 
chairman of the lookout committee. This chairman makes out 



154 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

a written notice for each absentee, and these notices are divided 
among the members of the lookout committee to be distributed. 
They are so divided that the members can distribute the notices 
at school. This plan will do much to keep up the attendance. 

Work with Trial Members. — Repeatedly tell the members 
of the lookout committee that much of their work lies with the 
trial or associate members. In every way they are to seek to 
lead these into full membership. This may be done by earnest 
private conversations. Often the prayer meetings may be so 
turned as to influence them. Occasionally let the lookout com- 
mittee tell in open meeting why they are active members, and 
what good it has done them, asking the other Juniors to give 
similar testimonies. 

It is a good plan for the superintendent occasionally to review, 
in lookout committee meetings, the entire list of associate or 
trial members, and set the members of the committee at work 
in their behalf. Sometimes it will be best to divide these trial 
members among the committee as the active members are di- 
vided, each committeeman to make a special effort toward the 
admission into the active list of his own charges. 

New Year's Letters. — Such anniversaries as New Year's and 
Christmas furnish the lookout committee an opportunity to bind 
the society together, and to add to the zeal with which the society 
work is performed. In no way can this better be done than by 
writing little letters, to be distributed the Sunday before Christ- 
mas or New Year's. These letters will have a word about the 
approaching holiday, a wish for the happy enjoyment of it, and 
a bit of exhortation regarding faithfulness to the pledge in some 
particular wherein the committee sees that the members need 
spurring. 

Helping Each Other. — It may sometimes happen that the 
members of the Junior lookout committee, in their search for 
new members, will come across young people who should join 
the older society. A similar discovery may be made by the 
lookout committee of the older society ; and so these two com- 
mittees should work together, the chairmen frequently consult- 
ing each other. 

The necessity of graduation from the Junior to the older society 
furnishes an additional reason for this close co-operation. A joint 



THE LOOKOUT COMMITTEE. I 55 

meeting of the two committees should be held occasionally, both 
that the Juniors may learn the methods of the older committee, 
and that the older Endeavorers may come into closer touch with 
the best workers among the Juniors. 

Look Them Up. — Other hints regarding the work of the 
lookout committee will be found in chapters of this manual 
that deal with cognate subjects, such as those on the pledge, 
the consecration meeting, the attendance, and the daily readings. 



156 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 



CHAPTER XVII. 

THE ATTENDANCE AND RECORDS. 

A Warning. — There is danger in this keeping of records. 
Sometimes the superintendent and the society depend too much 
upon marks on paper. Personal appeals are needed to keep any 
society up to the highest efficiency in any direction. Both the 
superintendent and the lookout committee should be earnest in 
hunting up absentees, and winning them to faithful attendance ; 
in speaking to those who have been tardy, and urging upon them 
promptness in the future. 

Let Them Keep the Record. — Whatever method of recording 
the attendance of the Juniors at the meetings the superintendent 
may adopt for her private convenience, the Juniors themselves 
should be set to keeping a record also. This work is easy and 
definite ; and it will help them to appreciate the need of prompt- 
ness and regularity, and to feel their own responsibility for the 
success of the society along these lines. 

Simple Marking. — Teach the members of the lookout com- 
mittee, if they keep the record of attendance, this simple way of 
marking. If a Junior is absent, make no mark opposite his 
name. If he is present, make a straight mark. If he is present 
and takes part, change the straight mark to a cross. If he is 
present and does not take part, draw a circle about the straight 
mark at the conclusion of the meeting. 

Utilize Them. — Though the keeping of a record of attendance 
is a valuable training in itself, yet the superintendent should 
count it a great loss if she makes no use of these records after 
they have been made. Frequently she should speak to the 
Juniors about their progress in the matter of regularity, sum- 
marizing their attendance for the past week or month, and 
comparing it with the attendance for formei periods. Facts 
regarding the attendance should always be put in the report, 
and the superintendent should be as hearty in her praise of 



THE ATTENDANCE AND RECORDS. 



157 



regularity and promptness as she is earnest in her reproof and 
exhortation if there is any defect in this matter. 

The Higher Motive. — In all your strivings after improved 
attendance, urge upon the Juniors the higher motive. I should 
offer prizes for regular attendance seldom, if ever. Teach the 
Juniors the reason for good attendance, showing them how 
habits of regularity, formed when they are young, will remain 
with them and strengthen all their future life ; how their ex- 
ample will lead others to become faithful ; how much they are 
losing if they remain away even from a single meeting ; and 
above all urging upon them the one great motive, that Christ 
wants them to be there, where they can come closest to him. 

As They Come In. — I do not approve of the plan of calling 
the roll at every meeting. It soon becomes monotonous, and 
the superintendent is unable to take up new plans. A roll-call 
once a month, at the consecration meeting, is sufficient, though 
of course the attendance should be regularly recorded. If none 
of the methods elsewhere spoken of are adopted, the superin- 
tendent should herself record the attendance as the members 
enter the room, not trusting to her memory to mark her book 



Personal Record Cards. — Some Junior superintendents will 
like to use personal record cards, on which the Junior records 
for himself his attendance during the Sundays of the month. 
The following is a sample. The fifth space, of course, will not 
be filled except when there is a fifth Sunday in the month. 



MY RECORD 

AT 

Junior Christian Endeavor Society. 

For the month of 






1st Sunday. 


2d Sunday. 


3d Sunday. 


4th Sunday. 


5th Sunday. 












Say whether present or absent. If absent, why ? 
Name ... 





I58 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

Hearts and Stars. — A Massachusetts superintendent has 
originated this ingenious method of recording attendance and 
participation in the prayer meeting. On a large piece of paste- 
board she writes the names of her Juniors. Following each 
name are thirteen spaces, one for each week of the quarter. If 
any of the Juniors must be absent, but sends a verse or a mes- 
sage, or if he comes and reads his own verse, a blue heart is 
stuck in the place opposite his name. If he has prepared his 
verse so well that he is able to recite it, a red heart is pasted on 
instead of the blue. If he makes any original remarks, gives 
any testimony, or offers a sentence prayer, he has a gilt star. 
This record is made during the meeting by some one who sits 
behind the children so that their attention is in no way diverted, 
and at the conclusion of the meeting it is brought before the 
society. 

Attendance Prizes. — Many Junior workers find it helpful to 
offer a small prize for regular attendance at the Junior society. 
The pastor of a Methodist Junior Christian Endeavor society 
gives each child a fifteen-cent Junior silver badge for attendance 
at ten meetings in succession. When the Junior comes twenty 
times in succession, the fifteen-cent badge is returned, and a 
twenty-cent blue enamelled badge is received in exchange, the 
first being used for some one else. The Sunday school or the 
older Christian Endeavor society pays for these badges, and 
they find that it pays them. 

Junior Circles. — Quebec Juniors have adopted what is called 
the "circle plan 1 ' of keeping track of the attendance on their 
meetings. The entire membership is divided into groups or 
circles of from eight to ten each. These circles are numbered, 
and one member of the lookout committee is placed in charge 
of each group. Every member of the group is furnished with a 
card which contains the names of all the members of his group. 
With this card each member of the circle keeps account of the 
attendance of all the other members, recording also the way in 
which each takes part in the meeting. It is sought thus to 
interest each member of the group in every other member, so 
that all will seek to find out the reason for the absence of all 
absentees, and in helping the indifferent to take part in the 



THE ATTENDANCE AND RECORDS. 1 59 

Thorough — It may seem a rather stern method ; but some 
Junior superintendents have found it advisable for the secretary 
to sit in front of the society with a list of the members, marking 
each one present, crossing this mark as each takes part, and 
crossing it again for each prayer. At the close of the meeting 
the names of those who have not taken part are read, and at 
the end of each quarter the names of those who have been 
present and who have taken part in each meeting are read. , 

Attendance Badge Records. — A spur to faithful attendance 
may be made by utilizing the ribbon badges in the following 
manner : When the Junior is present at every meeting of the 
month, paste on the badge a gilt star. If the Junior is absent 
any Sunday of the month, leave the space for that month 
vacant. This plan necessitates new badges, probably every 
year. 

A Peg Record. — The Juniors will take pleasure in keeping 
their own record of attendance. Let them do it after the follow- 
ing fashion : Obtain a pine board of appropriate size, and make 
in it as many holes as you have Juniors, with a few extra for 
future growth. Write above each hole the name of one of the 
members. Below the board, which is fastened near the door of 
your society room, place a small basket swinging by a ribbon. 
This basket is to contain pegs, which fit into the holes of the 
board. 

Each Junior as he enters stops at the board, takes a peg, and 
places it in the hole under his name. The membership of the 
society should be divided among the members of the lookout 
committee, and at the close of each meeting the committeemen 
stop and examine the board to see if the Juniors belonging to 
their divisions have been present. If any hole is empty, the 
Junior thus designated is hunted up during the following week. 

Self-Recording. — An excellent method is reported by one 
of the State Junior superintendents. Write the names of all 
the Juniors upon a large chart. After each name leave a space 
for every Sunday in the year. Before the meeting, place this 
chart by the door, and put a pencil near by. As each Junior 
enters, he is expected to mark his own attendance with a cross 
in the proper space. If he is tardy, he writes a T in this 
space. 



l6o THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

At the end of three months a silver pin is given to each 
Junior who has not been tardy, and has been present at every 
meeting. If he is similarly faithful for the next three months, 
he returns the pin, and receives a better silver one. At the end 
of a year of equal faithfulness this second pin is returned, and a 
gold pin given the Junior, which he keeps. 

A simpler method is this. Place in the vestibule a pencil 
tablet with a pencil, and instruct the Juniors to write their 
names on this as they enter. For a large society it would be 
necessary to have several tablets, in different places. 



SOMETHING ABOUT ROLL-CALLS. l6l 



CHAPTER XVIII. 

SOMETHING ABOUT ROLL-CALLS. 

RolUcall Variations. — Do not call the roll of the society 
yourself. This is something the Juniors can do, and so they 
should be taught to do it. See that the officer who calls the 
roll uses a strong voice and enunciates distinctly. Maintain 
quiet in the society while this exercise is going on. An admira- 
ble plan for a variation in the roll-call is for each chairman of 
the committees to call the roll of his own committee, the secre- 
tary noting at the same time who are present. 

" Faithful." — Some Junior superintendents have found it a 
good plan to call the roll at each meeting, the responses from 
the Juniors being with either the word " Faithful," or the word 
"Present." The former response is used by those alone who 
have kept their pledge by reading their Bibles every day. At 
the monthly business meeting of the Young People's society, 
there is read the roll of honor from the Junior society, this roll 
of honor containing the names of all who have answered 
"Faithful " at every meeting during the month. 

One Verse a Month. — Many societies call the roll of the 
Juniors at every meeting, the Juniors responding with the repe- 
tition of Bible verses. Sometimes this verse is the same during 
the month ; and at the consecration meeting a new verse is re- 
peated, which is the verse chosen by the Junior for the coming 
month. 

The Record. — If you wish at some time to emphasize the 
good or bad attendance of each Junior, let the secretary call the 
roll, each member responding " Present," while after each re- 
sponse the chairman of the lookout committee states the number 
of times the responding member has been absent during the 
past month, making the same statement, of course, in the case 
of absent members. 

Train Their Eyes. — Whenever you form a roll of the society, 



l62 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

to be placed on the blackboard or hung on the wall, let it be 
most carefully written or printed, the letters distinct and clear, 
and sufficiently large to be read without straining the eyes. 
Make everything of this sort as pretty and tasteful as you can. 
Remember that all such things form a decided though uncon- 
scious training of the children's artistic sense. If you are in- 
capable of this work, get some good draughtsman to help you. 
Make tasteful use of colored chalk, colored ink, paints, gilding, 
and of colored paper cut out to form pretty silhouettes. When 
you have occasion to make a new roll, form it on a different 
plan from any you have set before the Juniors previously. 

A Merit Roll. — The best form of a merit roll consists of two 
parts. One is a large wall roll for the names, opposite each 
name being placed a star when the Junior has accomplished 
work of a certain kind. These stars should be of different 
colors. By the side of this large roll hangs a smaller one 
which is the key to it. It contains stars of each color, oppo- 
site the star being written the work which that star signifies. 
The following is the full list sent in by one society that has 
tried this plan : — 

Books of the Bible, 
Ten Commandments, 
Ten verses containing promises, 
Five verses containing commands, 
Twenty-five names by which Christ is called, 
The Beatitudes, 
The Lord's parables, 
The Lord's miracles, 
The Twenty-first Psalm, 
The Thirty-fourth Psalm, 
His favorite chapter of John, 
The twelve apostles, 
A short story of the life of each apostle, 
A short story of the life of Christ, 

A short story of the life of Ruth for the girls, and of David for the 
boys. 

I advise superintendents to make use only occasionally of 
honor rolls, merit rolls, and similar devices. Appeal to the 
Juniors on higher grounds, whenever you can, making it their 



SOMETHING ABOUT ROLL-CALLS. 163 

desire to do good to please God rather than to be seen of 
man. 

The Roll. — Probably most superintendents will not find it 
advisable to tie the meeting down to a roll-call, however valua- 
ble this exercise may be as an occasional feature. The roll, 
however, should always be kept accurately by the secretary. 
The secretary should note the attendance of visitors, as well as 
of the members, keeping a separate list for these. 

For other points regarding the use of the roll, see the chapter 
on the consecration meeting, and also that on attendance. 



164 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 



CHAPTER XIX. 

THE DAILY BIBLE-READING. 

The Daily Verse. —The little books in which the United 
Society of Christian Endeavor prints the daily readings for 
the Juniors are very attractively printed and bound. They cost 
$1.50 a hundred, or three cents each, and they should be in use 
in all Junior societies. 

Daily Reading Thoughts. — Once in a while ask the Juniors 
to bring, each one of them, a single thought which they have 
gained from some one of the daily readings of the week. This 
will be their contribution to the coming meeting. To vary this 
method, ask the Juniors to write out one thought on each of the 
six daily readings. These papers are to be brought to the 
meeting, and all the Juniors will read them. First the Juniors 
will read their thoughts on the daily reading for Monday, then 
for Tuesday, and so on. Possibly the Juniors might be asked 
to vote which day had given the best thought. For a large 
society, of course, this plan would have to be modified, the 
daily reading for only one day, possibly, being taken. 

An Advance Reading. — It might not be a good plan for 
every week, but occasionally, at least, go over the daily read- 
ings for the coming week with your Juniors at the meeting, to 
show them how they bear upon next Sunday's topic, and to 
show them also how they may obtain from the daily readings 
thoughts on the lesson, and how they should read their Bible, 
keeping the coming Christian Endeavor meeting constantly in 
view. 

Daily Reading Songs. — The Juniors will like once in a 
while to select songs that are appropriate to the daily readings. 
Ask them a week beforehand to do this, and then at the next 
meeting let the Juniors recite the daily readings one after the 
other, singing after each the appropriate hymn. 

Daily Reading Illustration. — Let the Junior superintendent 



THE DAILY BIBLE-READING. l6$ 

occasionally prepare some illustration for each daily reading of 
the week. It may be an original drawing, or some picture cut 
out of some paper or magazine, or it may simply be an object. 
Passing these around among the children, ask them to tell which 
daily reading is illustrated by which drawing, and then suggest 
that the Juniors talk about these illustrations in the course of 
the meeting. 

Daily Reading Leaders. — Occasionally appoint seven lead- 
ers for the prayer meeting, one for each daily reading of the 
week. Ask these different leaders to speak each upon his own 
daily reading, showing how it illustrates the topic. A variation 
of this method is to appoint one leader and six assistant lead- 
ers, who may be called " followers. 1 ' After the main leader has 
spoken upon the topic, these six may speak, briefly and in 
order, on the daily verses for each day of the week. 

10=9=8. — For encouraging faithfulness in Bible reading, let 
the secretary call the roll every Sunday, requesting those who 
have read their Bibles every day of the week to respond 10, 
those who have missed one day to respond 9, etc. 

His Favorite Verse. — It inspires new interest in the daily 
reading, if occasionally you ask the Juniors, telling them your 
plan at the preceding meeting, to repeat each of them from the 
daily readings of the week the verse he likes best. 

In the Meeting. — Sometimes, at least, let the superinten- 
dent begin the meeting by asking, "Will some one please re- 
peat Monday's daily reading?" A Junior rises and repeats the 
verse, which is in turn repeated by the superintendent, slowly 
and with emphasis. The superintendent then explains carefully 
the meaning of the verse, and shows the Juniors how it bears 
upon the topic of the meeting. Tuesday's verse is then given 
by another Junior, and treated in the same way, and so on 
through the entire seven verses. The whole exercise does not 
occupy more than ten minutes. 

A Gain. — One of the advantages possessed by the laborious 
plan of writing out the daily readings on slips of paper, which 
are given to each Junior, is this: that the lookout committee 
may be set to giving these slips to each absent member, thus 
reminding the absent members of the society meeting to come, 
and interesting the members of the lookout committee in look- 
ing up the absent. 



l66 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

Special BibIe=Readings. — Junior Bible-reading will be 
greatly promoted if, in addition to the regular Bible verses laid 
down in the uniform topics, the superintendent occasionally as- 
signs for the week some special Bible work, such as the reading 
of the shortest chapter in the Bible, Ps. 117 ; the reading of the 
longest chapter, Ps. 119; the reading of six parables, six prom- 
ises, six prayers ; or the following lesson in Bible arithmetic : 
addition, 2 Pet. 1 : 5-7; subtraction, Rev. 22 : 19; multiplica- 
tion, 2 Cor. 9 : 6-10; division, 2 Tim. 2 : 15; profit and loss, 
Mark 8 : 36; bookkeeping, Mai. 3 : 16, 17. 

Study One Book. — For extra work in Bible-reading, in ad- 
dition to the daily readings, the Juniors may be set to reading — 
all of them — the same book of the Bible for a month. At the 
end of the month the pastor may be called in to question the 
society as to the author of the book, and the book's particular 
teachings. 

The Best Time. — A wise superintendent will instruct the 
children as to the best time of day for reading in the Bible. 
Usually, of course, this will be the morning. If, however, for 
any reason, the parents are not likely to be at leisure in the 
morning to explain the verses when they need explanation, the 
evening is a better time. Teach the Juniors not only to get 
help from their parents, but to think over the verses by them- 
selves, and above all to pray over them when they cannot 
understand them. 

Rainbow Bookmarks. — The Juniors will appreciate rain- 
bow bookmarks, and these will help them to attend to their 
daily readings. Strips of baby ribbon of different bright colors 
are fastened to a single brass ring. One color is to be chosen 
for each day. The Juniors will place scarlet, for instance, in 
Monday's Bible reading, green in Tuesday's, and so on. The 
fixing of these bookmarks in the appropriate places in the 
Bibles may be made an occasional exercise in verse-finding in 
the Junior meetings. 

Badges and Bible=Reading. — An Illinois Junior society 
makes ingenious use of its society colors to promote Bible- 
reading at home. The colors are pink and white. Any Junior 
that completes the reading of the book of Matthew receives a 
pink ribbon badge, and for the reading of any other additional 



THE DAILY BIBLE-READING. \6j 

book of the New Testament a white star is printed upon the 
badge. 

Daily Reading Stars. — A Kansas Junior superintendent has 
had little cards printed, bearing a large gilt star composed of 
many smaller stars. There is one star for each day in the month. 
Every day the Junior performs the Bible-reading assigned, he 
thrusts a pin through one of the small stars. The Juniors them- 
selves might be set to making these cards, and they will serve as 
useful records and faithful reminders. 

Another Record. — Some Presbyterian Juniors of Pennsyl- 
vania use, in order to promote fidelity to the daily-reading clause 
of the pledge, a pretty little card showing a large C. E. mono- 
gram, the E bearing the legend, " For Christ and the Church, 1 ' 
and the C, " I promise to read the Bible every day. 1 ' About the 
outer edge of the C are thirty-one white dots, one for each day 
in the month ; and as the Junior is faithful to his pledge he pricks 
one of these dots with a pin. Such cards are soon to be sold 
by the United Society. 

A Calendar Reminder. — An admirable reminder of the daily 
Bible-reading is a year's calendar printed in small type, on a card 
of convenient size to be kept in the Bible. Tie at the top of each 
card a tiny bow of baby ribbon, and stick a pin in it. As the 
Junior each day fulfils his pledge of Bible-reading, let him punch 
out the date. In this way unfaithfulness will speak for itself. 

A New Card Each Week. — If the superintendent has a 
duplicating apparatus and the necessary time, one of the best 
ways of emphasizing the Junior daily readings is to print, by 
means of the duplicating apparatus, the daily readings for each 
week upon a piece of card-board, giving these cards out to the 
Juniors every Sunday. The boys and girls will place these cards 
where they can be seen daily, and will thus be led to remember 
their duty. 

Diaries. — Some Junior superintendents spur their Juniors to 
daily Bible-reading by giving to each active member at the be- 
ginning of the year a diary. These diaries are brought to the 
weekly prayer meeting and placed on the desk of the secretary. 
During the opening part of the meeting this officer copies in the 
diaries, from The Junior Golden Rule, the daily verse references 
for the week, and then c-uietly distributes the diaries to their 



l68 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

owners. This plan, of course, is practicable only in a small 
society, and must be modified in a large one. Each day the 
Junior looks up and reads the Bible reference, and copies the 
verse in the blank space of the diary. 

A Reminder. — To stimulate the daily Bible-reading of the 
Juniors, at least one hard-working superintendent prepared for 
each Junior a round of card-board, on the circumference of which 
was placed as many gilt stars as there were days in the month, 
with a big gilt " C. E." in the centre. Beside each star, point- 
ing toward the centre, the superintendent carefully wrote the 
reference to be read on that day. The whole was hung up with 
a loop of blue ribbon. On each day the Junior was to prick with 
a pin the star for that day, provided the reference was read ; and 
the whole was to be returned to the superintendent on the first 
Sabbath of the next month. 



THE SOCIETY AND THE SUNDAY SCHOOL. 169 



CHAPTER XX. 

THE SOCIETY AND THE SUNDAY SCHOOL. 

The Sunday = School Committee. — Much of the work of the 
Junior Sunday-school committee is along the same lines as that 
of the older society. For example, they should be on the watch 
at the church services for children who are strangers, that they 
may invite them to come to Sunday school with them. They 
are to seek new scholars for the Sunday school among their 
acquaintances and friends throughout the town. These new 
scholars they should call for in person, introduce to their class and 
teacher, and in everyway make them feel at home in the school. 

It should be the especial pride of the Junior Sunday-school 
committee to help the superintendent carry out all his desires, 
and to assist the teachers of their own classes. They should set 
an example of orderliness before their associates. They should 
be prompt in attendance, and the superintendent should place it 
upon their consciences in every way to be models to their mates 
in Sunday-school work. 

This committee should see that notices of the Junior society 
are given to the superintendent, wherever it is the custom to 
read these notices from the Sunday-school desk. There are cer- 
tain classes of the Sunday school with whose teachers they may 
well co-operate — the primary department and other classes of 
Junior age. 

If the teacher desires such assistance, this committee should 
hold itself in readiness to visit the scholars that have been absent 
and that are sick. They should report to the superintendent the 
causes of absences. It is well to divide the Sunday-school com- 
mittee, assigning one or more to each teacher who desires their 
assistance. 

New Juniors. — One of the most important duties of the 
Sunday-school committee will be to keep on the watch for new 
members that may be obtained from the children of the Sunday 



I70 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

school. Each might canvass his own class, and obtain canvass- 
ers in classes that are not represented on the committee, re- 
porting all names, of course, to the lookout committee. In 
some cases it has been found advantageous to issue, solely to 
Sunday-school scholars, special invitations to the Junior meet- 
ings, neatly printed on a manifolder. 

A Sunday=School Record. — The Junior Sunday-school 
committee may keep a record of the attendance of the Juniors 
at Sunday school, the society being proportioned out among the 
different members of the committee who are in various classes. 
This attendance may be reported at the monthly business meet- 
ing of the society, those Juniors who are present every Sunday 
being reported as perfect. 

A Sunday=School Social. — An Ohio Lutheran Junior so- 
ciety once found it a joy to give a social to the entire Sunday 
school of their church. Many a strong Junior society would be 
glad and proud to do this. For the smaller societies, however, 
it would be a sufficiently laborious undertaking to give an occa- 
sional social to the Sunday-school scholars of their own age 
alone. If the lookout committee is active at the social, not a 
few new members may be gained for the Junior society. 

Getting New Scholars. — It is an excellent plan for the 
Sunday-school committee occasionally to distribute among their 
friends of the same age pieces of paper upon which may be 
written the names of children who do not attend any Sunday 
school, and who may be persuaded to go to theirs. The Sun : 
day-school committee will then hunt up these boys and girls, 
and give them a pressing invitation to connect themselves with 
their school. 

Music and Flowers. — The Junior choir may be utilized in 
the Sunday school and may help greatly in the singing. The 
entire Junior society may occasionally practise Sunday-school 
songs, and may help very much in the process of learning new 
pieces. On occasions when such music is to be practised, the 
superintendent should get her Juniors to be present themselves 
at the rehearsals, and to see that other scholars are present. 
The flower committee of the Junior society may well take upon 
itself the decoration of the Sunday school, sending flowers to 
the sick of the Sunday school, just as the flower committee of 



THE SOCIETY AND THE SUNDAY SCHOOL. \J\ 

the older society performs the same offices for the sick of the 
church. 

At the Close of the Sunday School. — It is a good idea, 
if the society is small, to call the Juniors together for a moment 
at the close of the Sunday school, giving them a thought regard- 
ing the coming Junior meeting, or a question bearing on the 
topic, which each is to answer. Of course this could be done 
at the meeting before, but the matter is far fresher in the minds 
of the children if a moment after Sunday school is taken for 
this purpose. 

The Primary Teachers. — The Sunday-school teachers that 
are over the younger children, those of Junior age, should co- 
operate most heartily and closely with the Junior superintendent, 
not merely in the Bible work, but in all other respects, helping 
to find new members for the Junior society, and speaking often 
in the Sunday school of the Junior Endeavor work and its ad- 
vantages. These primary teachers should be frequent, and 
welcome visitors at the Junior prayer meetings. 



172 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 



CHAPTER XXL 

AT WORK FOR MISSIONS. 

A Missionary Assistant. — Missionary work among the 
Juniors deserves enough care and attention to occupy the time 
of an assistant superintendent who is responsible alone for this 
branch of the work, thus relieving the superintendent, and add- 
ing to the interest the Juniors will take in missions. If there is 
no assistant superintendent, possibly the superintendent may 
get some enthusiastic missionary worker of the older society to 
relieve her of this part of her duties. 

Country Leaders. — One Junior worker urges that the Junior 
missionary committee consist of a boy or a girl for each country 
that is to be studied. These are to be the leaders of the differ- 
ent missionary meetings, and each is to select members of the 
society to help him in studying his country and in carrying 
on his meeting. The entire society is thus to be divided. 

Each of these leaders is furnished with a little blank-book, in 
which, under the direction of the superintendent, he is to write 
easy questions regarding his missionary country. Each of 
these question books is to be of a different bright color. 

After the country has been studied in the society, these ques- 
tions upon the study are to be read by the member of the mis- 
sionary committee for that country, at any meeting when the 
superintendent may call for them. They furnish a useful review. 

The Committee Responsible. — If possible, place your mis- 
sionary meetings entirely in the hands of the missionary com- 
mittee. This responsibility will make them more faithful to 
their work. The committee might also be empowered to select 
the leader for that meeting. 

The Next Meeting. — Always announce at the end of your 
missionary meetings what will be the next country studied, and 
ask the Juniors to keep on the watch for interesting items 
about that country, showing them where these may be obtained. 



AT WORK FOR MISSIONS. 1 73 

Let each be asked to bring such items to the next missionary 
meeting. It pays to look as far ahead as possible in this work. 

For a Year. — A list of the missionary meetings arranged 
even for a year ahead, and hung up in the meeting room, will 
teach the children to take long thoughts, and make plans for 
coming studies. This list should state what country is to be 
studied each month, and who is to be the leader of each 
meeting. 

A Shrewd Move. — Kill two birds with one stone by occa- 
sionally giving out to the Juniors some bit of home work in the 
study of missions, in the accomplishment of which they will have 
to ask the aid of their parents. In this way you will plant the 
seeds of missionary enthusiasm in many older minds. 

Helping their Elders. — Why not obtain from the older En- 
deavorers an occasional invitation to the Juniors to assist them 
in their own missionary meeting ? The Juniors will be very 
proud of the responsibility thus laid upon them, and will be sure 
to astonish the older Endeavorers by the zest and ability with 
which they accomplish their task. 

A Missionary Reading. — Ask the worker from the older 
society who looks after the Junior missionary committee to meet 
these Juniors one afternoon in each month and read missionary 
articles to them, for the purpose of inspiring them with greater 
zeal, and of giving them a fundamental knowledge of at least 
the missionary stations of their denomination. 

Note-Books. — Missionary note-books should be given to all 
the Juniors, and they should be required to write in them the 
most important missionary facts, those you are especially anx- 
ous to have them learn. The very act of writing down these 
facts will help to fix them in the memory, while the note-book 
will constantly be referred to. 

One Thing Thoroughly. — You cannot teach the children 
everything about the many mission countries ; but you can teach 
them thoroughly a few things, and then let them grasp what 
they can of the rest. Choose some one or two subjects, and 
familiarize the Juniors with the facts along these lines. For 
example, throughout one entire year spent in the study of mis- 
sion countries, take as your main theme the houses of the 
people, or the condition of the women, or the customs regard- 



174 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

ing children, or the fashion of dress, or study one great city in 
each country — anything, in fact, so as to get a standard of 
comparison and a line of continuity. 

Utilize the Day School. — Do not forget that your children 
are studying in their day schools the geography, history, and 
natural history of the mission countries. Do not fail to make 
the story of missions more vivid to them, and to knit together 
their school with their church work, by frequently asking, in the 
course of your mission studies, questions that will bring out 
what they have learned in school. At the same time, for in- 
stance, that you teach them where missions in China began, 
teach them what part of China sends us our Chinese laborers, as 
well as a large portion of our tea. At the same time that they 
learn where Carey worked, ask them questions about the 
Ganges River and Calcutta. When you are studying the life of 
Paton, bring out facts concerning Oceanica. 

Poems and Songs. — Obtain all the poems on missions that 
you can find, not forgetting, of course, the great missionary 
hymns. Have the children commit these to memory, and use 
one at least for every missionary meeting. Special missionary 
music may also be provided, and thus the music committee will 
be set to work as well as the missionary committee. 

Mottoes. — Missionary mottoes may well be painted or 
drawn, and framed for hanging before the society in the meeting 
room. Such mottoes as Carey's famous sentence, " Attempt 
great things for God ; expect great things from God ; " or John 
Eliot's, " Prayer and pains through faith in Jesus Christ can do 
anything; 11 or again Carey's, " I cobble shoes to pay expenses,' 1 
— will, if their story is told, do much to keep the missionary ideal 
before the minds of these young Christians. In addition, it 
would be well to have some of the Bible rules for giving, such 
as, " The Lord loveth a cheerful giver ; " or, " He that giveth to 
the poor lendeth to the Lord ; " or, " To do good and to com- 
municate forget not," — hung in different parts of the room. 

Pictures. — A missionary picture book is easily made from 
the beautiful illustrations to travel articles that appear in such 
abundance nowadays in our popular magazines, as well as in 
ninny of the missionary monthlies. It is best to form a port- 
folio of separate leaves, the pictures being pasted on stout card- 



AT WORK FOR MISSIONS. 175 

board, so that they can be separated and passed around among 
the Juniors. 

As Fractions. — A helpful article on Junior work, by 
" V. F. P., 1 ' suggests the vivifying of missionary information by 
the use of fractions, diagrams, arrangements like arithmetical 
sums, etc. She gives the following examples : — 

Do you want to show a good reason for giving to missionaries ? 
There hangs the map of the world. You show the United States as 
one-tenth of the area : in the corresponding tenth live the Chinese. 

We have 65,000,000 people. 
They have 400,000,000. 
They have I missionary to 

250,000 people. 
We have 1 minister to 

500. 
In each 1 knowing Christ 

250 never have heard of him. 

Write these things as the children have examples at school, 

fractions, equations : — 

India = United States east of Mississippi. 

I missionary to 

Siam : — 

300,000 people. 

, . .1 missionary to 

South America 7 : — 

600,000 people. 

Brazil = United States or one-half South America in area. 
In all South America one-third the work done in 

Philadelphia. 
The Chinese = one-quarter the world's population. 
Suppose you are talking about the need of home missions in 
the United States, and wish the children to comprehend the 
many diverse nationalities that make up this country. Get the 
Juniors to write them upon the board in a long column, and see 
how much more impressive it will be. 

English, French, Italian, Norwegian, 

Irish, German, Spanish, Chinese, 

Scotch, Dutch, Russian, Japanese, etc. 

Flags. — Do not forget to use little flags, placed upon pins 
so that they can be fastened in the map, and inscribed with the 



I76 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

names of the missionary heroes about whom you have been 
talking, or the modern missionaries of your church. Helpful 
exercises may be devised by means of these flags. The super- 
intendent, for instance, may ask, " Where shall I put Carey's 
flag? 11 or Bishop Thoburn's, or John Paton's ; or, "Here is a 
flag belonging to the first missionary our denomination ever 
sent out. Where on the map of the world shall I fasten it ? " 
These flags may be, also, of different colors, one color being 
reserved for your own denomination. For some uses it will be 
better to buy little circles of gummed paper, which may be 
obtained in different colors. These can be stuck on the maps 
in different places. 

Missions and Postage Stamps. — Junior workers might 
well imitate the ingenuity of a missionary worker of whom I 
have heard, who utilizes the passion for stamp-collecting which 
she finds in her charges. Distributing foreign stamps, or tak- 
ing advantage of the collections the Juniors have already made, 
she has them learn as much as they can about each country 
from which stamps are obtained, and then tell what they learn 
in the missionary meetings that deal with those countries. The 
fact of actually possessing a bit of paper that has come from 
these distant regions helps greatly to give vividness both to 
them and to the missionary work. 

Junior Essayists. — Short articles on some heathen country 
will add much to the interest of missionary meetings. These 
articles should deal with the customs of the people, their 
manner of living, their dress, their religion, etc. ; and pictures 
may well be brought in, illustrating the points that are made. 

A Missionary Paper. — A missionary paper may be edited 
by the Juniors, and will add great interest to the monthly 
missionary meetings. It may be called The Junior Missionary 
Review. It should be prepared by different Juniors each month, 
and will contain news from the missionary fields, interesting 
items regarding the strange people among whom the mission- 
aries work, clippings from papers, and extracts from books. If 
it is not thought best to make it a missionary paper always, 
the idea may be applied to a general paper, in which the Juniors 
will take delight. 

Be Loyal to the Boards. — In some denominations the cen- 



AT WORK FOR MISSIONS. IJJ 

tral missionary authorities object to special causes, and wish all 
the money contributed for missions to go to one centre, by them 
to be distributed among the different missionary fields, home 
and foreign, as they think best. Other denominations appeal 
to their constituents along precisely opposite lines, assigning 
missionaries to groups of societies, by them to be entirely sup- 
ported, and calling for special contributions from their Endeav- 
orers for the building of home mission churches, or the support 
of " Christian Endeavor missionaries " in foreign lands. What- 
ever may be the policy of your denominational secretaries in 
this particular, rest assured there are wise reasons for it in the 
constitution of your church, and loyally follow out their plans. 
The essential thing is to raise the money, and you can trust 
the consecrated secretaries of the mission boards to put it to the 
best possible use. 

Don't be Narrow. — Be sure, however, that the thoughts 
and interests of your Juniors are widened to reach out beyond 
their own especial denomination, and take in the lives of the 
great heroes of missions who may have belonged to foreign 
countries or different bodies of Christians. The work of such 
men as Judson and Carey, Gilmour, Henry Martyn, Patteson, 
Morrison, Mackay, Harrington, Moffat, Livingstone, and the 
like, your Juniors should surely know about ; and the knowledge 
will add to rather than detract from their zeal for the missions 
of their own branch of the great church universal. 

Juniors and Mission Bands. — Some, who have much at 
heart the work of the mission societies among the children, 
are suffering under an ill-founded fear that the Junior societies, 
springing up in so great numbers all over the country, will 
injure the progress of the mission bands. We commend to all 
these doubters the following earnest and sensible words from 
Miss Laura Wade Rice, that well-known missionary worker 
among the Lutherans, the editor of The Children's Missionary, 
who speaks as follows, in the Lutheran Missionary Journal: — 

"A mission band stands for a pledged endeavor to raise money for 
missions, and to stimulate interest in them. An Endeavor society 
stands for a pledged endeavor to do "whatever Jesus would like to 
have " its members do. Certainly he would not like any mission band 
to relate its interest in missionary work because it has become a Junior 



I78 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

society. Nor need it do so, provided the superintendent chosen for 
the Junior work be in sympathy with the missionary movement. To 
let that interest flag is a step backward, and at utter variance with the 
true Endeavor spirit, which is onward, forward, upward, in its every 
tendency. 

A Junior Endeavor society with mission-band attachment is far in 
advance of the old " one Sunday a month missionary meeting " for 
children. The true Endeavor training on the other Sundays will make 
the members more interested in the band meeting on the one Sunday 
of the month, will have developed them in prayer, in self-sacrifice, 
and in readiness to take part, besides providing them with a perma- 
nent engagement for Sunday afternoons, which will make their band 
attendance more certain. 

For some time it was a problem with me how to combine the two; 
as it was evident that, as matters now stand, two constitutions would 
have to be adopted, for in order to be auxiliary to our Women's 
Home and Foreign Missionary Society it is necessary to adopt the 
band constitution provided by them. A very few unimportant and 
yet necessary changes were made in each for the society which we 
wished to form, the children voted on both, and our Junior Christian 
Endeavor society and Junior Christian Endeavor mission band was 
born. (The verb is singular, for they are one.) It all lies with the 
leader or superintendent. If she desires to have both, the matter is 
very simple; but she can make it an impossibility if she be uninterested 
in missions. 

Two Missionary Sundays. — One society of which I have 
heard does not think it disproportionate to give two Sundays 
in each month to missions, the first Sunday being devoted 
to foreign and the third to home missions. In answer to the 
roll-call on these Sundays, each member is requested to give 
some item of missionary information appropriate to the theme 
of the meeting. 

Home and Foreign. — It may be hard to maintain among 
vour members equal interest in both home and foreign missions. 
The fault will lie largely in your own partiality for one of these 
fields. Remember, however, that God's work lies in one place 
as much as in another, and teach the Juniors as faithfully about 
the home as the foreign fields, equally dividing the money they 
contribute, and if possible giving an equal amount of time to the 
study of each. 



AT WORK FOR MISSIONS. 1 79 

Each with His Own Missionary. — Missionary work can 
be made very vivid to the Juniors if to each Junior is assigned 
the name of some missionary, preferably of his own denomi- 
nation, whose work he is particularly to keep in mind in his 
prayers, to study about in the missionary magazines, and report 
to the society at the missionary meetings. In the sentence 
prayers at the missionary meetings, these distant workers may 
all be remembered by name. A helpful occasional exercise is a 
roll-call in which the Juniors, instead of responding "Present," 
reply to their names by giving each the name of the missionary 
who has been assigned to him. 

Missionary Correspondence. — One of the best ways of in- 
spiring interest in missions among the Juniors is through per- 
sonal correspondence with children who are under the care of 
missionaries. In one Ohio society, for example, two boys and 
two girls of the society had a tintype group taken, each getting 
a picture, the total cost being fifty cents. Each one then se- 
lected from a picture of a mission school in Africa one of the 
pupils, and wrote to that one a friendly letter, enclosing their 
picture. The letter told about their home life, their duties, their 
school, their plays, etc. In due course these Juniors received a 
splendid letter from the four little Africans, entirely original, 
and written in their peculiar dialect. Those letters gave that 
society quite an impulse toward better missionary work. 

Letters from the Field. — Cultivate missionary correspon- 
dence. If in any way you can put your Junior society in con- 
nection with some active missionary, so as to have a letter, if 
only once a year, coming from the very midst of heathendom, 
by all means do so. Remember, however, that missionaries are 
very busy people, and do not expect them to write many letters 
just for your society. It is a good plan for all the Junior socie- 
ties in the district belonging to the same denomination to obtain 
letters in this way from a single missionary, and pass them 
around. 

Adopting a Missionary's Girl. — Some Juniors I have 
heard about have "adopted," as they call it, a little girl of a 
missionary on the frontier. They have chosen her a member of 
their society, and sent her a Junior pin. She sends them in 
return an occasional letter for the consecration meeting, and in 



l8o THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

this way those Juniors are kept in touch with home mission 
work, much as other Juniors, by their correspondence with chil- 
dren in foreign lands, maintain their interest in foreign missions. 

A Little Missionary Library. — A genuine missionary aid 
for the Juniors is a collection of missionary leaflets. Your de- 
nominational board will furnish you, at slight cost, or none at 
all, with a large supply of these ; and there are other sources 
from which the collection may be enlarged. These leaflets 
should be covered with brown paper, numbered, and cata- 
logued. The society librarian should be appointed to take 
charge of these, and loan them to the members. An interest- 
ing spur to the reading of these will be to have the Juniors 
report at the next meeting upon the number of their family 
who have read these leaflets, or heard them read. 

Magazines and Tracts. — Every Junior worker should, of 
course, take the missionary magazine of his own denomination. 
He should also obtain some of the many bright missionary 
journals published for young people. The articles intended 
for older readers should be condensed and simplified by the 
superintendent before they are presented to the children. Most 
of the missionary boards publish very helpful missionary stories 
in tract form. These are of the highest value for reading in the 
missionary meetings, and to be handed around for home reading. 

Missionary Envelopes. — Set your missionary committee 
to collecting missionary scraps, and keeping them in sets of 
envelopes, appropriately labelled. There may be one envelope 
for city missions, another for home missions, and one each for 
all the foreign missionary lands. If the Juniors are interested 
in any special missionary and his work, an envelope may be set 
apart for him also. When a missionary meeting is to be held, 
produce the appropriate envelopes. Gather the missionary 
committee — or the society, if it is a small one — around a table, 
and study the items that you have collected. 

" Fuel for Missionary Fires." — This little book, by Miss 
Belle M. Brain, though written primarily for the missionary 
committees of the older societies, yet is packed full of bright 
suggestions for Junior workers. Every Junior superintendent 
should have it. It is sold by the United Society of Christian 
Endeavor for fifty cents; 



AT WORK FOR MISSIONS. l8l 

Two Funds. — Every Junior society should have two treasu- 
ries, carefully kept distinct. One should be for the current 
expenses of the society, and the other for missions. It should 
never become the practice of a society to take from a single 
treasury all it needs for topic cards, hymn-books, socials, and 
the like, giving what may chance to be left for the service of the 
Master. 

Their Own Treasurer. — Though all the committees of the 
society may well have their own secretary and treasurer, as well 
as their chairman, this is. especially necessary for the missionary 
committee, and above all when the society carries on some form 
of systematic giving. 

Work and Interest. — Your missionary meetings will be 
much more interesting if the Juniors, during the month that 
precedes, do some work for the missionary country or the mis- 
sion field which is to be studied at the coming meeting. 

Lay By Each Week. — Though, in reporting the practice 
of many superintendents, I speak in this chapter of special col- 
lections, monthly collections, and the like, yet I want it under- 
stood that I myself believe in collections at every meeting. The 
Juniors can in no other way be taught definite, systematic giving, 
and a small sum given each week will prove far more educa- 
tive than the same, or even a larger sum, given occasionally. 

Something Every Sunday. — If for any reason you do not 
find it advisable to take up a collection for missions at every 
meeting, see if you cannot induce the children to bring to every 
meeting at least something to give away, even if it is nothing 
but an apple or orange for the relief committee to give to the 
poor and the sick. It is not so much the amount that the 
children give as it is the drill in regular habits of giving, that 
will count for the cause of Christ when the children grow up. 

Self = Denial Week. — In addition to the regular gifts of the 
children, special seasons of self-denial are helpful as calling 
attention afresh to the needs of the heathen lands, and to the 
comparatively little we are already doing in proportion to our 
opportunities and abilities. These special times of self-denial 
may be the week before Christmas, New Year's week, or the 
week that closes with Christian Endeavor Day, the latter being 
preferable, as it is the time chosen by most societies, and as the 
annual missionary thank-offering comes on that day, 



l82 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

The Fulton Plan. — The Fulton plan for giving to missions, 
so-called because it has been chiefly pushed by the Rev. Albert 
A. Fulton, a Presbyterian missionary to China, is that in ac- 
cordance with which each Junior promises to give two cents a 
week to missions, this to be divided between the home and 
foreign fields. The United Society of Christian Endeavor has 
for sale blank-books to be used in connection with this system. 
These will be found helpful, though they are not absolutely 
necessary. 

A Penny a Week. — The Fulton pledge plan may thus be 
modified for the Juniors. The pledge should read: "I desire 
to give, if possible, one cent a week through our Junior society, 
to help in sending the good news of the Saviour's love to those 
boys and girls who have never heard of him." This pledge is 
engrossed at the head of the roll of honor by a skilled penman, 
and all the members who will are got to sign it. 

It is a good idea for the missionary committee to permit the 
Juniors to make at one time larger contributions than a penny, 
crediting them with as many Sundays in advance as their con- 
tribution will cover, and reminding them if they do not again 
begin their penny contributions when this time is up. 

In some of the Western States pennies are not common, and 
in one church this plan is used. The chairman of the Junior 
missionary committee sits at a table at each meeting. To this 
table the Juniors bring their money, and the amount is credited 
in a little book. While this money lasts each Junior can receive 
from the missionary treasurer, every Sunday, a little envelope 
containing a penny. This envelope is placed by the Junior in 
the contribution box. 

A Good Beginning. — One useful method of teaching the 
Juniors early to make a wise division of their money between 
themselves and the cause of Christ, is to ask each to keep a 
private record of his spendings, setting down in a blank-book 
just what he spends for toys, candy, and the like, and in another 
part just what he gives to good causes. 

How Earned. — So far as I know, a Canadian Congregational 
society originated the excellent plan of wrapping up the money 
given to the missionary collection in pieces of paper, on which 
each Junior has written the way in which he earned the money. 



AT WORK FOR MISSIONS. 1 83 

The collection being received, the superintendent unrolls these 
slips and reads them aloud. " Helping mother," " Being up in 
time for breakfast," " Saved from car-fare," thus run the inter- 
esting records. 

A Processional. — A missionary processional is a good plan 
for interesting the Juniors in giving. A missionary plate is 
placed on the leader's table each week. At the close of the 
exercises of the hour, the Juniors are arranged in a circle, the 
organist plays, " Hear the Pennies Dropping," the circle starts, 
and they all march by the plate, dropping in their pennies as 
they pass. 

An Offering Hymn. — It is helpful to set the children to 
singing while the collection is being received. The following 
beautiful hymn has been written for this purpose by Rev. S. 
Winchester Adriance, a former general secretary of the United 
Society of Christian Endeavor. It is to be sung to the tune, 
" Jesus, keep me near the cross." 

Take the gift, O Saviour, King, 

Here I come presenting ; 
With my love the gift I bring, 

All my heart consenting. 

Chorus. 

Cheerfully, willingly, 

Here I bring my off 'ring ; 
Use it for thy service, Lord, 

Banish sin and suffering. 

Send thy gospel far away 

To the lands of sorrow ; 
Let the light of God's sweet day 

Bring a glad to-morrow. 

For our own home-land we pray, 

Blessed by thy great kindness ; 
May thy gospel have full sway, 

Conq'ring darkest blindness. 

Bless the little store I give ; 

Make it tenfold greater ; 
Grant me grace to thee to live, 

Who art my Creator. 



1S4 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

Fifty=Two Cents a Year. — One of the best methods of 
collecting the pennies, when the members pledge one cent a 
week for missions, is to give the Juniors a thick pasteboard card 
having places for four pennies cut in it, with a fifth hole in case 
the month has five Sundays. Printed or written on the card 
should be the pledge of systematic giving. The pennies are to 
be fastened into the holes with strips of gummed paper. At the 
end of the month the Juniors hand in their cards, the pennies 
are taken out, and the cards returned to be filled up again. 

A Card=Bank. — A missionary offering card will prove of 
service in teaching the Juniors habits of systematic beneficence. 
This card has, pasted to the back, ten little envelopes, each de- 
signed for five cents, either in pennies or in a single coin. After 
each envelope is filled, it is to be sealed by the gummed flap. 
On the face of the card is the Junior pledge, with a space for the 
name of the Junior and the society, together with the superin- 
tendent's certificate that the money is given by the Junior. 
This card, which has been put to the test of practical use and 
found very helpful, is sold by the United Society for $3.50 a 
hundred copies. 

Mite Boxes. — The use of mite boxes is a very great help 
in stirring up the Juniors to give systematically and regularly. 
These boxes may be obtained from most of the mission boards 
at a very slight cost. Appropriate Bible verses may be printed 
on three sides of the boxes, and in front the name of the church 
and society. 

A Tithing Company. — The children will delight in the fol- 
lowing method of missionary giving. Organize an association to 
be known as the Christian Tithing Company. Make the assist- 
ant superintendent the cashier, and one of the older boys 
receiving teller. All the Juniors who agree to give to the Lord's 
work one-tenth of the money they call their own become deposi- 
tors in the bank. 

Upon their first deposit they receive a small bank-book, of 
which they will think a great deal. In this book their account 
is strictly kept. The teller has a large book in which he keeps 
an account for the bank. 

This money does not belong to the society, but the general 
fund is accessible for all the Christian giving of the Juniors. 



AT WORK FOR MISSIONS. 1 85 

At the first meeting of every month the bank is open. At that 
time deposits are received, and the Juniors can draw from their 
accounts. 

A boy, in a society that tried this plan, once succeeded in 
making quite a profitable sale, and his mother's testimony was : 
" Indeed, that child derived more pleasure from the fact that 
he could make a large deposit in the bank than from any benefits 
that came to him personally." 

Missionary Quilts. — Some Juniors desiring to increase the 
amount of money in their treasury, made a quilt of twenty-five 
blocks, each being stamped with some pretty design, and out- 
lined in silk by the members. Other Juniors got their friends 
to pay five cents each for the privilege of writing their names on 
blocks, which were then outlined in silk and quilted together. 
The money was sent to missions. 

Missionary Barrels. — One Junior superintendent in Illinois 
got a great deal of money for missions by distributing through 
the society little barrels, and requesting each holder to put in 
his barrel one cent a week for home and foreign missions. At 
the end of the year a missionary social was given in which the 
barrel-holders alone were permitted to take part. Those that 
held these barrels were not asked to contribute to the regular 
Sunday collections. 

Definite Objects. — It is helpful to the Juniors, even more 
than to their elders, to have definite objects for which they can 
save their missionary money. Systematic giving is in this way 
most effectively promoted. Here is a sample card which was 
used in one society : — 





I 


PROMISE 






f sane eacf) 


morttl) ♦ . . 






Two cents 


for 


Good Will Farm. 






Two cents 


to 


help educate girl at Pleasant 


Hill, 




Tennessee. 






Two cents 


for 


boy in Turkey. 






Two cents 


for 


support of our society. 






Total, eight cents 




. CONSECRATION 


SUNDAY. 




Sig) 


ted. 













1 86 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

One to One — If you wish to interest Juniors in giving for 
any special mission school, either home or foreign, obtain if 
possible a list of the names of the scholars, with their ages. 
Assign each scholar to one of your Juniors of the same age and 
sex, telling his name, or hers, and letting the Junior know that 
his gifts, whatever they are, are going to help that particular 
boy or girl. Sometimes the Juniors can be interested in send- 
ing little presents to these special scholars. 

Their Special Care. — When the older missionary society 
sends a box to home missionaries, the Junior superintendent 
should always inquire whether there are not some little children 
in the family whose outfit may be undertaken by her Juniors 
alone. 

A Missionary Contest. — A method of stimulating giving 
among the Juniors is to choose two captains, who divide up 
between them the membership of the society, each striving to 
have all the members of his side bring pennies to the meeting. 
Account is kept to see which group of Juniors is most faithful to 
this duty. Another plan is to choose a captain for the girls and 
another for the boys, the contest being divided along these lines. 

Practical Work. — If your society has not yet done any prac- 
tical missionary work, sent a barrel or a box to some mission- 
ary or his children, or in some such way worked with their hands 
as well as given money, you are missing a very important part 
of missionary training. The children can be set to making little 
things that will be helpful in many a missionary home ; and they 
can be set to finding in their homes garments quite as good as 
new, that can do excellent service in the mission field. There 
is no reason why boys, as well as girls, should not learn to sew ; 
and one of the most successful Junior workers I know has 
found that her boys take up the work of sewing for mission- 
aries with as great zeal as the girls, and are even more faithful. 

What They Want. — There is sometimes a bit of careless- 
ness in sending gifts to missionaries, both in the home and 
foreign fields. Before you pack a barrel or make similar offer- 
ings, take pains to find out directly from the missionary just 
what will most be needed, and fill your barrel accordingly. 

Mission Maps. — One of the very best helps for Junior mis- 
sionary meetings are small hectographed maps. Merely the 



AT WORK FOR MISSIONS. 1 87 

outlines of the different countries should be given, so that mis- 
sionary stations and other localities, as well as figures and facts, 
may be inserted as the meeting proceeds. The Juniors should 
each be given one of these maps and a pencil, and it is astonish- 
ing how much more vivid the lesson may be made with the help 
of these simple and easily manufactured aids. If these maps 
are made of uniform size, the Juniors will be glad to preserve 
them, and bind them together into a book that they will call 
their missionary geography. 

Maps. — You should keep hanging before the society all the 
time a map of the world. Let this be sufficiently inexpensive to 
permit pasting colored stars here and there to indicate the cen- 
tres of your denominational missionary work. For filling in the 
minor details, use the outline maps just mentioned. The chil- 
dren will like to make for themselves also rough clay or putty 
maps of the different lands. 

Sand Maps. — A sand map will add much interest to your 
Junior meetings. Fit a low rim to a large, square board, and 
obtain the cleanest and brightest sand you can. Bits of look- 
ing-glass, of course, will answer for lakes and seas. Coarse blue 
yarn will do for rivers. Blocks of wood will represent cities. 
For the mission stations, light little candles, and stick them up 
in the sand. If you make this map while the children are look- 
ing on, and talk about the different features as you form them, 
the Juniors will remember far better, and be doubly interested. 

A Missionary Social. — Missionary socials may occasionally 
be given. In these, each Junior should be dressed in the cos- 
tume of some missionary country, as nearly as that costume can 
be imitated. If, as is the best plan, each of your Juniors has 
chosen for himself a country which he will make peculiarly his 
own in the course of the year, to study about and pray for, then 
he should appear at this social in the costume of that country. 
At the social, each Junior should be expected to present some 
interesting item from the country of his choice. 

It will be helpful, also, to have one Junior at least who will 
be a returned missionary, — one of the well-known missionaries 
of your denomination, — who will speak in the first person, and 
give an account of what has been taking place in his field. An 
interesting feature of such a social is missionary contests. Each 



188 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

of the countries will select some Junior to speak for it. There is 
to be a jury ; and the country whose representative, in its opin- 
ion, makes the best speech, is to receive the collection that is 
taken at the social. 

Missionary Matches. — After the Juniors have spent some 
time in the study of a mission land, they will be prepared to 
carry on a missionary match, and they will greatly enjoy it. 
Leaders are to be appointed, who will choose their sides. Two 
of the oldest Juniors will prepare the questions. Let it be one 
boy and one girl. The sides stand facing each other ; and the 
questioners propound their problems, first the boy and then the 
girl asking a question. The sides answer as a whole, any one 
on a side being permitted to reply. If neither side can answer 
the question, the questioners ask each other. The side is 
counted victorious that answers the most questions. 

Post=Off ice Meetings. — Post-office meetings will get the 
Juniors to studying about missions. To carry out this meeting, 
each Junior will write a letter to some other Junior, pretending 
that the writer is a heathen child. Having selected his pre- 
tended home, the Junior will study up about it, find out the 
customs of the children and the children's surroundings, and 
incorporate in this letter whatever he learns. He will tell his 
friend how he lives, and as much as possible about his country. 
These letters will be dated from the places the children are de- 
scribing ; and the sealed envelopes containing them will bear, if 
possible, foreign stamps from the countries they describe. The 
letters will be collected as the members enter the room, placed 
in a set of post-office boxes, and distributed by the superinten- 
dent at the opening of the meeting, to be read in order by the 
recipients. 

A Missionary Concert. — With a very little trouble any 
Junior society may prepare a missionary concert that will be 
worthy of presentation before an audience of the older people. 
Select for the Juniors brief and pointed missionary anecdotes, 
startling and valuable facts regarding missionary progress and 
difficulties, and concerning missionary countries. Teach these 
to the Juniors, or have them read little slips. Give them also 
bright missionary poems, and instruct them in the singing of 
earnest missionary songs. Your pastor will be delighted to give 



AT WORK FOR MISSIONS. 1 89 

the Juniors an opportunity to present this concert before the 
older people, and the missionary zeal of young and old will be 
greatly increased thereby. 

A Missionary Alphabet. — An admirable plan for a mission- 
ary meeting is the following, which is sent me by a Connecticut 
worker. Cut from card-board a large number of letters, covering 
them with bright red paper. Number these letters upon the 
back, and pin them upon the Juniors, letting each know the 
number of his letter. In the course of the meeting, to illustrate 
different points, call out the numbers of the letters one by one, 
having the Juniors who bear the corresponding letters rise and 
come forward in such a way as to spell the words you wish to 
exhibit to the children. 

Thus you will spell out the name of the country you are to 
study for the day, the towns where the different missionary sta- 
tions are situated, the names of the missionaries, and any other 
fact you may wish to emphasize in this pleasant manner. You 
may also spell out little sentences, telling, for example, what the 
children might do for missions, such as pray, study, give. The 
children will enjoy this exercise thoroughly. 

An Observation Party. — An observation party will add 
much to your missionary meetings. Arrange, back of a screen, 
or in another room, a table covered with all kinds of articles 
that come from the country under discussion — the fruits of 
that land, different food products in common use that are there 
obtained, articles of dress, manufactured products, images, 
jewelry, — everything, in fact, that you can beg or borrow, in- 
cluding, of course, photographs, plants, flags, and the like. 
Number these objects, and furnish the Juniors with slips of 
paper. Admit them to the room in sections, if necessary, and 
give them five minutes to name as many of these objects as they 
can. Afterwards write a correct list upon the blackboard, and 
have them compare theirs with it. 

Missionary Journeys. — Missionary journeys will add zest 
to missionary meetings. To carry out successfully the journeys 
through the mission country you are studying, divide the route 
into sections, appointing one good worker to describe each sec- 
tion before the society. For example, if you are to study India, 
one Junior might be sent travelling in imagination from the 



190 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

United States to Bombay ; another might take up the journey 
there, and carry it on to the Punjaub ; another from the Punjaub 
to Calcutta; and the fourth from Calcutta to Ceylon. These 
travellers should point out what missionary stations of their de- 
nominations they pass, and should tell, each of them, some- 
thing about the characteristics of the country and of the people, 
describing as well the sights of the great cities. 

Candles and Missions. — A skilful superintendent can make 
mission work in some of its phases very interesting to the Ju- 
niors by the use of candles. Set up before the Juniors a large 
number of candles to represent the different countries. Let 
them be large or small, and of different colors, to correspond 
with the condition of the countries. One, for instance, might 
be black, for Africa ; one yellow, for China ; one red, for the 
Indian tribes of North America; one brown, for the Malays. 

As you talk about the countries, you may show how the Light 
of the world came to the United States from Europe by making 
the European candle light the United States candle. You can 
show how the United States passes the light on to China, India, 
Africa. 

You may show how a small candle can light a large candle as 
well as a large candle could. Show them how the candles, 
though they are of different color, yet give the same light, so 
that it makes no difference what may be the color of one's skin, 
he can shine as well for Christ. Many other truths can be illus- 
trated brightly by this means. 

A Question Meeting. — One of the best ways of arranging a 
missionary meeting is by way of question and answer. Let the 
superintendent prepare a set of questions, numbered, giving to 
the Juniors the answers, correspondingly numbered. If these 
questions and answers are used for several successive mission- 
ary meetings, the facts stated therein will become familiar. 
The superintendent may test this by asking the questions, with- 
out furnishing the Juniors with the answers beforehand. 

Another excellent plan that is similar, is to distribute, one 
week before the meeting, little slips of paper containing a set of 
five or six simple questions on the country to be studied, giving 
no clew to the answers. If the children cannot find the answers 
themselves, they go to the superintendent or to some member 



AT WORK FOR MISSIONS. 191 

of the missionary committee, or to their parents and friends. 
At the missionary meeting the superintendent asks the ques- 
tions, and the members give their various answers. 

Missionary Trees. — A missionary tree will teach the Ju- 
niors about the missionary work of their denomination. It 
should be drawn upon a large sheet of paper, or on the black- 
board. There should be as many roots to the tree as the de- 
nomination has missionary and benevolent societies. The 
branches of these roots represent local societies. The tiny 
rootlets of these branches represent the Juniors, and all who 
give to the work of the denomination. Each one is pouring into 
the roots, and so into the tree, the nourishment of his gifts. 

The branches of the tree are the fields of work, which should 
be marked — the different lands, the different races, and differ- 
ent enterprises. The fruits of the tree are the Christian lives of 
the converted. The trunk is the gospel. These parts should 
not be named ; but the Juniors should frequently be reviewed on 
the matter, being required to name the different parts as the 
superintendent points to them. 

Chairs and Missions. — In many bright ways the arrange- 
ment of the chairs in the Junior room may be made to contrib- 
ute to the interest and profit of missionary meetings. For 
instance, if you are studying for the day missions that lie in the 
islands of the Pacific, arrange your chairs in groups, each to rep- 
resent an island where your church has missionary work. If 
you are to study some country, let the groups of chairs repre- 
sent the missionary stations of that country, which will be situ- 
ated usually in the important cities. Be sure to place these 
groups of chairs at the proper distances from each other, and 
in the right directions. 

In the case of islands, the superintendent can instruct the 
chairman of the missionary committee to pass from island to 
island, representing the course of a missionary ship. 

An ingenious leader will get much good out of such an ar- 
rangement as this. Little banners should be fastened to the 
backs of the chairs, bearing upon them in clear letters the names 
of the islands or of the cities. Questions about the missionary 
work in each district should, of course, be referred for answer 
to the children occupying those districts. A map of the coun- 



192 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

try under discussion should be placed before the children. To 
each group of Juniors should be given some fact about the 
station they are representing, and at the end of the exercise 
they should be asked to rise and repeat these facts as a review. 

A Flag Exercise. — Effective missionary lessons may be 
based upon the flags of the different countries. A sample of 
this method has been sent me by Ohio's zealous Junior super- 
intendent, Miss Mary C. Merritt. 

Holding up the flag of the United States, for instance, the 
superintendent asks such questions as, "What flag is this?" 
" When was it adopted ?" " How many stars were at first on 
the flag?" " How many stars has it now?" "When do they 
make the change?" " By what names is the flag called?" " For 
what does the red stand? the white? the blue?" " For what 
do the stars stand? the stripes?" 

Here the superintendent will give some instances of heroism 
connected with the American flag; some Junior may recite 
Whittier 1 s poem, " Barbara Frietchie ; " another will tell about 
the little coat in which Washington was baptized, which is still 
preserved by Miss Lewis of Woodlawn, Va. It is made of 
white silk, lined with red silk, and trimmed with blue ribbon. 

Going on from this, the superintendent may continue her 
questions: "Does this flag represent a Christian country?" 
"Are all who live here Christians? 1 ' "Have we any real hea- 
then among us, who worship idols ? " "What other people among 
us need to be taught about Jesus?" And so the questions may 
lead to a review of the home missionary work of the church. 

At the close of this exercise, two boys should come forward 
and each take hold of the flag, stretching it out so as to receive 
the money which the Juniors come and drop in. Each Junior, 
if there is time, will recite a verse as he lays his offering in the 
flag. When all have contributed, a short prayer will be offered, 
asking for God's blessing on the gift ; and then a national song 
will be sung while the money is being counted, that the sum 
may be announced. 

This is a sample of the way in which the flags of all countries 
may be treated ; and it will readily be seen how the superinten- 
dent's ingenuity, supplemented by much study of books, will 
produce an exceedingly effective and helpful drill. 



TEMPERANCE WORK FOR JUNIORS. I93 



CHAPTER XXII. 

TEMPERANCE WORK FOR JUNIORS. 

Facts ! Facts ! Facts ! — The Junior superintendent should 
see to it that the temperance meetings are packed as full as may 
be with temperance facts. At least one fact each meeting should 
be impressed upon the minds of the Juniors so distinctly that it 
cannot be forgotten ; for example, the number of drunkards in 
the country ; the number that die every year ; the number of 
saloons, the number of schoolhouses ; the number of saloon- 
keepers, of ministers, and of teachers ; the amount of money 
spent each year for intoxicating liquor, and the amount spent 
for schools, for missions, for bread, for meat ; the number of 
States that have adopted prohibitory laws. 

Such facts as these, taken one at a time and thoroughly com- 
mitted to memory, will make earnest temperance advocates of 
your Juniors almost before you know it. There are many mag- 
azines of such facts, among them, Handbook of Prohibitio7i, 
published by Funk & Wagnalls, New York City, 50 cents ; 
The National Temperance Alma?iac, published by the Na- 
tional Temperance Society, New York City, 10 cents ; the vari- 
ous tracts of the Woman's Christian Temperance Union, and 
the weekly issues of The Union Signal and The Voice. 

The Memory. — There are many magnificent temperance 
poems with which the children's memories should be stored ; 
and they will like to recite them, either singly or in concert. 
The temperance problem was not much of a problem in Bible 
times and in Bible lands ; so that the Bible does not abound 
in temperance texts, however undoubted is its stand on the 
side of temperance and purity. Therefore it will be possi- 
ble for your Juniors to commit to memory all of the temper- 
ance passages in the Bible. Make that your aim, and have 
them frequently recite these texts in concert. They will enjoy 
forming themselves into two temperance brigades, which will fire 
back and forth at each other temperance texts. 



194 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

Temperance Experiments. — A little study of the temper- 
ance physiologies, now so often used in schools, will teach the 
superintendent some excellent experiments that may be made, 
that will demonstrate to the Juniors the injurious effects of alco- 
hol upon the tissues of the body. These experiments will pro- 
duce upon the Juniors an ineffaceable impression. 

The Great Societies. — One temperance meeting might well 
be devoted to the study of the great temperance organizations, 
such as the Woman's Christian Temperance Union, the Y"s, 
and the National Temperance Society. The date of organiza- 
tion should be learned, the important accomplishments of each, 
the work each is now doing in many directions, and the promi- 
nent workers connected with them. 

Biographical Meetings. — No more inspiring theme for a 
temperance meeting could possibly be chosen than a study of 
temperance heroes. Get different Juniors to write brief biog- 
raphies of Neal Dow, John B. Gough, John G. Woolley, 
Francis Murphy, Frances E. Willard, Lady Henry Somerset, 
and such heroes of the temperance cause. Have their pictures 
to show, and be prepared with interesting anecdotes to supple- 
ment what the children say. At the close, give some time to 
questions the Juniors may like to ask, and review the whole 
yourself by questioning. 

"Water is Best." — For a temperance meeting, set half a 
dozen of the Juniors to telling Bible stories of the events in 
which water served good purpose, such as the miracle at Cana, 
the water drawn from the rock by Moses, Naaman's recovery 
from leprosy, and the like. 

Story Skeletons. — The Juniors will develop unexpected 
talent in the way of original story-telling, and temperance meet- 
ings may be enlivened in that way. One writer suggests that a 
series of words be given the entire society, and each Junior 
asked to construct therefrom a short temperance story. A 
sample of such a series is, "boy, man, bottle, city, fire, baby." 
The Juniors will be interested to hear one another's efforts. 

Current Events. — At least one temperance meeting in 
every year should be devoted to the study of the current events 
bearing upon temperance. The Juniors are not too young to be 
interested in the great struggle that is going on for the preserva- 



TEMPERANCE WORK FOR JUNIORS. 1 95 

tion of the home. If any temperance laws have been passed in 
your State or are proposed for passage, if anywhere in the Union 
the elections have been significant regarding temperance re- 
form, if important conventions have been held or anniversaries 
observed, if you have any remarkable temperance speeches to 
which attention should be called, if any of the heroes of the 
temperance cause have recently died, these events, and such as 
these, will make up an interesting and profitable hour, and will 
do much to make your Juniors feel that temperance is not merely 
a great question in theory, but a practical and stirring problem 
on which live men and women are actively engaged. 

A Temperance Alphabet. — Mrs. Scudder has kindly sent 
me the following temperance exercise for Juniors, which she has 
rearranged for this manual : — 

A stands for Alcohol, a fluid of fire 

Which often brings death to the seller and buyer. 

B stands for Beer, sometimes sold by the barrel, 
And most men who love it, love also to quarrel. 

C is for Cider, which goes to the head, 
And makes men appear as if they were dead. 

D stands for Drunkard ; oh, help him who can 
To reform, be converted, and live like a man ! 

E stands for Eggnog, called an innocent drink ; 
Made of milk, eggs, and brandy ; is it innocent think ? 

F stands for Fight, which is easy for those 
Who of brandy and beer take a liberal dose. 

G stands for Gutter, and also for Gin ; 

Who use much of the latter, the former fall in. 

H stands for Hops, a vine much abused; 

By those who make ale, beer, and porter, it's used. 

I is for Idler, to work he won't go. 

J is for Jug, his companion and foe. 

K is for Kindness ; how little is shown 

To those who through liquor have desperate grown. 

L is for Loafer, who after much drinking, 
Stands on the corner apparently thinking. 

M stands for Maniac, his reason all gone, 

His dear ones heart-broken because he did wrong. 



I96 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

N is for Night, the time of dark deeds. 

is for Outcast, who on the husks feeds. 

P stands for Pipes, which you often will find 
Full of tobacco which injures mankind. 

Q questions whether 'tis prudent and wise 
To handle a drink wherein such evil lies. 

R is for Rum, an enemy to all, 

For those men that use it are certain to fall. 

S is for Station-house, where, in sad plight, 
Poor drunkards are frequently taken at night. 

T is Tobacco, used in various ways 

To rob men of strength, and shorten their days. 

U stands for Usury, which adds to the woe 

Of those who through drink to the pawnbrokers go. 

V is for Vine ; its innocent fruit 

Is forced to help man sink below the poor brute. 

W is for Whiskey, a very mean drink, 
For all those who like it to ruin soon sink. 

X's one, two, and three are used to describe 
A drink which hundreds of drunkards imbibe. 

Y stands for Youth. Oh, be wise and beware ! 
Yield not to the tempter, to die in despair. 

Z stands for Zeal, which will help us to win 
Many souls from the power of Satan and sin. 

Swearing. — The subject of swearing is not inappropriate 
to be considered in connection with our temperance topics. 
Temperance committees should be set to doing work to guard 
the Juniors against this sin, and to suppress it when it exists. 

Singing. — Temperance songs have a large part to play in 
Junior temperance work, and the Juniors should have many of 
them in their ?-epertoire. Both the W. C. T. U. and the 
National Temperance Society publish little books of children's 
temperance songs from which you may teach many bright and 
stirring melodies to the Juniors. 

From the Newspapers. — Set the children themselves to 
making a temperance scrap-book, the material for which will be 
gathered from the newspapers and other periodicals, by them- 



TEMPERANCE WORK FOR JUNIORS. I97 

selves, with the help of their parents. Widen the scope of the 
book to include not merely the evils wrought by strong drink, 
but those of gambling, smoking, bad literature, and possibly of 
theatre-going. Under these different heads will be pasted news- 
paper clippings showing the evil things that have been done by 
men under the influence of strong drink, and all other facts that 
may tend to make the Juniors stronger for temperance. 

The Superintendent's Scraps. — Besides the temperance 
scrap-book kept by the Juniors and accessible to them, the 
superintendent will, of course, have a temperance scrap-book of 
her own, or, better still, a temperance envelope, in which she 
will keep little poems suitable for the Juniors to learn, and all 
kinds of temperance facts and illustrations. 

The Sinews of War. — The temperance committee can do 
a great deal of helpful work by the circulation of temperance 
tracts and other literature, if they can obtain a little money to 
buy it. This will not be a feat difficult of accomplishment if 
the committee circulate a subscription paper with this written at 
the head: "We, the undersigned, are glad to give ten cents 
apiece for promoting the temperance work of the Junior society 
of Church." 

Drinking Fountains. — So much good can be done for the 
temperance cause by the erection of drinking fountains, that this 
is one very appropriate bit of temperance work that may be 
undertaken by Junior societies. I have heard of one temperance 
society on the Pacific coast that raised money enough to put up 
a drinking fountain in front of the church. Why should not 
every church preach in this way? and why may not every Junior 
society take up such a beautiful task ? 

From the United Society. — The temperance committee 
supplies published by the United Society of Christian Endeavor, 
though intended primarily for the work of the older society, are 
yet in several cases entirely suited to the Juniors, and will 
always prove suggestive to Junior workers. Among these are 
three temperance exercises, each of which costs $2.00 a hun- 
dred ; two leaflets, — " The Temperance Committee at Work," 
3 cents, and "Why Sign the Temperance Pledge?" 2 cents; 
temperence pledge cards, 50 cents a hundred ; and pledge 
books, 3 cents each. 



I98 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

Temperance Literature. — The temperance committee can 
do a great deal by lending temperance stories, papers, books, and 
tracts among the members of the society, seeing that they are 
returned, and passed on again to others. Following a method 
spoken of elsewhere more fully, temperance stories may be 
placed in envelopes, numbered and catalogued, and circulated 
as a little library among the Juniors. 

From the National Temperance Society, New York City, you 
may obtain a very large number of most excellent tracts that 
cost very little. They also publish temperance papers for chil- 
dren, as does the Woman's Christian Temperance Union, 
whose headquarters are The Temple, Chicago. The temper- 
ance committee will do a good thing, too, if it procures the 
insertion in the Sunday-school library of an occasional new 
temperance story. 

Two Helpful Pamphlets. — A suggestive book is published 
by the National Temperance Society, 58 Reade Street, New York 
City, entitled Temperance Arithmetic. Its examples teach the 
children, after the fashion of the public school, important moral 
lessons. A sample problem is the following: " If Mr. B takes 
three glasses of whiskey a day, and his wife three glasses of beer 
with her meals, how much money will they drink up in the 
course of a year ? " 

This same society publishes a pamphlet giving the recipes for 
the making of all kinds of intoxicating liquors. Of this the 
superintendent may make effective use, showing the Juniors 
what is the poisonous and hurtful character of the substances 
that enter into these abominable compounds. 

A Strong Pledge. — Here is a form of temperance pledge your 
Juniors may like to use. "Trusting in the Lord Jesus Christ 
for strength, I promise him that I will drink no intoxicating 
liquor, that I will use no tobacco, that I will use no profane lan- 
guage, that I will never listen to or repeat an impure story, that 
I will pray each day that the saloon may be banished from our 
land, and that, just so far as I know how, I will work for what I 
pray, and will do all in my power to kill King Alcohol." 

Another Good Pledge. — Here is a Junior temperance pledge 
sent us by some Baptist Endeavorers. Other societies may pre- 
fer this form. " I promise that I will never drink anything that 



TEMPERANCE WORK FOR JUNIORS. 1 99 

makes men drunk, never use tobacco, never swear, and I will 
ask God every day to help me keep these promises." 

A Rhymed Pledge. — The following temperance pledge was 
sent me from the Congregational Juniors of Slatersville, R. I. 
Other Junior societies may like to see it. 

" A pledge I make, no wine to take, 
Nor brandy red, that turns the head ; 
Nor whiskey hot, that makes the sot ; 
Nor will I sin by drinking gin ; 
Hard cider, too, will never do, 
Nor fiery rum, that ruins home ; 
Nor brewer's beer that makes poor cheer ; 
Nor sparkling ale my face to pale. 
To quench my thirst I'll always bring 
Cold water from the well or spring ; 
And here I pledge perpetual hate 
To all that can intoxicate." 

Miss Willard's Pledge. — You will like to make use of this 
rhymed pledge, whose author is no less a person than Miss 
Frances E. Willard. 

" I pledge my brain God's thoughts to think ; 
My lips no fire or foam to drink 
From alcoholic cup, nor link 
With my pure breath tobacco's taint ; 
For have I not a right to be 
As wholesome and as pure as she 
Who, through the years so glad and free, 
Moves gently onward to meet me ? 
A knight of the new chivalry 
Of Christ and temperance I would be, 
In nineteen hundred ; come and see." 

Ribbon Reminders. — Present to the Juniors that sign the 
temperance pledge a little bow of red ribbon to wear, telling 
them at the same time something about the work of Francis 
Murphy. They will appreciate this badge, and it will help 
them to remember their pledge. 

A Pledge Book. — A temperance record book with the 
pledge written on the first page, followed by the names of all the 
young people you can get to sign it, will be a valuable pos- 
session for the society. Let all who sign this pledge book sign 



200 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

also a separate pledge card, which they may retain, and keep 
in some place where they can frequently see it. 

A Wall List. — Some Denver Juniors once did some excel- 
lent temperance work among the young people of the Sunday 
school. They gathered signatures to the pledge, and after 
they had obtained all they could, placed the pledge and signa- 
tures in a frame to adorn the walls of the Sunday-school room. 
Similar work should be done in every society among the Juniors 
themselves. Have a pledge beautifully engrossed, obtain as 
many signatures of the Juniors as possible, frame it handsomely, 
and keep it as a permanent memorial upon the walls of the 
society room. 



GOOD-CITIZENSHIP WORK. 201 



CHAPTER XXIII. 

GOOD-CITIZENSHIP WORK. 

Coming Citizens. — Junior superintendents may do much 
to arouse in the Juniors an interest in better citizenship, and so 
put them in line to do noble work in that revival of better citi- 
zenship which the present decade is witnessing. 

The boys may be got together occasionally outside of the so- 
ciety meetings, and given practical talks on how they are gov- 
erned. They may be set to holding debates regarding patriotic 
subjects. They will like to conduct elections, especially on 
election days, going through with the form which a regular voter 
must use. They will enjoy, during campaign seasons, campaign 
rallies, when Junior representatives of the different parties may 
be permitted to speak each for his own side. 

The superintendent may do much by directing their reading 
in the public libraries to noble patriotic books. Portraits and 
statues of distinguished Americans and noble patriots of other 
countries may be exhibited occasionally in the Junior meetings, 
and the superintendent may talk briefly about their magnificent 
achievements. If there are scenes or buildings of historic inter- 
est accessible to your society, you might take your boys on 
occasional pilgrimages to them, and ask them afterward to write 
essays connected with those themes. 

Teach them patriotic songs. Bear in mind historic dates that 
are famous for noble achievements, and remind the boys of 
them in connection with your Junior talks. Commemorate 
Washington's Birthday, Decoration Day, the Fourth of July, 
and Lincoln's Birthday, in some suitable way, if only by five or 
ten minutes spent appropriately in your Junior meetings. En- 
courage patriotic recitations. Get flags for the Juniors, which 
they may carry on stated occasions. 

Many other ways will suggest themselves to the superinten- 
dent who is genuinely patriotic, and eager that his young charge 
shall have the same love for country that he has himself. ■ 



202 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

Training in Citizenship. — The superintendents of our 
Junior societies are, by a large majority, women. They will 
need to watch very carefully to see that they do their full duty 
along the lines of training in Christian citizenship. To teach 
the young voters their duty to their country, they will need 
themselves in many cases to make special study of that duty, 
which to them is largely unfamiliar. 

A Junior superintendent should know the names of the 
prominent rulers of country and State. She should know when 
election times come. She should keep up with the prominent 
current events in this land and in foreign lands, and should be 
able to turn to account, for the inspiration of patriotism, all of 
these occurrences and seasons. 

No boy that is old enough to join a Junior society is too 
young to be taught what constitutes a good ruler, and what 
are the duties of a good citizen. Few lines of study, moreover, 
are more helpful to the Junior superintendent in holding the 
boys than that of history. Many noble and inspiring illustra- 
tions may be drawn from the history of our own land ; and in 
few better ways, if any, can man's noble and ignoble charac- 
teristics be illustrated before the society. 

In this way the superintendent will win the boys and help 
them for aH their lives ; and if, as seems not unlikely, the girls 
themselves are to be added to the force of coming voters, then 
this training on the part of the superintendent is doubly 
necessary. 

A Rally. — Junior unions have held good-citizenship rallies, 
and why should they not ? Appropriate exercises at such 
rallies would be a flag drill by the Juniors, patriotic songs, also 
by the Juniors, together with patriotic recitations, and bright 
talks about the duties for which these young citizens-to-be 
should be preparing. Much should be made at such a meeting 
of appropriate decorations, banners, and the pictures of eminent 
patriots. 

Good-Citizenship Pledges. — I do not see why the Juniors 
may not with profit follow the example of many older societies, 
and sign good-citizenship pledges. These should be written 
in a very simple way, but should contain the following, in sub- 
stance : "I promise Christ that I will study about this good 



GOOD-CITIZENSHIP WORK. 203 

country that he has given me, and that I will pray for it ; that 
when I grow up I will vote for good men, and will try in every 
way to make this nation such as Christ would approve." 

Good=Citizenship Committees. — The older Christian En- 
deavor societies have good-citizenship committees ; why should 
not the Juniors have them too ? These Juniors will soon 
become citizens themselves ; and it is time they should learn, 
under Christian auspices, how to perform a citizen's duty. It 
is the work of these good-citizenship committees to take the 
especial superintendency of all patriotic meetings, and under 
the superintendent's direction to inspire the Juniors with a 
more hearty and intelligent patriotism. 



204 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 



CHAPTER XXIV. 

JUNIOR SOCIALS. 

Its Chief Task. — The main work of the social committee 
is not to hold socials, but to welcome strangers, and make them 
feel at home in the meetings, to care for the shy and timid 
members, to call on children that are newcomers in the town 
or Sunday school, and in every way to promote genuine socia- 
bility and friendship in the society. Show them that this is 
their true and most Christlike work, and that the holding 
of pleasant socials must always have this as its main end. 

Finding and Testing. — Interest the members of the social 
committee in the search for novel and pleasant games. Their 
bright wits will learn many a pleasing entertainment, and they 
will be capable even of devising others. It is best, before any 
of these new games are tried by the society, to have them tried 
by the members of the social committee themselves. The 
chairman of this committee may well gather the members at 
her home on some week-day evening, and spend the entire 
evening in playing new games, becoming familiar with the 
processes, and deciding on which shall be proposed at the 
next social. 

No Clannishness. — Teach the social committee that one oi 
its main duties is to break up the sets and cliques that are 
formed even among the unceremonious children. Children are 
clannish ; and by them a stranger, or some one against whom 
they chance to form a dislike, is quite certain to be left out in 
the cold, unless an earnest Christian social committee remedies 
the evil. 

Use Their Help. — The superintendent will make a mistake 
if she does all the work of preparing the refreshments for the 
Junior socials. The Juniors themselves will like to assist her. 
For example, you may ask each Junior to bring a cup to drink 
lemonade from. You may appoint certain Juniors to squeeze 



JUNIOR SOCIALS. 205 

the lemons, some to cut them, some to cut the cake. Appoint 
others to pass these articles. Appoint others to attend to the 
arrangement of the chairs and benches. 

A Second Social Committee. — Some Baptist Junior En- 
deavorers have two social committees. One is the ordinary social 
committee ; and the other is a social committee for prayer meet- 
ings, whose duty it is to make strangers who attend the meetings 
feel thoroughly at home. In a large society this additional social 
committee may very well be formed, though in a small society 
one social committee should perform both lines of work. 

Admission Tickets. — People value much more highly what 
it has cost them a little pains to get. This rule applies to chil- 
dren as well as to grown folks, and to Junior socials as well as 
to other meetings. It will pay you to use little admission tickets 
to your socials, and to make these tickets somewhat different in 
the cases of the Juniors themselves and of the friends they may 
wish to invite. 

One may read: " Member's Admission Card. Admit , 

a Junior Endeavorer, to the Junior social held in , on 

, 189 , at P. M. This card should be presented 

at the door." 

The other card reads: "Complimentary Admission Card. With 

the approval of the society, (the Junior's name) 

cordially invites (the visitor's name) to attend the 

Junior social," etc. The remainder of the card will be like the first. 

Picnics. — In the summer months a Junior picnic held once 
a month is a most helpful feature. If the picnic is held at cer- 
tain regular intervals, the children look forward to it with more 
eagerness than if it comes at uncertain times and without a long 
notice. The Juniors will like to meet at the church with their 
lunch-baskets, and march in line to the picnic grounds, possibly 
with drums and trumpets, and with flags flying. The parents 
should be invited to attend whenever it is possible ; and the best 
time for these picnics is, of course, on Saturday afternoon. 

Summer Joys. — Mrs. Hageman, Indiana's Junior superin- 
tendent, suggests for Junior meetings during the summer that 
they be held often in a dooryard, or in some grove. Let lawn 



206 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

socials be held once a month during the summer. In all these 
pleasures, however, don't let the Juniors forget the primary 
object of their organization. 

A Treat. — One Junior superintendent of whom I have heard 
greatly endeared herself to the hearts of her Juniors one sum- 
mer by making for them on hot days ice-cream, which two or 
three of the Juniors took around to the different homes in a 
little cart and sold by the dishful, thus realizing a neat sum for 
the Junior treasury. 

A Junior Walk. — An occasional walk with the Juniors 
through the woods and across the fields will be a great help, 
if the superintendent is willing to take the trouble. Let him 
point out the beauties of the natural world, telling, as they 
move on, interesting things about the rocks and the birds, the 
flowers and the trees. Children have an innate love of all the 
beautiful objects of nature, and will almost worship one who 
opens to their eyes nature's wonders. 

Teas. — Committee teas are capital affairs for bringing the 
superintendent into close contact with her Juniors. Once a 
month she may have to tea with her some special committee. 
During the evening they will talk over their committee work. 

Together. — It is an excellent idea for the Juniors and the 
Young People's societies to hold occasional socials together. 
In this way both gain an inspiration. 

A Visitors' Album. — It will be pleasant for each Junior 
society to keep a visitors' record book, in which to preserve 
the autographs of all its visitors. The Juniors will greatly enjoy 
this, and the book will make a valuable record. 

Get them Photographed. — If there is a camera obtainable, 
by all means take a picture of the Juniors. They will treasure 
these, and the sight of the society together will inspire a spirit 
which will be very helpful. 

Junior Squirrels. — A nut-hunt is a pleasant feature of a 
Junior social. The nuts are scattered everywhere, and the Ju- 
niors are set to hunting them, the one who gets the most in a 
certain time being counted the victor. An interesting variation 
is to hide nuts of two kinds, say peanuts and walnuts, permit- 
ting the Juniors to hunt for the peanuts first without disturbing 
the walnuts they may come across, and then, after this contest 



JUNIOR SOCIALS. 207 

is decided, permitting them in a similar way to seek out the 
walnuts. 

J. S. C. E. — Miss Jessie Norton, of Cleveland, Ohio, wrote 
the following poem. It was used by one of the Cleveland 
societies in a military drill given at a birthday social. Fifteen 
boys took part, and at various stages of the march they formed 
the letters "J. S. C. E." As each letter in turn was formed, 
the boys halted, and repeated together the verse appropriate to 
that letter : — 

" J " is for Junior ; though young, we are strong, 
And mean to fight bravely against sin and wrong. 
Our lives hid in Christ, we shall conquer each foe, 
Stand firm for the right, and learn to say " No." 

" S " for Society ; in strength there is might ; 
With the breastplate of faith and the banner of light 
Then onward we'll go, and triumphantly sing, 
For Christ is our Saviour and Captain and King. 

" C " is for Christian ; oh that we may be 
So full of sweet trust and of true purity, 
That naught that we do will ever bring shame 
To the dear Lord himself, who gave us his name. 

" E " for Endeavor ; let's work while we may, 
Till the trumpet of God sounds forth the great day ; 
Then, clad in his brightness, we'll march through the gates, 
Right into the city where Christ ever waits. 

Social Souvenirs. — The socials will make a strong impres- 
sion upon the Juniors if you give to each Junior a little souvenir 
at the conclusion of the entertainment. Pleasant souvenirs will 
be little dolls made of peanuts or English walnuts. Cards either 
pretty or comic, Japanese napkins which the Juniors will pass 
around among themselves for autographs, cradles made of egg- 
shells, little pictures, or dainty booklets, will all be appropriate 
souvenirs, and will indefinitely extend the memory of a pleasant 
hour. 

A Christmas Pie. — For a Christmas social for the Juniors, 
a Christmas pie is an admirable feature. Fill a large pan with 
sawdust, mixing up with it the presents which the Juniors have 
made for each other, or, if you do not wish to run the risk of 



208 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

invidious comparisons, simply place in the pan sticks of candy 
wrapped in tissue paper, or some other inexpensive gift, one for 
each Junior. Blindfold the Juniors in turn, and permit them to 
grope around in the sawdust until each has found a present. 
The sawdust pie should be covered with paper, pricked so as 
to make it look as much like a crust as possible, and with a slice 
cut out. It will add to the amusement if the Juniors draw slips 
of paper each containing a number, and' put their thumb into the 
pie in the order of these numbers. 

May Baskets. — A happy idea for a May Day prank comes 
from Massachusetts. Some Juniors of a certain society there 
concocted some dainty baskets, filled them with candy, flowers, 
or fruit, and, slipping in the names of the babies, the dear old 
grandfathers or grandmothers, or of those who were sick, they 
slyly hung the baskets on the door-knobs of the parish when it 
began to grow a little dark. . 

Childish Games. — Do not neglect the simple games so dear 
to the hearts of little children, such as jumping rope, bean-bags, 
drop the handkerchief, puss in the corner, tag, " button, but- 
ton," feathers, come-see-come, blowing a feather, hunt the ring, 
going to Jerusalem, and a long list of others. 

Speaking Books. — A very bright form of Junior entertain- 
ment, quite easily prepared, is the following : Dress the Juniors so 
as to represent books of various authors. Prepare large frames 
reaching from their shoulders to below their knees. Cover these 
frames in such a way that they shall appear like books, binding 
them and lettering them to correspond with the character 
assumed by the Junior. 

When done, the book will be a hollow box open at top and 
bottom, with two bars across the inside which the Junior's hands 
may grasp, thus supporting the book. The Junior should be 
attired in appropriate costume, at least as to the head and that 
part of the body that shows below the book. If representing 
Shakespeare, for instance, a classic head-dress and dress should 
be worn. If representing Dickens, some famous character of his 
may be personated. If representing James Whitcomb Riley, a 
sunbonnet and rough shoes would be appropriate. 

On the evening of the entertainment, each Junior is to come 
forward in turn and repeat some carefully memorized extract 



JUNIOR SOCIALS. 209 

from the wcrks of the author he represents. Music and songs 
chosen from the works of the authors, or in some way connected 
with them, may be interspersed ; and the whole will make a very 
enjoyable evening's entertainment. 

A Rainbow Social. — The Juniors will rejoice in a rainbow 
social. It is conducted in this way : Decorate tables with the 
different colors of the rainbow, and assign to each its waiter ; these 
tables being placed at the side of the room, and the provisions 
set forth upon them. Arrange the chairs in the centre of the 
room in sections, each chair being tied with a bow of bright 
ribbon, all the chairs in one section being of the same color. 

As the Juniors enter, present each with a card tied with a rib- 
bon of the same color as one of the tables and the correspond- 
ing seats. A Junior whose duty this is will then usher the 
Juniors to the section corresponding with the color given them, 
and refreshments will be served them by the waiter from the 
table of the same color. Planned in this way, there is no confu- 
sion, and all are served. 

Junior Gymnasts. — When the Junior meeting is not held 
on Sunday, the superintendent can very profitably keep the 
Juniors for half an hour after the prayer meeting for a drill in 
light gymnastics, if she or some friend is able to give it. One 
superintendent of whom I have heard utilizes this gymnastic 
drill in giving an annual gymnastic exhibition with her Juniors. 
This work will, of course, delight the boys especially. 

Interest al! Summer. — One of the best devices for retaining 
the interest of the Juniors during the summer is to prepare for 
some entertainment early in the fall. Assign the parts before 
the summer begins, and before any of the Juniors have scat- 
tered with their parents upon their summer vacations. Be sure 
that all the Juniors have some part in the entertainment. 

During the summer, hold regular meetings for rehearsals. It 
is well to hold these meetings once a week, even though, as 
will probably be the case, you will not have all the Juniors who 
are to take part at any single meeting. The time and place of 
these rehearsals should be unvarying. 

It will be surprising to see how anxious the Juniors will be to 
make a success of their entertainment, and at the same time, all 
unwittingly, of their summer Junior Endeavor society. The 



2IO THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

entertainment should be given the week before or after the fall 
term of school opens. 

A Good Programme. — An enthusiastic Junior superinten- 
dent from Ireland has sent me the programme of a recent social 
of her society, which contains, among others, these suggestive 
items : Testimony from applicant for membership. Reception 
of the same, with reception hymn. Address of the chairman of 
the social committee. Solos. Readings. Temperance dialogue. 
A paper on the pledge. Recitations. Duet. An action song. 
A blackboard talk. Refreshments. Rallying hymn. "The 
prayer that Christ taught his disciples." 

A Sweet Social. — A candy social will please the Juniors. 
All the members that can are requested to furnish home-made 
candy. This is sold during the social. 

A Butterfly Social. — A form of social that will delight the 
Juniors is the butterfly social. Slight refreshments are to be 
served, and the waiters are to be dressed with butterfly wings 
made from delicately colored paper. The napkins on the table 
should be folded in butterfly designs. In a room near by, paper 
articles may be for sale ; the attendants at the table, and the 
Juniors everywhere, as far as possible, being arrayed in butterfly 
costumes. A musical programme with songs by the Juniors 
will fill out a very pleasant evening. 

Good Socials. — Here are some pleasant children's socials 
suggested by Mrs. Slocum : A China party, where Chinese 
games are to be played, the refreshments being cocoanut cakes, 
little cookies, and lemonade. A berry party. An "others" 
social, each member bringing some little delicacy for the sick. 

A Jerusalem social, each Junior learning something about 
Jerusalem to tell at the social, the Juniors also forming a model 
of the Holy Land in a great pile of sand. For this the lookout 
committee will bring mirrors for the lakes and ponds, the prayer- 
meeting committee silver cord for the rivers, the missionary 
committee moss for the mountains, while the boys will whittle 
buildings for the cities. Each member will bring a contribution 
for missions in Jerusalem, or for some appropriate object. 

A Dorcas social, the Juniors to bring cloth, which they will 
sew into garments, even the boys helping. A picture party, the 
members bringing cards and pictures to send to foreign mission- 



JUNIOR SOCIALS. 211 

aries for use in their work. A book social, the members bring- 
ing books and magazines to help the Sunday-school library, or 
the Endeavor library, or for other good causes. At this social 
there should be little talks and recitations and essays on books. 

A barrel social, for the packing of old clothes in barrels to be 
sent to missionaries. A patchwork social, the members bring- 
ing blocks they have made at home, which they put together 
into a quilt. 

A Field Day. — The boys especially will delight in athletic 
field days, to be held once a year ; and there is no reason why 
they should not be made attractive also to the girls. A com- 
mittee on games should be appointed from the older society, 
with possibly one representative from the Juniors. There 
should be careful rules strenuously insisted upon. Prizes may 
be offered, and gold. and silver Junior badges are the best. 

It will take away any sting of defeat if these prizes are given, 
not immediately after the games, but on the next Sunday at the 
Junior meeting, the superintendent, in presenting them, mak- 
ing appropriate remarks along the line of i Cor. 9: 24, 25, 
Paul's description of the athletic games that Christians carry on 
in their living. If possible, get some energetic and consecrated 
Christian athlete to make these remarks. Attach to each prize 
a card bearing the name of the winner and an appropriate text 
of Scripture. 

A picnic may be arranged in connection with the field day, 
the Juniors bringing their luncheons. A Baptist Endeavor so- 
ciety that has tried the plan arranged the following events and 
rules : — 

EVENTS. 

For the boys: 50 yard dash; running high jump; swimming race; 
tub race. 

For the girls: 50 yard dash. 

For both: 25 yard backward dash; potato race; running broad 
jump ; egg and spoon race. 

RULES. 

I. Handicaps shall be arranged in accordance with the judg- 
ment of the athletic committee. 

II. Entries shall close at the time specified. 



212 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

III. The committee shall judge in regard to the number of events 
any contestant may enter. 

IV. Disputes shall be referred to the referee. 

V. Judgment of unfairness shall debar any contestant so con- 
victed from further participation in the games. 

A . Review. — Either by itself, or in connection with the 
" Junior field day" just described, a review may be held of all 
the societies of a union or a district. A commander-in-chief 
should be elected, with a staff, to be made up of one representa- 
tive from each society. These officers should lay out the plan 
of the day, and plan for the games, if any are held. 

Let there be a flag-raising, and then the general review of the 
societies, the Juniors to be drawn up in martial array, and to 
march past a grand-stand where are standing the commissioned 
officers, the pastors, and guests. The society that has the 
largest number of members in the parade, and shows the best 
discipline, should be given the honor of raising the flag, and of 
carrying it during the Christian Endeavor rallies for the next 
year. As the flag is raised, the entire company should join in 
singing some patriotic song. 

This review might be made the occasion of large ingatherings 
to the Junior society. 

Shadow Pictures. — One very pleasant feature of a Cali- 
fornia Junior social was a set of shadow pictures, illustrating 
scenes from " Mother Goose," the children guessing with each 
picture what rhyme was represented. 

A Giving Social. — On Thanksgiving Day a Kansas Junior 
society held a " giving social," when each Junior brought cloth- 
ing or good things to eat to give away. After their songs and 
recitations, the Juniors were divided into little companies, and 
carried all these things to seven different families who were sick 
or in need. This is a social which might be held at any time 
of the year. Of similar nature are " pound parties," the Juniors 
descending in force on some very poor family, each bringing a 
pound of some food or other useful article. 

Game Socials. — Occasionally have a social to which each 
child is requested to bring some game for the entertainment of 
the others. Fill the room with little tables on which the games 
may be played. Appropriate amusements for Junior socials will 



JUNIOR SOCIALS. 21 3 

be Jackstraws, Tiddledy Winks, Checkers, Halma, Go-bang, 
Dominoes, letter games like Logomachy, such games as Par- 
chesi, Crockinole, Table Croquet, Tiddledy-Wink Tennis, and 
puzzles, such as Pigs in Clover. 

A Bubble Social. — A bubble party will furnish one of the 
prettiest of amusements for a pleasant afternoon social that 
may be held on the lawn. Furnish each Junior with a bowl of 
strong soapsuds, re-enforced with glycerine to make the bubbles 
last, and give them also clay pipes. Many games may be 
played with these bubbles. 

First institute a contest as to who can blow the largest bubble 
without its bursting, then as to whose bubble shall float the 
longest, then as to whose bubble shall rise the highest. 

Give each Junior a fan, and divide the Juniors into sides. 
Let some one stand in the centre between the two lines, and 
blow a large bubble. The Juniors will then use their fans, each 
trying, while he remains in his place, to fan the bubble over to 
the other side and keep it there until it breaks. Another con- 
test is for each side to send at the same time a bubble into the 
air, and try, by blowing upon it, which side can keep its bubble 
floating the longest time. 

Basket Socials. — A basket social is thus arranged. Each 
girl belonging to the Junior society will bring lunch for two, 
daintily put up in a pretty basket. Attached to each basket will 
be two button-hole bouquets, to be worn when the basket is 
purchased. These baskets are to be ranged upon a table; and 
after the opening exercises and the games, some comical genius 
from the older society will sell the baskets. These are to be 
bought by the boys, who are not to know the owners of them. 
After each basket is bought, the purchaser will hunt up the 
owner and eat lunch with her. 

A Mother Goose Social. — A Mother Goose entertainment 
is easily prepared. The children are to be dressed to represent 
the characters of the immortal nursery rhymes. One of the 
brightest women in the church should represent Mother Goose. 
The children should appear upon the stage one by one, each 
repeating or singing the rhyme he represents. To represent 
some of the rhymes, more than one Junior will be needed. At 
the close of the presentation there may ■ be a Mother Goose 



214 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

march in which all the Juniors take part, and the evolutions 
may be as complex as the leader is able to design. 

Scrap-Book Socials. — Scrap-book socials occupy the time 
very pleasantly and at the same time usefully. Leaves of cam- 
bric are to be cut beforehand of uniform size, and the Juniors 
will bring to the social a large supply of bright pictures of all 
kinds. The girls may be set to working the edges of the cam- 
bric leaves with bright worsteds. The boys will trim the pic- 
tures, and paste them neatly upon the leaves as they are 
finished. The girls will then bind the whole in handsome 
covers, and they will be taken or sent to the nearest children's 
hospital. 

A Washington's Birthday Social. — A Washington's 
Birthday social will interest the Juniors. Decorate the room 
prettily with flags, bunting, and pictures of Washington, with 
other patriots. Present each person on entering with a little 
pasteboard hatchet, appropriately decorated and inscribed. 
Have a short patriotic programme made up of recitations, brief 
talks, with possibly a tableau or two, or a flag drill. Dress the 
Juniors in costumes resembling those of the Revolutionary 
times, and have them serve tea in memory of the Boston Tea 
Party, and little cakes baked in the shape of a hatchet. 

A Doll's Fair. — An excellent entertainment for a Junior social 
is a doll's fair. As many dolls may be exhibited as can be ob- 
tained from the younger Juniors and their friends. Some may 
be made by the Juniors, and these should be placed in a sepa- 
rate section. There should also be a paper doll booth. The 
dolls may be arranged in attractive groups, such as a wedding 
party, a tea party, a school, a " babies' table," or " an old woman 
in the shoe." There will be a table for curious dolls, or, maybe, 
for dolls of other nations. There may be a hospital for cracked 
dolls and broken dolls, laid out in little beds, with doll nurses 
in white caps bending over them. It will add much interest to 
the affair if a set of rhymes is prepared for each Junior who is 
in charge of a booth. The Junior may rehearse the lines 
descriptive of her exhibition. An interesting side-show is an 
exhibition of live dolls, to which an admission fee of five cents 
may be charged. These dolls are children, made to look as 
much like dolls as possible. One of the Junior boys will wind 



JUNIOR SOCIALS. 215 

them up and exhibit them. If a small admission fee is charged, 
and especially if there is an auctioning of the dolls, quite a large 
sum may easily be realized. 

A Babies' Photograph Social. — The social committee will 
collect, for this social, photographs of all the Juniors taken at 
as early an age as possible. These pictures are fastened on the 
wall encircling the room in which the social is to be held. Num- 
ber the photographs in order, and give to each Junior at the 
social a pencil, and a slip of paper containing the same numbers. 
Opposite each number the Junior is to place his guesses at the 
names of the persons to whom the photographs belong. The 
social committee, after examining these slips, will give some 
honor to the person who has made the most successful guesses. 

For a variation of this idea, try a reception given by the Junior 
society to the members of the older Christian Endeavor society. 
A series of pictures will be hung on the wall, the photographs 
of the older Endeavorers when they were of Junior age. These 
photographs are to be obtained without the knowledge of the 
persons they represent. The pictures of the girls are all to be 
numbered, and the young men of the society are each to escort 
to lunch the girl whose number is given him — first finding her! 

" Social Evenings." — Junior workers will find a great many 
hints for Junior socials in a book entitled Social Evenings, by 
the author of this manual. It is published by the United Society 
of Christian Endeavor, and sold for thirty-five cents. It contains 
a hundred and forty-two pages, with more than one hundred and 
fifty games and entertainments, many of them simple enough for 
the Juniors, and some of them especially prepared for their use. 



2l6 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 



CHAPTER XXV. 

THE BIRTHDAY COMMITTEE. 

The Birthday Committee. —The chief duties of the birth- 
day committee are to make a list of the birthdays of the mem- 
bers of the society, arranging them in the order of their occurrence 
throughout the year, to announce at the beginning of each meet- 
ing the names of the Juniors whose birthdays fall on the coming 
week, to keep the birthday boxes in which are placed the birth- 
day offerings, to remind the Juniors whose birthdays are to be 
celebrated on next Sunday of those offerings, and to keep these 
Juniors in special remembrance in their prayers during the entire 
week. Besides the birthdays of the Juniors, the society will do 
well to remember, in some pleasant way, with gifts or otherwise, 
the birthdays of their pastor, of his wife, of the Sunday-school 
superintendent, and of the Junior superintendent. Christmas is 
Christ's birthday ; and it would be pleasant, if the committee 
is able for the responsibility, to place the Christmas meeting in 
its especial charge. 

On the Board. — The birthday committee wn'i find it very 
helpful to put on the blackboard each Sunday the names of the 
Endeavorers whose birthdays fall during the coming week, the 
superintendent at each meeting requesting the Juniors to offer 
especial prayers for the happiness and spiritual welfare of these 
Juniors. The names, being before the Endeavorers during the 
meeting, are firmly fixed on the memory. 

Birthday Pennies. — Often the Juniors give to the society, on 
their birthday anniversaries, as many pennies as they are years 
old. In some societies the members stand and sing a birth- 
day prayer, while the member whose birthday is observed comes 
forward and drops his pennies into the birthday box. It is a 
good idea to keep this money apart, and use it either for the 
benefit of sick members who are poor, or for Christmas, which is 
Christ's birthday, when the money may be spent in making pres- 
ents to needy ones, who will thus be given a happy Christmas. 



THE BIRTHDAY COMMITTEE. 2\J 

A Birthday Hymn. — Choose a birthday hymn, such as No. 
51 in " Gospel Hymns No. 6," "I belong to Jesus," and have 
this hymn sung on every occasion when a Junior's birthday is 
remembered. 

A Birthday Celebration. — An impressive way of celebrating 
the birthdays of the Juniors is this : Let the birthday committee 
report the name. The Junior rises and stands while the children 
sing one verse of the hymn, "God will take care of you," No. 
52, in "Junior Christian Endeavor Hymns." The superinten- 
dent then offers a short prayer for the Junior, committing him 
and all his interests to the Saviour. After this the Juniors sing 
the last verse of the same hymn. 

Another Birthday Observance. — Some Juniors of Baltimore 
have this interesting observance in connection with their remem- 
brance of the birthdays of the different members. At each meet- 
ing prayer is offered for those boys and girls whose birthdays 
occur during the week ; and all the Juniors are requested to think 
of these members on their birthdays during the week, and to 
pray for them. It is surprising how many do thus pray for each 
other. 

A Birthday Chair. — A pleasant bit of ceremony is to set 
apart a particular chair draped with flowers or ribbon by the 
birthday committee, which is to be occupied during the meet- 
ing by the Junior whose birthday is to be celebrated. In some 
societies, this fortunate Junior is presented on this anniversary 
with a copy of the New Testament. It is always appropriate 
for the superintendent to give him, before the society, a few 
earnest and loving words of advice for the coming year. 

A Personal Letter. — A personal birthday letter sent by the 
superintendent in her own handwriting will be greatly appre- 
ciated by the Junior who receives it. It may contain a pretty 
birthday card with a suitable verse of Scripture, and the Junior 
may be asked to make that verse his motto for the coming 
year. 



2l8 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 



CHAPTER XXVI. 

THE SUNSHINE COMMITTEE. 

The Committee Work. — The work of the sunshine com- 
mittee is quite impossible to define, because it depends almost 
entirely upon the surroundings of the societies and the Endeav- 
orers. This committee is to do any good Samaritan work that 
suggests itself, anything that is helpful, and cheering, and Christ- 
like. Their special care is the poor of the congregation and 
of the neighborhood, and, of these, chiefly the children. They 
are set to minister to the sick, and should work with the flower 
committee in their beautiful ministry. They should co-operate 
with the relief committee of the older society, who should ask 
the Juniors of the sunshine committee to go with them in their 
calls upon poor families where there are children. 

The pastor should keep in mind this branch of the Junior 
work, and make the chairman of this committee one of his 
active helpers. The doctors who belong to the church will be 
able to tell the committee who are sick, if they themselves can- 
not find out from their parents or their friends. The church 
officers, also, will be glad to direct the Juniors to families 
where their Christlike helpfulness will be appreciated. 

A Home Committee. — Above all things, the sunshine com- 
mittee is a home committee. Teach the children that while 
the Juniors are all bound by their pledge to make home as 
happy a place as kindness, love, helpfulness, and unselfishness 
can make it, yet the members of the sunshine committee are in 
a peculiar manner committed to such endeavors. The super- 
intendent cannot talk too often about the little foxes that do 
so much to spoil the home vine — peevishness, fretfulness, 
crossness, the hasty word, the sluggish spirit, the willingness 
to impose upon the good nature of others. All these things 
the sunshine committee should be set to conquering in them- 
selves, and should be taught that this conquest must come 



THE SUNSHINE COMMITTEE. 219 

before they can successfully bring sunshine into the lives of 
others. 

"And Co." — Members of the sunshine committee may 
well work in couples, or even in trios. For instance, one boy 
belonging to a Junior society of which I have heard was sick, 
and was visited three times a day by the Juniors, one member 
reading to him, another taking him delicacies for his dinner, 
while a third ran in to tell him the news. 

Worth Remembering. — The following excellent sunshine 
committee motto is used by one Presbyterian Junior society. I 
commend it to others. " I expect to pass through this world 
but once. Any good thing, therefore, that I can do, or any 
kindness that I can show to any fellow-being, let me do it now. 
Let me not defer it nor neglect it, for I shall not pass this way 
again." 

In Their Hands. — One superintendent of wide experience 
makes it her rule to accompany her Juniors on their first visits 
to the sick and others under their care. Afterwards, however, 
she seldom goes with them, and labors to make the Juniors feel 
their individual responsibility. This trust they appreciate, and 
are faithful to it. 

To the Old and Infirm. — The ministry to the aged of the 
congregation and neighborhood is one of the most beautiful 
ways in which the sunshine committee can be helpful. The 
superintendent may ask the Juniors to volunteer for this service, 
or the superintendent may appoint certain members each week 
to do this delightful work. They can read many books for 
those whose eyes are failing. They can tell the news. They 
can sing their merry songs, and in other ways can carry the 
freshness of childhood into the lives that too often are desolate 
and lonely. 

Serenades. — The sunshine committee will sometimes give 
much pleasure by an out-of-doors serenade on some aged per- 
son,' or some " shut-in." They should get together the singers 
of the society, and, after practising one or two bright songs, 
should go to the homes they may select and sing them. 

Shut-In Work. — The Juniors will be especially interested 
in the work of the Shut-in Society, whose secretary, Miss 
Monroe of Ashland, Mass., will be glad to tell any superinten- 



220 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

dent about its workings. The Juniors will write letters to these 
shut-ins, and send them pictures and books. 

A Constant Reminder. — A Tennessee Junior society does 
not save its consecration basket for the consecration meeting, 
but sets it by the door at every meeting. The Juniors, as they 
come in, drop into it all sorts of good things and useful things ; 
and at the close of the meeting the sunshine committee examines 
the contents of the basket and decides to which of the objects 
of their care these gifts shall go. 

Practical Charity. — In no way can the beauty of charity be 
so clearly shown the children as when they are brought into 
actual contact with the recipients of their gifts. Thanksgiving 
is an excellent occasion for this. Some societies are in the 
habit of collecting from the Juniors money with which fruit, 
candy, and nuts are bought for children in families that would 
probably be too poor to afford such luxuries on Thanksgiving 
day. 

A Thanksgiving committee is appointed, whose members 
meet at the home of the superintendent, fill their baskets, and 
go about among the homes of the poor the day before Thanks- 
giving, distributing these presents. This Thanksgiving com- 
mittee reports at the next business meeting of the society. 

A Merry Christmas. — Do not let Christmas pass without 
interesting your Juniors in making Christmas presents for poor 
children who will get none in other ways. Among the articles 
they can make are comforts, scrap-books, mittens, dolls 1 
dresses, etc. 

Some Noble Fun. — A way of distributing gifts to the poor 
that will especially commend itself to the fun-loving Juniors is 
the leaving of baskets of good things upon the door-step. Let 
the Juniors ring the bell and then scurry away, watching from 
some hiding-place the results of their beneficent stratagem. 

A Food Store. — Your Junior society may like to establish a 
food closet, a sort of storehouse of canned fruit, flour, and simi- 
lar articles of food, from which they can draw for the relief of 
cases of need that come to their notice. 

No Pharisees. — In the sunshine committee work that is 
done for the poor, the Juniors should be carefully taught by 
their superintendent to exhibit nothing but a spirit of the ten- 



TIE SUNSHINE COMMITTEE. 221 

derest sympathy. No feeling should enter their hearts that they 
are better than the poor people whom they help and cheer. 
The superintendent will do well to show his charges how much 
of the world's poverty is due not to fault but to misfortune. 
I Child Ministries. — If your Juniors belong to a large city, 
you should certainly interest them in the children's hospitals 
and orphans 1 homes. Take them occasionally with you to visit 
the unfortunate children, and see that they do not go empty- 
handed. They will like to carry their presents and give them 
in person, tell stories to the children, and play games with 
them, and sing to them, before they go, some beautiful song 
like, " There is sunshine in my soul.'" 

After several visits from the children a Junior society may be 
organized in the institution itself, which will furnish a fresh tie 
between the favored and the unfavored young people. 

If this cannot be done, at any rate these hospital children 
should always be given an invitation to become members of the 
Junior society on their recovery. Some very happy acquisitions 
have thus been made. 

A Lesson In Kindness. — When your Juniors have picnics 
or other social gatherings, invite to join with them some of the 
children of orphans' homes or similar institutions that may exist 
near by, and teach the Juniors to make the little strangers have 
a pleasant time. 

A Hospital Visitation. — A hospital service for Christmas 
time will be a great pleasure to the Juniors, and will furnish 
them with an initiation into practical Christian work. Teach 
them a supply of sweet Christmas carols. Give them sprays of 
evergreen or holly tied with bright red ribbon, each spray bear- 
ing a card on which is written or printed a Christmas Bible 
verse or a bit of helpful poetry. Carrying these to the cots, 
wishing each sick one a Merry Christmas, and singing their 
happy carols, the Juniors will pass through the wards, leaving 
behind them brightness and good cheer that will last for many 
a day, and carrying away with them a thoughtful spirit and a 
truer appreciation of what Christmas means. 

Comfort Sheets. — The Juniors will be greatly interested in 
the making of comfort sheets, which at the same time will do 
much good. Let the scrap-book committee get sheets of bristol 



222 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

board in some pretty tints. These can be obtained more cheaply 
from a printing-office than from a stationery store. Cut them 
in stripes five by six inches, and divide them among the mem- 
bers of the committee. 

Let these paste neatly upon them beautiful poems suitable* 
for tired workers, weary watchers, patient sufferers, mourning 
friends, or for the aged or sick. Upon the back let bright, 
cheery pictures be pasted, or let some flower or pretty scene be 
painted. These comfort sheets should be distributed by the 
sunshine committee to the many who will be helped by them. 

Hospital Screens. — A good thing for Juniors to make for 
the hospitals is a screen, for weary eyes to look at, and for the 
interception of the sun's brightest rays. These screens should 
be ornamented with bright pictures, especially with funny ones. 

Story Envelopes. — Story envelopes for hospitals are easily 
prepared, and will be of the greatest service. These consist of 
stout manilla envelopes, each containing three pleasant stories. 

Hospital Committees. — Some societies have hospital com- 
mittees. The main purpose of this committee is to gather all 
the maimed, crippled, dilapidated, and otherwise disabled dolls, 
which the boys glue together and make solid, while the girls 
furnish them with fresh dresses. Then they are sent to the 
children's hospitals. Sometimes this hospital committee makes 
scrap-books, or covers separate leaves of paper with bright 
pictures, the latter being more easily held in the hand, deco- 
rates fans with funny or pretty pictures, stuffs pillows with bits 
of paper and covers them, and in many other ways cares for the 
pleasure and the comfort of the poor children in the hospital. 

About Christmas time the Juniors should be made to feel that 
their own Christmas is incomplete unless they have helped to 
furnish a merry Christmas to those who otherwise would have 
a sad one. Fruit and clothing, toys and books, with the loving 
messages of the Juniors, and their own sunshiny faces when 
they can present the gifts in person, will do good like medicine. 

A Good Present. — A nice Christmas present that the Junior 
society may give to the Sunday-school superintendent, the 
pastor, or any one they wish to honor, is a neat linen table 
scarf, on which each Junior's autograph has been outlined in 
silk. The corner should contain the Junior badge, embroidered 
in pretty colors. 



THE SUNSHINE COMMITTEE. 223 

Printed Helps. — In The Junior Golden Rule a. great deal 
of sunshine committee work is suggested each month. Little 
prizes are offered, for instance, for the best-decorated fan that 
is sent in for the children in the hospitals ; for the best-dressed 
doll, this to have the same destination; for the neatest and 
prettiest scrap-book, and the like. Moreover, the letters from 
the children, as well as the reports of Junior work given in the 
older Golden Rule, are full of suggestions. 



224 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 



CHAPTER XXVII. 

THE SCRAP-BOOK COMMITTEE. 

Junior Scrap=books. — Every Junior society should have a 
little library of scrap-books for the use of the different commit- 
tees, and of these the scrap-book committee should have charge. 
The material will come, of course, mainly from The Golden Rule 
and The Junior Golden Rule ; and it will be well for the society 
to have two copies of each, for clipping articles that may 
appear on opposite sides of the same leaf. 

Each committee should have a scrap-book, which may he 
kept by the chairman of the committee. The material for filling 
the book, however, will be collected by the scrap-book com- 
mittee, sorted, and the appropriate clippings given to each 
chairman for pasting in his book. The missionary committee 
might well have books for the different missionary countries, 
one in charge of each member of the committee ; and to these 
books should flow a constant stream of bright anecdotes, useful 
facts, and helpful suggestions. 

Hospital Books. — The scrap-book committee will find it a 
delightful, as well as a helpful task, to make large numbers of 
scrap-books, light and easily held in the hand, to be sent to 
hospitals. It will be a good plan to classify the material for 
these books. One may be a book of jokes, another a book of 
comforting poems, a third may contain nothing but helpful 
prose, and a fourth a collection of short stories. Picture scrap- 
books for children's hospitals, or scrap-books for the same insti- 
tutions containing only poems and stories that the children will 
enjoy, may also be made. There may be a book of Brownie 
pictures, a flower book, an animal book, etc. In fine, there is 
here quite an unlimited field of blessed endeavor. 

Scrap=Leaves. — Scrap-leaves are often better ,than scrap- 
books. These scrap-leaves are simply large sheets of paper or 
of cloth, covered with pictures. They should be of uniform 



THE SCRAP-BOOK COMMITTEE. 225 

size, and placed in a neat album whose sides can be tied to- 
gether. Not only are these scrap-leaves easier for the sick chil- 
dren in the hospitals to handle, but they are better for the 
Juniors to make, because the Juniors are not so easily tired in 
preparing them as they would be in manufacturing each a large 
scrap-book. 

A Scrap=book Evening. — Under the direction of the scrap- 
book committee the entire society may spend a happy evening 
once or twice a year. A large amount of material having been 
collected by the committee and sorted in different piles, near 
each of which is placed a large bowl of paste and a paste brush, 
the Juniors may be set to pasting these clippings in different 
scrap-books. One may have a pile of jokes for a scrap-book of 
jokes ; another may make a scrap-book of poetry ; another a 
China scrap-book, or a temperance scrap-book. 

It is not necessary, by the way, to buy regular scrap-books 
for this work. Any well-bound book, part of whose leaves may 
be torn out, may be used for the purpose. Old government 
documents, patent office reports, and the like, are just the thing. 
For many purposes a light pamphlet will make an acceptable 
scrap-book, especially if the pamphlet, after being filled with 
scraps, receives a cloth or pasteboard cover. 

Scrap= Envelopes. — Set the scrap-book committee to sorting 
all the scraps it can gather itself or obtain from its friends, pla- 
cing them in a set of envelopes on which are written the different 
classes of scraps. Keep one envelope, for example, for helpful 
poems ; another for bright stories ; one might be a temperance 
envelope ; another, a missionary envelope ; another, an enve- 
lope for the sick ; another, a Bible envelope. 

These envelopes should be stout, so that they can be passed 
around from house to house. They should not contain so much 
that they cannot easily be read through in the course of a week, 
and returned on the next Sunday. This will make it necessary 
to have more than one envelope for many of tke subjects. A 
wide-awake scrap-book committee can do much good by lending 
these envelopes to persons who can make good use of them. 

A Scrap Prayer Meeting. — For an occasional variety, it is 
pleasant to invite the Juniors to be on the lookout for clippings 
bearing upon a certain topic, which should be appointed several 



226 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

weeks ahead. At the meeting when this topic is considered, 
each Junior will bring and read some scrap of poetry, or a little 
anecdote or fact illustrative of the topic. The chairman of the 
scrap-book committee might appropriately be the leader for this 
meeting. 

Scrap=books as Presents. — If the society desires to make 
a present to the pastor, the pastor's wife, the Sunday-school su- 
perintendent, or others, it will find a scrap-book, appropriately 
made, very acceptable. Many a pastor, for example, would 
make good use of a large collection of helpful poems. Many 
a Sunday-school superintendent would enjoy a well-arranged 
scrap-book composed of clippings from The Sunday School 
Times and the denominational Sunday-school journals. 

A Paper for Each. — In all this scrap-book work it will 
greatly simplify matters if each member of the scrap-book com- 
mittee takes under his charge a single one of the journals from 
which the committee expects to get most of its material. In 
addition, the society should be canvassed, that the committee 
may learn what papers and magazines not accessible to any of 
its members are taken in the families of the other Juniors ; and, 
as far as may be, those Juniors should be interested in gathering 
helpful clippings from those periodicals also. 

The Superintendent's Scraps. — Every Junior superinten- 
dent should have a Junior scrap-book, in which should be placed 
clippings from The Golden Rule and other Christian Endeavor 
papers, as well as from Junior leaflets, and any helpful articles, 
poems, and the like. The scrap-book should be divided into 
appropriate divisions, such as "music, 11 "missions, 11 " temper- 
ance," "lookout, 11 "prayer-meeting, 11 "social, 11 "general," 
"committee work," " Bible drills," " incidents," "the pledge," 
"boys," "business." The chapter heads of this Manual will 
furnish suggestions for the subdivisions of such a book. 

Sometimes it will be better to use a set of stout envelopes, 
fittingly labelled, each large enough to hold such pamphlets on 
Junior work as the United Society may publish from time to 
time. 

Besides these scraps regarding methods, keep scraps of all 
kinds of good literature. Nearly every Junior topic can be il- 
lustrated with appropriate poems, and you will find that Juniors 



THE SCRAP-BOOK COMMITTEE. 227 

delight in committing these to memory and in repeating them. 
If you bear in mind the topics for several months to come, you 
will find many poems suitable for their illustration in the current 
periodicals. These scraps also should be classified in envelopes 
marked with the main subject of the poems, such as "forgive- 
ness," " kindness, 11 " love, 11 " animals, 11 " Christmas, 11 etc. 



228 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 



CHAPTER XXVIII. 

THE FLOWER COMMITTEE. 

Working Together. — The members of the flower committee 
should be those who are congenial ; and this may be brought 
about without any pandering to the caste spirit, and without 
any fostering of cliques. The flower committee are frequently 
thrown together ; and, if they like each other, their excursions 
over fields and through woods will be tenfold enjoyable. 

Taking Turns. — There are few churches in which the older 
society does not carry on the beautiful ministry of flowers, dec- 
orating the pulpit on the Lord's Day. It will be best for the 
older society to share this pleasure and duty with the Juniors. 
Let the Juniors decorate the pulpit on one Sunday and the 
older society the next, alternating. In this way a not hurtful 
rivalry will be brought about, and each society will be less 
heavily burdened. 

Co=operating with the Pastor. — It is not always that the 
flower committee need know the theme of the pastor's sermon 
in order that its decorations may be suitable. Occasionally, 
however, the decorations might be quite incongruous with the 
subject of his sermon, and at other times a changed order of 
decoration might greatly assist the effect of the sermon. At 
any rate, the superintendent should ask the pastor to let the 
flower committee know at any time when he wishes special 
kinds of decoration in order to allude to it in his sermon. 

Special Decorations. — On Christmas, Easter, Thanksgiv- 
ing, Children's Day, and similar holidays, let the Juniors join 
with the older Endeavorers in decorating the church. It will 
be a good plan if a certain part of the church be set apart for 
the Juniors to decorate all by themselves. 

Decorate the Junior Room. — The work of most flower 
committees is expended, and very appropriately, almost entirely 
upon the church, the Sunday-school room also occasionally re- 



THE FLOWER COMMITTEE. 229 

ceiving a few flowers. It may be well, once in a while, to deco- 
rate the Junior meeting-room too. For special occasions, such 
as graduation day and Christian Endeavor Day, this should 
always be done. 

For the Sick. — Whatever use of flowers the committee may 
make, let them imitate the beautiful practice of the older com- 
mittees and distribute the flowers, after they have served their 
purpose, to the hospitals and to the sick of the congregation. 
The Juniors may go in a body to the hospitals, and, when the 
attendants permit, sing one of their songs in each ward, after- 
wards distributing the flowers. Scripture verses may be re- 
peated, or the Lord's Prayer said in concert. It will be far 
better if the Juniors themselves carry the flowers to the sick. 
With each bouquet that is sent out, let a helpful verse of Scrip- 
ture go. These verses should be written on cardboard, the 
information being added that the flowers are the gift of the 

Junior Society of Church. The cardboard should be tied 

to the bouquet. 

Lending and Giving. — The lending of flowers will furnish 
one of the helpful methods this committee may use. Many a 
sick room could be brightened by a rose in full bloom, a lily, or 
a hyacinth. The committee might also raise some of these 
plants to give away. Instances have been known where the 
coming of a plant into a poor and dirty tenement has worked a 
complete moral revolution. 

Birthday Flowers. — The flowers that are not needed for 
the sick or the hospitals should be sent to the pastor's study, 
and once in a while a particularly nice bouquet should be made 
all for him. Similar delicate attention should signalize his birth- 
day, and the birthday of the Sunday-school superintendent, and 
the pastor's wife, and of any one else the society wishes to 
honor. In this the flower and birthday committees should 
co-operate. 

Junior Horticulture. — There is no reason why the Junior 
society, any more than the older society, should go to the large 
expense of buying flowers that their own members might raise 
with equal pleasure and profit. Let the flower committee see to 
this. They might buy small plants, and distribute them among 
the members to care for. The same thing might be done with 



230 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

packages of choice flower seeds. It would be a pleasant plan 
for the flower committee to establish a flower garden, taking a 
corner of some yard offered to them, and working in it all to- 
gether, or taking turns. 

Variety and Simplicity. — It should be the aim of the 
flower committee to introduce as many novel effects as possible 
in the decorations of the church. Certainly the methods of deco- 
rating should be different on consecutive Sundays. Teach the 
Juniors the value of simple decorations, especially the use of 
large groups of flowers all of one kind. Show them that grains 
and grasses produce beautiful decorative effects, as well as ferns, 
autumn leaves, and any green foliage, and, in the proper season, 
almost any kind of fruit. 

The Church Yard. — One of the most helpful things a Junior 
Christian Endeavor society can do, if it has an energetic flower 
committee, is to take charge of flower-beds about the church. 
These will serve the double purpose of beautifying the grounds 
and supplying flowers for the pulpit. 

Flower Shows. — The flower committee may earn money for 
missions or for the general purposes of the society by organizing 
a flower show. This, of course, must be planned for many 
weeks beforehand, and the co-operation of the entire society 
will be necessary. The results of these weeks of careful tend- 
ing are to be brought together, arranged on tables and shelves 
in attractive ways, the room being decorated also with tissue 
paper and similar adornments. If the affair is well advertised, 
and if the plants are auctioned off by a bright member of the 
older society, a neat sum will be gained. 

Flower Meetings. — Flower meetings are very helpful in the 
Junior society. Ask the Juniors to bring flowers, accompanying 
each, if they can, with a Bible text about that flower. Or, if the 
flower they have to bring is not mentioned in the Bible, let 
them bring with it, at least, some flower text. The flowers 
should be given to the sick. The superintendent may talk 
about the flowers mentioned in the Bible. She may tell stories 
about flowers and their helpfulness. Some of the Juniors may 
recite flower poems, and songs about flowers can always be 
found. 

These meetings may be named after the flowers that happen 



THE FLOWER COMMITTEE. 23 1 

to be then in bloom, and each Junior may come wearing one of 
the flowers after which the meeting is named. Thus there 
might be daisy meetings, violet meetings, lily meetings, rose 
meetings, aster meetings, or chrysanthemum meetings. 

A Flower Salute. — For many public occasions a flower 
salute will make a pretty exercise, and of this the flower com- 
mittee may appropriately take charge. The salute originated, 
I believe, with Rev. F. B. Everitt of New Jersey. The children 
stand in a row facing the audience, in their right hands small 
bouquets, and in their left handkerchiefs. The pianist gives 
the signals, playing merely the four chords in any key, and the 
octave chord. This is the salute : — 

First chord, flowers to lips. 

Second chord, flowers extended in the right hand as if a kiss were 
thrown, while at the same time the Juniors step forward on the right 
foot. 

Third chord, flowers in position the same as before, the Juniors 
waving their handkerchiefs briskly with the left hand. 

Fourth chord, the Juniors return to their first position, the flowers 
and handkerchiefs at the side. 

Octave chord, all are seated. 



232 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 



CHAPTER XXIX. 

COMMITTEE WORK IN GENERAL. 

Why Junior Committees? — I once read an article whose 
writer argued that committees are harmful in a Junior society. 
She urged various reasons. One is that the superintending of 
the committees is a severe drain on the superintendent's time. 
The answer is, that if it is too much for the superintendent, she 
should obtain helpers from the Young People's society. These 
aids would learn many a valuable lesson while overseeing the 
Junior committee work. 

The second objection was that "if the children do efficient 
work upon committees, it is too great a tax upon them, added 
to their other duties. Add to the demands of their school 
work, the study of music or painting, their household duties, 
the running of errands, then the hour spent in the Junior meet- 
ing, besides Sabbath school and other church services, and 
they surely have enough without committee work." The re- 
sponse is that the committee work does for the child what none 
of these other duties can accomplish. It is the child's training 
in organized, practical religious work. Better drop something 
else, if need be, than relinquish this. But in* reality this work, 
if rightly conducted, becomes as interesting and enjoyable as 
play. 

The third objection was that " the committees, if we have 
them, should be trained to do thorough work ; for what is worth 
doing at all is worth doing well. The lookout committee is 
considered a very important one, but to my mind it is unwise to 
put children on this committee at all. We well know how care- 
fully and prayerfully our older ones have to do this work, and 
even then there is danger of doing harm. It is a delicate mat- 
ter to speak to others about being derelict in duty, and children 
are very outspoken. Then it has seemed to me that a good 
deal of the Pharisaical spirit may be developed by watching the 



COMMITTEE WORK IN GENERAL. 233 

other members in a criticising way, to see who have not done 
their duty." 

In reply, let it be said that the child's outspoken way is, more 
often than not, the Christlike and best way. A wise superin- 
tendent will need, of course, to guard against the Pharisaical 
spirit ; but her work will not be in half so much danger from it 
as it would be if her flock were older. The earlier children are 
taught that they are their brothers 1 keepers, the more likely are 
they to grow up loving, helpful, frank, and sympathetic men 
and women. 

The final objection was couched in these words : " There is 
danger that the committee work may come to seem the impor- 
tant part of the society, while the spiritual should always be 
first. We have older Christians that are ready to do work that 
can be done with the hands and head and feet, but stop when it 
comes to the heart work, or spiritual part. When the children 
enter the Young People's society they can be placed on com- 
mittees with older ones, and there be trained for this part of the 
work." The misconception of committee work shown here is 
the fundamental difficulty that led to the writing of the article. 
The writer does not see how profoundly spiritual committee 
work in a Christian Endeavor society is. If it is done merely 
with the hands and head and feet, and not with the heart, it is 
a failure, in Junior, Young People's, and Senior society alike. It 
is in the committee work of the Junior society that the prayers 
are made vivid, the Bible verses brought in touch with life, the 
joy of service disclosed, the spiritual life at the same time drawn 
upon and quickened. It gives added zest to the society, prac- 
ticality to its theories, and adds works to its faith. It is not 
the chief essential to a successful Junior society, but it is an 
essential. 

Each on a Committee. — If it is necessary, in a Young 
People's society, to place every member on some one commit- 
tee, how doubly necessary is it in a Junior society? These 
wide-awake youngsters differ conspicuously from their elders in 
the fact that they are miserable unless given something to do. 
There is one committee on which, after a liberal allowance of 
members to the other committees, all remaining members may 
be placed; that is the sunshine committee. There is infinite 
scope for their ministry of loving words and deeds. 



234 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

Novel Committees. — A consecrated ingenuity, however, 
will be forced to this "lumping 1 ' only in the largest societies. 
The superintendent can invent committees, temporary commit- 
tees, changing their names and purposes with the changing 
needs of church and society. There may be " surprise commit- 
tees, 1 ' to do pleasant little needed things for the church and 
society, and bring them out as jolly surprises. There may be 
" pastor's aid committees," to do little tasks under his direction, 
or the direction of the pastor's wife. There may be "sewing 
committees " among the girls, to make useful things to give 
away. There may be "hospital committees" among the boys, 
to mend broken toys to be sent to children's hospitals. There 
may be "scrap-book committees," to get up bright and enter- 
taining scrap-books for the same purpose. These and other 
novel committees are fully described in this Manual. Every 
member on some committee — that's an essential to the highest 
success in a Junior society ; and it may be brought about. 

How to Appoint. — How should we appoint our committees? 
One interesting method has lately been proposed. Let the su- 
perintendent call for volunteers, naming each committee in order, 
and asking who would like to serve on that committee, getting 
a boy and a girl alternately. Possibly this is as good a way as 
any to set the ball rolling ; but when once the committees are 
formed, it would be well to have a regular rotation of service in 
them. Why not? The Christian Endeavor idea is to get as 
many people as possible to work for Christ in as many ways as 
possible, and it is a great mistake to keep the best members 
always on the most important committees. Both best members 
and worst members need the stimulus of new work, and it is 
hard to say which need it most. One of the most important 
things in determining the composition of a Junior committee is 
to see that you have placed upon it some very timid members 
as well as some who are bold and enterprising. Look very 
carefully to the balancing of your committees. 

On New Committees. — Matters should be so arranged that 
at the end of the term each Junior should enter a new commit- 
tee, and one, if possible, on which he has never served before. 
Of course, no one would advocate the bodily transference of the 
lookout committee, say, into the work of the prayer-meeting 



COMMITTEE WORK IN GENERAL. 235 

committee. That would keep the same set of workers together, 
and would be a bad thing for the social spirit of the society. 
All that is urged is that each Junior should be assigned, if pos- 
sible, to a new committee at the end of each term of office. 

With this method there can be no complaint at the assign- 
ments made by the superintendent, because each member will 
understand that all kinds of work will come to him in his turn. 
The officers will remain, to be nominated by the superintendent 
and elected by the society, as before. 

Many Committees. — Put every member of the society upon 
some committee, but do not have the committees so large as 
to be unwieldy. Effect this object by having a good many 
committees. 

Be the Silent Partner. — Though the superintendent may 
meet with the committees of the society, and, indeed, should 
so meet as often as possible, yet the chairmen of those commit- 
tees should conduct the meetings, even when she is present, 
otherwise they will not feel half so much responsibility as they 
should. In fact, the great danger of committee work is that too 
much of it shall be done by the superintendent, and too little of 
it by the children themselves. Learn to trust the powers of the 
children. The more you learn of their bright brains and ready 
zeal, the more you will confide in them. It is your part to plan, 
advise, direct. You must show them just what to do and how 
to do it, and this work will often be more laborious than to 
accomplish the tasks of the committee yourself. The purpose 
of the Junior society, however, you must remember, is not to get 
work done, but to train workers for the tasks of the coming 
years. Make it your fundamental principle in committee work 
never to do anything yourself that you can, by earnest endeavor, 
get the children themselves to accomplish. 

In Charge of Committees. — If you are compelled to be 
absent during the summer, and can in no other way provide for 
the continuance of the meetings, try the plan of giving the 
several meetings into the charge of the different chairmen of 
the Junior committees. You will be pleased to see how well 
they will respond to this responsibility, and how much strength 
they will gain from this courageous endeavor. 

The Older Endeavorers. — The best plan I know of for 



236 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

holding the monthly committee meetings is to put each under 
the special superintendence of some member of the correspond- 
ing committee from the older society. It is asking too much 
of any superintendent to expect her to be present at each 
monthly committee meeting of all her committees. The plan 
of committee meetings I think best is the following : — 

After the consecration meeting, or after some other assigned 
meeting held at a regular point in the month, the society breaks 
into committee groups, which go to different parts of the room, 
or to different rooms, each with its member of the correspond- 
ing committee from the Young People's society to help and 
suggest. It is not a bad plan, after half an hour's discussion 
and consultation, for these committees to come together again 
as a united society. At this time the chairmen of the various 
committees will bring before the society any plan upon which 
the advice and decision of the entire society may be desired. 

Older Chairmen. — I believe that it is almost always best 
to permit the Juniors to be chairmen of the Junior committees, 
at the same time appointing members of the older society to 
act as overseers, or committee superintendents. A plan pro- 
posed by Mrs. Scudder, however, may meet the need of certain 
localities ; and so I mention it. She advocates that these older 
Endeavorers be appointed chairmen of the various Junior com- 
mittees, and act as instructors of the Juniors, and that the 
superintendent herself be the chairman of the prayer-meeting 
committee, as that is the most important. 

Committees of Two. — It is better, in a small Junior society, 
to have very small committees and many of them, rather than 
few committees with a large number of members. A new society 
of which I hear starts with twelve Juniors, divided into six com- 
mittees of two members each, one of whom is chairman. 

Committee Sundays. — It is a good plan to set apart cer- 
tain committees for each Sunday of the month, so that all the 
committees will have a regular Sunday for their monthly com- 
mittee meetings. The names of these committees may well be 
printed on the topic card following the announcement of the 
leader. 

Only Chairmen. — In small Junior societies it has some- 
times been found best not to divide the society into committees, 



COMMITTEE WORK IN GENERAL. 237 

but to appoint simply the chairmen of the usual committees, 
requesting each chairman to consider the entire society his 
committee for the accomplishment of the work ordinarily as- 
signed to him. * When the missionary committee, for example, 
would have work to do, the chairman of that committee calls 
a meeting of the entire society, and so with all the other 
committees. 

Prayer Always. — It is a good rule never to have a com- 
mittee meeting without prayer. This point deserves a para- 
graph to itself. 

All Ready for Work. — One little Junior of Washington, 
D.C., enthusiastically cried at her first Junior meeting of the 
year: " Oh, I should like to be on every single committee, and 
work just as hard ! " That is the right spirit to show. Try 
to inculcate it in all the committee work your Juniors undertake. 

Honor Them. — Our Junior societies should recognize, more 
than they do, honest work on committees. It is well occasion- 
ally for the superintendent to give a little prize for the best 
committee service, or in some other way to honor publicly the 
best committee workers. 

Monthly Committees. — It is a question how long Junior 
committees should serve. Several societies have found it profit- 
able to have a rotation in committee work once a month, 
especially in the lookout committee. The argument for long 
terms of committees in the Young People's society is that only 
thus is it possible to form and develop wise and far-reaching 
plans. In a Junior society, however, the conserving and con- 
tinuing of effort is provided for by the existence of a continuous 
superintendent, and long terms of office in the committees are 
not so necessary. 

Any experienced superintendent, of course, knows the relief 
which is felt when a committee has been developed to the point 
of partial or entire independence, so that it will do its work 
well without continuous oversight. It is a great temptation 
to keep such members in office for a long time ; and, of course, 
they should be kept in office long enough to become thor- 
oughly at home in the work. 

But the growth of any society, as a whole and as individual 
members, depends on rotation of work — on dropping the easy 



238 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

and familiar tasks, and taking up new and difficult ones. And 
especially in a Junior society much of the interest depends on 
keeping the work fresh, and making things lively. It will 
almost always be found better to give a Junior a short term 
in lookout-committee work, and then a second term after an 
interval of some other work, than to keep him at the same work 
for a long time. The change will rest him, and enliven him, 
and he will come back to his old work with new zest. 

From all these considerations it would appear wise to shorten 
the terms of Junior officers and committees, if not to one month, 
at least to a period shorter than the terms used in the older 
societies. 

Committee Drill Meetings. — An occasional committee 
drill meeting would be very helpful to a Junior society. It may 
be conducted in the following way. All parts, of course, should 
be carefully prepared beforehand. 

At the meeting let the different committees sit together. The 
superintendent, after preliminary exercises, calls on the com- 
mittees in order. As she names a committee, the members of 
that committee rise. Then the superintendent questions them. 
" Lookout committee, what is your work for Christ and the 
church ? " 

Says one Junior (these answers have been given out at the 
previous meeting), " To get new members for our society.'* 
Says her neighbor, " To explain, to all who would like to join, 
just what the pledge means. " Say the other members in order: 
" To look after absent members, especially when they are absent 
from the consecration meeting.'" " To look after the members 
who seem not to be keeping their pledge." " To give invi- 
tations to outsiders to attend our meetings. 1 ' " To urge the 
associate members to become active. 1 ' 

After all these have spoken, the committee repeats in concert 
a bit of Scripture appropriate to its work, such as Phil. 2 : 3, 4, 
and then sits down. The superintendent makes a little talk 
about the duties of the lookout committee, the spirit in which it 
should work, and the spirit in which the other members should 
work with it, and receive its help. Then there are a few sen- 
tence prayers from the Juniors, asking God to help this com- 
mittee, to give it wisdom, to keep it faithful, and to help the 



COMMITTEE WORK IN GENERAL. 239 

society to receive its words and warnings in the right spirit. 
Then a hymn is sung, appropriate to the lookout committee, 
like "What shall the harvest be?" or " Will Jesus find us 
watching ? " In the same manner let all the other committees 
be treated. 

It would be a capital plan to select some good, bright mem- 
ber from each of the corresponding committees of the Young 
People's society, and have him present, to say a few words of 
love and encouragement to the Juniors who are engaged in the 
same work. If your Juniors are at all skilled in talking, it 
would be a capital plan, after each committee has told what it is 
trying to do, to ask the society in general to tell what the society 
ought to do to help that especial committee. 

Committee Reports. The Junior society that is not train- 
ing its members to make regular written reports is preparing 
trouble for the Young People's society into which that Junior 
society will grow. It is very easy to get the Juniors to make 
reports, if you go about it in the right way ; and that Sunday of 
the month when the reports are given will be looked forward to 
with great interest. 

It will not be found advisable to seek the same kind of reports 
from all committees. Each committee, in fact, should have a 
unique way of presenting the results of its work. The sunshine 
committee, for instance, would soon become priggish if it re- 
ported in the ordinary way the good deeds done by its members. 

Here is an excellent method for sunshine committee reports. 
Let each member of the committee write out, for the encourage- 
ment and pleasure of the society, in simple and reverent lan- 
guage, an account of the helpful deeds to which he has been 
prompted, during the month, by membership in the sunshine 
committee. It would be a good thing to add an account of one 
or two good deeds the member has noticed in others. As no 
names are to be mentioned, and as no one, not even the super- 
tendent, is to know who writes these reports, these little histo- 
ries can do no harm by developing a Pharisaic spirit. As the 
members come in, let them place their reports in a gilt ball, 
made to represent the sun, and called the " sunshine ball." 
From this the superintendent will take them, and read them 
out loud, making brief comments. 



240 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

To aid the chairmen of the other committees in preparing 
their reports, the superintendent should write on sheets of paper 
sets of questions for each committee. These questions could 
;be preserved for continual use. The answers to the questions, 
'written in the children's own language, will make very creditable 
reports, if the questions are wisely worded. Here is* a set for 
the prayer-meeting committee : — 

1. How many prayer meetings have been held this month? 

2. Who were the appointed leaders? Did they all serve? Have 
you any suggestions for future leaders? 

3. What has been most helpful, do you think, in our prayer meet- 
ings lately? 

4. Are the members becoming more faithful in offering prayer and 
speaking for Jesus? 

5. Do you see any faults in the meetings? How can these faults 
be helped? 

6. What are some of the difficulties the prayer-meeting committee 
has lately had to meet? 

7. In what ways does the committee want the help of the members? 

8. Has the committee any new plans to propose for the prayer 
meeting ? 

Frequently let the reports be given in novel ways. For exam- 
ple, the monthly report of the lookout committee might be 
presented, for a change, in the following manner: Let a chart 
be prepared. On it are seven gold stars, for the seven active 
members received during the month, and three silver stars for 
three new associate members. Here is a row of blots — six of 
them — for six members who were absent from the last conse- 
cration meeting, and sent no message. Here are ten outline 
stars, for the ten new members that are wanted during the com- 
ing month. Who will set the committee on the track of them ? 
Here are three stars covered with a veil ; you can barely see 
them. They are three Juniors who have not taken part in the 
meetings during the whole month, except by reading a verse. 
Won't they throw off the veil and shine out ? 

If the superintendent is ingenious and persistent, she can 
bring it about that the reports of the Young People's society, 
when her Juniors get there, shall be among the most inspiring 
features of the entire work ; and that is very far from being the 
case now. 



COMMITTEE WORK IN GENERAL. 24I 

Bind Your Reports. — Junior superintendents will make a 
mistake if they do not insist upon written reports from the 
committees. These reports should be kept on file. If written 
on uniform slips of paper, they can be bound up at the end of 
the year, and make a volume in which the little authors will 
take great pride. 

Who Give the Reports? — When you have committee 
superintendents appointed from the Young People's society, 
be sure, none the less, to have the report of the committee 
work prepared and given, not by the committee superinten- 
dents, but by the Junior chairmen of the committees, in order 
to teach the Juniors to do the work, and to hold them to their 
responsibility. 

Visiting the Committees. — Ask your president and vice- 
president to drop in systematically upon the meetings of the 
different committees, so as to keep informed regarding their 
work. It would be well to arrange for their visits at a time 
when the superintendent cannot also be present. 

Public Announcement. — Though the habit is one to be 
discouraged in the older society, yet in the Junior society it 
is not a bad plan to have the committee meetings, that are 
called for the week, announced by the chairmen of the different 
committees at seme fit time in the Junior meeting, preferably 
at its beginning. 

Committee Seats. — You can avoid the weekly calling of the 
roll, and gain many other incidental advantages, by adopting 
the plan carried out by a certain Canadian Junior society. In 
this society each member is allotted a certain chair ; the mem- 
bers of the hymn-book committee, for example, occupying the 
outside chair of each row. As the Juniors enter, they distrib- 
ute the hymn-books, and collect them again at the close of the 
meeting. At the other end of the rows sit the members of the 
lookout committee, each looking after the attendance of his 
row, visiting the absentees, and reporting. They have a com- 
mittee called the kind-act committee, whose members occupy 
chair No. 5 in each row, and see that all the Juniors have 
Bibles. In the same way the other committees are seated, 
one member behind the other. 

A Committee a Week. — It is a severe task for the super- 



242 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

mtendent to oversee all the Junior committees and come in 
close contact with each, but the matter may be easily managed 
if she plans an evening a week with some committee, the com- 
mittees taking turns in coming to her house for the discussion 
of their work, and the formation of plans for prayer and Bible- 
study appropriate to their tasks. A helpful adjunct to this 
work is the requirement that the committee which thus meets 
with the superintendent shall be held especially responsible 
for the next week's prayer meeting. 

Committee Ribbons. — Small bows of ribbon for each com- 
mittee, these ribbons differing in color with the different 
committees, will be found helpful in giving the committees esprit 
de corps, and in reminding the little workers of their duties. 
The colors of the ribbons may be symbolical. The prayer- 
meeting committee may have white, for purity and holiness. 
The lookout committee may have blue, for the sky. The 
sunshine committee, of course, should have yellow. The social 
committee should have red, the color of the heart. The flower 
committee should have green, the color of leaves. 

Committee Mottoes. — Bible mottoes for Junior committees 
are very helpful. The newly elected chairman may select them. 
Each member is required to learn the motto of his committee, 
and then promises to try to live up to it. The temperance com- 
mittee of a Canadian society has for its motto Ps. 39 : 1 , and 
each child whom they persuade to sign the temperance pledge 
repeats this verse before signing. Mottoes of the other com- 
mittees are: missionary, Mark 16: 15; sunshine, Eph. 4 : 32 ; 
music, Ps. 66: 4; lookout, Ps. 119: 105; prayer-meeting, Col. 
3:17, etc. The officers should also choose their mottoes. 

In connection with this you may establish a pretty ceremony. 
Call each forward in turn and have him say, "I will try to be 
faithful to my duties as president, 1 ' or " secretary, 1 ' " treasurer, " 
etc., and recite his motto. The chairman and members of the 
committees will do the same. 

Committee Outlines. — The following set of suggestions for 
the different Junior committees used by one superintendent will 
be found useful in many ways. They should be written out with 
the typewriter, and a copy of the appropriate set given to each 
committee chairman. A copy should also be given to each assist- 



COMMITTEE WORK IN GENERAL. 243 

ant from the older society. Spaces for fresh suggestions should 
be left on each slip. 

The Prayer-Meeting Committee. — 

1. Select leaders and topics for the prayer meeting. 

2. Keep a list of the part taken by each member. 

3. Help new and timid members by asking them to take some 

specified part in the meetings. 

4. See that the meeting does not drag. 

5. Pray for the meeting before coming to it. 

6. Welcome new members and strangers. 

7. Encourage members to be faithful to the prayer-meeting pledge. 

8. Meet with the leader for a little prayer service before the meeting. 

9. Always praying. 
The Social Committee. — 

1. See that every member is acquainted with every other member. 

2. Welcome new members and introduce them to the old members. 

3. Call on new members and newcomers. 

4. Conduct occasional social gatherings. 

5. Praying always. 
The Music Committee. — 

1. Lead the singing at the meetings. 

2. Keep up the Junior choir. 

3. Arrange to sing each week one song in which the others need 

not assist. 

4. Encourage all to sing. 

5. Praying always. 

The Sunday-School Committee. — 

1. Call upon the absent scholars. 

2. Get new members into the Sunday school. 

3. See that all the members of the society are members of the 

Sunday school. 

4. Get new members into the society from the Sunday school. 

5. Praying always. 

The Missionary Committee. — 

1. Assist the missionary societies of the church in any way practi- 

cable. 

2. Arrange a missionary meeting at least every quarter. 

3. Collect papers, fruit, and flowers for distribution in hospitals. 

4. Collect clothing, fruit, flowers, and other things for the poor 

and sick. 



244 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

5. Request that members bring some of these to each missionary 

meeting. 

6. Get signers to pledges of money, and collect it once a month. 

7. Praying always. 

The Scrap-Book Committee. — 

1. Collect pictures and scraps for books. 

2. Make books of cambric, and paste in the scraps. 

3. Distribute them to the poor and in the hospital, especially among 

the young. 

4. Cut from The Golden Rule and The Junior Golden Rule sug- 

gestions for the Junior committees, and make a book of them 
for the superintendent and the committees. 

5. Praying always. 

The Sunshine Committee. — 

1. Prevent quarrels among the members. 

2. Assist in collecting fruit, flowers, and clothing for the poor, and 

distribute them. 

3. Welcome strangers to the meetings. 

4. Be pleasant to all whom you meet. 

5. Make others happy in any way you can. 

6. Praying always. 

The Birthday Committee. — 

1. Obtain the date of birth of each member. 

2. Report each week the names of those that have birthdays during 

the week, and pray for them. 

3. Obtain the date of the birthday of the pastor, and celebrate it if 

convenient. 

4. Celebrate the birthday of the society. 

5. Have a birthday box, and let each member put in one cent for 

each year of his age on his birthday. 

6. Praying always. 
The Book Committee. — 

1. Distribute Bibles at the meetings. 

2. Distribute song-books at the meetings. 

3. Distribute tracts. 

4. Erase any marks found in the books that should not be there. 

5. See that those that come late have books. 

6. Help build up the Sunday-school library. 

7. Praying always. 

The Good- Literature Committee. — 

I . Get subscriptions to The Junior Golden Rule. 



COMMITTEE WORK IN GENERAL. 245 

2. Get subscriptions to denominational papers. 

3. In every way encourage good reading. 

4. Praying always. 

The Lookout Committee. — 

1. Speak to those who are careless in keeping the pledge. 

2. Be present every week, and mark the roll-call books. 

3. Bring new members into the society. 

4. Visit the absent ones, and report the reason for their absence to 

the superintendent. 

5. Be first at the meetings, and first to take part. 

6. Always praying. 
The Flower Committee. — 

1. Furnish flowers for the church. 

2. Bring flowers to the meeting each week, and take them to the 

hospital, the sick, and the poor the next day. 

3. Assist the missionary committee in distributing fruit and flowers. 

4. Raise flowers for distribution. 

5. Decorate the church for special services and entertainments. 

6. Praying always. 

A Thread=and=NeedIe Committee. — One Junior Christian 
Endeavor society in South Carolina has a committee with this 
odd name. The purpose, however, is perfectly manifest. It is 
a sort of Dorcas committee, and makes not only nice things for 
missionary boxes, and to be given away to needy families at 
home, but dresses dolls for poor children, and does all such 
delightful work. 

Humane Committees. — One of the most important subjects 
upon which the Juniors should be instructed is the kind treat- 
ment of animals. The superintendent can do much by occa- 
sional talks, but more can be accomplished by the formation of 
a humane committee. The duties of this committee should be 
to gather items relating to the humane treatment of all living 
creatures, and turn them over to the scrap-book committee for a 
special volume ; to report cases of cruelty ; and to prevent, as 
far as possible, any that they may see. 

A Sailors' Committee. — An English Junior society has a 
new committee called the " sailors' committee," which was sug- 
gested by a San Francisco Endeavorer who had crossed the 
water. The work of this committee is to send good literature 



246 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

on board steamers for the use of the sailors, and to do every- 
thing they can to make the voyage pleasant for them. 

A Smoking Committee. — Forms of committee work that 
are especially appropriate to boys are valuable above all others. 
One odd committee of which I have heard is a " smoking com- 
mittee." This committee keeps watch over all the Juniors, and 
reports to the superintendent any that may be seen smoking. 
Other vices to which the Juniors are more likely to be addicted 
may furnish motives for committees of different names. In the 
particular society that adopts a smoking committee, at the next 
meeting after the re'port to the superintendent, a special prayer 
is offered for the guilty Juniors. 

Message Committees. — Message committees are found 
useful in many a society. The duty of this committee is to 
notice who are absent from the business meetings or the prayer 
meetings, and notify them regarding any special point of busi- 
ness which the interests of the society require them to know. 
Sometimes also the superintendent uses this committee to pass 
messages around among the members, informing them of special 
meetings, or matters of the sort. 

A Postman Committee. — A postman committee of the 
Junior society will work very helpfully for the Young People's 
society if placed at the disposal of the proper officers, and set to 
delivering parcels or letters, or assisting the older Endeavorers 
in their religious work. 

Information Committees. — It is a great inspiration to the 
Juniors to learn what other Juniors are doing. The older so- 
cieties have their information committees and report at the be- 
ginning of each meeting, for five minutes, things that have been 
accomplished by other societies and new plans of work. 

A similar committee would be especially enjoyed by the young 
folks. They might read papers written by other Juniors for the 
State conventions. They should consult The Junior Golden 
Rule, and find out from the letters there published the work in 
which other Juniors are engaged. Of course the news page of 
The Golden Rule contains frequent hints, all in the same line. 



WINNING AND HOLDING THE BOYS. 247 



CHAPTER XXX. 

WINNING AND HOLDING THE BOYS. 

Vim and " Go." — If your society has few boys in it, some- 
thing is wrong with you, or with the society. It has been 
proved by many superintendents that this something, whatever 
it is, is discoverable and removable. Try to enter more thor- 
oughly into the likings of a boy, not catering to what is rude 
and careless in boy nature, but appealing to everything that is 
manly, and to all his innocent boy tastes. 

Boys like noise, for instance. They like a great deal of vigor 
and vim in whatever they are connected with. They are pleased 
with novelty and with movement. If they are learning Bible 
verses, they enjoy them far better if they are divided into Com- 
pany A and Company B, and are permitted to fire Bible verses 
at each other, one division repeating one verse, the other imme- 
diately charging with a corresponding verse. Now and then 
you may vary this plan by the formation of temperance brigades, 
who will have a fusillade back and forth of temperance quota- 
tions from the Bible, with an occasional temperance song. 

How to Appeal to Them. — In seeking to win the boys, 
adopt Professor Drummond's principle in his college work, and 
strike for the boy leaders. If you win them, you have won all 
of Boy-land. Show the leaders that you need them. They will 
learn after a while how much they need you and the society. 
Tell them of some of the definite lines of work that you have 
for them. If they feel that they will have some immediate occu- 
pation in the society, they will be far more likely to enter it. 
Place responsibility constantly upon them. Ask their advice 
and consult with them whenever you can. 

Responsibility. — Lay upon the boys as many definite duties 
in connection with the society work as you can. Appoint one, 
for example, to care for your desk for a month. Appoint an- 
other to take charge of the society maps, pictures, and similar 



248 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

illustrative objects. Let the blackboard be the charge of a 
third, the hymn-books, possibly, of a fourth, the windows and 
ventilation of the room of a fifth. Let others see that the 
chairs are arranged in proper order, and changed, if you adopt 
the wise plan of varying the arrangement from time to time. 
Let others be chosen to pass the singing books and the Bibles. 
Assign to one each month the duty of reading the society no- 
tices, and seeing that the notices are given out in Sunday 
school. It is a good plan to have one of the Junior boys read 
these notices himself in the Sunday school. 

By Themselves. — Pay a little especial attention to the boys 
occasionally, remembering how difficult it is to reach them and 
hold them. Invite them to remain for a few minutes, sometimes, 
after the Junior meeting. Hold with them a short prayer ser- 
vice, urge them to help you win the other boys of the Sunday 
school, and ask each boy to select another boy for whom he 
will pray and work during the coming months. This plan was 
instrumental in doubling, in a very short time, the number of 
boys in a certain Junior society of which I have heard. 

Seek the Fathers. — Among the Junior workers there is 
none too much talk about the mothers, but there is far too little 
talk about the fathers of the Juniors. If we wish to win the 
boys, we must look more to the fathers to help. Get the men 
to drop into the Junior society once in a while. It will be 
harder to do this, because their business hours must not be 
interfered with; but it may be accomplished now and then. 
Urge the fathers in all ways to show their boys that they 
approve of the Junior society, and believe in it thoroughly. 

The Help of the Young Men. — You can never get the 
boys to join the Junior society and remain there without the co- 
operation of the young men of the older society. Let the 
boys see that the young men to whom they look up are in- 
terested in Christian Endeavor, and they themselves will be 
interested. Get the young men of the older society to take part 
in the socials of the Juniors, organize for the boys skating- 
parties, walking-parties, coasting-parties, and in all ways to try 
to make friends with them, and win them and hold them for the 
Master. 

Forward — March ! — Boys like gymnastics and marching, 



WINNING AND HOLDING THE BOYS. 249 

and there would be no harm in brightening your Junior meetings 
with many motion songs and similar exercises, being careful 
always to tie the exercise firmly to some gospel truth. For 
many reasons it is a good plan to drill your entire society, boys 
and girls, in marching. This accomplishment is especially use- 
ful in all union gatherings ; and it tends to weld the society 
firmly together, as well as to increase the children's interest in 
it. Teach the Juniors the meaning of such military terms as 
"fall in," "right dress," "front," "at ease," "right face," 
" about face," " forward march," " mark time," " double quick," 
"column left," "single file," " column of fours," " right wheel," 
etc. Practise the Juniors in marching along aisles, up steps, 
and about the platform. 

Let Them Know. — In answer to the question: "How do 
you manage to keep your boys ? " one Junior superintendent 
gave the significant answer: " I just love them real hard, and 
let them know it." It is in the last four words that most super- 
intendents fail, if they fail at all. 

Manliness Wins Boys. — One of the most experienced 
Junior workers in the country has given me this plain and sen- 
sible hint: "So many Junior superintendents worry because 
the boys will not come to the meetings. The reason is plain. 
The Junior talks are given in such a childish, goody-goody way 
as to disgust older girls and all boys. Practical talks about 
the every-day happenings of life are what appeal to their better 
selves, and not some tale of a good little boy who never did a 
wrong act." 

How She Won the Boys. — A California Junior superin- 
tendent has told how she was able largely to increase the at- 
tendance of boys on her Junior society. After Sunday school 
it was announced, with a little mystery, that the boys of certain 
classes were requested to meet her after the lesson hour. 

Talking with them, she urged upon them membership in the 
Junior society, stating that it was not fair that the girls should 
monopolize all the good things ; urging them to come in a body 
to the next Junior meeting, each bringing a friend ; insisting, 
moreover, that they keep the whole affair secret, so that it 
should be a profound surprise. She got the boys to promise to 
do this by asking each one if he would do it if all the others did. 



250 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

More can be done by a very brief talk with a lot of boys 
together than you will accomplish by a hundred times the 
amount of work with boys taken separately. If our Junior 
superintendents understood how to take advantage of the gre- 
garious nature of boys, and their love for little secrets and 
mysteries — in short, if they would take more pains to under- 
stand boy nature — there would not be the dearth of boys that 
is now experienced by many Junior societies. 

As the result of this little scheme I have just described, 
that Junior society, whose membership was almost entirely of 
girls, received such an accession from the boys that they now 
constitute more than two-thirds of the membership. More 
than that, they are good and faithful workers. 

Military Drill. — There is quite a difference of opinion in 
regard to the advisableness of incorporating with Junior Chris- 
tian Endeavor work the work of the Boys 1 Brigade, or anything 
of a military character. There is no doubt that the boys are 
strongly attracted by military drill, brass buttons, and uniforms. 
There is no doubt also that the reign of the Prince of peace will 
not be furthered by any appeal to the love of war. The use of 
military tactics, however, and of the manual of arms, has no 
essential connection with war, and will be retained, I believe, as 
an admirable discipline, long after all swords have been beaten 
into pruning-hooks. 

No Junior superintendent, of course, will adopt military drill 
for his boys except with the full and hearty consent of the pas- 
tor and the church officers ; and if, with this consent, military 
methods are in any degree adopted, let all care be taken lest the 
pleasure and exhilaration of them supersede the interest in the 
distinctively religious work for which the Christian Endeavor 
Society is established. Give enough of them to freshen mind 
and body, to train the children in order and obedience, to 
enlist in the work their physical and social natures, but not so 
much that the spiritual aims of the work are lost. 

And especially, in all military drill, so train these young 
Christian soldiers that they shall see that the weapons of their 
warfare are not carnal, but that they are enlisted for life under 
the banner of the Prince of peace, that their strife is to be 
against war and anger and passion and all other evil things. 



WINNING AND HOLDING THE BOYS. 2$ I 

Some Junior superintendents form the Junior boys into what 
they call the " Boys' Brigade of Christian Endeavor." Others 
have simply "a brigade committee" of the Junior society. 
Others drop the word " brigade " altogether, and organize what 
they call " Christian Endeavor Guards," or " Christian En- 
deavor Cadets." With any plan, membership in the Junior 
society is an essential to membership in this military company. 

Usually the military drill occupies the hour preceding the 
prayer meeting of the Junior society, — only, of course, when 
the prayer meeting is held on some week-day. At the roll-call 
the Guards respond with Bible verses. They also report attend- 
ance at church, Sabbath school, and Christian Endeavor soci- 
ety. Sometimes at this roll-call the Juniors are required to 
give the text of last Sunday's sermon, or the topic of the coming 
Christian Endeavor prayer meeting. 

The Boys 1 Brigade constitution calls for a monthly missionary 
meeting and for a Bible study every fortnight; and this work 
would, of course, be done by the Junior society in the combina- 
tion here described. 

Squads of this military company could be detailed by their 
commander to do all kinds of Christian Endeavor work. A 
musical squad might be drilled in a choir. A relief squad would 
do the work of a relief or sunshine committee. A lookout 
squad would win new members, and watch over the faithfulness 
of the members already obtained. A White Cross squad would 
see that the boys' lips are kept pure from intoxicating drink, 
tobacco, and profane and vulgar language. This idea may be 
indefinitely extended. 

A boy's cap, belt, and other equipments, including his wood- 
barrel gun, need not cost more than $1.80. Their uniforms 
may also be obtained very cheaply. A single entertainment 
given by the Guards would easily pay for the whole, or the boys' 
friends or parents would probably delight to fit them out. 

As to the captain, it is by far the best plan to enlist in this 
service some young man from the older society, if a competent 
drill-master can there be obtained. In this way you hold the 
young men as well as the boys. 

The Cadet Committee. — Junior societies that do not wish 
to take up the work of the Boys' Brigade may find a hint in the 



252 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

cadet committee formed by a certain Junior society within my 
knowledge. This society has more than one hundred boys. 
They are uniformed, and are given regular drills. They are 
taught that it is their special work to preserve good order in the 
society, to set an example of manly deportment, and to perform 
any helpful service they may be called upon to carry out. 

Boys to the Fore ! — If you arrange the boys so that they 
sit next to the organ or piano, and the girls sit farther away, 
you will find that the girls will sing quite as well, and the boys 
will sing very much better. In this way, too, the boys will be 
brought to the front, where their behavior will be improved, 

A Secret Name. — You will please the boys by giving them, 
all to themselves, some name which will be a secret between 
you and them, the initials only being communicated to the 
outside world. For example, they may be known as the " E. 
R's," "Ever Readies." 

Boys' Clubs. — A boys' club will prove a useful auxiliary to 
any Junior society that can find a good superintendent for it. 
This club should have a room appropriated to its use, where 
games may be played, and debates and similar exercises held. 
The room should be opened especially during the evenings, and 
the boys should be at liberty to invite to it their particular 
friends. The young men of the older society should be inter- 
ested in the movement, and would be glad to take turns in 
superintending the room during the evenings. In no better 
way can the Christian workers of the church get a strong hold 
upon the boys, not only of the congregation, but of the entire 
neighborhood and town. 

Debates. — Boys like debates, and it will do no harm now 
and then to spend fifteen minutes of your society meeting in a 
brief debate on some moral question ; one side, for example, 
urging the superior claims of home missions and the other side 
of foreign missions ; or the debate may turn upon the compara- 
tive needs of the different mission fields, or upon the best way 
of defeating the liquor power; or the question might be, 
" Which does more harm, card-playing or theatre-going ? ri 

Well, why not? — One wide-awake Junior superintendent 
— this was in Canada — won the boys to his Junior society by 
establishing a swimming-club. 



WINNING AND HOLDING THE BOYS. 253 

Boys' Meetings. — Occasional boys' meetings will prove a 
success. They should be composed not merely of the boys of 
the junior society, but of all their boy friends whom they can 
get to come. 

A Banana Peel Committee. — One Junior superintendent 
I know of has organized a "banana peel committee" among 
the boys. The duty of this committee is to put out of the way 
of others banana peelings and cigar stumps. When the boys 
are shown what mischievous work is done by the waste cigar 
stumps that are collected and used over again, they will see the 
point of the latter portion of their work. 

The Postman Committee. — It is well to have the postman 
committee consist entirely of boys, and brightness will be given 
to the work if the committee is changed each month by the su- 
perintendent. It is their duty to distribute letters with texts to 
learn from the leaders and from the prayer-meeting committee, 
during the week ; to deliver for the superintendent messages to 
the members ; to run errands for the pastor and older En- 
deavorers and the Sunday-school superintendent, and in gene- 
ral to make themselves useful after the fashion of postmen 



254 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 



CHAPTER XXXI. 

BADGES AND BANNERS. 

Wear Them. — Urge the Juniors to wear their badges all 
through the week. Remind them of the responsibility they are 
thus taking on themselves, and urge them not to disgrace the 
emblem. These badges will not only keep the Juniors from 
yielding to many a temptation, but they will advertise the so- 
ciety among the young people, and strengthen each Junior's 
loyalty to the organization. 

A Variety. — The United Society of Christian Endeavor has 
quite an assortment of Junior badges, — the shield, bearing the 
" C. E. 1 " monogram, above which is the word "Junior. 1 ' This 
is made of gold, costing $1.00, or in gold and enamel, whose 
price is the same. A silver and enamel badge costs 30 cents, 
and a silver badge 25 cents ; Corinthian silver and enamel 20 
cents, and Corinthian silver 15 cents. These are all pretty, 
well made, and serviceable. 

A New Badge. — Emphasize reception into the Junior so- 
ciety always by pinning upon the breast of the new member, in 
the presence of the society, a new Junior badge. 

Paying for Them. — Teach the Juniors to care for their 
Junior badges by requiring them to pay for their second one in 
case they lose the first. In most societies, probably, each 
Junior pays for his first badge also; but it is better that it 
should be an entrance gift from the society. 

Paper Badges. — Superintendents may like to manufacture 
Junior badges out of pasteboard for special occasions. The 
Junior monogram may easily be cut out of paper of different 
colors, and hung from pretty bits of ribbon. This will furnish 
a pleasing badge for union socials and the like, those of differ- 
ent societies being of different colors, or, possibly, those of 
similar committees in the different societies being of the same 
color. 



BADGES AND BANNERS. 255 

Junior Colors. — When a society cannot furnish each mem- 
ber with a pin or badge, it will be the next best thing to adopt 
junior colors, and present each member with a ribbon badge of 
the same. Special emphasis should be placed on the faithful 
wearing of these badges at school. Here they attract attention, 
and often give opportunity for an invitation to the Junior so- 
ciety. Besides that, they serve as reminders to the Juniors 
themselves, and, when the same ribbon badge is adopted by all 
the societies of a local union, they introduce the members of the 
different societies to one another. 

Junior Banners. — Your society needs a banner, if it has not 
one already. If you ever attend a convention in a body, you 
will want the banner to fly at the head of your marching 
column. If you have adopted the pleasant and shrewd custom 
of dismissing the Juniors by having them march in an orderly 
manner from the room, singing a marching song, you need a 
banner to lead the way. Let the smallest boy carry it. 

Even when the banner is quietly hanging before the society 
in the place of meeting, it is of use in keeping before the society 
the fact that it is a society. Used year after year, a banner 
comes to have a great deal of meaning, and a glance at it is 
sure to bring up many pleasant memories. 

The banner is to last for years. Make it, therefore, of tough 
material, and letter it handsomely. Adopt some characteristic 
emblem, as a crown, a cross, a shield, a star. Place on the 
banner the name and denomination of the church, as well as of 
the society and its location : " The Junior Society of Christian 
Endeavor, of the Third Baptist Church, Springfield, 111." 

Use also some good motto. "For Christ and the Church" 
should be on every banner, but you might adopt also a local 
motto. 

Appoint, with your other officers, a standard-bearer. You 
will find the post a coveted one. Train the standard-bearer to 
be a good leader in the marching. If the design and motto on 
the banner are well chosen, they may be turned to much spirit- 
ual profit in the society. 

Make the banner attractive in coloring, but not gaudy. Chil- 
dren should be trained in artistic sense as well as in higher 
things. See to it especially that the lettering is so distinct that 



256 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

it can be read across a large church. Such combinations as 
black on a blue background, or silver on a white background, 
are to be avoided. Let the banner be sufficiently simple to tell 
its story at a glance. Do not overload it with ornament. 

Orders for society banners are filled, cheaply and promptly, 
by The Golden Rule Co., Boston. 

Home=Made Banners. — Some societies cannot afford to 
have an expensive banner of silk, and other societies need 
special banners for special occasions. It is well for all Junior 
workers to bear in mind, therefore, how cheaply banners can be 
made. A Florida superintendent tells us of a beautiful banner 
which she constructed, whose total cost was seventy-three 
cents. 

The foundation was a piece of cotton flannel of the requisite 
size. The standard was made of a slender stick, painted white. 
The ornamentation was of crepe tissue paper, white, green, and 
gold. This beautiful paper, which is so much used, can be 
twisted and puffed and plaited in many different ways, and 
quite gorgeous banners can be fashioned quickly and effectively, 
as well as little souvenirs for special occasions. 

Red, White, and Blue. — Much may be made by an inven- 
tive superintendent of the use of flags, especially in connection 
with Christian citizenship meetings. The Juniors will like to 
wave these flags during the singing of patriotic hymns, or to 
march, carrying the flags, or to talk about the flag and what it 
symbolizes. 

Committee Shields. — It is an advantage to have the Junior 
committees seated together, and this is not always so easy of 
accomplishment as it might seem. One ingenious superinten- 
dent brought it about by making five shields, one for each 
committee. Upon these shields was the Christian Endeavor 
monogram, and each was differently colored. Each of these 
was placed upon a certain row of seats which the committee was 
to occupy during the meeting. 

A committee meeting may easily be called by putting one of 
these shields in a conspicuous place. Once in one society, for 
example, it was desirable to hold meetings of all the committees 
at the close of the regular session. These shields were placed 
in the parts of the room where the meetings were to be held. 



BADGES AND BANNERS. 257 

The organist played a marching song, and the committees took 
their places. When the time was nearly up they were called 
back by the organist. 

Shield Contests. — A shield contest will add greatly to the 
interest of the society. Divide the society into companies, 
whose size will vary with the size of the society. Number them 
A, B, C, etc. Cut from heavy pasteboard a shield. Cover it 
with cloth, — light blue or any other pretty color, — and hang it 
by a neat cord. One of these shields should be for each com- 
pany, and lettered across the top with the company's name. 

The shields should be about two feet long. Cut from red 
paper the Christian Endeavor monogram, pasting it upon the 
shield. About this monogram are to be pasted silver stars as 
each company earns them. Set over each company a captain, 
whose business it is to keep his company in order, see that it is 
punctual in attendance, etc. 

In dividing the members into companies, be sure to place in 
each company representatives of the different classes of children 
in the society as to age and character. Seat these companies 
together in the Junior meeting, with the shields hanging in 
front. 

The credits are earned as follows : One silver star is given to 
each company who has every member present. If an absent 
member sends a verse, he is counted as present. Another star 
is earned when every member of the company brings his Bible. 
A gilt star is given to the company that brings in a new mem- 
ber. A silver star is earned by the company every member of 
which is in place at the time for the opening of the meeting. If 
each member of the company has prayed and read the Bible 
every day during the week, another star is earned. This 
schedule can be enlarged by the superintendent, according to 
the needs of the society. 

Room should be made about the Junior monogram for, say, 
fifty stars, and a small prize maybe given to the company which 
is the first to complete this number. 

Junior Colors. — The society should by all means adopt a 
color, and this should appear not merely in connection with the 
Junior badge, as a little bow of ribbon, but, as far as possible, 
in all the decorations of the society room. 



2$8 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

Mottoes. — A motto is an inspiration to any Junior society. 
Better have it in plain English. It may be chosen from the 
Bible, or from some author familiar to children. Tell the 
Juniors something about the author, whether sacred or secu- 
lar. Get some good artist to make an illuminated copy of the 
motto for the society walls. 

If the Juniors themselves can select an appropriate motto, so 
much the better. This motto may well be chosen afresh each 
year, though the society might also have a standing motto that 
it might call its society motto. 



ORDER IN THE SOCIETY. 259 



CHAPTER XXXII. 

ORDER IN THE SOCIETY. 

Keep Control. — It is important that the superintendent sit 
not merely where she can see the entire society, but where the 
entire society can see her. A warning glance or shake of the 
head will often preserve the order of the meeting. It is always 
best to remove a child who persists in creating a disturbance, 
rather than to allow the meeting to be spoiled ; and it makes no 
difference who the child may be. Do not forget that the devout 
spirit of the superintendent, made manifest in a reverent bear- 
ing and tone of voice, is almost certain to lead the children to 
similar reverence. Boisterousness in the superintendent will 
make a boisterous society, and it could hardly be expected to 
result otherwise. 

Go to the Root. — If you are troubled with disorder in the 
society, see if you cannot remove the cause of the disorder. It 
may sometimes arise in the distribution of the books. Have 
them distributed before the meeting. Sometimes the smaller 
children may grow fidgety because their feet cannot reach the 
floor. They are compelled to swing them or press them against 
the seats in front. Provide them with smaller chairs. Some- 
times the children are interested in watching the visitors. Seat 
them behind the society. Sometimes it is bad air that spoils 
the meeting. See to the ventilation of the room. Sometimes 
the children grow restless because they cannot hear what is 
said. Make the leader and those who take part speak more 
distinctly. 

Seek the Best. — Here is a wise suggestion from an Illinois 
superintendent: "My rule for controlling restless and some- 
times troublesome children is to study the lovable traits of such, 
which I can always find, and make the most of such avenues of 
approach to the heart of the child. 11 

Time to Get Disorderly. — The fact that the children are 



260 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

allowed to gather in the meeting-room some twenty minutes 
before the time for the meeting is often responsible for the dis- 
orderliness that continues throughout the Junior hour. If the 
superintendent herself has a key to the door of the room, and 
does not open it until ten minutes before the hour, and herself 
sees to the preservation of order before the meeting, everything 
will move more smoothly. 

Be on Hand. — Much of the disorder that arises in the 
Junior meetings has its source in the superintendent's tardiness. 
If she is present in the meeting-room before any of the Juniors 
arrive, this danger will be avoided. Some superintendents find 
it a wise plan to set the Juniors to singing as soon as two or 
three of them have gathered together, and to keep up the sing- 
ing until it is time to begin. This would be a good opportunity 
for the practising of unfamiliar songs. 

A Good=Order Committee. — Good -order committees are 
great helps in many societies. The most obstreperous boys 
in the society are organized into the committee, and their ring- 
leader is appointed chairman ! It is their duty to keep order in 
the meeting, and the effect is marked and immediate. 

The members of this committee should sit in the back part of 
the room, making a note of the names of all offenders in the 
matter of order, and should report them to the superintendent, 
who will either talk with the culprits, or summarily dismiss them 
from the society, or put them on probation, as he may think 
best. 

In some societies this good-order committee is a " committee 
of the whole," and is divided into as many parts as there are 
members, so that each Junior is chairman of a subdivision. 
The superintendent can therefore say, " Now, Charley, as 
chairman of a subdivision of the order committee, you ought 
to set a better example." 

A Courtesy Committee. — A worker among the Juniors of 
Victoria, Australia, urges the establishment in every Junior so- 
ciety of a " guild of courtesy." This guild, or committee as we 
should call it, will seek to promote among the Juniors courteous 
habits, neatness, chivalry, personal cleanliness, and purity in all 
ways. The committee will have for its field of action not merely 
the society, but the school, the playground, the street, the table, 
the home ; in short, everywhere. 



ORDER IN THE SOCIETY. 26l 

A Peace Committee. — An Illinois society has a "peace 
committee/' whose work it is to prevent all quarrels among the 
Juniors and their friends, and in general to restore the peace 
wherever there is any trouble. 

Toe the Mark ! — If the Juniors are at all disorderly, a set 
of rules, carefully formulated and posted in the room, will be 
found exceedingly helpful in preserving order. Here is a sample 
set used in one society : — 

1. When the meeting is called to order, each Junior must take his 
seat quietly. 

2. Two Juniors must not talk at the same time. 

3. There must be no changing of seats, talking, whispering, or mis- 
behaving of any kind during the meeting. 

4. Any one who breaks these rules will be taken from the room. 
Shaking Hands. — The Juniors will like to shake hands with 

the superintendent as they go out. This little ceremony will 
aid the superintendent to maintain order as the society passes 
from the room. 

Separating Them. — Some Junior superintendents who have 
found difficulty in managing unruly boys have solved the prob- 
lem in this way. They have divided their societies into divis- 
ions by means of the different committees, one the missionary 
division, another the lookout, and a third occupied by the 
prayer-meeting and social committees. The assistant superin- 
tendents were placed each in charge of one division, and in each 
division was placed one of the unruly boys. The members of 
each division were required to sit together, and thus there was 
peace in the meetings. 

Take Turns. — It is an excellent plan to have the boys and 
girls alternate in occupying the front seats, especially if there is 
any strife among the Juniors for the back seats, or for any 
special position. 

Up Front. — It is a small point, but you will find it helpful 
not to permit the smaller members of the society to be hidden 
behind the taller ones in the meeting. 

Caught ! — If the talkative members of your society are in the 
habit of grouping themselves at the back of the room, a good 
plan to break this up is to get the prayer-meeting committee, 
before the meeting, to turn the rear seats around so that no one 
can sit in them, thus forcing: the members forward. 



262 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

Each His Seat. — It is an admirable plan to assign to each 
Junior a special seat in the meeting-room and expect him to 
retain that seat. In this way the superintendent is able to sep- 
arate the disorderly members and those who are inclined to talk 
and laugh together, and she can throw into companionship those 
who are able to help one another. 

A Rest. — It helps to keep the Juniors in good order if, right 
in the middle of the meeting, when they are becoming a little 
tired, you have them rise and circle about the room, singing a 
marching song. This rests them, and makes them fresh for the 
close of the meeting. 

Thistles. — I have heard of a Junior society that is divided 
into three sections, the "pansy," the "primrose, 11 and the 
"thistle" sections. If a Junior becomes disorderly he is at 
once degraded into the "thistle section"! 

An Occasional Visitor ! — Sometimes the younger boys of 
the Junior society are especially disorderly. One Junior super- 
intendent has succeeded in quieting them by occasionally invit- 
ing one of the fathers of the Juniors to come in and sit among 
them during the meeting. 

A Badge of Honor. — If the deportment of your Juniors 
needs improving, try this plan : Buy a gold Junior badge which 
you will call the badge of honor, and permit this badge to be 
worn at each meeting by some one whose deportment at the 
preceding meeting was very good. Do not say that you offer 
it for the best deportment, because that will provoke invidious 
comparisons. Show them that they all have a chance to wear it. 

Ushers. — You will find the appointment of ushers a decided 
stimulus to order in your society. Be sure not to call them 
" monitors." They may hold office for one month, and two will 
usually be enough. Their duties will be to attend to newcomers 
and strangers, seating them, and finding their places in the 
Bible and the hymnal. They will watch that the doors are 
closed, and that the windows are open as ventilation is needed, 
that the chairs are well arranged, and all similar matters. 



THE BUSINESS MEETING. 263 



CHAPTER XXXIII. 

THE BUSINESS MEETING. 

Slowly and Systematically. — Do a little planning for the 
business meeting, keeping in mind the development of the Ju- 
niors 1 knowledge of parliamentary law. Make it your purpose to 
introduce one new principle, but seldom more than one, at each 
Junior meeting, and contrive beforehand how this may be done. 
At one meeting, for instance, you may have the society resolve 
itself into a committee of the whole to consider some point that 
requires informal discussion. At another meeting you may 
scheme to bring in the principle of an amendment to an amend- 
ment. At another, you may bring about the reconsideration of 
a vote, and so on. 

Snap and Vim. — Strive to introduce into the conduct of the 
business meeting as much snap and acuteness as possible, tak- 
ing care, of course, to avoid even the slightest approach to 
quarrelling and " smartness." Instruct the young president to 
insist jealously upon his rights. Let him refuse to recognize 
members unless they rise in addressing him, and on no account 
let him permit any one to speak without first obtaining permis- 
sion of the chair. Let him put no motion unless it is seconded, 
and until the seconder has risen and obtained the floor. 

Be Accurate. — It is a mistake to permit any slipshod 
method of carrying on the business meeting, or to think that, 
because the Juniors are young, carelessness in business methods 
may be overlooked. Remember, they are forming habits here 
that will last them through their lives. It is not necessary that 
these Juniors shall understand all the complex laws of parlia- 
mentary tactics, but it may easily be brought about that they 
shall understand the few simple principles that they will need to 
practise in the management of their business meetings. The 
superintendent herself should make a careful study of some 
standard book of parliamentary law, such as Roberts's Rules of 



264 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

Order, or Cushing's Manual. Either book is sold by the 
United Society of Christian Endeavor for fifty cents. 

Criticise. — Encourage the children themselves to correct 
one another when errors are made, not in any spirit of unfriendly 
criticism, but solely in the interests of accuracy and for the good 
of the society. Do not hesitate yourself, also, to correct the 
youthful officers and parliamentarians when they are in the 
wrong. 

Let Them Recite. — An excellent plan to enliven the busi- 
ness meetings is to have the Juniors prepare recitations to be 
given at the opening and close of the meeting. It will be well 
to have as many of these as possible bear on temperance and 
missions. 

Sugar Coated. — If the Juniors are slow to come to the 
business meeting of the society, try the plan of holding socials 
in connection with those meetings. This will bring them out. 

Some Parliamentary Rules. — Do not be confused by the 
many rules of the manual. Those that are essential are few and 
simple. I venture to give the following list of the most impor- 
tant points : — 

A motion to adjourn takes precedence of other motions. 

A motion to reconsider a vote must be made by a member 
who voted with the majority. 

When any member thinks that a parliamentary error has been 
committed he may rise and say at once, " I rise to a point of 
error," and then be seated. If the president says, " State your 
point," he will again rise, and call attention to the error. 

Any member may appeal from the decision of the chair, and 
this appeal must be seconded. The presiding officer will then 
ask, "Shall the decision of the chair be sustained ? " and, after 
debate, will put the question. 

By-laws may be suspended by a two-thirds vote, but not the 
constitution. 

A motion to lay on the table requires a majority vote. After 
it is passed, the subject under discussion goes over to the next 
meeting. 

When one moves the previous question, and the motion is 
carried, the debate must cease, and the question be put at once. 

Sometimes the most desirable way to avoid debate is to refer 



THE BUSINESS MEETING. 265 

the matter under discussion to a committee, that is to report 
at the next meeting. 

There are several ways of amending a motion. It may be 
amended by adding to it, inserting in it, striking out portions, 
or substituting portions. 

The amendment may itself be amended, but the chain can go 
no farther. 

The vote must first be taken on the amendment to the 
amendment, then on the amendment, and then on the original 
motion as amended, if it is amended ; otherwise, as it originally 
stood. 

Standing committees are the committees that are formed 
according to the regular rules of the society. Special commit- 
tees are those appointed temporarily. 

When the chairman or the society names a committee, the 
first person named is chairman. The committee may, however, 
if it choose, elect another chairman. 

When the report of a committee has been given, it may be 
voted to accept it or adopt it. In this case the committee is 
discharged. When a committee, however, makes only a par- 
tial report, and this partial report is accepted, the committee 
is continued. 

To pass into a committee of the whole is simply an informal 
way of discussing the matter. When a motion to pass into a 
committee of the whole is agreed to, the presiding officer 
names some Junior to act as chairman of the committee, him- 
self leaving the chair. After discussion, it is moved that the 
committee rise and report. The president resumes his seat, 
and the chairman of the committee of the whole makes his 
report to the society. 

A quorum, if there is no rule to the contrary, is always a 
majority of all the members. 

Motions may be passed by general consent, the chairman 
simply saying, "If there are no objections, the motion is 
adopted/ 1 It may be passed by acclamation, the chairman 
saying, " As many as are in favor of this motion will say Aye ; 
contrary minded, No." A motion may be passed by the rais- 
ing of hands, or by a rising vote, or by yeas and nays, the 
secretary calling the roll, or by ballot, the president appointing 



266 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

tellers who collect the ballots and count them, one of them 
afterwards reporting them to the society. Finally, a motion 
may be made that the society instruct the secretary to cast 
the ballot of the society for it. 

When there is a tie vote, the chairman may always vote. 
He may also vote whenever his vote would create a tie. In no 
case can he vote twice. 

A good order of business for the Junior meeting is : Prayer, 
reading of the minutes of the last meeting, election of officers, 
election of new members, reports of standing committees, 
reports of special committees, unfinished business, new busi- 
ness, prayer, adjournment. Singing may be interspersed, and 
other exercises, at the discretion of the society. 

For the election of officers, it is best to appoint a nominating 
committee at the preceding meeting. In this way the new 
officers can be more carefully chosen. 

The minutes should contain an account of all motions that 
were passed, but need not trouble themselves with motions 
that failed to pass. 

The reports of the committees should always be written, 
and should be placed on file with the secretary. A good report 
will contain an account of what the committee has been able 
to accomplish, of what it has hoped to accomplish that it did not 
do, and why it did not do it, together with its most important 
plans for the coming weeks, especially those in which the 
co-operation of the Juniors is needed. The report will also 
contain any suggestions that will be helpful in the general work 
of the committee. 



JUNIOR FINANCES. 267 



CHAPTER XXXIV. 

JUNIOR FINANCES. 

Be Systematic. — The treasurer of the Junior society should 
have a little account book, and should be taught the little 
mysteries of debit and credit, and of balancing his books at 
the end of each month. The superintendent may act as the 
auditor. The treasurer should give careful monthly reports, 
and give occasional reports also to the older society, whose 
members ought to be interested in seeing that the funds of their 
younger brothers and sisters do not run too low. 

Missionary money should be handed in to the treasurer, 
even if the missionary committee collects it. From him, when- 
ever the society appropriates it by vote, the money should go 
to the treasurer of the church, to be by him sent to the desig- 
nated object or board. The church treasurer should be careful 
always to say that the money comes from the Junior Christian 
Endeavor society of his church. In some societies it might 
be better, where there is a systematic plan of giving to 
missions, for the treasurer rather than the missionary com- 
mittee to attend to the monthly collection of these gifts. 

Cheerful Givers. — No Junior society should incorporate 
in its constitution any provision for regular dues. All gifts 
made by the Juniors should, in accordance with the well-known 
Christian Endeavor principle, be voluntary. 

The Collection. — Inculcate in the Juniors habits of giving 
by taking up a collection every Sunday. 

There is always more or less disorder while the collection 
is being taken. This may be remedied by having the Juniors 
sing a verse of a hymn during the taking of the collection. 

Occasionally, at least, also have the Juniors repeat their 
Bible verses while the collection is being received, each saying 
a verse as he deposits his penny. 

Quiet Giving. — Instead of passing around the contribution 



268 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

box, it is best to place at the door a basket in which each 
Junior, as he enters, will deposit his offering. In this way the 
poorer child can give his penny quietly, and not feel the 
contrast between it and the silver dime of the better-off. In 
every Junior society the children should be made to feel the sig- 
nificance of the story of the widow's mite, and the truth that 
God knows how much each is able to give, and judges the 
faihfulness of the giver rather than the size of the gift. 

The Use of Envelopes. — One good way of taking up the 
collection is this, used by some Methodist Juniors of Canada. 
The treasurer, during the closing hymn, distributes collection 
envelopes. Upon these each member writes either his name 
or a number previously given each, putting in his offering, and 
handing the envelope to the treasurer as each passes out. 

Junior Banks. — Toy banks are useful in Junior societies. 
They can be obtained at a cost of about five cents each, and 
will last indefinitely. In some societies, those who take these 
banks pledge themselves to put in them at least two cents a 
week for missions ; more, if they desire. The banks are opened 
on special occasions, like Christian Endeavor Day, Christmas, 
or Easter Sunday. 

A Mite=box Opening. — Mite-boxes are a helpful adjunct to 
any Junior society. They may be obtained, either free or at 
slight cost, from most mission-board rooms. They are kept 
in the homes, and not in the society room ; and the occasion of 
their opening should be made a grand ceremony, accompanied 
with special exercises. The Juniors should come forward one 
by one, each presenting his mite-box, and reciting a verse about 
giving. The mite-boxes should then be emptied into a common 
receptacle before the money is counted, so that the poorer 
Juniors need not be chagrined by the smallness of their faith- 
ful gifts. 

While the money is being counted, let the Juniors all stand 
and read Matt. 6: 1-4, afterwards having a song service. After 
the amount of the gift is announced, let the Juniors, led by their 
superintendent, repeat after her a short prayer, asking God to 
bless the gift, and make it fruitful in his service. 

Precise. — Definite pledges of money are always helpful. 
Here is one used by a Chicago Junior society: — 



JUNIOR FINANCES. 269 

I will save each month 

2 pennies for a little girl at Erzroom, Turkey ; 
2 pennies for a little Indian girl out West (South Dakota); 
2 pennies to find some Chicago boy a home; 
2 pennies for the expenses of our society. 
Total, 8 pennies, to be brought each consecration Sunday. 

A Source of Supply. — The honorary members of the Junior 
society will furnish one sure source of revenue. They should 
understand when they join that they are expected to contribute 
each year toward the expenses of the society with which they 
have connected themselves. 

Their Very Own. — The average Junior society will need 
money for the purchase of topic cards and daily readings, 
pledge cards and constitutions, and The Junior Golden Rule. 
It will want also Junior song-books, badges, and banners, and 
money for the enlivenment of Junior socials, which are luxuries, 
rather than necessities. The Juniors will appreciate their topic 
cards and their other supplies far more if they earn the money 
they spend for them, and as near as possible this should be 
brought about, though the Juniors contribute only a portion 
of the necessary amount. 

How to Earn Money. — Here are some ways in which the 
Juniors can make money. Give each five cents to trade with, 
having them report at the end of a certain number of weeks 
how much each has made by trading, and how the money has 
been gained. At the appropriate seasons of the year, young 
chrysanthemum plants, Easter-lily bulbs, and the like, may 
be given to the Juniors, to be cared for until they blossom ; 
then a chrysanthemum or a lily show may be given, and these 
plants may be auctioned off to the church members by some 
bright and witty fellow. 

A doll show will please the Juniors, and may be made to 
make money for the society. The Juniors could sell candy 
or popcorn from house to house. They may make by them- 
selves stove-holders, table-spreads, quilts, and similar articles, 
which they may sell. 

On the occasion of church suppers and the like, the Juniors 
may be permitted to have ice-cream stands, lemonade stands, 
etc., for the sake of adding to their treasury. If their minds 



270 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

are set upon it, they will find ways of earning money at home, 
as well as of saving from their own allowances. 

Society Pictures. — Junior societies always make pretty 
photographs, especially if some taste is exercised in the group- 
ing. These photographs sell well, and may be made to add 
money to the society treasury. Try the plan of grouping the 
Juniors upon steps, or upon a grassy bank, in the form of the 
Christian Endeavor monogram. 

The Best Way of Spending. — An admirable lesson in the 
right use of money was given once by a Junior society whose 
superintendent presented each Junior with a penny. This 
penny was to be spent in the best way each could think of, 
and at the next meeting they were to tell how they had spent 
the money. The Juniors were then to vote and decide which 
was the best way to spend a penny, a little prize being given 
to the one who received the most votes. In this particular 
instance the prize went to the Junior who, with her penny, 
bribed a little girl to go to the Junior meeting ! 



JUNIOR LITERATURE. 2*]\ 



CHAPTER XXXV. 

JUNIOR LITERATURE. 

Missionary Packages. — The good-literature committee 
should set itself, in co-operation with the similar committee 
of the older society, to gathering the helpful papers and maga- 
zines and books that can be spared by the members of the con- 
gregation, and sending these in packages to all persons who 
can make good use of them, especially to missionaries, and to 
Sunday schools in needy districts. It is a good plan to write 
letters with each package, and read to the society the cordial 
replies that are received. If this gathering is done at regular 
intervals, the harvest will be much larger. 

Sending. — One of the best things that can be done by Junior 
good-literature committees is the lending of helpful books and 
magazines. They should especially keep watch to see what 
members of the society or their friends are forming a taste for 
vicious or weak literature. In this the superintendent should 
guide them, and should help them also in the choice of bright 
and valuable literature which may take the place of the poison. 

Bits from Books. — Encourage the Juniors to bring to the 
meeting helpful bits that they find during the week in books and 
papers. As a safeguard, however, require them to show what 
they bring to their parents beforehand. 

Barber Shops and the Like. — Christian Endeavor socie- 
ties are doing everywhere a noble work in supplying the best 
papers and magazines to barber-shops, hotels, railway stations, 
prisons, and hospitals, and even fixing pockets on the backs of 
the seats in the parks, these being filled with useful and elevat- 
ing tracts and journals. In this work, of course, the Juniors 
will wish a hand ; and the older society should go into partner- 
ship with the Junior good-literature committee, assigning to it a 
certain portion of the field. 

Helping the Sunday School. — What the good-literature 



2J2 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

committee of the older society does for the books of the Sunday- 
school library adapted to the age of their members, the Juniors 
may do for their own class of Sunday-school books. They may 
call the attention of the society to those that they themselves 
have found particularly attractive, and in every way may strive 
to promote the circulation, among their members, of the Sunday- 
school library books. 

A similar service may be done for the books of the public 
library, if your town is blessed with one. It is a good thing, 
too, to mention in the society meeting any helpful article, story, 
or poem, that the members of the committee have read in 
magazines that are accessible to many of the Juniors. 

Subscription Agents. — Much good may be done by the 
good-literature committee if they will take in charge subscrip- 
tions to The Junior Golden Ride and The Golden Rule, as well 
as the denominational papers and magazines. Juniors make 
capital canvassers, because they have so much time, and are not 
at all afraid to present the claims of the papers for which they 
are canvassing. Let the Juniors find out from their pastor what 
papers and magazines will be most helpful to the members of 
the congregation and to him in his work, and then see how many 
subscribers they can gain. 

The International Organs. — It has been suggested that one 
of the best prizes, if prizes are offered at all in connection with 
Junior work, would be a year's subscription to The Golden Rule 
or The Junior Golden Rule. It has also been suggested that 
one of the pleasantest ways of putting the society in connection 
with children of foreign lands is to subscribe to The Junior 
Golden Rule for them, making this the means of opening cor- 
respondence. 

Endeavor Reading Circles. — A Lutheran pastor of Penn- 
sylvania started among his Junior Endeavorers what he calls 
an " Endeavor reading circle." He made clippings from The 
Golden Rule and his denominational papers, selecting chiefly 
the stories that would be attractive to the young people. Each 
of these was placed in a separate neat envelope, numbered and 
catalogued, as Sunday-school libraries are. 

The envelopes are exchanged at every meeting of the Juniors. 
This operation takes but little time, as the envelopes are re- 



JUNIOR LITERATURE. 2JI 

turned at the opening, new ones being given out at the close of 
the meeting. This plan has resulted in adding fully fifty per 
cent to the attendance of this particular society, besides teach- 
ing the Juniors to read helpful and elevating literature. 

The Junior Golden Rule. — Superintendents and Juniors are 
loud in their praise of this, the international organ of the Junior 
movement. Few superintendents, however, know how to util- 
ize the bright little paper in the society work itself. The fol- 
lowing methods have been tested, and found practical and 
helpful in different societies. 

The paper has many departments which are sustained by the 
writings of the Juniors themselves. There is an Open Parlia- 
ment, in which the children express themselves on various 
topics of interest to them, such as, " What is your favorite 
Bible character ? " " How do you intend to spend your next 
vacation?" "What is the most interesting thing you ever 
saw?" " What kind of minister do you like best? " and so on. 
A slight prize is offered for the best response each month. 
The Juniors of your society may like to write, each of them, a 
paragraph for this contest ; the society voting which is the best, 
and sending that one as the society contribution, at the same 
time not debarring any one else in the society from sending his 
contribution if he wishes. 

Another department is that of " Bright Sayings," in which 
the Juniors may report any funny saying of their friends, or any 
joke on which their eyes may fall that seems to them especially 
comical. A slight prize is offered for the best of these also. 

In another department sets of Bible questions are asked each 
month, to set the Juniors to studying the Bible in new ways. 
Each month, also, the best letter received from Juniors of each 
separate denomination is printed in the paper. These letters 
describe the society work and its results. Junior badges are 
given to all the successful letter-writers. 

One of the most helpful features of the paper is the depart- 
ment called " Something To Do." A little task is set the 
Juniors each month. Sometimes it will be to dress dolls for 
the children of the hospitals, sometimes to make games for 
them, to decorate fans for them, or to make for them scrap- 
books. At other times the contest will be of quite a different 



274 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

character, to see who can patch a hole in the best way, or darn 
a piece of torn cloth, or whittle the most ingenious set of jack- 
straws, or make the best collection of tree buds, or of common 
minerals. Slight prizes give zest to these contests also ; and 
the Juniors have, in addition, the satisfaction of helping other 
children, or of adding to their own information. 

Besides these various features that interest the Juniors directly, 
the paper contains bright stories and poems and pretty pictures, 
articles from the best writers for young people, letters from the 
general secretary and the president of the United Society of 
Christian Endeavor. 

Probably the most helpful feature of the paper is the page 
devoted to the weekly prayer meeting. Here are given a large 
number of classified Bible references, together with a helpful 
talk on each topic, and suggestions for Junior leaders. 

The paper is abundantly worth its cost, which is only 25 cents 
a year where ten or more copies are sent to one address in one 
wrapper. For separate addresses, its cost is 35 cents a year. 

The Golden Rule. — No Junior superintendent can afford to 
do without the International Christian Endeavor organ. The 
Junior page of The Golden Rule is entirely for superintendents. 
There is a department of Junior methods, and the weekly topic 
is treated in several different ways. One writer suggests plans 
for the superintendent's talk, and for the conduct of the meet- 
ing. Another writer gives an attractive chalk-talk. Still a third 
writes a little story, or gives some other illustration of the topic 
that the superintendent or the Juniors may use. There is also 
a set of simple questions bearing on the topic. These questions 
may be distributed to the Juniors for them to answer in the 
meeting. 

The entire paper, moreover, is helpful to Junior workers, as 
well as to all Endeavorers. The department of " Ways of Work- 
ing," kept up by contributions from Endeavorers from all over 
the world, contains many a method that, though intended for 
older societies, may be adapted to the Juniors also. 

Society Periodicals. — Every Junior society should take The 
Junior Golden Rule, at least one copy for the use of the leader ; 
and the Juniors should also subscribe for one copy of The Golden 
Rule, that the leader for each week may have the advantage of its 



JUNIOR LITERATURE. 2*]% 

suggestions on the Junior topic, which are entirely different from 
those in The Jwiior Golden Rule. The society should also take 
one copy of the denominational missionary paper that is best 
fitted to its use, and this should go to the leader of the monthly 
missionary meeting. A few cents may be spent each month for 
interesting temperance tracts and articles, or for a subscription 
to a child's temperance paper. 

United Society Publications. — The United Society of 
Christian Endeavor either publishes or has for sale a number 
of books and pamphlets exceedingly helpful to any Junior worker. 
I have space to do no more than mention some of these. I have 
spoken of others in other parts of this Manual. 

Foremost mention must be made of Attractive Truths in Les- 
son and Story, by Mrs. Alice May Scudder, a book of three 
hundred and thirty pages, costing $1.25 . This is filled with help- 
ful Junior exercises, stories to illustrate different truths, and sug- 
gestions for Junior superintendents. 

Two books are especially useful along the line of object les- 
sons for Juniors, and chalk-talks. One is Little Children in the 
Church of Christ, by Rev. Charles Roads, a book of two hun- 
dred and twelve pages, costing $1.00. The other is Five-Minute 
Object Sermons to Children, by Rev. Sylvanus Stall, D.D., also 
costing $1.00. 

Books especially useful to blackboard workers are The Black- 
board and the Sunday School, by Frank Beard, $1.25; Plain 
Uses of the Blackboard, by Dr. and Mrs. Crafts, $1.00; and 
Pictured Truth, by Rev. Robert F. Y. Pierce, $1.25. 

Dr. McCauley's handbook of Christian Endeavor methods, 
entitled Hoiv, devotes six pages to Junior workers ; and many 
suggestions may be gained from its chapters devoted to older 
Endeavorers. The same is true of Mr. Ogburn's The Young 
People's Prayer Meeting and Its Improvement, and of Mr. 
Bomberger's Christian E?ideavor Plans and Principles. 

A Christian Endeavor classic that should be in every Junior 
worker's library is Ways and Means, by Rev. F. E. Clark, D.D., 
the president of the United Society. It costs $1.25, and is filled 
with practical and helpful suggestions. 

These are all books. Among the pamphlets and leaflets of 
especial value to Junior workers are Meetings for Juniors and 



276 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

How to Conduct Them, by Mrs. James L. Hill ; Missionary 
Plans for Junior Societies, by V. F. P. ; Scripture Illustrated, 
by Mrs. Scudder; A Live Junior Society, by Rev. W. W. 
Sleeper; Jimior Christian Eudeavor Unions, and other pam- 
phlets by Miss Kate H. Haus, together with some bright exer- 
cises for special meetings ; one, An Evening with the Juniors, 
by J. A. Shannon ; another, Let the Little Ones In, by Mrs. 
James L. Hill ; and services for anniversary, graduation, and 
the enforcement of the pledge, by Miss Kate H. Haus. 

All of these books and pamphlets are to be obtained of the 
United Society of Christian Endeavor, whose price-list is sent 
on request. This price-list will also put the superintendent on 
the track of many helpful publications for older Endeavorers, 
whose methods can be adapted, with slight change, to the 
Junior society. 



THE TRIAL MEMBERS. 



2/7 



CHAPTER XXXVI. 



THE TRIAL MEMBERS. 



Trial Members. — Trial members are defined by the Model 
Constitution to be " those who wish to attend, and promise to 
behave when at the meeting. These shall have their names on 
the trial roll, but shall not sign the pledge, or serve as leaders 
for the meetings." 

The term, " trial members " is, in my opinion, to be preferred 
to " associate members ; " because the latter recognizes a perma- 
nence in the arrangement, while the former, like the Methodist 
word " probationer,'" looks forward to a speedy advance from 
trial to full membership. And that is what we all want. 

A Pledge. — This temporary nature of trial membership makes 
it seem best not to propose a pledge to trial members, for sign- 
ing a pledge seems a bond of continuance. Nevertheless, not a 
few societies have associate members, and use some such asso- 
ciate members' pledge as the following : — 



Junior Associate Membership Pledge. 

As an associate member of the Junior Christian En- 
deavor Society , I promise to be present at every meeting, 
unless prevented by a very good reason. I promise to be 
orderly, and to do all I can for the society. 
Name 

/ am willing that should sign this 

pledge, and will do all I can to help keep it. 

Parent's name 

Residence , , 



A Harder Pledge. — Another form for an associate members' 
pledge is the following, which may approve itself to some super- 



278 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

intendents : "As an associate member, I promise to pray to 
Jesus every day, to conduct myself properly in the meetings, to 
try to get some good out of every meeting, and to do whatever 
the superintendent asks me to do." 

All Active ? — It is the strong opinion of many Junior workers 
that associate members, and even trial members, have no busi- 
ness in the society. "The object of Junior work," says an 
experienced superintendent, "is to take the boys and girls be- 
fore they know anything else than serving Christ, as day by day 
and Sunday by Sunday he is shown them, and to bring them to 
manhood and womanhood without ever asking, ' Do you wish 
to serve Christ ?'or, ' Do you believe in him? ' There are few 
boys and girls who are not ready to join actively in the work 
when its aims are placed properly and understandingly before 
them." 

Practical workers, however, will not share in this opinion. 
They know how varied are the states of religious development 
in children, and understand that it is especially confusing and 
discouraging to them to place on precisely the same level the 
earnest, well-instructed young Christian, and the boy or girl 
who has scarcely begun to comprehend who Christ is. Justice 
to the former, as well as care to stimulate the growth of the 
latter, would forbid this " lumping." 

From Trial to Active. — How can you tell when the child is 
ready for active membership ? Children differ so widely that no 
rule can be laid down. Consider the child's knowledge of Christ, 
desire to please him, realization of his presence. Look at his 
faithfulness in Bible study and in society work. Test him on 
some committee. Let him try whether he can keep the Junior 
pledge for a month. Find out about his home life. Ask the 
advice of his parents. Inspire in him a longing for active mem- 
bership, not for the sake of honor among his fellows, but for the 
sake of the activity in Christ's service. Sometimes all, some- 
times only a part, of these tests can be met by one who is ready 
for active membership. 

Not Leaders. — If, in the Young People's society, it is found 
best to establish an invariable rule that no associate member 
should lead the meetings, so, even more surely, it will be found 
best to confine the leadership of the Junior society meetings to 



THE TRIAL MEMBERS. 279 

those Juniors who are confessed Christians — the active mem- 
bers. Children especially need to see emphasized the difference 
between Christians and non-Christians. Besides, for most topics, 
the leader cannot do effective service without proclaiming in some 
way his love for Christ, that he may inspire others to do the same. 

Not Chairmen. — It is, perhaps, equally important to reserve 
the chairmanships of the various committees for the active 
Juniors. There may be among the trial members a child who 
could get up interesting socials ; but you want to teach your 
Juniors to be " social to save," and you should not put a non- 
Christian at the head of your social committee. One of the trial 
members might direct the work of the flower committee with 
taste and skill ; but the higher service of this committee, the 
ministries to the sick, the choice of Bible texts to accompany 
the bouquets, the songs and prayers in the sick room, should 
not be in the hands of a non-Christian. Place the trial mem- 
bers on the subordinate committees in subordinate positions, 
but never as chairmen, and do not give them any position at all 
on the lookout, prayer-meeting, and missionary committees. 

The Roll-call. — For the same reasons, jealous distinctions 
should be made at the consecration meeting between the two 
classes of members. Their names should be placed on a sepa- 
rate roll, and they should be called separately, if at all. They 
should be required to answer no more than, " Present ; " though 
they should not be hindered from making as full a response as 
they feel moved to make, and, indeed, should be encouraged to 
pray and testify at this meeting as soon as the superintendent 
perceives that they are ready for this step. The roll of trial 
members, when called, should come at the beginning of the 
meeting, to avoid an anti-climax. 

Work Them In. — However, we must make good use of our 
trial members if we wish to lift them into active membership. 
They can safely be set to many tasks. Place them on the sun- 
shine committee, the music committee, the flower committee, 
the book committee, the social committee, the postman com- 
mittee. Get them to serve as ushers, to distribute singing- 
books, to copy verses for the prayer-meeting committee, to 
help you with the blackboard and in getting objects for your 
talks. Get their aid in all missionary work especially. 



280 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

Show them how eager you are to receive them into full mem- 
bership. Get the lookout committee to do the same. Pray for 
them and with them. Unfold to them with tender faithfulness 
the character and commands of the dear Saviour, and before 
many weeks you will be rejoiced by the manifest blooming of 
Christian character. Your trial members will have become 
active Christian Endeavorers. 



RECEPTION, GRADUATION, AND DISMISSION. 28 1 



CHAPTER XXXVII. 

RECEPTION, GRADUATION, AND DISMISSION. 

An Honor Roll. — To spur the Juniors to win new members 
to the society, an honor roll is excellent. This honor roll 
should be printed on a large sheet of paper; and a gilt star 
should be placed after the name of every Junior who brings in 
a new member, the star being doubled, tripled, etc., as more 
members are obtained. 

Two by Two. — The two by two method is as helpful in 
getting new members into the Junior society as it is in any 
other form of Christian service. Divide the active membership 
into pairs, and set each couple at work to interest in the society 
some particular boy or girl. 

Permanent. — When you give special inducements to the 
Juniors, asking them to gain new members for the society, do 
not fail to make it one of the requirements in the undertaking 
that the new members be kept in the society, as well as intro- 
duced to it. 

Searching Questions. — It is a mistake to think that a child 
who is old enough to join a Junior society is too young to have 
had a Christian experience, and to know what it has been. The 
following letter and questions are given to each applicant for 
membership in the Junior society of a certain church in Belfast, 
Ireland. After each question is left space for a full reply. 

MINERVA HOUSE 

Junior Society of Christian Endeavor. 



Dear 

We are very glad that you wish to join our Junior Society of Christian En- 
deavor. 

You will not find the pledge easy or a pleasure to keep unless you are " trust- 
ing in the Lord Jesus Christ." Therefore we ask you to test yourself by the follow- 
ing questions. 

Yours very cordially, 



Superintendent. 



282 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

i. Why do you wish to join our Junior Society of Christian Endeavor? 

2. Why do you wish to strive " to do whatever he would have you do " ? 

3. When did you begin to want to please Jesus? 

4. How were you led to trust in the Lord Jesus Christ ? 

5. What does " trusting in the Lord Jesus Christ " do for you ? 

6. What will " trusting in the Lord Jesus Christ " do for you ? 

{Signed) , 

A Reception Exercise. — A good service for the reception 
of new members must be short, earnest, and pointed. These 
requirements are well met in the following exercise by Miss 
Laura Wade Rice : — 

{All members rise, while the Junior with a signed card comes for- 
ward.) 

Supt. — What do you mean by bringing this card? 

Junior. — I mean that I have made a promise to God. 

Supt. — What do you mean by a promise ? 

Junior. — A promise means that I will do as I say, that I will 
keep my word. 

Supt. — What have you promised? 

{Junior reads pledge on card.) 

Supt. — Let us pray. 

After the close of the superintendent 's prayer all the members join 
in the following prayer : 

Dear Lord Jesus Christ, give us strength to keep our promise to 
thee, and may we help one another to be true to our pledge, Amen. 

A Reception Service from Ireland. — A Junior society in 
Ireland finds it best to use a great deal of formality in the recep- 
tion of new members. Test questions are presented to the 
Junior to answer in writing. These questions are so formed as 
to elicit evidence of conversion. The applicant for membership 
being retained in another apartment, the superintendent reads 
to the Juniors these answers, and the society shows its satisfac- 
tion with this testimony by raising hands. 

If no objection is raised, a member of the reception committee 
goes to the other apartment, and brings in the person who is to 
be received. As these enter, all the Juniors rise and repeat in 
unison Num. 6 : 24, " The Lord bless thee," etc. The applicant 



RECEPTION, GRADUATION, AND DISMISSION. 2$3 

then takes his place near the secretary, at a small table that con- 
tains a pledge card and the roll book. 

After a suitable prayer by the superintendent, the secretary 
hands to the new member the pledge card, which he reads 
aloud. On the completion of this reading, the active members, 
who have been standing, march around the table singing a re- 
ception hymn. At the chorus of the last verse, as the members 
pass, each one shakes hands with the new member, the chorus 
being repeated until all have done this. 

In a Hollow Square. — One Junior Society of Washington, 
D.C, admits the new members in a novel way. The child who 
is to be received stands and answers questions about the pledge, 
these questions being asked by the superintendent. When this 
is satisfactorily completed, the active members take hold of 
hands and form a circle or a square about the new member. 
They then repeat the pledge together, and sing, " Consecrate 
me now to thy service, Lord. 1 ' 

Still One More. — Here is another good programme for the 
reception of members : Singing. Prayer by the leader. Con- 
cert repetition of the first Psalm. Responsive reading of the 
Beatitudes. New members called forward. Song, "Who will 
join our band to-day?" ("Junior Christian Endeavor Songs," 
No. 32). New members repeat the pledge. The society chants 
the pledge. Charge to the new Juniors by the superintendent. 
Charge to the old Juniors by the superintendent or some other 
Endeavorer. Song. Sentence prayers by the Juniors. Roll- 
call with verse responses. Song, " Blest be the tie." Mizpah 
benediction. 

A Gift. — At some point in the course of the reception ser- 
vice, let the Junior president pin a Junior badge upon the new 
member, telling him that it is a gift from the society, a token of 
their interest in him, and of their hope and trust that he will 
always be true to the Christian Endeavor pledge. This should 
never be omitted, as the badge, so presented, will be greatly 
increased in value and influence. 

Set Him at Work. — Be sure that the new member gets 
something to do the very first day of his attendance on the 
society. Have a verse ready for him to read, or get him to 
make a little prayer, or give him a question to answer, written 
out on a slip of paper, 



284 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

Dismission Cards. — One Junior society of which I have 
heard gives to each member that leaves the society for another 
place what is called a "good-will card.''' This card simply 
states that the person has been a member of the Junior society, 
and commends him to the cordial fellowship of the Juniors 
where he may go. The form and name of these dismission 
cards may vary, but it is always pleasant thus to introduce the 
departing Junior to his new friends. 

The cards should be granted by the society at a regular busi- 
ness meeting, on recommendation of the lookout committee. 
They should be signed by the president and secretary of the 
society, as well as by the superintendent ; and they should be 
addressed to the secretary of the society in the church the Junior 
will attend, or, if this is not known, "to whomsoever it may 
concern. 11 

If you can learn the address of any member (preferably the 
president) of the Junior society your departing Junior will join, 
be sure to write, telling that the new Junior is to be expected, 
and asking that she be called upon and cordially invited to join 
the society there. 

Graduate Them. — It is a bad mistake to permit Juniors to 
linger on in the Junior society after they have reached the age 
and attainments proper for graduation. You injure the. other 
Juniors, the younger of whom should be pushed forward to the 
responsible places the graduates would leave empty ; and you 
injure the older society, that needs the inspiration of new mem- 
bers, and needs also to get hold of the young people before they 
have grown so wedded to Junior ways that it has become difficult 
for them to accommodate themselves to the methods of the 
older Endeavorers. 

To be sure, the Junior has a naturally strong attachment for 
his old society, and somewhat dreads going among compara- 
tively strange faces, and taking up work in which he cannot 
hope to excel without long waiting and working. If, however, 
the relations between the two societies have been such as are 
urged in this Manual, this reluctance will be minimized. For 
the good of both societies, then, keep constantly before your 
Juniors the thought of graduation, treating it as an honor to be 
won, and a happy privilege to be enjoyed, 



RECEPTION, GRADUATION, AND DISMISSION. 285 

When Shall They Graduate? — This question is debatable. 
The answer to it depends partly on the maturity of the Junior. 
Some children are further advanced at ten than others at sixteen 
years of age. The answer depends partly also on the condition 
of the older society, and whether it is large or small. Most 
Junior societies have fixed upon the age of fourteen as the best 
time for graduation, though this rule must be left flexible. 

The superintendent must decide in each separate case whether 
the child is sufficiently well developed in Christian character, in 
ability to do Christian service, and in knowledge of the Bible, 
to make a good worker in the older society, and to pass with 
safety from her own close superintendence. If the older society 
is not too crowded, give the Junior the benefit of the doubt, and 
graduate him at fourteen, even if his progress has not been en- 
tirely satisfactory. Often the increased responsibility and more 
mature companionship of the older society will prove just the 
spur he needs. 

Graduation Day. — Remembering the natural shrinking of 
the Juniors from entrance into the older organization, you will 
see how much better it is to graduate them in companies than 
singly. Let all whose fourteenth birthdays come within the 
year, and who are to be permitted to graduate, reserve their 
graduation till a certain day early the next year, — say New 
Year's Day, or Christian Endeavor Day, or, probably better, 
some Sunday in January when there will be no other interest to 
detract from this, and when an entire evening in the church 
may be devoted to the graduation ceremonies. 

On this Sunday it would be well to arrange, if the season fits 
the requirements of the church, that the graduating Juniors who 
are not church members be received into the church. Surely, 
after all their years of Junior training, they will by this time be 
ready for this step, and will not wish to join the older society as 
associate members. Thus the day will be doubly blessed to the 
church. 

The Graduation Programme. — Issue little printed invita- 
tions. Advertise the matter widely. Get a large attendance of 
old folks. This is a magnificent chance to interest them in the 
work of both societies. 

Let the choirs of each society sing in turn, then antiphonally. 



286 



THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 



Have Junior ushers, as well as ushers from the Young People's 
society. Let the presidents of both organizations sit on the 
platform, with the Junior superintendent, pastor, and graduates. 
Either the Junior superintendent or the pastor should preside. 

The programme will contain, as its main feature, short papers 
or addresses by each graduate. The themes should have a range 
as wide as the Christian life and experience. In assigning them, 
consider what kind of Christian work the Junior knows most 
about, and let that be his subject. The Junior president may 



FOR CHRIST AND 




THE CHURCH. 



DIPLOMA. 

To zvhomsoever these presents may come, 
Greeting : — 

This certifies that 

because of progress in morals and devotion to Christ and 
his church, has been honorably graduated from the 

Junior Society of Christian Endeavor 
Of the Church of 

Junior C. E. Stip^t. 

Pastor. 

Junior Endeavor President. 

Junior Endeavor Secretary. 

day of 18 



give a history of the year's work of his society. The Junior 
superintendent will say good-by to the Juniors, and bid them 
Godspeed. The Young People's president will bid them wel- 
come, in the name of the older society, at the same time pinning 
upon each the badge of the older organization. All the older 
Endeavorers will now rise and repeat with the new members 
(who should have been voted in at a former meeting) the Chris- 
tian Endeavor pledge. Finally the pastor will address the 
graduates, telling them about the new kind of work that awaits 
them, and inspiring them to enter with zeal upon it, Then he 



RECEPTION, GRADUATION, AND DISMISSION. 287 

will offer prayer for God's blessing upon the new bonds just 
sealed. 

Intersperse throughout the evening bright songs and respon- 
sive readings. Have concert work by all the Juniors, but per- 
mit no Junior except the graduates and the president to take 
part upon the platform. Let the keynote of the entire occasion 
be " Consecration to higher service." 

Diplomas. — Some societies like to signalize the graduation 
of their Juniors by the presentation of neatly printed diplomas 
or certificates, which may be prepared after the style shown on 
the opposite page. 



288 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 



CHAPTER XXXVIII. 

THE INTERMEDIATE SOCIETY. 

The Need. — The Intermediate Society is a recent outgrowth 
of Junior work, — too recent, in fact, to have developed any 
distinctive methods. Probably no distinctive methods are 
needed for the conduct of an Intermediate society, those of the 
older society, and those of the Juniors being appropriated in 
different degrees, according to local and varying needs. 

The demand for Intermediate societies is greatest, of course, 
in large churches, where it has also been found necessary to 
divide the Young People's societies. In such churches it fre- 
quently happens that both Junior and Young People's societies 
are overcrowded, while yet a large number of Juniors are ready 
to graduate. The solution of the problem is to form an Inter- 
mediate society. In many churches already this plan has 
proved practically helpful, and it is destined to be widely 
adopted. 

Ages. — The proper age for graduation into the Intermediate 
society must of course be variously determined in accordance 
with circumstances. Probably most churches will put into the 
Junior society children from six to eleven, into the Intermediate 
those from twelve to fifteen, and into the Young People's those 
from sixteen to one hundred, unless the church is fortunate 
enough to possess also a Senior society. 

Officers. — Some churches have only one president for both 
Junior and Intermediate societies, this president being an Inter- 
mediate. There is, however, a treasurer and a secretary for 
each society. I should myself prefer separate presidents also ; 
and over the Intermediate society should preside a separate 
superintendent. Each society should have a distinct ribbon 
badge and topic card. Scarcely any modifications need be 
m de in the ordinary Junior constitution to fit the Intermediates, 
except the change of name. 



THE INTERMEDIATE SOCIETY. 289 

The Committees. — As to the committees, in some churches 
they are union affairs, containing members from each society. 
I should prefer here also a complete separation. The Interme- 
diate society will be able to devote more attention to committee 
work than the Juniors, and the work it undertakes will be of a 
more difficult grade. 

Joint Meetings. — Nevertheless, the two societies will natu- 
rally feel very closely akin, and occasional joint meetings may 
be held. Some workers go so far as to join the two societies in 
the monthly missionary meetings, business meetings, and 
socials. Others always appoint an Intermediate to lead the 
Junior consecration meetings. I should not adopt either plan, 
except as an occasional variation. If it is best to separate the 
Intermediates at all from the Juniors, it is best for both to con- 
sider them as distinct societies, allied only a little more closely 
than both are to the Young People's Society. 



29O THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 



CHAPTER XXXIX. 

JUNIOR UNIONS. 

The Constitution. — The United Society of Christian En- 
deavor suggests the following constitution as suitable for a Ju- 
nior union, subject, of course, to any modification that local 
needs may require : — 

CONSTITUTION. 



Article I. — Name. 
This organization shall be known as the Junior Christian Endeavor 
Union of 

Article II. — Object. 
The object of the union shall be to stimulate and encourage an 
interest in Junior Christian Endeavor work, to provide an opportunity 
for interchange of thought, and for improvement in methods among 
its leaders, to promote the growth of children in the Christian life, and 
to interest them in every branch of church and Sunday-school work. 

ARTICLE III. — Membership. 
Any Junior Society of Christian Endeavor connected with an evan- 
gelical church or mission, working upon Christian Endeavor principles, 
and having the Christian Endeavor pledge, may join this union upon 
its vote to do so, when such vote is approved by the pastor and Junior 
superintendent, and upon the society's application for admission to the 
executive committee of the union. 

Article IV. — Executive Committee. 
This union shall be controlled by an executive committee composed 
of the superintendents of the Junior societies belonging to the union, 
or of the chairmen of the Junior committees having the Junior socie- 
ties in charge. This committee shall meet for consultation once a 
month, or upon the call of the president, and shall choose annually 
from among its members a president, vice-president, secretary, and 
treasurer, whose duties shall be those usually belonging to such officers. 



JUNIOR UNIONS. 291 

The pastors and assistant superintendents of the societies belonging to 
the union shall constitute an advisory committee, which may meet for 
consultation with the executive committee, upon its request to do so. 

If any society shall not have an assistant superintendent, the super- 
intendent may appoint a member to act with the advisory committee. 

Article V. — Meetings. 
There shall be a rally or mass-meeting held quarterly, or as often 
as the executive committee deem advisable. Such meetings may be 
devotional, social, or otherwise, at the discretion of the executive 
committee. 

Article VI. — Quorum. 
Representatives from societies shall constitute a quo- 
rum for the transaction of business at any meeting of the executive 
committee. 

Article VII. — Honorary Members. 
All Christians not superintendents, but interested in the work among 
the children, may become honorary members of the union by paying 

the sum of annually or semi-annually, thereby signifying 

their willingness to do what is in their power to advance the interests 
of the union. Honorary members shall be members of the advisory 
committee. 

Article VIII. — Vote. 
Every member attending a rally or mass-meeting shall be entitled 
to vote upon any question that may be brought before such meeting. 

Article IX. — Finances. 
The expenditures of this union shall be met by voluntary semi- 
annual contributions from the different societies belonging to it, and 
by collections taken for this purpose at any of the mass-meetings or 
rallies. 

Article X. — Relation to the Christian Endeavor Union. 
Since the Junior Christian Endeavor work is closely allied to the 
work of the Young People's Society of Christian Endeavor, it is ex- 
pected that the president of the Christian Endeavor Union shall have 
a voice in all the deliberations of the Junior Union, and the President 
of the Junior Union shall have the like privilege in all the delibera- 
tions of the Christian Endeavor Union, in order that the two unions 
may work in harmony and to the best interests of the Christian En- 
deavor cause in the city. 



2()2 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

Article XI. — Amendments. 

This constitution may be altered or amended by vote of of the 

executive committee, when deemed advisable, at any session of the ex- 
ecutive and advisory committees jointly convened for that purpose. 

The Connection with the City Union. — The object of the 
Junior union is to bind together in bonds of friendly association 
and mutual interest all of the Junior societies of a city or dis- 
trict, to organize new societies, and to better the work of the 
old ones. A separate organization of the Junior societies is 
favored for the same reason that it is found best to organize 
each separate Junior society apart from the older Endeavorers. 
Union meetings must be prepared on somewhat different plans 
to interest Juniors and the older Endeavorers ; and besides, in 
most cities Endeavor societies are so numerous that no one set 
of officers could adequately manage both Junior and Young 
People's societies. 

. There should, however, be the closest possible connection 
between the Junior union and the city Christian Endeavor 
union, of which the Junior work should be considered merely 
a branch. The city superintendent of Junior work should be a 
member of the executive committee of the city union, and her 
report should be given at the annual meeting of that union. 
The work of the Juniors, moreover, should frequently be repre- 
sented in the rallies of the larger body, in order that the claims 
of their younger brothers and sisters upon them may be brought 
home to the consciences of the older Endeavorers. 

Another Way. — Another method of forming this connec- 
tion is by constituting the officers of the Junior union a union 
Junior committee, with the president of the Junior union for the 
Junior superintendent of the city union. In this way the lead- 
ing Junior workers are placed in authoritative contact with all 
the Endeavorers of the city. It is a good plan for these workers 
to district the city, appointing a leader over each district, ur- 
ging him to come in contact with the superintendents in his sec- 
tion, to visit as many societies as possible, and to arrange for 
joint meetings and intervisitation. 

The President. — The work of the president of the Junior 
union is limited only by her time and strength. She should 



JUNIOR UNIONS. 293 

visit as many of the societies in the union as possible, holding 
private talks with every superintendent, and inspiring the Ju- 
niors by bright and brief addresses. She will, of course, be the 
ruling spirit in the union lookout committee, guiding their work 
in the organization of new societies, and whenever possible be 
present to control the organization. She will have it among her 
duties to urge upon the older Endeavorers of the city the claims 
of Junior work, advising them to form Junior committees for the 
aid of their Junior superintendents. 

The planning of the quarterly rallies of the union will largely 
fall to her share, as well as the management of the quarterly 
superintendents 1 meetings. Helped by the sub-committees of 
the executive committee, she will choose speakers, select topics, 
and do everything possible beforehand to make the meetings 
profitable and entertaining. She must keep posted upon all 
recent developments of Junior methods, and must not fail to 
keep up an acquaintance with the Junior workers of her city or 
district. In all of these tasks she will, of course, have most 
competent assistants, for Junior workers are proverbially ready 
and able. 

President's Letters. — The Junior president will find it a 
pleasant as well as a profitable plan to issue during the year, 
at intervals, manifolded letters to the superintendents, and at 
other times to the Juniors themselves. These letters will contain 
questions the superintendents are to answer, plans the president 
wishes to bring before the societies either for their local work or 
for the work of the union, suggestions as to helpful books and 
pamphlets recently published, and praise for any especial prog- 
ress that has been made in any direction. These letters will 
well repay the slight outlay of time and money that they render 
necessary. 

Stimulating the Societies. — The president of the Junior 
union may do much to interest the Juniors throughout the union 
in certain lines of work by offering slight prizes for special 
excellence in certain directions. For example, the superinten- 
dent of the Topeka, Kan., Junior Union once offered a prize of 
a dollar to the Junior who would select the Bible verse which he 
liked best, and tell in a letter to the president of the union the 
reason for his preference. This little contest brought many 



294 THE JUNIOR MANUAL, 

interesting letters, which were read at a meeting of the union. 
In a similar way, a contest regarding the best committee reports 
might be held, or the best set of Bible verses to be used with 
flowers sent to the sick, or the best record of good-literature 
committee work, or the largest gifts to missions in proportion 
to the size of the society. 

The Secretary. — The position of secretary of the Junior 
union is one of great importance. It is her task to send out 
notifications of the quarterly rallies and superintendents 1 meet- 
ings, informing the different superintendents what part, if any, 
they and their Juniors have in the programme, what is the theme 
of discussions at the superintendents' meetings, and what will be 
expected by way of participation from all who come. It will be 
her duty to correspond with whatever speakers from outside the 
society are obtained for the Junior rally. Especially it will be 
her task to collect the statistics of the union, the most important 
items of which I have enumerated in the following paragraph. 

The Secretary's Report. — The annual report of the secre- 
tary of the Junior union should be printed either from type or 
by a manifolder. This report should show the names and mem- 
bership, active and trial, of all societies in the union, the date 
of their organization, the names and addresses of their superin- 
tendents and assistant superintendents, and of the pastors of 
the churches with which they are connected. Additional facts 
which should be given are the number that have graduated from 
the society during the year, the number that have joined the 
church, the amount of money given to missions, the number of 
new members received during the year, active and trial being 
separated, and any other statistics that will be of general inter- 
est. Large space in the report should be given to accounts of 
any especially helpful plans that have been tried and proved 
throughout the union, as well as to suggestions for fresh 
endeavors. 

The Executive Committee. — The executive committee of 
the Junior union consists of all the superintendents of the union, 
while an advisory body is at hand, consisting of the assistant 
superintendents and the pastors. Such a body is too large, in 
the great cities, to be effective ; and it is best to subdivide it. 
Select from the members of the executive committee a Junior 



JUNIOR UNIONS. 295 

union lookout committee, whose duties it will be to preside over 
the organization of new societies, planting these new societies, 
as far as possible, in every church that does not yet contain a 
Junior organization. There should be also a rally committee, 
with the president of the union at the head, whose duty it would 
be to prepare the programme for the quarterly Junior rallies. 
Another committee should do the same thing for the quarterly 
meeting of the Junior superintendents, while another committee 
might act as an information committee, to report at the superin- 
tendents' meeting any interesting facts regarding the progress of 
the Junior work, and any helpful plans they have come across in 
their reading. In a similar way other sub-committees might be 
formed. 

The Union Treasury. — The work of a Junior union cannot 
be carried on without money. The correspondence, the print- 
ing of the report, the circular letters, the car-fare of the speak- 
ers, the gifts of literature to those who are organizing new 
societies — all such things take money. The entire sum neces- 
sary, however, to do a large amount of good in the course of a 
year's Junior work, is very slight, and the Junior superinten- 
dents and societies will gladly contribute it. 

Do not fail to hold to the Christian Endeavor principle of 
freewill contributions. Under no circumstances levy a tax upon 
the societies, and never drop a society from the roll because it 
does not contribute money to the support of the union. You 
may go so far as to announce to the societies what amount of 
money is required to conduct the affairs of the union in good 
shape ; but let each society determine for itself, considering its 
numbers and resources, what is its own share of this sum. 

Stock in It. — The Juniors will be glad to contribute their 
share of the expenses of the Junior union ; and if this responsi- 
bility is placed upon them they will think far more of the work 
of the union, and feel a sense of proprietorship in it. 

Superintendent Conferences. — In no better way can the 
Junior work of a city be improved and vivified than by frequent 
conferences of the Junior superintendents. Let these be made 
as homelike and familiar as possible. The Baltimore plan is 
the best I have seen. 

Some superintendent sends to the secretary of the Junior 



296 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

union an invitation, which is accepted by the appropriate com- 
mittee. Cards are sent to all the superintendents, inviting them 
and their assistants to attend the conference, and giving a sub- 
ject for the evening. As the meeting is held in a home, it is far 
more likely to be informal and helpful. 

It is opened by a short, interesting paper on some topic rela- 
tive to Junior work ; and after this comes the main feature, — 
the question-box. When notices of the meeting are sent to the 
superintendents, each is asked to send to the secretary any ques- 
tion he desires answered and discussed. On receipt of these 
questions they are immediately sent to the different superinten- 
dents, that they may think them over and be ready to reply in 
the conference. When this answer comes from some one in 
the audience, the other persons in the company are encouraged 
to express their views, and so the discussion is started. 

After the question-box, the receiving superintendent and her 
assistants serve light refreshments, and the rest of the evening 
is spent socially. 

Topics for Superintendents* Meetings. — In most super- 
intendents' meetings the problem will be what topics of burning 
interest to omit, rather than what to talk about. However, the 
following list of themes for discussion may prove useful and 
suggestive : — 

The advantages of Intermediate societies. 

Graduation: at what age? with what ceremonies? 

How to promote regular attendance. 

Your pet plan of Bible study. 

How do you arouse interest in temperance? 

How do you make sure the Juniors read the daily readings? 

What is your way of teaching missions? 

What committees are essential? 

What novel committees have you found useful? 

How to win and hold the boys. 

How to get all to sing. 

Teaching Juniors to pray. 

Fresh modes of carrying on the consecration meeting. 

How to keep the society treasury full. 

The preservation of order in the meetings. 

Interesting the parents in the society. 



JUNIOR UNIONS. 297 

The good of Mothers' Societies of Christian Endeavor. 

How to teach the Juniors to give. 

How to influence the home life of Juniors. 

What do your Juniors learn about their church? 

Your brightest Junior social. 

Shall our trial members have a pledge? 

How get the Juniors from the trial to active membership? 

What does the parents' pledge mean in your church? 

How can we improve our union work? 

What relief work may our Juniors undertake? 

How does your pastor help your society? 

How do you present to your Juniors the claims of Christ? 

Object lessons for Juniors. 

How much to do for the Juniors. 

How do you get the older Endeavorers interested in your Juniors? 

How do you emphasize the Junior pledge? 

What does your society do for the Sunday school? 

How do you receive new members? 

How do you carry on your business meetings? 

Where may new societies be organized ? 

Encouragements. — Begin your superintendents' meetings 
with a note of cheer and hope, after the fashion of one meeting 
of the Cleveland Junior Union. The first part of the evening 
was spent entirely in the recitation of "encouragements,'- each 
superintendent bringing forward some experience with her 
Juniors that had been an encouragement to her. 

Cut Short the Business. — The business to be brought 
before the executive committee of the union at the monthly 
superintendents' meetings should be disposed of as promptly 
as possible, that the superintendents may get, as soon as may 
be, to the main work of the hour. Hold an introductory song 
and prayer service, not to last more than ten minutes, read the 
minutes of the last meeting, pass upon applications from new 
societies for entrance into the union, and as promptly as possi- 
ble despatch whatever business may be necessary, and then take 
up the regular topic of the day. 

The Rallies. — At the Junior rallies the best portion of the 
church should be set apart for the Juniors themselves. They 
should sit together as societies, and in order that enough space 
may be reserved, each superintendent should inform the presi- 



298 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

dent of the union beforehand how many Juniors may be ex- 
pected from her society. The Juniors themselves should wear 
badges, and carry at the heads of their lines their society banners. 
As they enter they should sing their society marching songs. 

As much as possible the entire exercises and management of 
the rally should be in the hands of the Juniors. They should 
largely compose the reception committee, to meet newcomers 
at the door or station. A Junior choir should chiefly furnish 
the music, and Junior ushers should escort the company to their 
seats. Indeed, it will not be impossible to find a Junior who 
can conduct with dignity and propriety the opening devotional 
exercises. The address of welcome should be made by a 
Junior from the society of the church, and the response be 
given by one of the visiting Juniors. 

Throughout the programme, — and, by the way, the printed 
programmes should be as bright and attractive as possible, us- 
ing gay colors, — let as much as possible be given to the Juniors 
to do. They should come with their memories stored with cer- 
tain psalms or other Scripture passages to repeat in concert. 
For variety, they may be asked to learn the words of a hymn, 
to repeat in the same way. An interesting feature will be the 
singing of different hymns by each society, the societies having 
practised in their own churches. There should always be a 
roll-call of the societies, and this is one way of responding. At 
other times the societies will respond by the concert repetition 
of Scripture verses. Possibly not at every rally, but once or 
twice a year certainly, conclude the rally with a consecration 
service, the societies taking part as a whole in whatever way 
they see fit. At the close, repeat the pledge in concert. 

Throughout the longer and more formal exercises, give the 
children something to do on every possible occasion. It will 
serve to hold their attention if you call upon them now and then 
to raise their hands in voting, to wave their handkerchiefs, to 
wave flags, or to rise all together. A concert exercise by the 
Juniors, especially one that will require a little costuming, short 
papers by Juniors upon different phases of the work, recitations 
by separate Juniors, Junior songs, either solos or choruses, — all 
of these will serve to make the young people feel that the meet- 
ing is their very own. 



JUNIOR UNIONS. 299 

Many a Junior rally has been spoiled by a long harangue by 
some man or woman who has no sympathy with children, and 
no understanding of what will interest and help them. Let no 
consideration of so-called policy persuade you to place such a 
person upon the programme. Those who speak before Juniors 
at their rallies should be skilled with the chalk, or able to en- 
force a truth by the use of objects, in some such way as Mr. 
Sleeper at the Montreal Convention with his Junior in armor, or 
Mr. Tyndall at the New York Convention with his two bal- 
loons, one filled with heavy gas and the other with light, which 
he put through all sorts of fascinating evolutions illustrating the 
dangers of bad companionship. 

Above all, see that the programme is not too long. This is 
the all but universal sin of Junior rallies. There is such an 
abundance of material, there are so many interesting things that 
may be done, that those who prepare the rallies are almost 
certain to fall into the temptation of adding just one thing 
more, until the effect of the whole is spoiled, the children are 
tired, and the parents displeased. Save some plans for the 
next time, and remember that one good speaker is the making 
of any programme. 

A Motto Exercise. — A pleasant exercise for a Junior rally 
is a motto exercise. Some time beforehand instruct each super- 
intendent to have her society choose some bright and helpful 
motto which they will repeat in concert at the rally. These 
mottoes should be sent to the one who is to have charge of the 
exercises ; and he will prepare himself with a bright sentence or 
two after each motto is repeated, showing the Juniors something 
that is especially good to be remembered about each motto. 

Topics For Rallies. — Here are some good topics for a 
Junior rally, the themes to be treated by the Juniors them- 
selves : " What the Junior society has done for me." "What 
can Juniors do for missions?" "Why should we look forward 
to graduating into the older Endeavor society?" "How will 
our Junior training help us in the older society?" " The good 
I have gained from the Junior pledge." "What I like best in 
the work of each committee." "The hard things in Junior 
society work." " Bible Juniors, and what they teach me." 
" Why I love the Bible." " Stories about some famous hymns." 



300 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

" What Juniors can do for temperance." "What Juniors can 
do for their country." " How to earn money for missions." 
"The Junior songs I like best, and why." "Some mistakes 
we Juniors make." " How we can help the Sunday-school. 1 ' 
" What we can do for our pastors." 

The Annual Meeting. — Whatever is done at the quarterly 
meetings of the union, be sure to make the annual meeting an 
especially noteworthy occasion. Decorate the church in which 
it is held. Prepare special music. Obtain, if possible, an at- 
tractive speaker from abroad. Advertise the meeting well in 
the churches and the newspapers, and especially endeavor to 
obtain a large company of the older Endeavorers, as of course 
the Juniors will come any way. 

If your union has a large membership, it is a good plan to 
have two sessions, one in the afternoon and one in the evening, 
the former being devoted especially to the Junior superinten- 
dents and the children, and the latter serving to present the 
claims and the work of the Junior society to the older Endeav- 
orers and to the grown-up Christians. A large number of 
Juniors, of course, will be present at this evening session ; and 
so especial pains should be taken to bring the exercises to an 
early close. 

A Prize Banner. — It is a good plan for the Junior union to 
present a prize banner, to be held by the society that reports 
the best work for six months. 

A Circular Letter. — The Junior superintendents of the 
union will get much good from a circular letter. The president 
writes the first letter, giving methods that she has found useful. 
The first superintendent who receives this letter adds other 
methods, or tells her troubles, asking for assistance, and then 
sends it to the next superintendent on the list, who does the 
same. 

So the letter goes the rounds among the superintendents, 
each reading all that has preceded it, and adding her own new 
plans, troubles, or suggestions for help in the troubles that the 
others have brought forward. The circular letter, thus greatly 
enlarged and enriched, returns to the president, who reads the 
whole, detaches her original letter, writes a new one, and sends 
the whole to the one who first received her original letter. 



JUNIOR UNIONS. 301 

Thus it goes the rounds again, each superintendent detaching 
her own letter, and adding a new one. 

Intervisitation. — Superintendents of Junior city unions will 
find it wise to plan an occasional visiting day or week for 
the Juniors. Two members, — good ones to send will be the 
president and the chairman of the prayer-meeting committee, — 
should go from each society of the union to visit some other 
society. The superintendent of the union should make the 
appointments, and should arrange that each society will send 
forth two members and have two visitors. The following Sun- 
day each visiting committee should report to its own society any 
helpful suggestions or plans which they have gained by their 
observations. 

Get Fresh Ideas. — In some way or other it should be made 
possible for the Junior superintendents also to pay occasional 
visits to other societies. This intervisitation is helpful in this 
as in no other work, with the exception of Sunday-school teach- 
ing. Where there are assistant superintendents the feat is 
easily accomplished ; but if there are none, then some older 
Endeavorer might without harm be pressed into service as sub- 
stitute superintendent for a single day. 

An Entertainment Committee. — A union entertainment 
committee may do much to increase the interest in Junior socials. 
The chairman of this committee obtains from the Junior super- 
intendents lists of the Juniors in each society who have special 
talents in the way of entertaining, whether as singers, declaim- 
ers, conductors of games, or anything of the sort. Whenever a 
Junior superintendent needs outside help for the management of 
any part of a proposed entertainment, she applies to this enter- 
tainment committee, and learns what Endeavorers of neighbor- 
ing societies she can probably call in to her assistance. In this 
way the Junior socials are improved, and, bett than that, the 
Juniors of different societies get to know one another. 



302 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 



CHAPTER XL. 

THE STATE JUNIOR SUPERINTENDENT. 

The Office. — There are few State Christian Endeavor unions 
now without a State superintendent of Junior work ; soon, I 
hope, all State unions will appoint such officers. They are 
greatly needed, especially now, while the Junior work is young ; 
and they always will be needed, to inspire the workers, co- 
ordinate their efforts, and diffuse the best and newest methods. 

The work gains so much from experience that it will always 
be best to retain a good worker in office for more than one year. 
Give her a generous share of the State funds and a liberal por- 
tion of the State convention's time ; for her work is second in 
importance to that of no State officer, — not even the State 
president himself. I say her work, because most State super- 
intendents thus far are women, though some of the most zealous 
and efficient are consecrated young men. 

The Record. — One of the first duties a State superintendent 
must perform is to see to it that the list of Junior societies in 
the State is accurate. That is to be the basis of all her activi- 
ties. If she is in doubt on that score, let her ask all district 
and county secretaries to make a thorough canvass, and report 
to her the result. 

The State record should contain the name of the church with 
which each society is connected, the names of pastor and Junior 
superintendent, the date of organization, and the number of 
members, of each class, on the first of each year. Additional 
records, of only secondary importance, will tell how many Ju- 
niors are graduated each year, how many join the church, how 
much money is given to missions, what committees are used, 
and will give all other obtainable facts that will help to show 
the status of each society. 

Organization. — Having these facts before her, the State 
superintendent will at once see in what districts few Junior 
societies are found, and will seek to stir up the district and 



THE STATE JUNIOR SUPERINTENDENT. 303 

county officers, and, these failing, the individual societies. 
She will send literature explaining the good the society may 
do, and how it may be organized. With each package of litera- 
ture she will send a personal note, inviting correspondence. 

Very soon the field will become individualized, separate 
churches and pastors emerging here and there as possible new 
Junior centres. Upon these she will concentrate her fire. Mr. 
Sleeper's pamphlet, " A Word to Busy Pastors About the Junior 
Society, 1 ' published by the United Society, and sold for $1.00 a 
hundred copies, will prove useful in this bombardment. So will 
" Hints for Forming* 1 ($1.50 a hundred), the Junior Constitu- 
tion, and various other leaflets. If she knows any able Junior 
worker in the neighborhood, she will ask her to call on the 
pastor and talk up the society. If her own services are desired 
to organize the new venture, she should not hesitate to go and 
set the society on foot. 

Deputies. — It will be better, however, if the State superin- 
tendent can interest some local worker to organize and watch 
over each society that is started. During the first months con- 
stant help and advice will be needed, and it will be far better 
for society and pastor if the organizer is close at hand besides 
saving the time and strength of the State superintendent for 
other purposes, and training the local workers to become Ju- 
nior missionaries. 

At Conventions. — Let the State superintendent plan to be 
present at as many local Christian Endeavor gatherings as pos- 
sible in the course of the year, especially in those parts of the 
State where the Junior society is least flourishing. The officers 
of the conventions will be glad to give you an opportunity to 
speak, if you make arrangements long enough beforehand. 
Open a question-box at a later session. Preside throughout the 
convention at an information bureau, where you can distribute 
Junior literature, and answer questions in private. Remember 
that your chief work at these conventions is to set the Endeavor- 
ers themselves to organizing new Junior societies. 

The Junior Hour. — One of the best plans for an interesting 
Junior hour at a State convention was once tried in Wisconsin. 
Twelve Juniors from as many different towns and cities were set 
to writing two-minute papers upon different phases of Junior 



304 THE JUNIOR MANUAL. 

work, — prayer-meeting work, Bible work, lookout work, social 
work, missionary work, sunshine work, temperance work, help- 
ing the pastor, etc. Some substitutes were provided, which 
proved to be wise. The topics were assigned among these rep- 
resentatives by the State superintendent, who knew which so- 
ciety had been doing the best work along each line, and the 
young speakers in every case confined themselves to practical 
experience, and so were both interesting and helpful to the large 
audience. 

Junior Headquarters. — The State superintendent should 
establish Junior headquarters at the State convention. In this 
room the Junior workers should register and hold their confer- 
ences, as well as become acquainted with each other by social 
intercourse. In this room should also be arranged samples of 
all kinds of Junior literature and helps. 

Inspiration and Information. — Another very important 
part of the State superintendent's work is the popularization of 
good Junior methods. In her correspondence she should con- 
stantly invite. accounts of fresh ways of doing things in Junior 
societies. Once in a while she should send to every Junior su- 
perintendent in the State what may be termed "suggestion 
sheets." These are manifolded letters consisting of short and 
pointed paragraphs, say ten or a dozen, each containing sugges- 
tions for novel methods of work. These suggestions may be 
obtained from private correspondence with progressive workers, 
or culled from the best Christian Endeavor papers and pam- 
phlets. These sheets should be printed from a duplicating ma- 
chine. The various hints should be condensed as far as is 
consistent with clearness. Each "suggestion sheet" thus sent 
out should invite fresh suggestions. 

The Report. — The State superintendent's annual report 
should be given wide circulation. It should contain an abstract 
of the statistics gathered, an account of the parts of the State 
yet needing to be roused to the importance of Junior work, an 
urging to missionary effort along this line, and suggestions re- 
garding the most important methods of work. Every society in 
the State should receive a printed copy of this report, which 
should be read at some society meeting. 



price list 
Junior Christian Endeavor Supplies. 



Daily Bible Verse, with Prayer-Meeting Topics. This attractive little book- 
let contains a verse for every day, bearing on the topic for the week. It helps 
the children to keep their promise to read the Bible every day. Price postpaid, 
three cents each ; $i .50 a hundred. 

Prayer-Meeting Topic Cards. On fine cardboard. Price, $1.00 per hundred. 
Special embossed design with topics for six months and name of society and 
officers and committee printed on same. Price, $3.00 per hundred. 



Reward Cards. 



As an encouragement to the children to commit to memory the Ten Commandments 
and the Apostles' Creed, give them one of these beautiful illuminated cards. 

per 100 

The Ten Commandments. Folding card. Size, open, 6 x 4^ $2.50 

The Apostles' Creed. Size, 3! x 5! 1.50 



Junior 




Badge. 



EACH 
Gold $I.OO 

Silver 25 

Corinthian Silver 15 



Gold and Enamel 

Silver and Enamel 

Corinthian Silver and Enamel, 



•30 
.20 



Junior Christian Endeavor Songs. 

Our New Junior Hymn-Book. Compiled by Ira 
D. Sankey, John Willis Baer, and William Shaw. 
OPINIONS. 

"It is splendid. I was pleased to see our pledge song 
in it. " — Miss M. C. Merritt, Junior Superin- 
tendent/or Ohio. 

" I am much pleased with the new Junior song book." 
— Miss Ruth N ash, Junior Superintendent for 
Kansas. 

" I am delighted with the Junior Christian Endeavor 
songs. They are splendid, no jingle;? among them. 
I am sure they will fill a long-felt wa"nt." — Miss 
Anna E. Kennedy, Jtmior Superintendent for 
Colorado. 

Sunday Schools, as well as Junior societies, will do 
well to examine this work before purchasing. The 
Responsive Readings will be found very helpful. 

PRICES. 

Words and Music. Board covers, in quantities, by express, at purchaser's ex- 
pense, 25 cents. Single copy by mail, 30 cents. 

Words Only Edition. In quantities, by express, at purchaser's expense, 10 
cents. Single copy by mail, n cents. Cash must be sent with all orders, or if 
desired they will be sent C. O. D. 

I 




JUNIOR SOCIETY SUPPLIES. 
Cards. 

PER IOO 

Junior Membership Pledge. Plain $ .50 

Embossed in purple and gold 75 

" Pansy," with beautiful pansy design in colors and pledge in gold . . . 1.25 
Heavy gilt edge 2.00 

Junior Missionary-Offering. The card is about 7x5 inches. The face 
contains the pledge and other matter attractively printed in two colors. 
On the back are ten small envelopes. In these the Juniors are to put 
their pennies until each contains five cents, making a total, when all are 
filled, of fifty cents. The card is then returned to the superintendent, 
and the money sent to the missionary boards. Price, card and envelopes 
complete, postpaid (per hundred) 3.00 

Junior Prayer-Meeting Topics 1.00 

Special embossed design, with topics for six months and officers and com- 
mittees 3100 

Service Card. To be used with leaflet, " Meetings for Juniors." Each, 
10 cents. (Ten copies or more, 5 cents each.) 

Subjects for Meetings. Special list ' . 1.00 

Leaflets. 

PER IOO 

A Live Junior Society. By Rev. W. W. Sleeper $2.00 

(Three cents each.) 
A "Word to Busy Pastors. By Rev. W. W. Sleeper 1.00 

(Two cents each.) 
Constitution and By-Laws 1.25 

(Two cents each.) 
Hints for Forming. By Rev. W. W. Sleeper 1.50 

(Three cents each.) 
Junior Christian Endeavor. Its Field and Work. By Mrs. F. E. 

Clark, and Miss Kate H. Haus 3.00 

(Single copy five cents.) 
Junior C. E. Unions. By Kate H. Haus 1.50 

(Three cents each.) 
Junior Prayer- Meeting Topics and Daily Verse 1.50 

(Three cents each.) 
Junior Society Leaflet. By Rev. F. E. Clark 2.00 

(Three cents each.) 
Meetings for Juniors, and How to Conduct Them. By Mrs. James L. 

Hill. Each, twelve cents. (Ten copies or more, ten cents each.) 
Missionary Plans for Junior Societies. By V. F. P 2.00 

(Three cents each.) 
Outline Study of the Life of Christ. Questions and answers for the 

Juniors. By Rev. A. W. Spooner 3.00 

(Single copy five cents.) 
Reception Service for New Members. By Miss K. H. Haus .... 1.00 

( Two cents each.) 
Scripture Illustrated. Object lessons for Juniors. By Mrs. Alice M. 

Scudder. (Five cents each.) 
Some Junior Suggestions. By Miss Kate H. Haus 2.00 

(Three cents each.) 

Exercises for Special Meetings. 

An Evening with the Juniors. By J. A. Shannon. A delightful exercise, con- 
sisting of dialogue, recitations, original music, etc. Just the thing for a Junior 
entertainment or anniversary. Price, to cents each. 

Let the Little Ones In. An exercise for Juniors, appropriate to their anniver- 
sary. Praise Service, or Christian Endeavor Day. By Mrs. James L. Hill. 
Price, 10 cents each. 

Three Junior Services. " Anniversary," " Graduation," " Pledge." Each, $2.00 
per hundred. (Sample copies, 3 cents each.) 

What the Junior Committees are Doing. A splendid exercise for convention 
rallies, anniversaries, etc. Price, 10 cents each. 

2 



Books. 

Attractive Truths in Lesson and Story. By Mrs. A. M. Scudder. Each, 

$1.25. 
Handy Record Book. Vest-pocket size. Each, 10 cents. 
How. A Hand-Book of Christian Endeavor. By W. F. McCauley. Each, 

50 cents. 

Ideal Membership Record and Roll-Call Book. Each, $1.00. 
Little Children in the Church of Christ. By Rev. Charles Roads. Each, 
$1.00. 

Pictured Truth. A hand-book of blackboard and object teaching. By Rev. R. F. 
Y. Pierce. Price, $1.25. 

The Junior Manual. A hand-book of methods for Junior workers. By Amos R. 
Wells. Price, $1.25. 



Junior Pledge for Chapel Wall. 

2$5 




IT? rusting* in the Lord *Jesus 
-Q) 1 1©- Christ for strength, I 
-*. promise Him that I will 
strive to do whatever He 
would like to have me do: 
that I will pray and read 
the Bible every day« and 
that, just so far as I know 
how, I will try to lead a 
Christian life. I will be 
present at every meeting 
of the society -when I. can, 
ami will take some part 
in every meeting. 

The accompanying cut is a fac-simile of our large Junior Wall Pledge. Size, 
28x36 inches; printed on heavy paper, in large, clear type that can be easily read 
across a large vestry. It is suspended from rod, with roll attached, and does not 
require framing. Price, postpaid, 75 cents. 

PUBLISHING DEPARTMENT, 

UNITED SOCIETY OF CHRISTIAN ENDEAVOR. 



646 Washington Street, 
BOSTON. 



155 La Salle Street, 
CHICAGO. 



THE JUNIOR GOLDEN RULE. 



for 
young peo- 



In response to a wide-spread demand, The Junior Golden Rule was estab- 
lished in January, 1893. It at once reached a large circulation, and has been steadily 
growing in usefulness and popularity. The testimony of Junior workers all over 
the country is that this little paper is exceedingly valuable in interesting the Juniors 
and helping the superintendent in her difficult task. It is 

. . . An Eight=Page Monthly . . . 

Each page gx 13 inches in size. It is printed on excellent paper, und is crowded 
with bright illustrations. It is edited by the editors of The Golden Rule. 

IT CONTAINS ALL THE HELPS 

Needed by the Juniors for the proper management of their society work. 

thrre are 

BHght Talks On the 0f the month, written by Mr. William T. Ellis. 
tv_*._.JvL ji/i ,>.n4-:.,~ nrv*,~:~„ These are accompanied by useful suggestions *~ 

Prayer=Meeting Topics Junior leaders- T he best writers for young , 

pie contribute to The Junior Golden Rule. 

Delightful Stories Among these writers are Sophie May, Rev. J. F. Cowan, 
OM j ciraf^liac Mrs. Fannie E. Newberry, Dr. F. E. Clark, Rev. Lean- 

ana 2>KeiCneS der s K eyser, Mrs. Mary E. Allbright, Amos R. Wells, 

Mrs. F. E. Clark, Mrs. Alice May Scudder, Mrs. BeJle Kellogg Towne, and Sophie 
Swett. One of the most attractive departments of the paper is called 

Something Prizes are offered every month for the work of the busy fingers 
Tr» Hn and brains oi tne Juniors. Now they are set to dressing dolls and 

I O UU making scrap-books for poor children in the hospitals. Now they 

whittle toys from wood, manufacture dissected pictures, or engage in a contest in 
drawing. Under this head Mrs. James L. Hill gives every month a set of Bible 
questions, and the Juniors are very eager in answering these. One of the most val- 
uable of the departments is a 

Junior Here each month prizes are offered for the best answers 

rk^«„ D««i:«« a «+ to such questions as, "What is vour favorite book, and 
Upen Parliament why ? » « What kind of teacher do you like best ? " and 
" How I have made money." Another department in which the Juniors are made 
the partners of the editor is called 

Aunt Ruth Tnis is tne children's post-office department, and the best letter 

" H sent in each month from each of tlie Christian Endeavor denom- 

at rlOme inations is rewarded with a Junior badge. These letters are 

always bright and interesting. Still one more partnership department, and the 

brightest of all, is called 

Rriorht To this page the Juniors contribute the comical and original remarks 
Jr l »" u m ade by their younger brothers and sisters, as well as the bright say- 
baymgS ings thev have hear d from their elders. It is wonderful how many of 
these are sent in, and how good they all are. 

When the usefulness and interest of the paper are considered, 

THE PRICE 

Is remarkably low. The Junior Golden Rule costs only 35 cents a year, and in 
clubs of ten or more, sent in one wrapper to one address, only 25 cents a year. 

In few ways, if in any, could a Junior superintendent do more for the permanent 
success of her society than by seeing that every member is a subscriber to this paper. 

THE GOLDEN RULE COMPANY, 

646 Washington St., Boston, Mass. 

4 



